WMS User Guide WMS_User_Guide

User Manual: WMS_User_Guide user guide pdf - FTP File Search (14/20)

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 670

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Sterling Warehouse
Management System: User
Guide
Release 8.5
October 2009

STERLING COMMERCE SOFTWARE
***TRADE SECRET NOTICE***
THE STERLING COMMERCE SOFTWARE DESCRIBED BY THIS DOCUMENTATION ("STERLING COMMERCE
SOFTWARE") IS THE CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET PROPERTY OF STERLING COMMERCE, INC., ITS
AFFILIATED COMPANIES OR ITS OR THEIR LICENSORS, AND IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF A
LICENSE AGREEMENT. NO DUPLICATION OR DISCLOSURE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION.
RESTRICTED RIGHTS.
This documentation, the Sterling Commerce Software it describes, and the information and know-how
they contain constitute the proprietary, confidential and valuable trade secret information of Sterling
Commerce, Inc., its affiliated companies or its or their licensors, and may not be used for any
unauthorized purpose, or disclosed to others without the prior written permission of the applicable
Sterling Commerce entity. This documentation and the Sterling Commerce Software that it describes
have been provided pursuant to a license agreement that contains prohibitions against and/or
restrictions on their copying, modification and use. Duplication, in whole or in part, if and when
permitted, shall bear this notice and the Sterling Commerce, Inc. copyright notice. Commerce, Inc.
copyright notice.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. This documentation and the Sterling Commerce Software it
describes are "commercial items" as defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101. As and when provided to any agency or
instrumentality of the U.S. Government or to a U.S. Government prime contractor or a subcontractor at
any tier ("Government Licensee"), the terms and conditions of the customary Sterling Commerce
commercial license agreement are imposed on Government Licensees per 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or §
227.7202 through § 227.7202-4, as applicable, or through 48 C.F.R. § 52.244-6.
This Trade Secret Notice, including the terms of use herein is governed by the laws of the State of Ohio,
USA, without regard to its conflict of laws provisions. If you are accessing the Sterling Commerce
Software under an executed agreement, then nothing in these terms and conditions supersedes or
modifies the executed agreement.

Sterling Commerce, Inc.
4600 Lakehurst Court
Dublin, Ohio 43016-2000
Copyright © 1999 - 2009

Third-Party Software
Portions of the Sterling Commerce Software may include products, or may be distributed on the same
storage media with products, ("Third Party Software") offered by third parties ("Third Party Licensors").
Sterling Commerce Software may include Third Party Software covered by the following copyrights:
Copyright © 2006-2008 Andres Almiray. Copyright © 1999-2005 The Apache Software Foundation.
Copyright (c) 2008 Azer Koçulu http://azer.kodfabrik.com. Copyright © Einar Lielmanis,
einars@gmail.com. Copyright (c) 2006 John Reilly (www.inconspicuous.org) and Copyright (c) 2002
Douglas Crockford (www.crockford.com). Copyright (c) 2009 John Resig, http://jquery.com/. Copyright
© 2006-2008 Json-lib. Copyright © 2001 LOOX Software, Inc. Copyright © 2003-2008 Luck Consulting
Pty. Ltd. Copyright 2002-2004 © MetaStuff, Ltd. Copyright © 2009 Michael Mathews
micmath@gmail.com. Copyright © 1999-2005 Northwoods Software Corporation. Copyright (C)
Microsoft Corp. 1981-1998. Purple Technology, Inc. Copyright (c) 2004-2008 QOS.ch. Copyright © 2005
Sabre Airline Solutions. Copyright © 2004 SoftComplex, Inc. Copyright © 2000-2007 Sun
Microsystems, Inc. Copyright © 2001 VisualSoft Technologies Limited. Copyright © 2001 Zero G
Software, Inc. All rights reserved by all listed parties.
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed on the same storage media as certain Third Party
Software covered by the following copyrights: Copyright © 1999-2006 The Apache Software Foundation.
Copyright (c) 2001-2003 Ant-Contrib project. Copyright © 1998-2007 Bela Ban. Copyright © 2005
Eclipse Foundation. Copyright © 2002-2006 Julian Hyde and others. Copyright © 1997 ICE Engineering,
Inc./Timothy Gerard Endres. Copyright 2000, 2006 IBM Corporation and others. Copyright © 1987-2006
ILOG, Inc. Copyright © 2000-2006 Infragistics. Copyright © 2002-2005 JBoss, Inc. Copyright
LuMriX.net GmbH, Switzerland. Copyright © 1998-2009 Mozilla.org. Copyright © 2003-2009 Mozdev
Group, Inc. Copyright © 1999-2002 JBoss.org. Copyright Raghu K, 2003. Copyright © 2004 David
Schweinsberg. Copyright © 2005-2006 Darren L. Spurgeon. Copyright © S.E. Morris (FISH) 2003-04.
Copyright © 2006 VisualSoft Technologies. Copyright © 2002-2009 Zipwise Software. All rights reserved
by all listed parties.
Certain components of the Sterling Commerce Software are distributed on the same storage media as
Third Party Software which are not listed above. Additional information for such Third Party Software
components of the Sterling Commerce Software is located at:
installdir/mesa/studio/plugins/SCI_Studio_License.txt.
Third Party Software which is included, or are distributed on the same storage media with, the Sterling
Commerce Software where use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States government or a
government contractor or subcontractor, are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS under Title 48 CFR
2.101, 12.212, 52.227-19, 227.7201 through 227.7202-4, DFAR 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and (2), DFAR
252.227-7015(b)(6/95), DFAR 227.7202-3(a), FAR 52.227-14(g)(2)(6/87), and FAR 52.227-19(c)(2)
and (6/87) as applicable.
Additional information regarding certain Third Party Software is located at installdir/SCI_License.txt.
Some Third Party Licensors also provide license information and/or source code for their software via
their respective links set forth below:
http://danadler.com/jacob/
http://www.dom4j.org
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org).
This product includes software developed by the Ant-Contrib project
(http://sourceforge.net/projects/ant-contrib). This product includes software developed by the JDOM
Project (http://www.jdom.org/). This product includes code licensed from RSA Data Security (via Sun
Microsystems, Inc.). Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun Logo, Java, JDK, the Java Coffee Cup logo,
JavaBeans , JDBC, JMX and all JMX based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Sun Microsystems, Inc. All other trademarks and logos are trademarks of their respective owners.

THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION SOFTWARE
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the following
software products (or components thereof) and java source code files: Xalan version 2.5.2,
Cookie.java, Header.java, HeaderElement.java, HttpException.java, HttpState.java, NameValuePair.java,
CronTimeTrigger.java, DefaultTimeScheduler.java, PeriodicTimeTrigger.java, Target.java,

TimeScheduledEntry.java, TimeScheduler.java, TimeTrigger.java, Trigger.java, BinaryHeap.java,
PriorityQueue.java, SynchronizedPriorityQueue.java, GetOpt.java, GetOptsException.java,
IllegalArgumentException.java, MissingOptArgException.java (collectively, "Apache 1.1 Software").
Apache 1.1 Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the following license:

License Version 1.1
Copyright 1999-2003 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgement: "This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org)." Alternatively, this acknowledgement may appear in the software itself, if and
whenever such third-party acknowledgements normally appear.
4. The names "Commons", "Jakarta", "The Jakarta Project", "HttpClient", "log4j", "Xerces "Xalan",
"Avalon", "Apache Avalon", "Avalon Cornerstone", "Avalon Framework", "Apache" and "Apache Software
Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. For written permission, please contact apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their
name, without the prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMIPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTIBILITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTIAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache
Software Foundation. The GetOpt.java, GetOptsException.java, IlligalArgumentException.java and
MissingOptArgException.java software was originally based on software copyright (c) 2001, Sun
Microsystems., http://www.sun.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please
see .
The preceding license only applies to the Apache 1.1 Software and does not apply to the Sterling
Commerce Software or to any other Third-Party Software.
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the following
software products (or components thereof): Ant, Antinstaller, Apache File Upload Package, Apache
Commons Beans, Apache Commons BetWixt, Apache Commons Collection, Apache Commons Digester,
Apache Commons IO, Apache Commons Lang., Apache Commons Logging, Apache Commons Net,
Apache Jakarta Commons Pool, Apache Jakarta ORO, Lucene, Xerces version 2.7, Apache Log4J,
Apache SOAP, Apache Struts and Apache Xalan 2.7.0, (collectively, "Apache 2.0 Software"). Apache
2.0 Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the Apache License Version 2.0. A
copy of License Version 2.0 is found in the following directory files for the individual pieces of the Apache
2.0 Software: installdir/jar/commons_upload/1_0/ CommonsFileUpload_License.txt,
installdir/jar/jetspeed/1_4/RegExp_License.txt,
installdir/ant/Ant_License.txt
/jar/antInstaller/0_8/antinstaller_License.txt,
/jar/commons_beanutils/1_7_0/commons-beanutils.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
/jar/commons_betwixt/0_8/commons-betwixt-0.8.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),

/jar/commons_collections/3_2/LICENSE.txt,
/jar/commons_digester/1_8/commons-digester-1.8.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
/jar/commons_io/1_4/LICENSE.txt,
/jar/commons_lang/2_1/Commons_Lang_License.txt,
/jar/commons_logging/1_0_4/commons-logging-1.0.4.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
/jar/commons_net/1_4_1/commons-net-1.4.1.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
/jar/smcfs/8.5/lucene-core-2.4.0.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
/jar/struts/2_0_11/struts2-core-2.0.11.jar (./LICENSE.txt),
/jar/mesa/gisdav/WEB-INF/lib/Slide_License.txt,
/mesa/studio/plugins/xerces_2.7_license.txt,
/jar/commons_pool/1_2/Commons_License.txt,
/jar/jakarta_oro/2_0_8/JakartaOro_License.txt,
/jar/log4j/1_2_15/LOG4J_License.txt,
/jar/xalan/2_7/Xalan_License.txt,
/jar/soap/2_3_1/Apache_SOAP_License.txt
Unless otherwise stated in a specific directory, the Apache 2.0 Software was not modified. Neither the
Sterling Commerce Software, modifications, if any, to Apache 2.0 Software, nor other Third Party Code is
a Derivative Work or a Contribution as defined in License Version 2.0. License Version 2.0 applies only to
the Apache 2.0 Software which is the subject of the specific directory file and does not apply to the
Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third Party Software. License Version 2.0 includes the
following provision:
"Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume
any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License."
NOTICE file corresponding to the section 4 d of the Apache License, Version 2.0, in this case for the
Apache Ant distribution. Apache Ant Copyright 1999-2008 The Apache Software Foundation. This
product includes software developed by The Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
This product includes also software developed by :
- the W3C consortium (http://www.w3c.org) ,
- the SAX project (http://www.saxproject.org)
The task is based on code Copyright (c) 2002, Landmark Graphics Corp that has been kindly
donated to the Apache Software Foundation.
Portions of this software were originally based on the following:
- software copyright (c) 1999, IBM Corporation., http://www.ibm.com.
- software copyright (c) 1999, Sun Microsystems., http://www.sun.com.
- voluntary contributions made by Paul Eng on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation that were
originally developed at iClick, Inc., software copyright (c) 1999.
NOTICE file corresponding to the section 4 d of the Apache License, Version 2.0, in this case for the
Apache Lucene distribution. Apache Lucene Copyright 2006 The Apache Software Foundation. This
product includes software developed by The Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
The snowball stemmers in contrib/snowball/src/java/net/sf/snowball were developed by Martin Porter
and Richard Boulton. The full snowball package is available from http://snowball.tartarus.org/

Ant-Contrib Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the Anti-Contrib
software (Copyright (c) 2001-2003 Ant-Contrib project. All rights reserved.) (the "Ant-Contrib
Software"). The Ant-Contrib Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the
following license:
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1

Copyright (c) 2001-2003 Ant-Contrib project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgement:
"This product includes software developed by the Ant-Contrib project
(http://sourceforge.net/projects/ant-contrib)."
Alternately, this acknowledgement may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgements normally appear.
4. The name Ant-Contrib must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
ant-contrib-developers@lists.sourceforge.net.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Ant-Contrib" nor may "Ant-Contrib" appear in
their names without prior written permission of the Ant-Contrib project.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ANT-CONTRIB PROJECT OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The preceding license only applies to the
Ant-Contrib Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third-Party
Software.
The preceding license only applies to the Ant-Contrib Software and does not apply to the Sterling
Commerce Software or to any other Third Party Software.

DOM4J Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the Dom4h
Software which is free software distributed under the terms of the following license:
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain copyright statements and notices. Redistributions must also
contain a copy of this document.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name "DOM4J" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software
without prior written permission of MetaStuff, Ltd. For written permission, please contact
dom4j-info@metastuff.com.
4. Products derived from this Software may not be called "DOM4J" nor may "DOM4J" appear in their
names without prior written permission of MetaStuff, Ltd. DOM4J is a registered trademark of MetaStuff,
Ltd.
5. Due credit should be given to the DOM4J Project - http://www.dom4j.org

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY METASTUFF, LTD. AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL METASTUFF, LTD. OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 2001-2004 (C) MetaStuff, Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
The preceding license only applies to the Dom4j Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce
Software, or any other Third-Party Software.

THE ECLIPSE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the following
software:
com.ibm.icu.nl1_3.4.4.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.ant.core.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ant.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.compare.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.boot.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.commands.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.contenttype.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.expressions.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.filebuffers.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.filesystem.nl1_1.0.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.jobs.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.resources.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.runtime.compatibility.auth.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.runtime.compatibility.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.runtime.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.variables.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.debug.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.debug.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.equinox.common.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.equinox.preferences.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.equinox.registry.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.help.appserver.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.help.base.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.help.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.help.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.jdt.apt.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.apt.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.core.manipulation.nl1_1.0.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.debug.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.doc.isv.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.doc.user.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.junit4.runtime.nl1_1.0.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.launching.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.jdt.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jface.databinding.nl1_1.0.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jface.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.jface.text.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ltk.core.refactoring.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ltk.ui.refactoring.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.osgi.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.osgi.services.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.osgi.util.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.pde.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.pde.doc.user.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.pde.junit.runtime.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.pde.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.pde.runtime.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.pde.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.platform.doc.isv.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.platform.doc.user.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,

org.eclipse.rcp.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.search.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.swt.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.team.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.team.cvs.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.team.cvs.ssh.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.team.cvs.ssh2.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.team.cvs.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.team.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.text.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.ui.browser.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.cheatsheets.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.console.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.editors.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.externaltools.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.forms.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.ui.ide.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.intro.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.ui.navigator.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.navigator.resources.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.presentations.r21.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.views.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.views.properties.tabbed.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.workbench.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.workbench.texteditor.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.update.configurator.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.update.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.update.scheduler.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.update.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
com.ibm.icu_3.4.4.1.jar,
org.eclipse.core.commands_3.2.0.I20060605-1400.jar,
org.eclipse.core.contenttype_3.2.0.v20060603.jar,
org.eclipse.core.expressions_3.2.0.v20060605-1400.jar,
org.eclipse.core.filesystem.linux.x86_1.0.0.v20060603.jar,
org.eclipse.core.filesystem_1.0.0.v20060603.jar, org.eclipse.core.jobs_3.2.0.v20060603.jar,
org.eclipse.core.runtime.compatibility.auth_3.2.0.v20060601.jar,
org.eclipse.core.runtime_3.2.0.v20060603.jar, org.eclipse.equinox.common_3.2.0.v20060603.jar,
org.eclipse.equinox.preferences_3.2.0.v20060601.jar, org.eclipse.equinox.registry_3.2.0.v20060601.jar,
org.eclipse.help_3.2.0.v20060602.jar, org.eclipse.jface.text_3.2.0.v20060605-1400.jar,
org.eclipse.jface_3.2.0.I20060605-1400.jar, org.eclipse.osgi_3.2.0.v20060601.jar,
org.eclipse.swt.gtk.linux.x86_3.2.0.v3232m.jar, org.eclipse.swt_3.2.0.v3232o.jar,
org.eclipse.text_3.2.0.v20060605-1400.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.workbench.texteditor_3.2.0.v20060605-1400.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.workbench_3.2.0.I20060605-1400.jar, org.eclipse.ui_3.2.0.I20060605-1400.jar,
runtime_registry_compatibility.jar, eclipse.exe, eclipse.ini, and startup.jar
(collectively, "Eclipse Software").
All Eclipse Software is distributed under the terms and conditions of the Eclipse Foundation Software
User Agreement (EFSUA) and/or terms and conditions of the Eclipse Public License Version 1.0 (EPL) or
other license agreements, notices or terms and conditions referenced for the individual pieces of the
Eclipse Software, including without limitation "Abouts", "Feature Licenses", and "Feature Update
Licenses" as defined in the EFSUA .
A copy of the Eclipse Foundation Software User Agreement is found at
/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/windows/eclipse/notice.html,
/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/windows/eclipse/plugins/notice.html,
/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/gtk.linux_x86/eclipse/notice.html, and
/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/gtk.linux_x86/eclipse/plugins/notice.html.
A copy of the EPL is found at
/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/windows/eclipse/plugins/epl-v10.htm,
/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/windows/eclipse/epl-v10.htm,
/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/gtk.linux.x86/eclipse/plugins/epl-v10.html, and
/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/gtk.linux.x86/eclipse/epl-v10.html.
The reference to the license agreements, notices or terms and conditions governing each individual piece
of the Eclipse Software is found in the directory files for the individual pieces of the Eclipse Software as
described in the file identified as installdir/SCI_License.txt.

These licenses only apply to the Eclipse Software and do not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software,
or any other Third Party Software.
The Language Pack (NL Pack) piece of the Eclipse Software, is distributed in object code form. Source
code is available at
http://archive.eclipse.org/eclipse/downloads/drops/L-3.2_Language_Packs-200607121700/index.php.
In the event the source code is no longer available from the website referenced above, contact Sterling
Commerce at 978-513-6000 and ask for the Release Manager. A copy of this license is located at
/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/windows/eclipse/plugins/epl-v10.htm and
/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/gtk.linux.x86/eclipse/plugins/epl-v10.html.
The org.eclipse.core.runtime_3.2.0.v20060603.jar piece of the Eclipse Software was modified slightly in
order to remove classes containing encryption items. The org.eclipse.core.runtime_3.2.0.v20060603.jar
was modified to remove the Cipher, CipherInputStream and CipherOutputStream classes and rebuild the
org.eclipse.core.runtime_3.2.0.v20060603.jar.

Ehcache Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the ehache
v.1.5 software (Copyright © 2003-2008 Luck Consulting Pty. Ltd.) ("Ehache Software"). Ehcache
Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the Apache License Version 2.0. A copy
of License Version 2.0 is found in /jar/smcfs/8.5/ehcache-1.5.0.jar (./LICENSE.txt).
The Ehcache Software was not modified. Neither the Sterling Commerce Software, modifications, if any,
to the Ehcache Software, nor other Third Party Code is a Derivative Work or a Contribution as defined in
License Version 2.0. License Version 2.0 applies only to the Ehcache Software which is the subject of the
specific directory file and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third Party
Software. License Version 2.0 includes the following provision:
"Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume
any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License."

EZMorph Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the EZMorph
v. 1.0.4 software (Copyright © 2006-2008 Andres Almiray) ("EZMorph Software"). EZMorph Software is
free software which is distributed under the terms of the Apache License Version 2.0. A copy of License
Version 2.0 is found in /jar/ezmorph/1_0_4/ezmorph-1.0.4.jar (./LICENSE.txt).
The EZMorph Software was not modified. Neither the Sterling Commerce Software, modifications, if any,
to the EZMorph Software, nor other Third Party Code is a Derivative Work or a Contribution as defined in
License Version 2.0. License Version 2.0 applies only to the EZMorph Software which is the subject of
the specific directory file and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third
Party Software. License Version 2.0 includes the following provision:
"Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume
any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License."

Firebug Lite Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the Firebug Lite
Software which is free software distributed under the terms of the following license:
Copyright (c) 2008 Azer Koçulu http://azer.kodfabrik.com. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use of this software in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Azer Koçulu. nor the names of any other contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission of Parakey Inc.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

ICE SOFTWARE
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed on the same storage media as the ICE Software
(Copyright © 1997 ICE Engineering, Inc./Timothy Gerard Endres.) ("ICE Software"). The ICE Software is
independent from and not linked or compiled with the Sterling Commerce Software. The ICE Software is
a free software product which can be distributed and/or modified under the terms of the GNU General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License or any later
version.
A copy of the GNU General Public License is provided at installdir/jar/jniregistry/1_2/ICE_License.txt.
This license only applies to the ICE Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software, or
any other Third Party Software.
The ICE Software was modified slightly in order to fix a problem discovered by Sterling Commerce
involving the RegistryKey class in the RegistryKey.java in the JNIRegistry.jar. The class was modified to
comment out the finalize () method and rebuild of the JNIRegistry.jar file.
Source code for the bug fix completed by Sterling Commerce on January 8, 2003 is located at:
installdir/jar/jniregistry/1_2/RegistryKey.java. Source code for all other components of the ICE Software
is located at http://www.trustice.com/java/jnireg/index.shtml.
The ICE Software is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

JBOSS SOFTWARE
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed on the same storage media as the JBoss Software
(Copyright © 1999-2002 JBoss.org) ("JBoss Software"). The JBoss Software is independent from and
not linked or compiled with the Sterling Commerce Software. The JBoss Software is a free software
product which can be distributed and/or modified under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License or any later
version.
A copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License is provided at:
\jar\jboss\4_2_0\LICENSE.html
This license only applies to the JBoss Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software,
or any other Third Party Software.
The JBoss Software is not distributed by Sterling Commerce in its entirety. Rather, the distribution is
limited to the following jar files: el-api.jar, jasper-compiler-5.5.15.jar, jasper-el.jar, jasper.jar,
jboss-common-client.jar, jboss-j2ee.jar, jboss-jmx.jar, jboss-jsr77-client.jar, jbossmq-client.jar,

jnpserver.jar, jsp-api.jar, servlet-api.jar, tomcat-juli.jar.
The JBoss Software was modified slightly in order to allow the ClientSocketFactory to return a socket
connected to a particular host in order to control the host interfaces, regardless of whether the
ClientSocket Factory specified was custom or note. Changes were made to org.jnp..server.Main. Details
concerning this change can be found at
http://sourceforge.net/tracker/?func=detail&aid=1008902&group_id=22866&atid=376687.
Source code for the modifications completed by Sterling Commerce on August 13, 2004 is located at:
http://sourceforge.net/tracker/?func=detail&aid=1008902&group_id=22866&atid=376687. Source code
for all other components of the JBoss Software is located at http://www.jboss.org.

JGO SOFTWARE
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with, or on the same storage media, as certain
redistributable portions of the JGo Software provided by Northwoods Software Corporation under a
commercial license agreement (the "JGo Software"). The JGo Software is provided subject to the
disclaimers set forth above and the following notice:
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
The JGo Software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or
disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (C)(1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (C)(1)
and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Contractor / manufacturer of the JGo Software is Northwoods Software Corporation, 142 Main St.,
Nashua, NH 03060.

JSLib Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the JSLib software
product (Copyright (c) 2003-2009 Mozdev Group, Inc.) ("JSLib Software"). The JSLib Software is
distributed under the terms of the MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1.1. A copy of this license is
located at \repository\eardata\platform_uifwk_ide\war\designer\MPL-1.1.txt. The JSLib
Software code is distributed in source form and is located at http://jslib.mozdev.org/installation.html.
Neither the Sterling Commerce Software nor any other Third-Party Code is a Modification or Contribution
subject to the Mozilla Public License. Pursuant to the terms of the Mozilla Public License, the following
notice applies only to the JSLib Software (and not to the Sterling Commerce Software or any other
Third-Party Software):
"The contents of the file located at http://www.mozdev.org/source/browse/jslib/ are subject to the
Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the
License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html.
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the License.
The Original Code is Mozdev Group, Inc. code. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Mozdev
Group, Inc. Portions created by_Mozdev Group, Inc. are Copyright © 2003 Mozdev Group, Inc. All Rights
Reserved. Original Author: Pete Collins one Contributor(s):_____none
listed________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the ____ license (the "[___]
License"), in which case the provisions of [___] License are applicable instead of those above. If you
wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [___] License and not allow
others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions
above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not
delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the
[___] License."
The preceding license only applies to the JSLib Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce
Software, or any other Third-Party Software.

Json Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the Json 2.2.2
software (Copyright © 2006-2008 Json-lib) ("Json Software"). Json Software is free software which is
distributed under the terms of the Apache License Version 2.0. A copy of License Version 2.0 is found in
/jar/jsonlib/2_2_2/json-lib-2.2.2-jdk13.jar.
This product includes software developed by Douglas Crockford (http://www.crockford.com).
The Json Software was not modified. Neither the Sterling Commerce Software, modifications, if any, to
the Json Software, nor other Third Party Code is a Derivative Work or a Contribution as defined in
License Version 2.0. License Version 2.0 applies only to the Json Software which is the subject of the
specific directory file and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third Party
Software. License Version 2.0 includes the following provision:
"Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume
any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License."

Purple Technology
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the Purple
Technology Software (Copyright (c) 1995-1999 Purple Technology, Inc.) ("Purple Technology Software"),
which is subject to the following license:
Copyright (c) 1995-1999 Purple Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PLAIN LANGUAGE LICENSE: Do whatever you like with this code, free of charge, just give credit where
credit is due. If you improve it, please send your improvements to alex@purpletech.com. Check
http://www.purpletech.com/code/ for the latest version and news.
LEGAL LANGUAGE LICENSE: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The names of the authors and the names "Purple Technology," "Purple Server" and "Purple Chat" must
not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact server@purpletech.com.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS AND PURPLE TECHNOLOGY "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR PURPLE TECHNOLOGY BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The preceding license only applies to the Purple Technology Software and does not apply to the Sterling
Commerce Software, or any other Third Party Software.

Rico Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the Rico.js
software (Copyright © 2005 Sabre Airline Solutions) ("Rico Software"). Rico Software is free software

which is distributed under the terms of the Apache License Version 2.0. A copy of License Version 2.0 is
found in /repository/eardata/platform/war/ajax/scripts/Rico_License.txt.
The Rico Software was not modified. Neither the Sterling Commerce Software, modifications, if any, to
the Rico Software, nor other Third-Party Code is a Derivative Work or a Contribution as defined in
License Version 2.0. License Version 2.0 applies only to the Rico Software which is the subject of the
specific directory file and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third-Party
Software. License Version 2.0 includes the following provision:
"Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume
any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License."

Rhino Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the Rhino js.jar
(Copyright (c) 1998-2009 Mozilla.org.) ("Rhino Software"). A majority of the source code for the Rhino
Software is dual licensed under the terms of the MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1.1. or the GPL v.
2.0. Additionally, some files (at a minimum the contents of
toolsrc/org/Mozilla/javascript/toolsdebugger/treetable) are available under another license as set forth in
the directory file for the Rhino Software.
Sterling Commerce's use and distribution of the Rhino Software is under the Mozilla Public License. A
copy of this license is located at /3rdParty/rico license.doc. The Rhino Software code is
distributed in source form and is located at http://mxr.mozilla.org/mozilla/source/js/rhino/src/. Neither
the Sterling Commerce Software nor any other Third-Party Code is a Modification or Contribution subject
to the Mozilla Public License. Pursuant to the terms of the Mozilla Public License, the following notice
applies only to the Rhino Software (and not to the Sterling Commerce Software or any other Third-Party
Software):
"The contents of the file located at /jar/rhino/1_7R1/js.jar are subject to the Mozilla Public
License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You
may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/.
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the License.
The Original Code is Rhino code, released May 6, 1999. The Initial Developer is Netscape
Communications Corporation. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright © 1997-1999. All
Rights Reserved. Contributor(s):_____none listed.
The preceding license only applies to the Rico Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce
Software, or any other Third-Party Software.

Sun Microsystems
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media
as the following software products (or components thereof): Sun JMX, and Sun JavaMail (collectively,
"Sun Software"). Sun Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the licenses
issued by Sun which are included in the directory files located at:
SUN COMM JAR - /Applications/Foundation/lib
SUN ACTIVATION JAR - / Applications/Foundation/lib
SUN JavaMail - /jar/javamail/1_4/LICENSE.txt
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the
Web-app_2_3.dtd software (Copyright © 2007 Sun Microsystems, Inc.) ("Web-App Software").
Web-App Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the Common Development

and Distribution License ("CDDL"). A copy of the CDDL is found in
http://kenai.com/projects/javamail/sources/mercurial/show.
The source code for the Web-App Software may be found at:
/3rdParty/sun/javamail-1.3.2/docs/JavaMail-1.2.pdf
Such licenses only apply to the Sun product which is the subject of such directory and does not apply to
the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third Party Software.
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the Sun
Microsystems, Inc. Java (TM) look and feel Graphics Repository ("Sun Graphics Artwork"), subject to the
following terms and conditions:
Copyright 2000 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Sun grants you ("Licensee") a non-exclusive, royalty free, license to use, and redistribute this software
graphics artwork, as individual graphics or as a collection, as part of software code or programs that you
develop, provided that i) this copyright notice and license accompany the software graphics artwork; and
ii) you do not utilize the software graphics artwork in a manner which is disparaging to Sun. Unless
enforcement is prohibited by applicable law, you may not modify the graphics, and must use them true
to color and unmodified in every way.
This software graphics artwork is provided "AS IS," without a warranty of any kind. ALL EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE HEREBY
EXCLUDED. SUN AND ITS LICENSORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED BY
LICENSEE AS A RESULT OF USING, MODIFYING OR DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE GRAPHICS
ARTWORK.
IN NO EVENT WILL SUN OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT OR DATA, OR
FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER
CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY
TO USE SOFTWARE GRAPHICS ARTWORK, EVEN IF SUN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
If any of the above provisions are held to be in violation of applicable law, void, or unenforceable in any
jurisdiction, then such provisions are waived to the extent necessary for this Disclaimer to be otherwise
enforceable in such jurisdiction.
The preceding license only applies to the Sun Graphics Artwork and does not apply to the Sterling
Commerce Software, or any other Third Party Software.

WARRANTY DISCLAIMER
This documentation and the Sterling Commerce Software which it describes are licensed either "AS IS"
or with a limited warranty, as set forth in the Sterling Commerce license agreement. Other than any
limited warranties provided, NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED AND NONE SHALL BE IMPLIED,
INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE OR FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. The applicable Sterling Commerce entity reserves the right to revise this publication from time
to time and to make changes in the content hereof without the obligation to notify any person or entity
of such revisions or changes.
The Third Party Software is provided "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. FURTHER, IF YOU
ARE LOCATED OR ACCESSING THIS SOFTWARE IN THE UNITED STATES, ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY REGARDING TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED.
Without limiting the foregoing, the ICE Software and JBoss Software are distributed WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.

Contents
Preface
Intended Audience ................................................................................... xxxiii
Structure ................................................................................................ xxxiii
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation Documentation ........................................ xxxix
Conventions ................................................................................................ xli

Warehouse Management System Overview

Part I

Warehouse Management System Tasks

Accessing Multiple Nodes

Performing Inbound Tasks
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
3.2.1
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.7.1

Creating a Purchase Order..................................................................12
Adding Items to a Draft Purchase Order ..........................................12
Confirming a Draft Purchase Order .................................................12
Creating an Advance Ship Notice .........................................................13
Setting Up Shipment Supervisory Overrides .....................................13
Searching for Inbound Order Shipments ...............................................14
Viewing the Audit Trail for Shipment Modifications .................................14
Creating a Load ................................................................................15
Printing Documents or Labels..............................................................15
Receiving Inventory...........................................................................16
Receiving Inventory using High Speed Data Entry Screens .................16

3.7.1.1
3.7.1.2
3.7.1.3
3.7.1.4
3.7.1.5
3.7.1.6
3.7.2
3.7.2.1
3.7.2.2
3.7.2.3
3.7.2.4
3.7.2.5
3.7.2.6
3.7.2.7
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.9
3.10
3.11

16
17
17
18
18
19
20
20
21
21
21
22
23
23
23
24
24
25
25
26

Managing Inventory
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.10.1
4.10.2
4.11

xvi

Navigating to the Receive Details Screen ...................................
Receiving Expected Containers .................................................
Building Cases or Pallets..........................................................
Receiving Blind Receipts ..........................................................
Over-Receiving ......................................................................
Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes....................................
Receiving Inventory Using Paper and Recording on System Later .......
Navigating to the Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen ...........
Starting a Receipt...................................................................
Recording Paper-Based Receipts...............................................
Receiving Expected Containers .................................................
Building Cases or Pallets..........................................................
Over-Receiving ......................................................................
Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes....................................
Inspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps ..................................................
Inspecting a Receipt ....................................................................
Inspecting Receipt Lines ...............................................................
Closing a Receipt..............................................................................
Adjusting Receipts............................................................................
Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment.........

Searching for Inventory ....................................................................
Viewing an Inventory Audit Trail.........................................................
Managing Count ...............................................................................
Putting an Item or Item Category on Count .........................................
Managing Count Requests .................................................................
Invoking Count Service .....................................................................
Managing Count Tasks ......................................................................
Putting Tasks on Hold .......................................................................
Reporting Count Task Completion .......................................................
Creating Move Requests ....................................................................
For Moving Inventory to a Specified Location ..................................
For Moving Inventory that Exists in a Location.................................
Adjusting Inventory ..........................................................................

User Guide

30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
35
35
35
36

4.11.1
For a New Product ........................................................................36
4.11.2
For an Existing Product .................................................................36
4.12
Changing Inventory Attributes ............................................................37
4.12.1
Find Specific Inventory..................................................................37
4.12.2
Change Attributes Across Locations ................................................38
4.13
Cleaning Out Accounting Bin ...............................................................38
4.14
Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels.......................................................39

Performing Value-Added Services
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.3
5.3.1

Creating a Work Order .......................................................................42
Searching for Work Orders .................................................................42
Viewing Work Order Details ...........................................................43
Viewing Work Order Tasks.............................................................43
Viewing Move Requests.................................................................43
Confirming Work Orders................................................................44
Cancelling Work Orders.................................................................44
Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order ...................................44
Capturing the Extended Attributes of Multiple Serial-Tracked and
Serialized Kits in a VAS Station .......................................................45

Performing Outbound Tasks
6.1
Managing Outbound Shipment Tasks ...................................................49
6.1.1
Creating an Outbound Shipment.....................................................50
6.1.1.1
Setting Up Shipment Supervisory Overrides ................................50
6.1.2
Searching for Outbound Shipments.................................................51
6.1.3
Modifying an Outbound Shipment ...................................................51
6.1.4
Adding Holds to an Outbound Shipment ..........................................52
6.2
Outbound Execution ..........................................................................52
6.2.1
Pick Planning ...............................................................................52
6.2.1.1
Creating a Wave .....................................................................53
6.2.1.2
Auditing a Wave......................................................................53
6.2.1.3
Accepting a Wave....................................................................54
6.2.1.4
Releasing a Wave ....................................................................54
6.2.1.5
Cancelling a Wave ...................................................................54
6.2.2
Picking........................................................................................55

xvii

6.2.3
Packing and Unpacking Containers.................................................
6.2.3.1
Navigating to the Pack Details Screen .......................................
6.2.3.2
Packing System-Suggested Containers ......................................
6.2.3.3
Packing User-Defined Containers ..............................................
6.2.3.4
Packing a Container with Unknown Contents ..............................
6.2.3.5
Packing Single Item Shipments ................................................
6.2.3.6
Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes....................................
6.2.3.6.1
Capturing an Item’s Serial Numbers.....................................
6.2.3.6.2
Capturing an Item’s Tag Attributes ......................................
6.2.3.6.3
Capturing an Item’s Expiration Date.....................................
6.2.3.6.4
Capturing Item Details from an Inventory LPN.......................
6.2.3.7
Adding Items into a Container ..................................................
6.2.3.8
Removing Items from a Container ............................................
6.2.3.9
Adding Inner Packs for an Item ................................................
6.2.3.10
Removing Inner Packs for an Item ............................................
6.2.3.11
Packing Containers for a Shipment............................................
6.2.3.12
Unpacking Containers for a Shipment........................................
6.3
Managing Manifests ..........................................................................
6.3.1
Navigating to the Add to Manifest screen ........................................
6.3.2
Converting an Inventory Container into an Outbound Container .........
6.3.3
Adding Containers to a Manifest ....................................................
6.3.3.1
Capturing the Item’s Serial Number ..........................................
6.3.4
Viewing the Container’s Contents ..................................................
6.3.5
Removing Containers from a Manifest ............................................
6.3.6
Closing a Manifest .......................................................................
6.3.7
Recording the Weight of Containers ...............................................
6.4
Recording Container’s Weight ............................................................
6.4.1
Navigating to the Weigh Station Screen..........................................
6.4.2
Recording the Container’s Weight ..................................................
6.4.3
Capturing the Item’s Serial Number ...............................................
6.4.4
Converting an Inventory Container into an Outbound Container .........
6.4.5
Creating a Load...........................................................................
6.4.6
Searching for Loads .....................................................................
6.4.7
Adding Holds to a Load ................................................................
6.4.8
Adding Shipments to a Load .........................................................

xviii

User Guide

55
57
57
58
61
62
64
64
66
67
67
68
70
71
71
71
72
73
73
73
74
81
82
82
83
83
83
84
84
84
85
85
86
86
86

6.5
Scheduling Dock Appointments ...........................................................87
6.5.1
Searching for a Dock Appointment..................................................88
6.5.2
Viewing Dock Schedule Details .......................................................88
6.5.3
Taking a New Dock Appointment ....................................................89
6.5.4
Modifying a Dock Appointment .......................................................89
6.5.5
Canceling a Dock Appointment .......................................................90
6.5.6
Managing Docks...........................................................................90
6.5.7
Removing a Dock Group Constraint.................................................91
6.6
Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks ...............................................91
6.6.1
Defining Standard Capacity ...........................................................92
6.6.2
Viewing Capacity Details ...............................................................92
6.6.2.1
Transferring Resources Temporarily ...........................................93
6.6.2.2
Assigning Shifts ......................................................................93
6.6.3
Viewing Demand Details................................................................93
6.6.3.1
Performing a Demand Search....................................................94
6.6.3.2
Moving Shipments ...................................................................94
6.6.4
Confirming a Plan.........................................................................95

Managing Tasks
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2

Searching for Tasks ...........................................................................97
Viewing Task Details.....................................................................98
Assigning Tasks to a User..............................................................98
Reprioritizing Tasks ......................................................................98
Putting Tasks on Hold ...................................................................99
Releasing a Task ..........................................................................99
Canceling a Task ..........................................................................99
Confirming a Batch.......................................................................... 100
Recording Count ............................................................................. 100
Manually Logging Productivity ........................................................... 101
Searching for Productivity Logs ......................................................... 101
Viewing Productivity Log Records ................................................. 102
Deleting a Productivity Log .......................................................... 102
Deriving Labor Standards ................................................................. 102
Activities Search by Date Range ................................................... 103
Viewing Productivity Summary ..................................................... 103

xix

7.6.3
7.7

Part II
8

Warehouse Management System Screen Reference

Inbound Shipment Console Screens
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
8.15
8.16
8.17
8.18
8.19
8.20
8.21
8.22
8.23
8.24
8.25
8.26
8.27
8.28
8.29

Derive Labor Standards...............................................................103
Viewing User Time Sheet..................................................................103

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status .........................................107
Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date ...........................................108
Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier ........................................109
Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item ...........................................110
Inbound Order Shipment List ............................................................111
Inbound Order Shipment Details .......................................................113
Modify Address ...............................................................................118
Charges .........................................................................................119
Shipment Line Details ......................................................................120
Loads ............................................................................................122
Ship Node Detail .............................................................................123
Organization Details .......................................................................124
Organization Primary Contact Address Details .....................................125
Organization Corporate Address Details ..............................................127
Containers......................................................................................128
Inbound Order Shipment Instructions ................................................129
Shipment Status Audits....................................................................131
Shipment Audits..............................................................................132
Shipment Dates ..............................................................................134
Shipment Alerts ..............................................................................135
Additional Attributes ........................................................................137
Shipment Receipt Discrepancy ..........................................................138
Manage Receiving Discrepancies........................................................140
Receipts.........................................................................................141
Receipt Summary ............................................................................141
Receipt Details................................................................................144
Receipt Line Details .........................................................................146
Receipt Instructions.........................................................................147
Receipt Status Audits.......................................................................147

User Guide

8.30
8.31
8.32
8.33
8.34
8.35
8.36
8.37
8.38
8.39
8.40
8.41
8.42
8.43
8.44
8.45
8.46
8.47
8.48
8.49
8.50
8.51
8.52
8.53

Receipt Container............................................................................ 147
Activity Demand ............................................................................. 148
Record Container Details .................................................................. 149
Start Receipt .................................................................................. 151
Receive.......................................................................................... 152
Print .............................................................................................. 152
Create Picklist................................................................................. 153
Create Alerts .................................................................................. 153
Receive (Report or Record Receipt) ................................................... 153
Add Delivery Plan ............................................................................ 156
Inbound Order Container Search By All Attributes................................ 156
Inbound Order Container List ............................................................ 157
Container Details ............................................................................ 158
Container Serial Details.................................................................... 161
Container Status Audits ................................................................... 162
Pack or Unpack ............................................................................... 162
Delete Container ............................................................................. 163
Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes ......................................... 163
Dock Schedule Details ..................................................................... 164
Dock Appointment........................................................................... 165
Dock Group Details.......................................................................... 167
View Holds ..................................................................................... 169
Add Holds ...................................................................................... 170
View History ................................................................................... 170

Receipt Console Screens
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9

Receipt Search By Receipt ................................................................ 173
Receipt Search By Item.................................................................... 174
Receipt Search By Container............................................................. 175
Receipt List .................................................................................... 176
Return Order Receipt Summary......................................................... 177
Receipt Line Details ......................................................................... 181
Order Receipt Container ................................................................... 182
Receipt Line Details (Container) ........................................................ 183
Receipt Instructions......................................................................... 184

xxi

9.10
9.11
9.12

Create Inbound Shipment Screens
10.1
10.2

Receipt Status Audits.......................................................................186
Receipt Details................................................................................187
Receive..........................................................................................190

Shipment Entry ...............................................................................193
Shipment Supervisory Overrides .......................................................194

Receive Console Screens
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4

Receive Details ...............................................................................197
Serial Entry ....................................................................................200
Tag Entry .......................................................................................202
Expiration Date Entry.......................................................................202

Inspect Inbound Receipts Screens

Inspect Return Receipts Screens
13.1
13.2

Create Move Request Screens
14.1

Create Count Request ......................................................................215
Create Count Request for Location Range ...........................................218

Count Console Screens
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4

xxii

Create Move Request .......................................................................209

Create Count Request Screens
15.1
15.2

Inspect Receipt ...............................................................................205
Inspect Return Receipt Details ..........................................................206

Count
Count
Count
Count

User Guide

Request
Request
Request
Request

Search By Count Request Attributes .............................221
Search By Count Criteria .............................................222
Search By Location Range ...........................................224
List ..........................................................................224

16.5
16.6
16.7
16.8
16.9
16.10
16.11
16.12
16.13

Create Physical Count Screens
17.1

Create Physical Count Plan ............................................................... 244

Physical Count Console Screens
18.1
18.2
18.3

Count Request Details...................................................................... 225
Count Result List............................................................................. 227
Acceptance Variance Reason............................................................. 232
Create Count Request ...................................................................... 232
Cancellation Reason ........................................................................ 233
Record Count Result Details.............................................................. 234
Count Result Search By Variance....................................................... 237
Count Result Details ........................................................................ 239
Invoke Count Service....................................................................... 241

Physical Count Plan Search ............................................................... 245
Physical Count Plan List.................................................................... 246
Physical Count Plan Details ............................................................... 246

Move Request Console Screens
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7
19.8
19.9
19.10
19.11
19.12
19.13

Move Request Search By Item .......................................................... 251
Move Request Search By Location ..................................................... 252
Move Request Search By Date .......................................................... 254
Move Request Search By References.................................................. 255
Move Request Search By Tag Attributes ............................................. 256
Move Request List ........................................................................... 257
Move Request Details ...................................................................... 258
Move Request Alerts ........................................................................ 262
Status Audit Details ......................................................................... 263
Cancellation Reason ........................................................................ 264
Move Request Line Details ................................................................ 264
Move Request Line Activity Demand................................................... 266
Activity Demand ............................................................................. 267

xxiii

Location Inventory Console Screens
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8
20.9
20.10
20.11
20.12
20.13
20.14
20.15
20.16
20.17
20.18
20.19
20.20

Adjust Location Inventory Screens
21.1
21.2
21.3

Location Inventory Search By Item ....................................................271
Location Inventory Search By Container .............................................273
Location Inventory Search By Additional Attributes ..............................274
Location Inventory Search By Segment ..............................................275
Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes .......................................276
Location Inventory ..........................................................................278
Location Inventory Details ................................................................280
Location Inventory Serial Details .......................................................282
Location Details ..............................................................................283
Location SKU Dedications .................................................................286
Item Details ...................................................................................287
Location Inventory Tag Details ..........................................................290
Change Location Inventory Attributes (Criteria) ...................................291
Change Location Inventory Attributes ................................................291
Node Level Inventory ......................................................................293
Container Details.............................................................................295
Container Serial Details....................................................................297
Create Count Request ......................................................................298
Create Move Request .......................................................................299
Break License Plate Number..............................................................300

Adjust Location Inventory Criteria......................................................303
Adjust Location Inventory Details ......................................................304
Adjustment Cost Details ...................................................................307

Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens
22.1
Accounting Bin Adjustment Details Criteria .........................................309
22.2
Accounting Bin Adjustment Details.....................................................309
22.2.1
Accounting Bin Adjustment Details................................................310
22.2.2
Location Inventory Details ...........................................................310
22.2.3
Accounting Bin Adjustment Reasons..............................................311

xxiv

User Guide

Transfer Inventory Ownership
23.1

Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens
24.1
24.2
24.3

Receipt Adjustment ......................................................................... 321
Adjust Receipt ................................................................................ 322
Modification Reason......................................................................... 324

Create Work Order Screens
26.1
26.2
26.3

Print Stock Keeping Unit Search By Item ............................................ 317
Item List ........................................................................................ 318
Print .............................................................................................. 319

Receipt Adjustment Screens
25.1
25.2
25.3

Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes ............................................ 313

Create Work Order .......................................................................... 325
Additional Item Details..................................................................... 327
Work Order Details.......................................................................... 328

Work Order Console Screens
27.1
27.2
27.3
27.4
27.5
27.6
27.7
27.8
27.9
27.10
27.11
27.12
27.13
27.14

Work Order Search By Item.............................................................. 333
Work Order Search By Container ....................................................... 334
Work Order Search By Date.............................................................. 335
Work Order Search By Activity .......................................................... 337
Work Order Search By Components ................................................... 337
Work Order List .............................................................................. 338
Work Order Details.......................................................................... 340
Work Order Status Audits ................................................................. 344
Work Order Activity Demand ............................................................ 345
Work Order Holds............................................................................ 346
Add Holds ...................................................................................... 347
View History ................................................................................... 347
Cancellation Reason ........................................................................ 348
Work Order Details for Provided Service Items .................................... 348

xxv

27.15

Value-Added Services Station Screens
28.1
28.2
28.3

VAS Station ....................................................................................351
Serial Entry ....................................................................................354
Expiration Date Entry.......................................................................357

Outbound Shipment Console Screens
29.1
29.2
29.3
29.4
29.5
29.6
29.7
29.8
29.9
29.10
29.11
29.12
29.13
29.14
29.15
29.16
29.17
29.18
29.19
29.20
29.21
29.22
29.23
29.24
29.25
29.26

xxvi

Appointment Details ........................................................................349

Outbound Shipment Search By Status ................................................359
Outbound Shipment Search By Date ..................................................361
Outbound Shipment Search By Carrier ...............................................362
Outbound Shipment Search By Item ..................................................363
Outbound Shipment Search By Wave .................................................364
Outbound Shipment Search By Profiling .............................................365
Shipment List .................................................................................367
Shipment Details.............................................................................368
Special Services List ........................................................................375
Modify Shipment .............................................................................375
Address Details ...............................................................................376
Charges .........................................................................................377
Shipment Loads ..............................................................................378
Shipment Containers .......................................................................379
Shipment Instructions......................................................................380
Shipment Status Audits....................................................................381
Shipment Dates ..............................................................................383
Alerts ............................................................................................384
Additional Attributes ........................................................................386
Shipment Activity Demand ...............................................................387
Shipment Audits..............................................................................389
Logical Kits.....................................................................................390
Pack Containers ..............................................................................392
Packing a Container .........................................................................396
Print ..............................................................................................396
Cancel Selected Shipments ...............................................................396

User Guide

29.27
29.28
29.29
29.30
29.31
29.32
29.33
29.34
29.35
29.36
29.37
29.38
29.39
29.40
29.41
29.42
29.43
29.44
29.45
29.46
29.47
29.48
29.49
29.50
29.51
29.52
29.53
29.54

Create Outbound Shipment Screens
30.1
30.2

Split Shipment ................................................................................ 397
Split Shipment Lines........................................................................ 399
Create Alerts .................................................................................. 399
Ship Node Detail ............................................................................. 399
Organization Details ........................................................................ 400
Select Delivery Plan......................................................................... 401
Shipment Line Details ...................................................................... 401
Add Release ................................................................................... 403
Create Wave .................................................................................. 403
Containers ..................................................................................... 404
Container Search By All Attributes ..................................................... 404
Container Search By Status .............................................................. 405
Container List ................................................................................. 406
Container Details ............................................................................ 407
Serial Details .................................................................................. 412
Container Status Audits ................................................................... 412
Container Activity List ...................................................................... 414
Pack or Unpack ............................................................................... 415
Delete Selected Containers ............................................................... 415
Modify Containerization ................................................................... 415
Resolve Short Picked Containers ....................................................... 418
Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes ......................................... 419
Dock Schedule Details ..................................................................... 420
Dock Appointment........................................................................... 421
Dock Group Details.......................................................................... 423
View Holds ..................................................................................... 424
Add Holds ...................................................................................... 426
View History ................................................................................... 426

Shipment Entry............................................................................... 427
Shipment Supervisory Overrides ...................................................... 428

Wave Console Screens
31.1

Wave Search .................................................................................. 429

xxvii

31.2
31.3
31.4
31.5
31.6
31.7
31.8
31.9
31.10
31.11
31.12
31.13
31.14
31.15

Wave List .......................................................................................430
Release Wave .................................................................................431
Cancel Wave...................................................................................432
Wave Summary ..............................................................................432
Shipment Profile Summary ...............................................................434
Shipment Summary.........................................................................434
Batch Summary ..............................................................................435
Work Order Summary ......................................................................435
Item Task Summary ........................................................................436
Shipping Containers Summary ..........................................................436
Prioritize Wave................................................................................437
Print Wave .....................................................................................437
Alert List ........................................................................................438
Wave Audit.....................................................................................439

Create Wave Screens
32.1

Create Wave...................................................................................443

Pack Station Screens
33.1
33.2
33.3
33.4

Pack Details....................................................................................445
Container Contents..........................................................................451
Select SKU .....................................................................................453
Serial Entry ....................................................................................454

Manifest Console Screens
34.1
34.2
34.3
34.4
34.5
34.6
34.7

xxviii

Manifest Search By All Attributes .......................................................455
Manifest List ...................................................................................456
Manifest Details ..............................................................................457
Summary By Carrier Service .............................................................459
Print ..............................................................................................460
Open Manifest.................................................................................460
Close Manifest ................................................................................461

User Guide

Create Load Screens
35.1

Create Load.................................................................................... 463

Load Console Screens

Add To Manifest Screens
37.1
37.2

Remove From Manifest Screens
38.1
38.2

Weigh Station ................................................................................. 480
Serial Entry .................................................................................... 482
Container Contents.......................................................................... 483

Location Inventory Audit Console Screens
40.1
40.2
40.3
40.4
40.5
40.6
40.7
40.8

Remove From Manifest .................................................................... 473
Container Contents.......................................................................... 476

Weigh Station Screens
39.1
39.2
39.3

Add To Manifest .............................................................................. 469
Container Contents.......................................................................... 472

Location Inventory Audit Search By Item............................................ 485
Location Inventory Audit Search By Container ..................................... 486
Location Inventory Audit Search By Transaction References .................. 487
Location Inventory Audit Search By Inventory Attributes ...................... 488
Performing a Location Inventory Audit Search By Count Reference......... 490
Location Inventory Audit List ............................................................ 490
Location Inventory Audit Details........................................................ 492
Location Inventory Audit Details........................................................ 495

Task Console Screens
41.1
41.2
41.3
41.4

Task Search By Task Type ................................................................ 497
Task Summary ............................................................................... 498
Task Summary By Zone ................................................................... 501
Open Task Summary ....................................................................... 501

xxix

41.5
41.6
41.7
41.8
41.9
41.10
41.11
41.12
41.13
41.14
41.15
41.16
41.17
41.18
41.19
41.20
41.21
41.22
41.23
41.24
41.25
41.26
41.27
41.28
41.29
41.30

Confirm Batch Screens
42.1
42.2
42.3

Confirm Batch.................................................................................529
Complete Batch ..............................................................................530
Modification Reason .........................................................................532

Record Count Screens
43.1

xxx

User List ........................................................................................502
Task Search By Zone .......................................................................502
Task Search By Inventory.................................................................503
Task Search By Reference ................................................................505
Task Search By Exception.................................................................506
Task Search By Date........................................................................507
Task Search By At Risk Tasks............................................................508
Task List ........................................................................................509
Task Detail .....................................................................................511
Complete Task ................................................................................513
Modification Reason .........................................................................516
Summary Task Detail.......................................................................516
Task Status Details..........................................................................518
Task Status Audits...........................................................................519
Assign to User ................................................................................519
User Search By All Attributes ............................................................520
User List (selection).........................................................................520
Reprioritize.....................................................................................521
Hold Reason ...................................................................................521
Cancel Task Reason .........................................................................521
User Detail .....................................................................................521
Batch Search By All Attributes...........................................................523
Batch List.......................................................................................524
Batch Detail....................................................................................525
Complete Batch ..............................................................................526
Print Batch .....................................................................................528

Recording Count Results...................................................................533

User Guide

Log Productivity Screens
44.1

Productivity Console Screens
45.1
45.2
45.3

Activities Search By Date Range........................................................ 543
Productivity Type List ...................................................................... 544
Productivity Summary...................................................................... 545
Derive Labor Standards.................................................................... 547

User Time Sheet Screens
47.1
47.2

Productivity Search By Productivity Type ............................................ 537
Productivity List .............................................................................. 538
Productivity Details.......................................................................... 539

Derive Labor Standards Screens
46.1
46.2
46.3
46.4

Log Productivity .............................................................................. 535

User Time Sheet Search By User ....................................................... 549
Time Sheet .................................................................................... 550

Resource Planning Screens
48.1
Defining Standard Capacity .............................................................. 553
48.1.1
Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details............................ 554
48.1.1.1
Resource Pool Standard Capacity Details .................................. 556
48.1.1.2
Resource Pool Standard Capacity Period ................................... 556
48.2
Planning Resources ......................................................................... 557
48.2.1
Resource Planning Capacity Search............................................... 557
48.2.2
Resource Planning Screen ........................................................... 558
48.2.3
Capacity Details ......................................................................... 560
48.2.3.1
Transfer Resources Screen ..................................................... 562
48.2.3.2
Assign Shifts Screen .............................................................. 563
48.2.4
Demand Details ......................................................................... 563
48.2.4.1
Demand Search Panel ............................................................ 564
48.2.4.2
Move ................................................................................... 566
48.2.5
Planning Summary ..................................................................... 566

xxxi

Sterling WMS Prints
A.1
A.2
A.2.1
A.2.2
A.3
A.3.1
A.3.2
A.4
A.4.1
A.4.2
A.4.3
A.5
A.5.1
A.6
A.6.1
A.6.2
A.7
A.8
A.9
A.10

Packing Slip....................................................................................570
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label ....................................................573
Container Label Single SKU..........................................................574
Container Label Multi SKU ...........................................................576
Task List ........................................................................................579
Item Pick Task List (Simple) ........................................................579
Cart Manifest Task List (Requires Sorting of Inventory During Pick) ...581
Bill Of Lading ..................................................................................583
VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment ..................................................584
VICS Bill Of Lading for Load .........................................................590
Hazmat Bill Of Lading..................................................................596
LTL Manifest Label ...........................................................................599
Shipper’s Certification For Hazardous Materials...............................601
FedEx Carrier Label .........................................................................603
FedEx Shipping Label ..................................................................604
FedEx Return Shipping Label........................................................606
Reprint Carrier Label........................................................................608
Count Sheet ...................................................................................608
Wave Release .................................................................................610
Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels .....................................................611

Understanding the Execution Console Framework
B.1
B.2
B.3
B.4
B.5
B.6

Tab Ordering ..................................................................................614
Automatic Pop-Ups for Additional Data Capture ...................................614
Hot Keys ........................................................................................614
Field Level Validations......................................................................614
Populating Fields .............................................................................614
Barcode Handling Capabilities ...........................................................615

Index

xxxii

User Guide

Preface
Intended Audience
This manual is intended to provide assistance to users who are using the
Sterling Warehouse Management System Application Consoles.

Structure
This manual provides a brief overview of the Sterling Warehouse
Management System components. It then presents user information in
two primary parts. Part I consists of chapters that provide instructions for
completing various tasks. Part II consists of chapters that provide screen
and field descriptions for each of the screens in the Sterling Warehouse
Management System user interface. These parts are followed by
appendices that provide reference information for specific components.
The following sections are presented in this manual:
Chapter 1, "Warehouse Management System Overview"
This chapter provides a brief overview of the Sterling Warehouse
Management System (WMS) components and explains how to utilize high
speed data entry oriented transactions.
Part I, "Warehouse Management System Tasks" includes the following
task-oriented chapters:
Chapter 2, "Accessing Multiple Nodes"
This chapter explain how a user can access multiple nodes based on
team configurations.

xxxiii

Chapter 3, "Performing Inbound Tasks"
This chapter explains the various inbound tasks, and how they can be
performed.
Chapter 4, "Managing Inventory"
This chapter explains how to track, monitor, and maintain inventory in a
warehouse.
Chapter 5, "Performing Value-Added Services"
This chapter explains about performing value added services.
Chapter 6, "Performing Outbound Tasks"
This chapter explains the various outbound tasks, and how they can be
performed.
Chapter 7, "Managing Tasks"
This chapter explains how to manage paper-based tasks.
Chapter 8, "Inbound Shipment Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Inbound Shipment Console user interface.
Chapter 9, "Receipt Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Receipt Console user interface.
Chapter 10, "Create Inbound Shipment Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Inbound Shipment user interface.
Chapter 11, "Receive Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Receive Console user interface.
Chapter 12, "Inspect Inbound Receipts Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Inspect Inbound Receipt user interface.

xxxiv

User Guide

Chapter 13, "Inspect Return Receipts Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Inspect Return Receipt user interface.
Chapter 14, "Create Move Request Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Move Request user interface.
Chapter 15, "Create Count Request Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Count Request user interface.
Chapter 16, "Count Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Count Console user interface.
Chapter 17, "Create Physical Count Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for creating the
physical count plan.
Chapter 18, "Physical Count Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens of the Physical Count Console.
Chapter 19, "Move Request Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Move Request Console user interface.
Chapter 20, "Location Inventory Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Location Inventory Console user interface.
Chapter 21, "Adjust Location Inventory Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Adjust Location Inventory user interface.

xxxv

Chapter 23, "Transfer Inventory Ownership"
This chapter explains how inventory ownership gets transferred for an
item at a particular location with the help of the Transfer Inventory
Ownership screen.
Chapter 22, "Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens"
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Accounting Bin
Adjustment screens.
Chapter 24, "Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Print SKU Labels user interface.
Chapter 25, "Receipt Adjustment Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Receipt Adjustment user interface.
Chapter 26, "Create Work Order Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Work Order user interface.
Chapter 27, "Work Order Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Work Order Console user interface.
Chapter 28, "Value-Added Services Station Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the VAS Station user interface.
Chapter 29, "Outbound Shipment Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Outbound Shipment Console user interface.
Chapter 30, "Create Outbound Shipment Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Outbound Shipment user interface.

xxxvi

User Guide

Chapter 31, "Wave Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Wave Console user interface.
Chapter 32, "Create Wave Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Wave user interface.
Chapter 33, "Pack Station Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Pack Station user interface.
Chapter 34, "Manifest Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Manifest Console user interface.
Chapter 35, "Create Load Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Load user interface.
Chapter 36, "Load Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Load Console user interface.
Chapter 37, "Add To Manifest Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Add To Manifest user interface.
Chapter 38, "Remove From Manifest Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Remove From Manifest user interface.
Chapter 39, "Weigh Station Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Weigh Station user interface.

xxxvii

Chapter 40, "Location Inventory Audit Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Location Inventory Audit Console user
interface.
Chapter 41, "Task Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Task Console user interface.
Chapter 42, "Confirm Batch Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Confirm Batch user interface.
Chapter 43, "Record Count Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Record Count user interface.
Chapter 44, "Log Productivity Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Log Productivity user interface.
Chapter 45, "Productivity Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Productivity Console user interface.
Chapter 46, "Derive Labor Standards Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Labour Standards user interface.
Chapter 47, "User Time Sheet Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the User Time Sheet user interface.
Chapter 48, "Resource Planning Screens"
This chapter aids the warehouse by providing the ability to plan for
expected workload and determine the number of resources that is
required to complete all activities.

xxxviii

User Guide

Appendix A, "Sterling WMS Prints"
This appendix describes the various documents that are printed daily in a
warehouse.
Appendix B, "Understanding the Execution Console Framework"
This appendix describes how to capture data on the screen by entering
the data using the keyboard and pressing the Tab key, or by scanning
the barcode using a wedge scanner.

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation
Documentation
For more information about the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation
components, see the following manuals:
Q

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Release Notes

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Installation Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Upgrade Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Configuration Deployment Tool
Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Performance Management Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: High Availability Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: System Management Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Localization Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customization Basics Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing APIs Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing Console JSP Interface
for End User Guide
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing the RCP Interface
Guide
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing User Interfaces for
Mobile Devices Guide
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing Web UI Framework
Guide

xxxix

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Extending the Database Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Extending Transactions Guide
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Using Sterling RCP Extensibility
Tool Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Integration Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Product Concepts Guide

Sterling Warehouse ManagementTM System: Concepts Guide

User Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Extending the Condition Builder
Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing Swing Interface
Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform Configuration
Guide

Sterling Distributed Order ManagementTM: Configuration Guide

Sterling Supply Collaboration: Configuration Guide

Sterling Global Inventory VisibilityTM: Configuration Guide

Catalog ManagementTM: Configuration Guide

Sterling Logistics Management: Configuration Guide

Sterling Reverse LogisticsTM: Configuration Guide

Sterling Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform User Guide

Sterling Distributed Order Management: User Guide

Sterling Supply Collaboration: User Guide

Sterling Global Inventory Visibility: User Guide

Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide

Sterling Reverse Logistics: User Guide

Sterling Warehouse Management System: User Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Mobile Application User Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Business Intelligence Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Javadocs

Sterling Selling and Fulfillment SuiteTM: Glossary

Parcel Carrier: Adapter Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Multitenant Enterprise Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Password Policy Management
Guide
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Properties Guide
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Catalog Management Concepts
Guide

Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Pricing Concepts Guide

Business Center: Item Administration Guide

Business Center: Pricing Administration Guide

Business Center: Customization Guide

Business Center: Localization Guide

Conventions
The following conventions may be used in this manual:
Convention

Meaning

...

Ellipsis represents information that has been
omitted.

Angle brackets indicate user-supplied input.

mono-spaced text

Mono-spaced text indicates a file name, directory
path, attribute name, or an inline code example or
command.

/ or \

Slashes and backslashes are file separators for
Windows, UNIX, and Linux operating systems. The
file separator for the Windows operating system is
"\" and the file separator for UNIX and Linux
systems is "/". The UNIX convention is used unless
otherwise mentioned.

User-supplied location of the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation installation directory. This is only
applicable for Release 8.0 or later.

xli

Convention

Meaning

User-supplied location of the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation installation directory (for Release 8.0 or
later).
Note: This is applicable only for users upgrading
from Release 8.0 or later.

User-supplied location of the Sterling Supply Chain
Applications installation directory. This is only
applicable for Releases 7.7, 7.9, and 7.11.

User-supplied location of the Sterling Supply Chain
Applications installation directory (for Releases 7.7,
7.9, or 7.11).
Note: This is applicable only for users upgrading
from Releases 7.7, 7.9, or 7.11.

For Releases 7.3, 7.5, and 7.5 SP1, this is the
user-supplied location of the Sterling Supply Chain
Applications installation directory.
For Releases 7.7, 7.9, and 7.11, this is the
user-supplied location of the /Runtime directory.
For Release 8.0 or above, the /Runtime directory is no longer used and this
is the same location as .

This is the /Runtime directory for
Releases 7.7, 7.9, or 7.11.
Note: This is only applicable for users upgrading
from Releases 7.7, 7.9, or 7.11.

User-supplied location of the Sterling Analytics
installation directory.
Note: This convention is used only in the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Business
Intelligence Guide.

User-supplied location of the IBM Cognos 8
Business Intelligence installation directory.
Note: This convention is used only in the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Business
Intelligence Guide.

xlii

User Guide

Convention

Meaning

User-supplied location of the IBM WebSphere®
MQ Java components installation directory.
Note: This convention is used only in the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: System
Manangement and Administration Guide.

Refers to Oracle®, IBM DB2®, or Microsoft SQL
Server® depending on the database server.

Depending on the database used, considers the
value oracle, db2, or sqlserver.

xliii

Note: The Selling and Fulfillment Foundation documentation set uses the
following conventions in the context of the product name:
Q

Yantra is used for Release 7.7 and earlier.

Sterling Supply Chain Applications is used for Releases 7.9 and 7.11.

xliv

User Guide

Sterling Multi-Channel Fulfillment Solution is used for Releases 8.0
and 8.2.
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation is used for Release 8.5.

1
Warehouse Management System Overview
The Sterling Warehouse Management System enables you to manage
inventory and processes in your warehouse. The Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Concepts Guide provides an overview of various
processes in a warehouse for diverse enterprises.
This manual explains how to use the Sterling WMS consoles that contains
the following components:
Q

Execution Console Framework - enables you to capture data on
the screen by entering the data using the keyboard and pressing the
Tab key, or by scanning the barcode using a wedge scanner. The
various features of the execution console framework are explained in
Appendix B, "Understanding the Execution Console Framework".
Inbound Shipment Console - enables you to view information
about inbound order shipments and shipment containers. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 8, "Inbound Shipment
Console Screens".
Receipt Console - enables you to view receipt details. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 9, "Receipt Console
Screens".
Create Inbound Shipment - enables you to manually create
inbound shipments from fax, e-mail messages, or telephone
conversations, as well as for trailers that arrive with no prior notice.
The screen level information is explained in Chapter 10, "Create
Inbound Shipment Screens".
Receive Inventory - enables you to receive an expected container,
build cases or pallets, receive blind receipts, and receive over-receipt
quantity. This console is designed to support scanning of information

Warehouse Management System Overview

utilizing available barcodes. The screen level information is explained
in Chapter 11, "Receive Console Screens".
Q

User Guide

Receipt Adjustments - enables you to adjust errors in the receipt
quantity caused during receiving. The screen level information is
explained in Chapter 25, "Receipt Adjustment Screens".
Inspect Inbound Receipts - enables you to inspect inbound
receipts. The procedure for inspecting an inbound receipt is similar to
inspecting a return receipt. See, Chapter 12, "Inspect Inbound
Receipts Screens".
Inspect Return Receipts - enables you to record inspection details
and provides visibility to item level inspection details for a receipt.
The screen level information is explained in Chapter 13, "Inspect
Return Receipts Screens".
Location Inventory - enables you to manage inventory in a
warehouse and provides comprehensive visibility to inventory at both
enterprise and node levels. The screen level information is explained
in Chapter 20, "Location Inventory Console Screens".
Create Count Request - enables you to create count requests. A
count process in a warehouse allows you to verify the system’s
inventory against the actual inventory that is available in a specific
location. The screen level information is explained in Chapter 15,
"Create Count Request Screens".
Count Console - provides comprehensive visibility to the count
request status and the count results that are recorded. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 16, "Count Console
Screens".
Create Move Request - enables you to create ad hoc move
requests. The screen level information is explained in Chapter 14,
"Create Move Request Screens".
Move Request Console - enables you to manage all processes for a
move request, including the abilities to view and modify move
requests. The screen level information is explained in Chapter 19,
"Move Request Console Screens".
Adjust Location Inventory - enables you to adjust inventory in the
system for a location to reflect the physical inventory. The screen

level information is explained in Chapter 21, "Adjust Location
Inventory Screens".
Q

Print SKU Labels - enables you to print the SKU labels. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 24, "Print Stock Keeping Unit
Labels Screens".
Create Work Order - enables you to create work orders. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 26, "Create Work Order
Screens".
Work Order Console - provides work order visibility at both
enterprise and node levels. The screen level information is explained
in Chapter 27, "Work Order Console Screens".
VAS Station - enables you to scan an outbound container number or
a work order number to identify the work order. This component also
provides the ability to confirm the work order at an activity level. The
screen level information is explained in Chapter 28, "Value-Added
Services Station Screens".
Outbound Shipment Console - enables you to modify the outbound
shipment instruction. This component also provides visibility to
discrepancies found in the outbound shipments. The screen level
information is explained in Chapter 29, "Outbound Shipment Console
Screens".
Create Outbound Shipment - enables you to manually create
outbound shipments from fax, e-mail messages, or telephone
conversations, as well as for trailers that arrive with no prior notice.
The screen level information is explained in Chapter 30, "Create
Outbound Shipment Screens".
Wave Console - enables you to match all shipments with the
appropriate shipment groups and create waves for those groups. The
screen level information is explained in Chapter 31, "Wave Console
Screens".
Create Wave - enables you to manually create waves. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 32, "Create Wave Screens".
Pack Station - enables you to pack containers for system defined
and user defined containerization processes. The screen level
information is explained in Chapter 33, "Pack Station Screens".

Warehouse Management System Overview

Manifest Console - enables you to view manifest details. You can
also open a new manifest, close a manifest, and print a manifest. The
screen level information is explained in Chapter 34, "Manifest Console
Screens".
Add To Manifest - enables you to add containers to a manifest. The
screen level information is explained in Chapter 37, "Add To Manifest
Screens".
Remove From Manifest - enables you to remove containers from a
trailer or manifest before closing the manifest. The screen level
information is explained in Chapter 38, "Remove From Manifest
Screens".
Weigh Station - enables you to record a container’s weight that
belongs to a TL, LTL, or parcel shipment. The screen level information
is explained in Chapter 39, "Weigh Station Screens".
Location Inventory Audit Console - enables you to view an item’s
or a container’s inventory audit details. The screen level information
is explained in Chapter 40, "Location Inventory Audit Console
Screens".
Task Console - enables you to optimize warehouse throughput and
maximize worker efficiency. You can:
–

assign tasks

–

reprioritize tasks

–

modify task location and quantity

–

complete a task

–

cancel certain types of tasks

–

view summary level information across all tasks for a node.

The screen level information is explained in Chapter 41, "Task
Console Screens".
Q

User Guide

Confirm Batch - enables you to confirm a batch or confirm a batch
with exceptions, if applicable. The screen level information is
explained in Chapter 42, "Confirm Batch Screens".
Record Count - enables you to record count task results to indicate
the completion of the count task that was assigned. The screen level
information is explained in Chapter 43, "Record Count Screens".

Log Productivity - enables you to record additional productivity
information. The screen level information is explained in Chapter 44,
"Log Productivity Screens".
Productivity Console - provides visibility to activities performed at
a process level. Allows you to modify the productivity details. The
screen level information is explained in Chapter 45, "Productivity
Console Screens".
Prints - provides documents that are printed daily in a warehouse, as
and when requested, or when initiated by the occurrence of specific
events. The documents that can be printed are explained in
Appendix A, "Sterling WMS Prints".

Warehouse Management System Overview

User Guide

Part I
Warehouse Management System Tasks
The chapters in this section provide instructions to complete the following
tasks that can be performed using the Sterling Warehouse Management
System:
Q

Accessing Multiple Nodes

Performing Inbound Tasks

Managing Inventory

Performing Value-Added Services

Performing Outbound Tasks

Managing Tasks

User Guide

2
Accessing Multiple Nodes
A warehouse user can work in the context of one node. However, the
user may have to switch between warehouses and access multiple nodes.
The Sterling Warehouse Management System enables the user to access
multiple nodes and perform various warehouse operations. After the user
switches to a different node, all the transactional data displayed and
recorded will be in the context of the node the user is working on.
Permission to access multiple nodes is based on the teams assigned to
the users in the Applications Manager. For more information about
defining teams, refer to the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Perform the following steps to switch between multiple nodes:
1.

The Select Node window is displayed. Select the node from the Select
Node drop-down list or lookup icon. Depending on the configuration,
one of the following is displayed for Select Node:
Q

Select Node drop-down list - This list displays all the nodes you
have access to, based on the team configured for you. Select the
appropriate node from the list.
Select Node lookup icon - Click
to display the Node lookup
screen, and click Search. The nodes that are accessible to you are
displayed in the Node List dialog box. Click
adjacent to the
node you want to access. The selected node will be displayed in
the Select Node window.

Click OK. For all subsequent warehouse operations, the node you
have selected will be used as the default node.

Accessing Multiple Nodes

In order to access a different node, repeat Step 1 through Step 3. If you
do not want to select any node, either select the blank option in the
Select Node drop-down list or delete the current node displayed in the
Select Node field.
Notes:
Q

User Guide

If you log in to the Application Console without
selecting a node, and attempt to view any of the
Details screens such as Create Move Request, Create
Count Request, and so on, in which it is mandatory to
enter a value in the Node field, the Select Node dialog
box is displayed. After you select a node from the
Select Node drop-down list in this dialog box, the
relevant screen is displayed.
You must select a node before performing the pack
operations and manifest operations.
If you log in to the Application Console without
selecting a node, and attempt to view any of the
Search screen such as the Location Inventory Console,
in the Search Console screen, the Node drop-down list
automatically displays all the nodes that you have
permission to access. If you select a node from this
drop-down list, the resultant values for the new node
will be reflected only for that particular search. It will
not change the default node of the user.

3
Performing Inbound Tasks
The Inbound Shipment Console provides information on inbound
shipments and containers. This console provides sellers, node users, and
carriers with information necessary to coordinate and ensure on-time
delivery of shipments.
You can either include a purchase order release into an existing inbound
shipment or create an inbound shipment for a set of orders.
An inbound shipment as an entity can be used in a delivery plan by
attaching it to a load. For more information about configuring delivery
plans and loads, see the Sterling Logistics Management: Configuration
Guide.
This chapter explains the various inbound tasks, and how they can be
performed. It covers the following use cases:
Q

Creating a Purchase Order

Creating an Advance Ship Notice

Searching for Inbound Order Shipments

Viewing the Audit Trail for Shipment Modifications

Creating a Load

Printing Documents or Labels

Receiving Inventory

Inspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps

Closing a Receipt

Adjusting Receipts

Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment

Performing Inbound Tasks

Creating a Purchase Order

3.1 Creating a Purchase Order
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Supply > Create Inbound Order. The
Inbound Order Entry screen displays. For more information about the
Inbound Order Entry screen, see the Sterling Supply Collaboration:
User Guide.

In Document Type, select Purchase Order.

In Enterprise, select the enterprise that handle the inbound order

In Buyer, enter the buyer placing the inbound order.

In Seller, enter the seller that the inbound order is being placed from.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Create Order. The Inbound Order Detail screen displays. For
more information about the Inbound Order Detail screen, see the
Sterling Supply Collaboration: User Guide.

3.1.1 Adding Items to a Draft Purchase Order
Changes can be made to a Purchase Order at any time while it is in Draft
status. A Draft Purchase Order does not enter the Created status until it
is confirmed.
To add items to a Draft Purchase Order, in the Inbound Order Detail
screen:
1.

Enter details in the Order Lines panel.

Click Save. You can now confirm the order.

3.1.2 Confirming a Draft Purchase Order
To confirm a Purchase Order:

Search for, or create, an open Purchase Order in the Draft status.

From the Inbound Order action bar, click Confirm. The Inbound Order
now displays in Created status.

User Guide

Creating an Advance Ship Notice

Note: The Bill To address and order lines must be entered
before a draft order can be confirmed.

3.2 Creating an Advance Ship Notice
Shipments (ASNs) are transmitted to warehouses through EDI
downloads, fax, or e-mail, and also when a trailer arrives with no prior
notice.
The shipment entry console lets you manually create shipments from fax,
e-mail or telephone conversations. ASNs can also be created for those
trailers that arrive with no prior notice.
To create an inbound shipment:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Inbound > Create Inbound
Shipment. The Shipment Entry screen displays.

In Document Type, select the document type associated with the
shipment you are creating. Valid values are 'Purchase Order' or
'Transfer Order'.

In Ship Node, enter the shipping node associated with the shipment.
This represents the seller's ship node.

In Buyer, enter the buyer associated with the shipment you want to
create, if applicable.

In Seller, enter the seller associated with the shipment you want to
create.

In Order #, enter the purchase order number associated with the
shipment.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Create Shipment to create the Advance Ship Notice.

3.2.1 Setting Up Shipment Supervisory Overrides
To set the supervisory overrides, in the Shipment Entry screen:
1.

From the action bar, click Supervisory Overrides. The Shipment
Supervisory Overrides screen displays.

Select the check boxes of the applicable overrides.

Performing Inbound Tasks

Viewing the Audit Trail for Shipment Modifications

Click OK.

3.3 Searching for Inbound Order Shipments
The following Inbound Shipment Search screens let you search for
shipments to receive based on different criteria:
Q

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status screen

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date screen

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier screen

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item screen

To navigate to the search screens:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Inbound > Inbound Shipment
Console. Initially, the Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status
screen displays. Select the applicable search view from the Views
drop-down list.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Inbound Order
Shipment List screen.

3.4 Viewing the Audit Trail for Shipment
Modifications
In addition to shipment status audits, you can view the audit trail for
modifications made to an inbound shipment, shipment lines, or both.
This section provides instructions for viewing shipment modifications,
such as modifying a carrier or service, ship-to address, adding or
removing a shipment from a load, or adding or deleting shipment
instructions.
To view a shipment audit trail:

From the navigation bar, click Inbound > Inbound Shipment Console.
The Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status screen displays.

Enter the applicable search parameters, and click Search. The
Shipment List screen displays.

User Guide

Printing Documents or Labels

Select the shipment number for which you want to view details.

From the action bar, click View Details. The Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen displays.

From the Shipment action bar, click
. The Shipment Audits screen
displays, which provides complete visibility to modifications made to
an inbound shipment, shipment lines, or both.

3.5 Creating a Load
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation enables you to create a load
containing one or more complete shipments. The load must have a set
origin and destination, but it can have multiple intermediate stops.
Shipments can be added to a load at its origin or at any intermediate
stop. The shipments contained in the load can be delivered to any stop
between the origin and destination and can belong to multiple
Enterprises. Partial shipments cannot be included in a load.
To create a load:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Inbound > Create Load. The Create
Load screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Save. The Load Details screen displays. For more information
about the Load Details screen, see the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.

3.6 Printing Documents or Labels
To print a document or label:
1.

Search for the applicable shipments or containers. For more
information about searching for inbound order shipments, see
Searching for Inbound Order Shipments.

From the inbound shipment list or inbound container list, select the
check boxes of the applicable shipment or container.

Do any of the following:
Q

From the action bar, click Print. The Print screen displays.

Performing Inbound Tasks

Receiving Inventory

From the action bar, click View Details. The Inbound Order
Shipment Details or Container Details screen displays. From the
action bar, click Print. The Print screen displays.

3.7 Receiving Inventory
The Sterling WMS lets you control the receipt process in a warehouse. It
supports the least automated warehouse through paper-based processes.
It also supports the most automated warehouses that use MHEs for
receipts. A warehouse can configure its own receiving preferences to
characterize the flow of inventory from the receiving dock to other
departments and zones of a warehouse.
A receipt in the Sterling WMS is made against a purchase order or
shipment. The Sterling WMS tracks cases or pallets with contents at a
shipment level, if available. It also supports blind receipts. A warehouse
may use any or all of these methods to receive its inventory. The Sterling
WMS places constraints for each of these methods.

3.7.1 Receiving Inventory using High Speed Data Entry
Screens
This section explains how to receive inventory in the Sterling WMS using
the Receive HSDE.
The following use-cases are explained in detail:
Q

Navigating to the Receive Details Screen

Receiving Expected Containers

Building Cases or Pallets

Receiving Blind Receipts

Over-Receiving

Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes

3.7.1.1 Navigating to the Receive Details Screen
To access the Receive Details screen, from the navigation bar of the
Warehouse Management System module, click Inbound > Receive. The
Receive Details screen displays.

User Guide

Receiving Inventory

3.7.1.2 Receiving Expected Containers
To receive expected containers:
1.

Open the Receive Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Receive Details screen, see Section 3.7.1.1,
"Navigating to the Receive Details Screen".

In Shipment #, enter or scan the shipment number.

In Pallet ID/Case ID, enter the pallet SCM or case SCM.
Note: If the Do Not Verify Case Contents option is disabled,
and in the Applications Manager, under Receiving Preferences, if the "Force Case Content entry" option is selected,
verification of the contents packaged into the case is forced.
For more information, see the Sterling Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Do any of the following:
Q

Click Close Pallet or press Alt+P.

Click Close Case or press Alt+C.

3.7.1.3 Building Cases or Pallets
To build cases or pallets out of loose SKUs that are available in the
shipment:
1.

Open the Receive Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Receive Details screen, see Section 3.7.1.1,
"Navigating to the Receive Details Screen".

In Shipment #, enter or scan the shipment number.

In Pallet ID/Case ID, enter the new pallet SCM or case SCM.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Do any of the following:
Q

Click Close Pallet or press Alt+P.

Click Close Case or press Alt+C.

Performing Inbound Tasks

Receiving Inventory

3.7.1.4 Receiving Blind Receipts
When you receive loose items in a warehouse for a shipment which has
no order and shipment line, you are receiving a blind receipt.
To receive a blind receipt:
1.

Create an inbound shipment with no shipment lines. For more
information about creating an inbound shipment, see Section 3.2,
"Creating an Advance Ship Notice".

Open the Receive Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Receive Details screen, see Section 3.7.1.1,
"Navigating to the Receive Details Screen".

In Shipment #, enter or scan the shipment number.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Do any of the following:
Q

Click Close Pallet or press Alt+P.

Click Close Case or press Alt+C.

3.7.1.5 Over-Receiving
The process of receiving excess quantity is based on the shipment
attributes. For a list of defined over-receipt quantity attributes, see
Table 3–1.
To over-receive:

Open the Receive Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Receive Details screen, see Section 3.7.1.1,
"Navigating to the Receive Details Screen".

In Shipment #, enter or scan the shipment number.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Do any of the following:

User Guide

Click Close Pallet or press Alt+P.

Click Close Case or press Alt+C.

Receiving Inventory

Table 3–1 Over-Receipt Quantity Attributes
Order
Exists on
the
System

Does
Shipment
If Manual have
Shipment Lines

Is
Suppress
Overage
Check set

Receive up to receiving
preference overage limit
against the shipment
line.

Receive any quantity for
the existing order lines.

Receive any item, any
quantity.

Over-Receipt Quantity
Receive any quantity for
the existing shipment
lines.
Receive up to receiving
preference overage limit
against the order line.

3.7.1.6 Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes
Note: You can capture the tag and serial attributes only if
the node that is receiving inventory is configured to
capture tags and has serial tracking enabled, when
receiving inventory, or when performing all operations
within the node. For more information about capturing the
tag and serial attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration Guide.

Performing Inbound Tasks

Receiving Inventory

To capture the extended attributes for an item:
1.

Open the Receive Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Receive Details screen, see Section 3.7.1.1,
"Navigating to the Receive Details Screen".

In the Item ID field, scan an item. If the item is serial-tracked,
tag-tracked, or time sensitive, then capture the item’s extended
attributes.
For more information about capturing the extended attributes, see
Section 6.5, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".

3.7.2 Receiving Inventory Using Paper and Recording on
System Later
This section explains how to receive inventory in the Sterling WMS using
paper, and record the receipt on the system later.
The following use-cases are explained in detail:
Q

Navigating to the Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen

Starting a Receipt

Recording Paper-Based Receipts

Receiving Expected Containers

Building Cases or Pallets

Over-Receiving

Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes

3.7.2.1 Navigating to the Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen
To navigate to the Inbound Order Shipment Details screen:

Search for the required inbound order shipments. For more
information about identifying the inbound order shipment, see
Section 3.3, "Searching for Inbound Order Shipments".

From the shipment list, select the check boxes of the applicable
shipments.

From the action bar, click View Details. The Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen displays.

User Guide

Receiving Inventory

3.7.2.2 Starting a Receipt
To start a receipt:
1.

Navigate to the Inbound Order Shipment Details screen for the
applicable shipments. For more information about navigating to the
Inbound Order Shipment Details screen, see Section 3.7.2.1,
"Navigating to the Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen".

From the action bar, click Start Receipt. The Starting a Receipt screen
displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Save.

3.7.2.3 Recording Paper-Based Receipts
To record paper-based receipt details:
1.

From the action bar, click Report/Record receipt. The Receive screen
displays.
Q

If receipts are not available, the Starting a Receipt screen displays.
For more information about starting a receipt, see
Section 3.7.2.2, "Starting a Receipt".
If multiple receipts are available, the Receive screen displays.
Select the check boxes of the applicable receipts you want to
receive and click Proceed. The Receive screen displays.

In the Lines to Receive table, enter the quantity you want to receive
against each shipment line.

Click Save.

3.7.2.4 Receiving Expected Containers
To receive expected containers:
1.

Open the Receive screen. For more information about navigating to
the Receive screen, see Section 3.7.2.3, "Recording Paper-Based
Receipts".

Performing Inbound Tasks

Receiving Inventory

To receive expected pallets, in the Lines To Receive area, click Pallet
ID and enter the pallet SCM.
To receive expected cases, in the Lines To Receive area, click Case ID
and enter the case SCM.
Note: If the Do Not Verify Case Contents box is checked,
and in the Applications Manager, under Receiving Preferences, if the Force Case Content entry box is checked, verification of the contents packaged into the case is not
necessary. For more information, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide. Also, you need not
enter other information to receive the container, after scanning the case or pallet.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

If receiving a pallet, check Pallet Completely Received to close
the pallet.
If receiving a case, check Case Completely Received to close the
case.

3.7.2.5 Building Cases or Pallets
To build cases or pallets out of loose SKUs that are available in the
shipment:
1.

Open the Receive screen. For more information about navigating to
the Receive screen, see Section 3.7.2.3, "Recording Paper-Based
Receipts".

If receiving an expected pallet, in Pallet ID, enter the new pallet SCM.
If receiving an expected case, in Case ID, enter the new case SCM.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

If building a pallet, check Pallet Completely Received to close the
pallet.
If building a case, check Case Completely Received to close the
case.

User Guide

Inspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps

3.7.2.6 Over-Receiving
The process of receiving excess quantity is based on the shipment
attributes. For a list of defined over-receipt quantity attributes, see
Table 3–1.
To over-receive:
1.

Open the Receive screen. For more information about navigating to
the Receive screen, see Section 3.7.2.3, "Recording Paper-Based
Receipts".

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

If receiving a pallet, check Pallet Completely Received to close
the pallet.
If receiving a case, check Case Completely Received to close the
case.

3.7.2.7 Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes
To capture the extended attributes for an item:
1.

Open the Receive screen. For more information about navigating to
the Receive screen, see Section 3.7.2.3, "Recording Paper-Based
Receipts".

In the Lines To Receive area > Shipment Line list search for the
appropriate Item ID. If the item is serial-tracked, tag-tracked, or time
sensitive, then enter the item’s extended attributes.

3.8 Inspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps
Once inventory is received, it is inspected. Inspecting receipts involves:
Q

Recording inspection details
Viewing next disposition suggestions based on the current disposition
status

Entering appropriate inspection comments while inspecting an item

Viewing item inspection details for a receipt

Searching for receipts by disposition code

Inspecting receipts from receipt summary screen

Performing Inbound Tasks

Inspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps

The screens mentioned in these section appear
while inspecting return receipts. However, since the steps
required for inspecting receipts are the same for both
Inbound Orders and Returns, the fields in the screen are
the same.

Note:

3.8.1 Inspecting a Receipt
To inspect a receipt:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Inbound> Inspect Receipt to inspect
inbound receipts and Returns > Inspect Receipt to inspect return
receipts. The Inspect Receipt screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Proceed. The Inspect Return Receipt Details screen displays.

3.8.2 Inspecting Receipt Lines
You can view the receipt item details and receipt lines that are already
inspected and also enter the inspection details for receipts that are not
inspected.
To inspect a receipt line:

In the Inspect Receipt screen, click Proceed. The Inspect Return
Receipt Details screen displays.

In New Disposition, select the disposition code from the list.

In Disposition Qty, enter the disposition quantity.

Click Save.

Click Close.

User Guide

Adjusting Receipts

Note:
Q

To inspect an item, receive the item with non-final
disposition code. For more information about creating
disposition codes, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.
You can inspect receipts that are closed.

3.9 Closing a Receipt
To close an inbound order’s shipment receipt:
1.

Search for the applicable shipments. For more information about
searching for inbound order shipments, see Searching for Inbound
Order Shipments.

From the list, select the check boxes of the applicable shipments.

From the action bar, click View Details. The Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen displays.

From the Shipment action bar, click
displays.

From the list, select the check boxes of the applicable receipts.

Click Close Receipt.

. The Receipts window

3.10 Adjusting Receipts
To make adjustments to shipment receipts:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Inbound > UnReceive. The Receipt
Adjustment screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Proceed. The Adjust Receipt screen displays, which enables you
to validate the criteria you entered in the Receipt Adjustment screen
against the receipt number, for filtering the results.

Performing Inbound Tasks

Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment

In the Adjust Receipt screen, click Adjust. The Modification Reason
screen displays, which enables you to enter appropriate reasons for
adjusting the received quantity.

In the Modification Reason screen, click OK.
Note: The unreceive option can also be used to unreceive

a complete case or pallet and loose SKUs.

3.11 Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an
Inbound Order’s Shipment
You can manage discrepancies found while receiving inbound shipments.
To manage the receiving discrepancies of an inbound shipment:

Search for the applicable shipments. For more information about
searching for inbound order shipments, see Searching for Inbound
Order Shipments.

From the shipment list, select the check boxes of the applicable
inbound shipments.

From the action bar, click View Details. The Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen displays.

From the action bar, click
screen displays.

Click Manage Receiving Discrepancies. The Manage Receiving
Discrepancies screen displays.

If the Discrepancy Reason and Reason Quantity fields are greyed out,
click Reopen Reason Entry to enable you to make changes as
needed.

Adjust Discrepancy Reason and Reason Quantity so that the sum of
the Discrepancy Reasons and Reason Quantities add up to the
Discrepancy Quantity.

When you have finished the adjustments, click Save.

Click Reason Entry Complete. If your adjustments add up correctly,
then the fields are grayed out. If the adjustments do not add up

User Guide

. The Shipment Receipt Discrepancy

Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment

correctly but you need to close the window, you can finish working
with the receiving discrepancies later.
You can mark the reason entry as complete only after entering the
discrepancy reason for the entire discrepancy quantity.
10. Click Close.

Note: Use the recordReceivingDiscrepancy API to record
discrepancies while receiving an inbound shipment. For
more information about the recordReceivingDiscrepancy
API, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Javadocs.

Performing Inbound Tasks

Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment

User Guide

4
Managing Inventory
Operations in a warehouse are broken into different processes such as
receiving, picking, packing, VAS, and returns. It is critical to capture and
track inventory at granular levels for these processes. Visibility is
required at a granular level to provide comprehensive management of
inventory in a warehouse. Various reports are generated to track
inventory movement across an enterprise.
The Sterling WMS provides comprehensive functionality to track, monitor,
and maintain inventory in a warehouse. Inventory visibility is provided
through the Location Inventory Details screen to provide granular
information, such as:
Q

Comprehensive visibility of inventory at both enterprise and node
level.
Extensive search capabilities using granular level information such as
serial number or lot number at a warehouse location.

The ability to alter inventory at a location.

The ability to modify granular inventory attributes at a location.

Visibility of audits of inventory changes at the location level.

This chapter explains in detail the following use cases:
Q

Searching for Inventory

Managing Count

Adjusting Inventory

Changing Inventory Attributes

Cleaning Out Accounting Bin

Managing Inventory

Viewing an Inventory Audit Trail

Creating Move Requests

Viewing an Inventory Audit Trail

Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels

4.1 Searching for Inventory
Using the inventory search screens, you can perform:
Q

Location Inventory Search By Item

Location Inventory Search By Container

Location Inventory Search By Additional Attributes

Location Inventory Search By Segment

Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes

To navigate to the search screens:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Location Inventory
Console. Initially, the Location Inventory Search By Item screen
displays. Select the applicable search view from the Views drop-down
list.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Location Inventory
screen.

4.2 Viewing an Inventory Audit Trail
A comprehensive inventory audit trail is provided to view item or
container audit details that occur in a warehouse. Audits are written for
each transaction along with the appropriate reference values and item
attributes for tracking purposes. To view inventory audits:

From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Location Inventory
Console.

From the Entities menu, select Location Inventory Audit. The Location
Inventory Audit Search By Item screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields and click Search. The
Location Inventory Audit List screen displays.

User Guide

Putting an Item or Item Category on Count

From the Location Inventory Audit List, Item Information or Location
Inventory Audit List, Container Information panel, select the
checkboxes of the items or containers whose audit trail you want to
view.

Click View Details. The Location Inventory Audit Details screen
displays.

4.3 Managing Count
Products or product categories may be counted on a regular or on an ad
hoc basis to validate the accuracy of the product inventory.
The following use cases are explained in detail here:
Q

Putting an Item or Item Category on Count

Managing Count Requests

Invoking Count Service

Managing Count Tasks

Putting Tasks on Hold

Reporting Count Task Completion

4.4 Putting an Item or Item Category on Count
To put an Item or Item Category on Count from the Create Count
Request screen:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Inventory > Create Count Request.
The Create Count Request screen displays.

Enter the information in the applicable fields.
Note: An item or item classification may be put on count
only if an enterprise has been specified.

Choose the item or item category that you want to put on count:
Q

To put an item on count: Choose By Item, and enter relevant
item information.

Managing Inventory

Invoking Count Service

To put an item classification on count: Choose By Item
Classification, and enter relevant item classification
information.

Choose Create Count Request. The new count request displays in the
Count Request Details screen.

4.5 Managing Count Requests
To manage the existing count requests from the Count Request List
screen:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Inventory > Count Console.

Navigate to the Count Request Search By Count Request Attributes
screen OR the Count Request Search By Count Criteria screen.

Enter the applicable search parameters, and choose Search. The
Count Request List screen displays.

Select the relevant Count Requests and choose the appropriate
action:
Q

Choose View Details to view the details of the selected Count
Requests. The Count Request Details screen displays. From this
screen, you can Accept Variance in the inventory.
Choose Cancel to cancel the selected Count Requests. The
Cancellation Reason screen displays to capture the reason for
cancelling the request.

4.6 Invoking Count Service
You can use the Invoke Count Service screen to create additional count
requests.
To create additional count requests:

From the navigation bar, choose Inventory > Invoke Count Service.
The Invoke Count Service screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Proceed.

User Guide

Putting Tasks on Hold

4.7 Managing Count Tasks
To manage existing count tasks from the Task List or Task Detail screen.
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Tasks > Task Console.

You can search for Tasks by:
a.

Zone (See Task Search By Zone screen)

Inventory attributes (See Task Search By Inventory screen)

References (See Task Search By Reference screen)

Exception (See Task Search By Exception screen)

Date (See Task Search By Date screen)

Enter the applicable search parameters, and choose Search. The Task
List screen displays.

Alternatively, you can navigate to the Task List screen by choosing
View Count Tasks from the Count Request Details screen.

Select the relevant Count Tasks and choose the appropriate action:
Q

Choose View Details to view the details of the selected Count
Tasks. The Task Detail screen displays. From this screen, you can
Hold, Release, Cancel, or Complete count tasks.
Choose Assign To User to assign the selected count tasks to a
user. The Assign to User screen displays.
Choose Reprioritize to update the priority of the selected count
tasks. The Reprioritize screen displays.
Choose Hold to put the selected count tasks on hold. The Hold
Reason screen displays.
Choose Release to release the selected a count tasks, which had
been put on hold.
Choose Cancel to cancel the selected count tasks. The Cancel
Task Reason screen displays.

4.8 Putting Tasks on Hold
To put a count task on hold or release a count task that has been on hold
from the Task List OR the Task Detail screen:

Managing Inventory

Reporting Count Task Completion

From the navigation bar, choose Tasks > Task Console.

You can search for Tasks by:
a.

Zone (See Task Search By Zone screen)

Inventory attributes (See Task Search By Inventory screen)

References (See Task Search By Reference screen)

Exception (See Task Search By Exception screen)

Date (See Task Search By Date screen)

Enter the applicable search parameters, and choose Search. The Task
List screen displays.

Alternatively, you can navigate to the Task List screen by choosing
View Count Tasks from the Count Request Details screen.

Select the relevant Count Tasks and choose the appropriate action:
Q

Choose View Details to view the details of the selected Count
Task. The Task Detail screen displays. From this screen, you can
Hold, Release, Cancel, or Complete a count task.
Choose Hold to put a count task on hold. The Hold Reason screen
displays.
Choose Release to release a count task that has been put on
hold.

4.9 Reporting Count Task Completion
You can report the completion of a count task either though the console
or the mobile terminal. In the console, you can mark a count task as
complete from the Task Detail screen:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Tasks > Task Console.

You can search for Tasks by:
a.

Zone (See Task Search By Zone screen)

Inventory attributes (See Task Search By Inventory screen)

c.
d.

User Guide

References (See Task Search By Reference screen)
Exception (See Task Search By Exception screen)

Creating Move Requests

Date (See Task Search By Date screen)

Enter the applicable search parameters, and choose Search. The Task
List screen displays.

Alternatively, you can navigate to the Task List screen by choosing
View Count Tasks from the Count Request Details screen.

Select the relevant count task and choose View Details. The Task
Detail screen displays.

Choose Complete to record the completion of the count task. The
Record Count Result Details screen displays.

4.10 Creating Move Requests
Move requests can be automated or created manually. Whenever there is
a demand for a certain product or quantity, move requests are created
and released to the appropriate department. When released, tasks are
generated for the move requests. For example, when a customer
requests shipments with serial numbers, move requests are created for
those shipments and released to the pack station. Move requests can be
created:
Q

For Moving Inventory to a Specified Location

For Moving Inventory that Exists in a Location

4.10.1 For Moving Inventory to a Specified Location
To create a move request to move inventory to a specific location:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Create Move Request.
The Create Move Request screen displays.

On the Create Move Request screen, Create Move Request, Move
Request Items panel, enter the item and quantity that you want to
move.

Click Save.

4.10.2 For Moving Inventory that Exists in a Location
To create a move request for inventory existing in a location:

Managing Inventory

Adjusting Inventory

Search for inventory. For more information about performing an
inventory search, see Section 4.1, "Searching for Inventory".

Select checkboxes of the applicable locations. The Location Inventory
Details screen displays.

In the Location Inventory Details screen, select the checkboxes for
the inventory you want to move.

Click Create Move Request. The Create Move Request screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click OK.

4.11 Adjusting Inventory
From time-to-time, it may be necessary to adjust inventory. For
example, a spot location count (separate from scheduled inventory
counts) may reveal shrinkage. In this case, the easiest method for
correcting inventory at that location is to perform an inventory
adjustment. You can adjust the item quantity at the location level or on a
license plate. You can adjust inventory:
Q

For a New Product

For an Existing Product

4.11.1 For a New Product
To create inventory for a new product at a specific location and adjust
the quantity:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Adjust Location
Inventory. The Adjust Location Inventory Criteria screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Proceed. The Adjust Location Inventory Details screen displays.

Adjust the item quantity as needed.

4.11.2 For an Existing Product
To adjust the quantity for an existing product:

User Guide

Changing Inventory Attributes

Search for inventory. For more information about performing an
inventory search, see Section 4.1, "Searching for Inventory".

Select the checkboxes for the applicable locations. The Location
Inventory Details screen displays.

In the Location Inventory Details screen, select the checkboxes for
the inventory you want to adjust.

Click Adjust Location Inventory. The Adjust Location Inventory Details
screen displays.

In the Quantity panel, enter the new quantity for the item.

In the Modification Reasons panel, enter the applicable adjustment
reason code.

Click Save.

4.12 Changing Inventory Attributes
You can change an item’s inventory attributes, such as product class,
inventory status, country of origin, ship by date, FIFO number, or tag
number without changing the on hand quantity. To change inventory
attributes for an item, you:
Q

Find Specific Inventory

Change Attributes Across Locations

4.12.1 Find Specific Inventory
To find specific inventory for an item:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Change Location
Inventory Attributes. The Change Location Inventory Attributes
(Criteria) screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields and click Proceed. The
Change Location Inventory Attributes screen displays.

In the Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory
Attributes panel, enter the new attributes.

In the Change Location Inventory Attributes, Audit Reason panel,
enter the reasons why the inventory was adjusted.

Managing Inventory

Cleaning Out Accounting Bin

Click Save.

4.12.2 Change Attributes Across Locations
To change an item's inventory attributes across locations:
1.

Search for inventory. The Location Inventory screen displays.
For more information about performing an inventory search, see
Section 4.1, "Searching for Inventory".

Do any of the following:
a.

Select a checkbox for which you want to enter the new attributes.
Click Change Inventory Attributes. The Change Location Inventory
Attributes screen displays.

Select checkboxes of the applicable locations.
–

Click View Details. The Location Inventory Details screen
displays.

–

In the Location Inventory Details, Location Inventory Details
panel, select checkboxes of the applicable inventory for which
you want to change attributes.

–

Click Change Inventory Attributes. The Change Location
Inventory Attributes screen displays.

In the Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory
Attributes panel, enter the new attributes.

In the Change Location Inventory Attributes, Audit Reason panel,
enter modification reasons for adjusting the inventory.

Click Save.

4.13 Cleaning Out Accounting Bin
Warehouses clean out the inventory in accounting bin locations at the
end of a physical or cycle count process.

User Guide

Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels

Note: Before cleaning the inventory at an accounting bin
location, you need to understand the functionality of the
ZEROOUT_LOCATION_INV transaction. For more information
about this transaction, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.

To clean out the inventory at an accounting bin location:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Accounting Bin
Adjustment. The Accounting Bin Adjustment Details Criteria screen
displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Proceed. The Accounting Bin Adjustment Details screen displays.

In the Accounting Bin Adjustment Reasons panel, enter the applicable
adjustment reason code.

Click Save.

4.14 Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels
The SKU labels are applied on hazardous items.
To print SKU labels:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Print SKU Labels.

The Print Stock Keeping Unit Search By Item screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields and click Search. The Item
List screen displays.

Select the checkbox of an item for which you want to print the SKU
label.

Click Print. The Print screen displays.

The following label format depicts the default label printed for hazardous
items:

Managing Inventory

Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels

Table 4–1

Hazmat SKU Label

Fields

User Guide

DOT SHIPPING NAME

The proper shipping name.

ITEM

The item identifier.

HAZARD CLASS

The item’s hazard class.

IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER

The four-digit number that identifies the hazardous
items (such as explosives and poisonous materials) of
commercial importance. This is widely used in
international commerce, such as when labelling the
contents of the shipment containers.

PACKING GROUP

Indicates the degree of danger of a hazardous item
within its hazard class or division and the type of
packaging required for the item. The valid values are:
Packing Group I - high danger, Packing Group II medium danger, Packing Group III - Low danger.

DOT LABEL CODE

Indicates the label code of the hazardous item.

5
Performing Value-Added Services
The Sterling WMS supports VAS operations, which include creating work
orders for services.
A work order captures activities and the completion status of each
activity that is required to perform services such as:
Q

Kitting–assembling components for a kit item.
De Kitting–disassembling a kit item. This may be done to acquire an
individual component to complete another order.
Compliance–value-added service that is performed to supply an
item to a specific buyer for made-to-customer orders.

Inventory Change–converting inventory from one UOM to another.

Provided Service–service performed at a customer site.

Delivery Service–service performed for a product delivery to the
customer site.

You can include one or more service activities such as assembling
components, applying logos, or packing components in a work order. You
can assign a sequence number to indicate the order in which you want to
perform the activities.
This chapter explains the various VAS processes and how you can
perform them. It covers the following use cases:
Q

Creating a Work Order

Searching for Work Orders

Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order

Performing Value-Added Services

Searching for Work Orders

5.1 Creating a Work Order
You can create a work order for a service.
To create a work order:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose VAS > Create Work Order. The
Create Work Order screen displays.

In Service Item Group, select the appropriate service item group
associated with the work order.

In Service Item ID, enter the identifier of the service item.

In Item ID, enter the identifier of the parent item or kit item.

In Unit Of Measure, select the appropriate UOM.

In Product Class, select the appropriate product class.

In Requested Quantity, enter the quantity of parent items required.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Proceed. The Create Work Order screen displays.

10. Enter information in the applicable fields.
11. Click Save. The Work Order Details screen displays.

5.2 Searching for Work Orders
The following Work Order Search screens let you search for work orders
based on different criteria:
Q

Work Order Search By Item screen

Work Order Search By Container screen

Work Order Search By Date screen

Work Order Search By Activity screen

Work Order Search By Components screen

To navigate to the search screens:
1.

User Guide

From the navigation bar, choose VAS > Work Order Console. Initially,
the Work Order Search By Item screen displays. Select the applicable
search view from the Views drop-down list.

Searching for Work Orders

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Work Order List
screen.

5.2.1 Viewing Work Order Details
You can view the details of the work order you created in the Work Order
Details screen.
To view the details of a work order:
1.

From the Work Order List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable work orders.

From the action bar, click View Details. The Work Order Details screen
displays.

5.2.2 Viewing Work Order Tasks
You can view the tasks associated with a work order in the Work Order
Details screen.
To view the tasks associated with a work order:
1.

From the Work Order List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable work orders.

From the action bar, click View Tasks. The Task List screen displays.

5.2.3 Viewing Move Requests
You can view the move requests associated with a work order in the
Move Request List screen.
To view the move requests associated with a work order:
1.

From the Work Order List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable work orders.

From the action bar, click View Move Requests. The Move Request List
screen displays.

Performing Value-Added Services

Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order

5.2.4 Confirming Work Orders
To confirm a work order, you must confirm all service activities included
in the work order.
To confirm a work order:
1.

From the Work Order List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable work orders.

From the action bar, click Confirm. The VAS Station screen displays.
For more information about confirming activities included in a work
order, see Section 5.3, "Confirming Activities Included in the Work
Order".

5.2.5 Cancelling Work Orders
You can cancel a work order.
To cancel a work order:
1.

From the Work Order List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable work orders.

From the action bar, click Cancel. The Cancellation Reason screen
displays.

In Cancellation Reason Code, enter the applicable cancellation reason
code.

Click Ok.

5.3 Confirming Activities Included in the Work
Order
To confirm or complete the work order, you must confirm all activities
included in the work order.
To confirm activities included in a work order:

From the navigation bar, click VAS > VAS Station. The VAS Station
screen displays.

In Scan, enter or scan the work order number or container number.

User Guide

Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order

In Location, select the VAS station where you want to perform the
activity.

In Activities panel, the activities associated with the service displays.
Select the activity that you want to confirm.

In Qty To Process, provided in the Quantity panel, enter the item
quantity you want to process.

Click Save.
If the item or any of its components is serial-tracked, tag-tracked, or
time sensitive, capture the extended attributes of the item. For more
information about capturing an the extended attributes of the item,
see the appropriate section in this guide.

Note: You can capture the tag attributes for a
tag-controlled item only if the node confirming the work
order is configured to capture the tag attributes in all
operations performed within the node. For more
information about capturing the tag attributes, refer to the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.

To confirm or complete the work order, repeat Step 4 through Step 6
until the item’s quantity to be confirmed for all activities equals to
zero.

5.3.1 Capturing the Extended Attributes of Multiple
Serial-Tracked and Serialized Kits in a VAS Station
You can confirm or complete a work order that includes more than one
kit at a time if all the kits are serial-tracked and the components are
serial-tracked, tag-tracked, or normal items.
The procedure to capture the extended attributes of multiple quantities
of serial-tracked kits with serial-tracked, tag-tracked, or normal
components is as follows:
1.

In the Qty To Process field provided in the Quantity panel in the VAS
Station screen, enter the number of serial-tracked kits you want to
process.

Performing Value-Added Services

Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order

For more information about performing activities in the VAS Station
screen, see Section 5.3, "Confirming Activities Included in the Work
Order".
2.

Click Save.

In the Serial Entry screen that is displayed, enter the serial number
of the first serial-tracked kit in the Serial # field.

If a tag-tracked or tag-controlled item is present, the Tag Entry
screen is displayed. Enter the Batch #, Lot #, and so on as
applicable, and click Close.
Note: You can capture the tag attributes for a

tag-controlled item only if the node confirming the work
order is configured to capture the tag attributes in all the
operations performed within the node. For more
information about capturing the tag attributes, refer to the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.

In the Serial Entry screen that is displayed, you can either enter the
serial numbers of the components of the first serial-tracked kit one
after the other in the Serial # field, or click the Enter Serial Range
button to enter the serial numbers of the start and end components.
Note: For a serial-tracked or serialized item, if secondary

serials are defined, but secondary information is not
provided, the Enter Serial Range button is not displayed.

For more information about the fields available in the Serial Entry
screen, see Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended
Attributes", and Section 28.2, "Serial Entry".
Note: If the first serial-tracked kit contains different types

of components, perform step 5 for all the components.

User Guide

To confirm or complete the work order, repeat steps 3-6 for the
remaining serial-tracked kits until the value in the Qty Completed

Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order

field in the Quantity panel in the VAS Station screen equals the
number of serial-tracked kits entered in step 1.
Note: The Enter Serial Range button is available only for
the serial-tracked items in a serial-tracked kit, and not for
the serial-tracked kit.

Performing Value-Added Services

Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order

User Guide

6
Performing Outbound Tasks
The Outbound Shipment Console provides information about outbound
shipments and shipment containers. This console provides details about
sellers, node users, and carriers necessary to coordinate and ensure
on-time delivery of shipments.
You can either include a sales order release into an existing outbound
shipment or create an outbound shipment for a set of orders.
An outbound shipment can be included in a delivery plan by attaching it
to a load. For more information about managing delivery plans and loads,
see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.
This chapter explains the various outbound tasks and how you can
perform them. It covers the following use cases:
Q

Managing Outbound Shipment Tasks

Outbound Execution

Managing Manifests

Scheduling Dock Appointments

Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks

6.1 Managing Outbound Shipment Tasks
This section provides instructions to complete the following tasks using
the Application Console:
Q

Creating an Outbound Shipment

Searching for Outbound Shipments

Modifying an Outbound Shipment

Performing Outbound Tasks

Managing Outbound Shipment Tasks

Adding Holds to an Outbound Shipment

6.1.1 Creating an Outbound Shipment
You can use the Shipment Entry screen to manually create an outbound
shipment for a sales order or transfer order.
To create an outbound shipment:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Create Outbound
Shipment. The Shipment Entry screen displays.

In Enterprise, select the enterprise associated with the shipment.

In Shipment #, enter a number to identify the shipment, if applicable.
If you do not specify the number, the system generates a unique
shipment number.

In Buyer, enter the buyer associated with the shipment you are
creating, if applicable.

In Seller, enter the seller associated with the shipment you are
creating.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Create Shipment. The Shipment Details screen displays.

In the Shipment Lines panel, enter the details of the items you want
to add as part of the shipment.

Enter other information if applicable.

10. Click Save.

6.1.1.1 Setting Up Shipment Supervisory Overrides
You can set up supervisory overrides for a shipment.
To set up supervisory overrides for a shipment, in the Shipment Entry
screen:

From the action bar, click Supervisory Overrides.

Check the Allow Overage box of the applicable overrides.

Click OK.

User Guide

Managing Outbound Shipment Tasks

6.1.2 Searching for Outbound Shipments
The following Outbound Shipment Search screens let you search for
outbound shipments based on different criteria:
Q

Outbound Shipment Search By Status

Outbound Shipment Search By Date

Outbound Shipment Search By Carrier

Outbound Shipment Search By Item

Outbound Shipment Search By Wave

To navigate to the search screens:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Outbound Shipment
Console. Initially, the Outbound Shipment Search By Status screen
displays. Select the applicable search view from the Views drop-down
list.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Shipment List screen.

6.1.3 Modifying an Outbound Shipment
You can modify certain attributes of a shipment. For example, you can
modify the carrier service for any shipment that has not been shipped.
To modify an outbound shipment:
1.

Search for an outbound shipment. The Shipment List screen displays.
For more information about searching for shipments, see
Section 6.1.2, "Searching for Outbound Shipments".

Select the check box of the shipment that you want to modify.

From the action bar, click Modify Shipment. The Modify Shipment
screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click OK to save the changes.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

6.1.4 Adding Holds to an Outbound Shipment
You can add holds to a shipment to prevent it from being processed by
transactions or to prevent certain modifications on it.
To add holds to a shipment:
1.

Search for an outbound shipment. The Shipment List screen displays.
For more information about shipment search, see Section 6.1.2,
"Searching for Outbound Shipments".

Select the check boxes of the applicable shipments.

From the action bar, click View Holds. The View Holds screen displays.

From the Shipment Holds inner panel, click Add Holds. The Add Holds
screen displays.

In Hold Type, select the appropriate hold type that you want to add to
the shipment.

Click Save.

6.2 Outbound Execution
This section provides instructions to complete the following tasks using
the Application Console:
Q

Pick Planning

Picking

Packing and Unpacking Containers

Creating a Load

Adding Holds to a Load

Adding Shipments to a Load

6.2.1 Pick Planning
You can create waves to pick inventory for a shipment, specify a pick
strategy for each wave to determine the best process and locations to
use to pick inventory, thus optimizing the labor cost. For more
information about configuring a pick strategy, see the Sterling
Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide.

User Guide

Outbound Execution

6.2.1.1 Creating a Wave
You can create a wave either manually or automatically by the system.
When waves are created, the system determines the shipments to be
picked. The shipments picked are assigned to a particular shipment
group such as parcel, LTL, and TL shipments. After you assign a
shipment group to each shipment, you can create waves for those
groups.
To create a wave:
1.

From the navigation bar choose Outbound > Outbound Shipment
Console.

The Shipment Search By Status screen displays. For more
information about shipment search, see Section 6.1.2, "Searching for
Outbound Shipments".

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Shipment List screen.

Select the check boxes of the applicable shipments for which you
want to create a wave.

From the action bar, click Create Wave. The Create Wave screen
displays.

Click Create New Wave With Shipment Group and select the
applicable shipment group from the drop-down list.

Click Save.

6.2.1.2 Auditing a Wave
When you create a wave, the system allows you to audit the created
wave.
To audit a wave:
1.

From the Navigation bar, choose Outbound > Wave Console. The
Wave Search By Status screen displays

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results are displayed in the Wave List
screen.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

Click the wave number hyperlink. The Wave Summary screen is
displayed.

From the Action bar, click

. The Wave Audit screen is displayed.

6.2.1.3 Accepting a Wave
Warehouses can choose to monitor waves that are created and decide to
manually release them. This manual decision is called "accepting a
wave".
Shipments that are not accepted can be included in new waves. You can
accept a wave manually or configure to automatically accept it.
To manually accept a wave, in the Wave Summary screen, click Accept
from the action bar.
Note: An accepted wave has to be assigned a lane based

on the destination or carrier before releasing it. To assign a
lane to the wave, run the ASSIGN_LANE agent on the
trigger agent.

6.2.1.4 Releasing a Wave
A warehouse specifies the release time for waves. Shipments that do not
have sufficient inventory are removed from the wave.
You can define a schedule to release waves for picking in a warehouse for
a given day. The release schedule considers waves that are accepted and
ready for release. You can define different times and days to release a
wave that belong to a particular shipment group.
To release a wave, in the Wave Summary screen, click Release from the
action bar.

6.2.1.5 Cancelling a Wave
When you cancel a wave, the pick tasks associated with the wave get
cancelled.
To cancel a wave:
1.

User Guide

In the Wave Summary screen, click Cancel from the action bar. The
Cancel Wave screen displays.

Outbound Execution

Select the Cancellation Code Reason associated with the wave.

Enter appropriate reasons for canceling the wave.

Click Save.

6.2.2 Picking
You can pick inventory using the Mobile Application. For more information
about picking, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Mobile
Application User Guide.

6.2.3 Packing and Unpacking Containers
Packing operations are performed after completing picking or VAS
operations. Certain pick methods including "sort while pick" and "pick
and pack" combine packing activities along with picking.
This section describes the packing process to be followed at the pack
station.
The pack station is designed for a high-speed operation through a web
browser with minimal mouse usage. This can also be used for data entry
operations where barcodes are not readable or available.
The Pack Station console supports packing of shipment containers for
both system-defined and user-defined containers. For a system-defined
containers, the system automatically closes the shipment or container
after packing the items. However, in a user-defined packing process, the
user has to manually close the shipment or container.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

Note: When the shipment is packed, a "ON_SHIPMENT_
PACK_PROCESS_COMPLETE" event that is associated with
the "ADD_TO_CONTAINER" transaction is raised (if
enabled). You can use this event to print shipping labels,
container labels, or both.

Similarly, when the container is packed, a "ON_
CONTAINER_PACK_PROCESS_COMPLETE" event that is
associated with the "ADD_TO_CONTAINER" transaction is
raised (if enabled). You can use this event to print
container labels.
For more information about the Execution Console Framework, see
Appendix B, "Understanding the Execution Console Framework".
You can pack cartons, pallets, or both after picking the items. The
packing process can either be system-defined or user-defined. For more
information about the pack planning process, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.
This chapter explains in detail the following use cases:

Navigating to the Pack Details Screen

Packing System-Suggested Containers

Packing User-Defined Containers

Packing a Container with Unknown Contents

Packing Single Item Shipments

Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes

Adding Items into a Container

Removing Items from a Container

Adding Inner Packs for an Item

Removing Inner Packs for an Item

Packing Containers for a Shipment

Unpacking Containers for a Shipment

User Guide

Outbound Execution

6.2.3.1 Navigating to the Pack Details Screen
To access the Pack Details screen, do one of the following:
1.

From the navigation bar, click Outbound > Pack Station.

From the Container Details screen, click Pack/Unpack.

From the Shipment Details screen, click Pack Container.

6.2.3.2 Packing System-Suggested Containers
In this process, the system suggests the container to use to pack the
items. The Pack Details, Items panel provides a clear snapshot of items
that you need to pack into the container.
To pack system-suggested containers:
1.

Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".

Select the pack location where you are performing the pack
operation.

Enter or scan the container SCM.

Scan the item you want to pack. If the item is serial tracked, the
Serial Entry screen displays where you enter the item’s serial number.
See Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".

In the Add Quantity field, enter or scan the item quantity you want
add to the container:

If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen displays where you
enter the item’s tag attributes. See Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an
Item’s Extended Attributes".

If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date Entry screen
displays where you enter the item’s expiration date. See
Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".

Click Weigh or press Alt+W. The container’s weight displays in the
Actual Weight field. You can modify the weight, if necessary.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

Note: You cannot convert an inventory LPN into an

outbound container.

Note: If an inventory LPN is picked into a

system-suggested outbound container, the LPN ID is not
retained as the child container of the outbound container.
Only SKU and quantity are updated.

6.2.3.3 Packing User-Defined Containers
This process allows you to select the container to pack the items.
To pack the items into the selected container:

Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".

Select the pack location where you are performing the pack
operation.

Scan the container SCM or select New Case or New Pallet.

Scan the item you want to pack. If the item is serial tracked, the
Serial Entry screen displays where you capture the item’s serial
number. See Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended
Attributes".

Scan the number of items you want to add to the container:
a.

If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen displays where you
capture the item’s tag attributes. See Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing
an Item’s Extended Attributes".

If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date Entry screen
displays where you enter the item’s expiration date. See
Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".

Click Weigh or press Alt+W. The container’s weight displays in the
Actual Weight field. You can modify the weight, if necessary.

After you finish packing the container, click Close Container or press
Alt+C. You can scan the next container, if available.

User Guide

Outbound Execution

Note: Before you scan the next container, clear the
display information on the Pack Details screen by clicking
Reset or pressing Alt+R.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

Note:
Q

If the inventory LPN is picked into a user-suggested
outbound container, the LPN ID is retained as a child
container of the outbound container.
After you finish packing for a shipment, click Reset or
press Alt+R to clear the information before you start
packing for the next shipment.
In the Pack Station, you cannot convert an inventory
LPN into an outbound container.
If an empty row displays between line items, it
indicates that you cannot mix attributes. For more
information about mixing attributes, see the section
Defining Pack Planning in the chapter Configuring
Packing in the Sterling Warehouse Management
System: Configuration Guide.

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
You cannot pack or unpack shipments.
Cause
The Shipment Modification Rules for the Pack Shipment
and Unpack Shipment modification types are not set to
"Allow Modification".
Resolution
Ensure that the Shipment Modification Rules for the Pack
Shipment and Unpack Shipment modification types are set
to "Allow Modification".
For more information about modification rule types, see
the Order Document Modification Types table in the Order
Modification Types appendix of the Sterling Distributed
Order Management: Configuration Guide.

User Guide

Outbound Execution

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
You cannot print packing slips when packing cartons.
Cause
Q

The "ON_SHIPMENT_PACK_COMPLETE" event check
box is not selected.
The printer may not be connected, the printer power or
green light may not be on, or the printer that you want
to print to is incorrectly selected.

Resolution
Q

Select the "ON_SHIPMENT_PACK_COMPLETE" event
check box.
Make sure your printer is connected, the printer power
or green light is on, and select the correct printer that
you want to use.
Ensure that custom services that are used on the event
to print the labels are correctly implemented and
configured.

6.2.3.4 Packing a Container with Unknown Contents
You can pack a container with unknown contents.
To pack a container with unknown contents:
1.

Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".

On the Pack Details, Scan panel, in the Scan Identifier field:
a.

Enter or scan the shipment number.

Enter or scan the container SCM you want to add to the shipment.
The container you scanned is automatically closed.

Click Save.

After you finish scanning all containers that you want to add to the
shipment, click Close Shipment or press Alt+S.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

6.2.3.5 Packing Single Item Shipments
Using the Pack HSDE screen, you can perform item-driven pack process
and pack shipments that have a single item.
In the Pack Details screen, when you scan a barcode in the Scan
Identifier field, the system identifies the shipment to pack based on the
following sequence:
1.

Shipment Number, Batch Number, or Outbound Container

Serial number (derives the identifier of the item)

Identifier of the item

Inventory LPN
a.

Single SKU LPN

Multi-SKU LPN
Note: When you scan the identifier of an item, the

system considers only loose SKUs present at the pack
station.
When you scan an inventory LPN, the system suggests
shipments whose total quantity is less than or equal to
inventory LPN quantity.

Based on the information scanned in the Scan Identifier field, the system
first searches for shipments that have a single item and suggests the
shipment with the earliest ship date that can be fulfilled. However, if
multiple shipments are found with the same criteria, the system suggests
the shipment that has the highest quantity. Later, the system suggests
the container in which to pack the items.
The Pack Details, Items panel provides a clear snapshot of items that you
need to pack into the container.
To pack containers for single item shipments:

Open the Pack Details screen. For more information about opening
the Pack Details screen, see Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the Pack
Details Screen".

Select the pack station from the drop-down list where you want to
pack the items.

User Guide

Outbound Execution

In Scan Identifier, enter or scan the shipment number, serial number,
inventory LPN, or identifier of the item, as applicable. The system
suggests the shipment to pack.
Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
When you scan the identifier of a pallet or item in the Scan
Identifier field, an "Task type for Pack process is not
configured" error message displays.
Cause
A task type is not configured under the "Packing" activity
group.
Resolution
Configure at least one task type under the "Packing"
activity group.

Note: When you scan the serial number, inventory LPN
(single level container), or item identifier, the item details
display in the Products panel, and the focus is in the
Quantity field.

If you scan an inventory LPN, the Select SKU screen displays. Select
the item you want to pack. For more information about selecting the
items to pack, see Section 6.2.3.6.4, "Capturing Item Details from an
Inventory LPN".
4.

Scan the item you want to pack. If the item is serial tracked, the
Serial Entry screen displays where you capture the item’s serial
number. For more information about capturing an item’s serial
number, see Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended
Attributes".

Scan the number of items you want to add to the container:
a.

If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen displays where you
capture the item’s tag attributes. For more information about

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

capturing an item’s tag attributes, see Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing
an Item’s Extended Attributes".
b.

If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date Entry screen
displays where you enter the item’s expiration date. For more
information about capturing an item’s expiration date, see
Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".

Click Weigh or press Alt+W. The weight of the container displays in
the Actual Weight field. You can modify the weight, if necessary.

6.2.3.6 Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes
You can capture the extended attributes for serial tracked, tag tracked,
and time sensitive items.
6.2.3.6.1

Capturing an Item’s Serial Numbers

To capture an item’s serial number:
1.

In Serial #, enter the primary and secondary serial numbers of the
item.

In the Serial #, enter the serial range of the items.

In the Count field, the total count of items scanned displays.
The item ID, unit of measure, and requested serial number for the
item are automatically populated by the system in the corresponding
fields.

User Guide

Outbound Execution

Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

6.2.3.6.2

Capturing an Item’s Tag Attributes

Note: You can enter the tag details for an item:
Q

If the node is configured to capture the tag attributes
in all operations within the node, or,
If the buyer on a shipment mandates it as a part of the
inbound compliance.

For more information about capturing tag attributes, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
Enter the item’s tag attributes, such as Lot number, Batch number, and
Revision number associated with a tag-tracked item.

User Guide

Outbound Execution

Note: The fields displayed in the Tag Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.

Note: If the item scanned has inventory information such
as tag number, serial number, expiration date, or quantity
from the barcode translation, you are not prompted to
capture the inventory information.

For example, if a tag-tracked item with lot number "L" has
tag information from the barcode translation that the item
belongs to lot "L", the Tag Entry screen does not display.
6.2.3.6.3

Capturing an Item’s Expiration Date

Enter the item’s expiration date. To change this date, choose the Calendar
lookup and specify a new expiration date or press Alt+L.

6.2.3.6.4

Capturing Item Details from an Inventory LPN

You can capture the item details from an inventory LPN.
To capture the item details from an inventory LPN:
1.

In Item ID, enter the identifier of the item to pack, or select the item
identifier from the list.

Click OK.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

Note: The Select SKU screen displays if the
SKUPopupRequired flag is set to "Y" in the exuipack_
pack_container.jsp in \repository\eardata\yantra\war\wms\wmspack\det
ail folder.

By default this flag is set to "Y". If you set this flag to "N",
the Select SKU screen displays when you scan a Multi-SKU
LPN.

6.2.3.7 Adding Items into a Container
You can add items into a container.
To add items into a container:

Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".

In Add Quantity, enter the item quantity you want to add to the
container.

User Guide

Outbound Execution

If the item you want to pack already exists in the location in one
or more inventory containers (case or pallet), the Select Inventory
Container screen displays. Enter or select the Pallet or Case LPN
from the list. The Location Id is automatically populated by the
system.

If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen displays, where
you capture the item’s tag attributes. See Section 6.2.3.6,
"Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".

If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date Entry screen
displays, where you enter the item’s expiration date. See
Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".

Click Close Container or press Alt+C to indicate that the pack
operation is complete.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
You cannot print packing slips on packing cartons.
Cause
Q

Resolution
Q

Select the "ON_SHIPMENT_PACK_COMPLETE" event
check box.
Make sure your printer is connected, the printer power
or green light is on, and select the correct printer that
you want to use.
Ensure custom services that are used on the event to
print the labels are correctly implemented and
configured.

6.2.3.8 Removing Items from a Container
You can remove items from a container.
To remove the items from a container:
1.

Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".

In Remove Qty, enter the item quantity you want to remove from the
container.
a.

User Guide

If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen displays, where
you enter the item’s tag attributes. See Section 6.2.3.6,
"Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".

Outbound Execution

If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date Entry screen
displays, where you enter the item’s expiration date. See
Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".

6.2.3.9 Adding Inner Packs for an Item
To add inner packs for an item:
1.

Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".

In the Location field, select the location where you are performing the
pack operation.

In the Scan Identifier field, enter or scan the container SCM.

In the Pack Details, Items panel, select the item for which you want
to record the inner packs and click INNER PACKS.

In the Selected Container Details, Quantity Breakup panel, enter the
inner pack quantity and number of inner packs.

6.2.3.10 Removing Inner Packs for an Item
To remove inner packs for an item:
1.

Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".

On the Pack Details, Container Properties panel, click Unpack
Container.

In the Container Contents panel, select the item for which you want
to remove inner packs.

In the Selected Container Details, Quantity Breakup panel, in Remove
Inner Packs field, enter the number of inner packs you want to
remove. Depending on this, the value in the Remove Quantity field is
automatically populated.

Click Save.

6.2.3.11 Packing Containers for a Shipment
Once you create a shipment, you can pack all the items in a container for
the shipment.
To pack a container:

Performing Outbound Tasks

Outbound Execution

Search for an outbound shipment. The Shipment List screen displays.
For more information about shipment search, see Section 6.1.2,
"Searching for Outbound Shipments".

Check the box of the shipment number for which you want to pack
containers.

From the action bar, click View Details. The Shipment Details screen
displays.

From the action bar, select Pack Container. The Pack Details screen
displays.

Select the appropriate pack station from the drop-down list.

Click New Case. The item ID and corresponding details get filled
automatically.

In SKU, enter or scan the item identifier and press Tab.
The item’s unit of measure and the inventory status display
automatically.

In Add Quantity, enter the item quantity to be packed in one
container.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

10. Click Save.

6.2.3.12 Unpacking Containers for a Shipment
You can unpack any packed container to remove inventory from a
container.
To unpack a container:

Search for an outbound shipment. The Shipment List screen displays.
For more information about shipment search, see Section 6.1.2,
"Searching for Outbound Shipments".

Check the box of the shipment number for which you want to unpack
the containers.

From the action bar, click View Details. The Shipment Details screen
displays.

From the action bar, click
displays.

User Guide

. The Shipment Containers screen

Managing Manifests

Check the boxes of the applicable containers you want to unpack.

Click View Details. The Container Contents screen displays.

From the action bar, click Pack/Unpack. The Pack Details screen
displays.

In the Container Properties panel, click Unpack Container. The
Container Contents screen displays.

Enter the quantity you want to remove from the container.

10. Click Save.

6.3 Managing Manifests
This section explains in detail the following use cases:
Q

Navigating to the Add to Manifest screen

Converting an Inventory Container into an Outbound Container

Adding Containers to a Manifest

Viewing the Container’s Contents

Recording the Weight of Containers

Removing Containers from a Manifest

Closing a Manifest

6.3.1 Navigating to the Add to Manifest screen
To access the Add To Manifest screen, from the navigation bar, click
Outbound > Add To Manifest.

6.3.2 Converting an Inventory Container into an Outbound
Container
Note: LPNs picked for shipments with requested serials
cannot be converted into an outbound container.

You can use the manifest station to convert an inventory container to an
outbound container.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Managing Manifests

To convert an inventory container into an outbound container:
1.

Open the Add To Manifest screen. See Section 6.3.1, "Navigating to
the Add to Manifest screen".

In Station, select the station from the drop-down list where you are
manifesting the containers.

In Scan Identifier:
a.

Enter or scan the shipment number.

Enter or scan the inventory container.
If the item is serial-tracked and the serial number is not captured
during the pick or pack process, capture the item’s serial number.
For more information about capturing the item’s serial number,
see Section 6.3.3.1, "Capturing the Item’s Serial Number". Click
Close.
The system automatically converts the inventory container into an
outbound container.
Note: Do not scan the shipment number if you use the

Sterling WMS Task Framework to move the inventory
container.

6.3.3 Adding Containers to a Manifest
You can add containers to an existing manifest or add to a new manifest
after packing it.
To add containers to a manifest:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Outbound > Add to Manifest. The Add
To Manifest screen is displayed.

In Station, select the station from the drop-down list where you are
manifesting the containers.

In Scan Identifier, enter or scan the container SCM that you want to
add to the manifest.
If the item is serial-tracked or if the serial number is not captured
during the pick or pack process, capture the item’s serial number. For

User Guide

Managing Manifests

more information about capturing the serial number, See
Section 6.3.3.1, "Capturing the Item’s Serial Number".
4.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Add to Manifest.

Important: Save the container’s information and packing
notes entered (if any) before manifesting.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Managing Manifests

Note: You can customize the manifest station to perform

generic status changes on a container.
To customize the manifest station:

User Guide

Define the custom pipeline by extending the default
pipeline associated with a transaction ID. For more
information about configuring process models, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
Extend the existing resource and modify the JSP to
contain
JSP=/wms/wmsmanifest/detail/exuimanifest_
detail_anchor.
jsp?TransactionId=. For more
information about defining or extending resources, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Create a Menu Entry for the newly created resource
and use the new screen to perform a generic status
change. For more information about defining menus,
see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.

Managing Manifests

Troubleshooting Tip:

The Tracking Number and Freight Charges are not getting
generated while manifesting
Problem
The system does not automatically generate the tracking
number and freight charges for a manifested container.
Cause
No records are found for parcel carrier preferences
pertaining to the node.
Resolution
In the Applications Manager, add parcel carrier preferences
to a node, and also enter the node’s shipping account
number associated with the carrier. For more information
about parcel carrier preferences, see the Defining a Node’s
Parcel Carrier Preferences in the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration Guide.

Troubleshooting Tip:

An error message, "YDM00166 - No record found in YFS_
FREIGHT_TERMS table" pops up
Problem
An error message, "No record found in YFS_FREIGHT_
TERMS table" occurs.
Cause
The freight term is not configured for your Enterprise.
Resolution
Configure the freight terms for the Enterprise. For more
information about configuring freight terms, see the
section Creating a Freight Term in the Sterling Logistics
Management: Configuration Guide.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Managing Manifests

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
You cannot add containers to a manifest that is in "Closed"
or "Requested for Closure" status.
Cause
The system does not allow to add containers to a manifest
that is in "Closed" or "Requested for Closure" status.
Resolution
Add containers to a manifest that is in "Closure Failed" or
"Open" status.

Troubleshooting Tip:

An error message "YCS00006 - NMFC data is not set up for
the item" pops up
Problem
An error message, "NMFC data is not set up for the item"
occurs.
Cause
The NMFC code does not exist for the item.
Resolution
Enter the item’s NMFC code. For more information about
defining product item’s classifications, see the Defining a
Product Item’s Classifications in the Catalog Management:
Configuration Guide.

User Guide

Managing Manifests

Troubleshooting Tip:

An error message, "YDM00171 - Shipping Account No not
set up for the carrier" pops up
Problem
An error message, "Shipping Account No not set up for the
carrier" occurs.
Cause
A. The Shipping Account number is not configured for the
Parcel Carrier of the shipping node, OR
B. The Shipping Account number is not configured for the
Carrier of the Buyer.
Resolution
A. If the Freight Terms on the shipment is Prepaid,
configure the Shipping Account number for the Parcel
Carrier of the shipping node. For more information about
defining the parcel carrier preferences of the node, see the
section Defining a Node’s Parcel Carrier Preferences in the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
B. If the Freight Terms on the shipment is Collect,
configure the Billing Account number for the Carrier of the
Buyer. For more information about defining the carrier
preferences of the buyer, see the section Defining Carrier
Preferences Parameters in the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration Guide.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Managing Manifests

Troubleshooting Tip:

An error message, "Class not found exception" pops up
Problem
An error message, "Class not found exception" occurs.
Cause
The ycsbe.jar file is not included in the classpath
environment variable.
Resolution
Include the ycsbe.jar file in the classpath and restart the
Application Server.

Troubleshooting Tip:

Capturing Weight using the Weighing Scale
Problem
Using a weighing scale you cannot capture the package’s
weight.
Cause
The weighing scale is not integrated with the system, the
weighing scale’s power is off, or the weighing scale is
configured incorrectly.
Resolution
Make sure that the weighing scale is integrated with the
system, the weighing scale’s power is on, and the weighing
scale is configured correctly.

User Guide

Managing Manifests

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
You cannot print a FedEx label for a package that is
manifested.
Cause
The printer may not be connected, the printer power or
green light may not be on, or the printer that you want to
print to is selected incorrectly.
Resolution
Make sure your printer is connected, the printer power or
green light is on, and select the correct printer that you
want to use.

Troubleshooting Tip:

Error while Manifesting
Problem
While scanning a package to manifest, an error message
pops up.
Cause
The problem is related to FedEx Powership limitations.
Resolution
See the FedEx Powership guide for a list of error codes and
their descriptions.

6.3.3.1 Capturing the Item’s Serial Number
To capture a serial number for a serial-tracked item, enter or scan the
item’s serial number and component serial numbers. Click Close or press
Alt+O to return to the Add To Manifest screen.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Managing Manifests

Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry window vary

depending on the item scanned.

6.3.4 Viewing the Container’s Contents
You can view the details of all items packed in a container. On the
Container Contents screen you can view the item’s product class, unit of
measure, quantity to be packed, and the actual quantity packed in the
container.
1.

Open the Add To Manifest screen. For more information about
navigating to the Add to Manifest screen, see Section 6.3.1,
"Navigating to the Add to Manifest screen".

In Station, select the station from the drop-down list where you are
manifesting the containers.

In Scan Identifier, enter or scan the container SCM to view the
contents packed in the container.

Click View Contents. The Container Contents screen displays.

6.3.5 Removing Containers from a Manifest
You can remove packed containers from a manifest before closing the
manifest.
To remove packed containers from a manifest:

From the navigation bar, select Outbound > Remove from Manifest.
The Remove From Manifest screen is displayed.

In Station, select the station from where you want to remove the
container from the manifest.

In Scan Identifier, enter or scan the container SCM of the container
you want to remove from the manifest.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Remove from Manifest.

User Guide

Recording Container’s Weight

6.3.6 Closing a Manifest
After all the containers are added to a manifest, you can close the
manifest.
To close a manifest:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Outbound > Manifest Console. The
Manifest search window is displayed.

Enter information in the applicable fields and click Search. The
Manifest List screen is displayed.

Select the check box adjacent the manifest you want to close.

Click Close Manifest. The Close Manifest screen is displayed.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click OK.
Note: If trailer numbers are not associated with a
manifest, the Close Manifest screen is displayed.
Otherwise, the manifest is closed directly.

6.3.7 Recording the Weight of Containers
You can record the weight of a container.
To record the weight of a container:
1.

Open the Add To Manifest screen. For more information about
navigating to the Add to Manifest screen, see Section 6.3.1,
"Navigating to the Add to Manifest screen".

In Station, select the station from the drop-down list where you are
manifesting the containers.

In Scan Identifier, enter or scan the container SCM.

Click Weigh. The Weigh Station screen displays where you can record
the container’s weight.

6.4 Recording Container’s Weight
You can record the weight of containers that belong to TL, LTL, or parcel
shipments using the Weigh Station HSDE screen.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Recording Container’s Weight

This section explains in detail the following use cases:
Q

Navigating to the Weigh Station Screen

Recording the Container’s Weight

Converting an Inventory Container into an Outbound Container

6.4.1 Navigating to the Weigh Station Screen
To access the Weigh Station screen, from the navigation bar, click
Outbound > Weigh Station.

6.4.2 Recording the Container’s Weight
To record the container’s weight:
1.

Open the Weigh Station screen. See Section 6.4.1, "Navigating to the
Weigh Station Screen".

In the Location ID field, select the manifest location.

In the Scan Identifier field, enter or scan the container SCM to check
weight. If the item is serial tracked and the serial number is not
captured during the pick or pack process, capture the item’s serial
number. See Section 6.4.3, "Capturing the Item’s Serial Number".

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Weigh or press Alt+W. The container’s weight is recorded.

6.4.3 Capturing the Item’s Serial Number
To capture the serial number for a serial-tracked item, enter or scan the
item’s serial number and component serial numbers. Click Close or press
Alt+O to return to the Weigh Station screen.

Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry window vary

depending on the item scanned.

User Guide

Recording Container’s Weight

6.4.4 Converting an Inventory Container into an Outbound
Container
Note: LPNs picked for shipments with requested serial
numbers cannot be converted into an outbound container.

To convert an inventory container into an outbound container:
1.

Open the Weigh Station screen. See Section 6.4.1, "Navigating to the
Weigh Station Screen".

In the Location ID field, select the manifest location.

In the Scan Identifier field:
a.

Enter or scan the shipment number.

Enter or scan the inventory container.
If the item is serial tracked, and the serial number is not captured
during the pick or pack process, capture the item’s serial number.
See Section 6.4.3, "Capturing the Item’s Serial Number". Click
Close.
The system automatically converts the inventory container into an
outbound container.

Note: Do not scan the shipment number if you use the
Sterling WMS Task Framework to move inventory LPN.

6.4.5 Creating a Load
You can create a load.
To create a load:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Create Load. The Create
Load screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Save.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Recording Container’s Weight

6.4.6 Searching for Loads
You can search for loads using the Load Console screen. For more
information about load search, see the Sterling Logistics Management:
User Guide.

6.4.7 Adding Holds to a Load
You can add holds to a load to prevent it from being processed by
transactions or to prevent certain modifications to be applied to it.
To add holds to a load:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Load Console. The Load
Search by Summary screen displays. For more information about load
search, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide. Select
the applicable search view from the Views drop-down list.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Load Console
Summary screen. For more information about the Load Console
Summary screen, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.

Check the boxes of the applicable shipment mode and click View
Details. The Load List screen displays. For more information about the
Load List screen, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.

Check the boxes of the applicable load number for which you want to
view the details.

From the action bar, click View Holds. The View Holds screen displays.
For more information about the View Holds screen, see the Sterling
Logistics Management: User Guide.

From the Load Holds inner panel, click Add Holds. The Add Holds
screen displays. For more information about the View Holds screen,
see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.

Click Save.

6.4.8 Adding Shipments to a Load
You can add shipments to an existing load that are shipped to the same
delivery address.

User Guide

Scheduling Dock Appointments

To add shipments to a load:
1.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Load Console
Summary screen. For more information about the Load Console
Summary screen, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.

Check the boxes of the applicable load number for which you want to
view the details.

From the action bar, click View Details. The Load Details screen
displays. For more information about the Load Details screen, see the
Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.

From the action bar, click Add Shipments. The Outbound Shipment
Search By Status screen displays. For more information about
shipment search, see Section 6.1.2, "Searching for Outbound
Shipments".

Enter the applicable search parameters and click Search. The
Shipment Lookup List screen displays. For more information about
the Shipment Lookup List screen, see the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.

Select the check boxes of the applicable shipments that you want to
add to the load.

10. From the action bar, click Add to Load.

6.5 Scheduling Dock Appointments
The dock scheduling functionality allows you to manage appointments for
locations in a warehouse to receive inbound shipments and ship
outbound shipments. The dock scheduling rules enable you to specify
number of days in advance to take a dock appointment. Scheduling of
docks is based on the warehouse calendar associated with the dock and

Performing Outbound Tasks

Scheduling Dock Appointments

takes into consideration the working days, holidays, and shifts that are
valid for receiving or shipping operations. Each dock can have its own
calendar and specify the shifts when it is available.
For more information about dock appointments, see the Sterling
Warehouse Management System: Concepts Guide.
Scheduling dock appointments may involve a combination of any of the
following tasks which are explained in detail in this section:
Q

Searching for a Dock Appointment

Viewing Dock Schedule Details

Taking a New Dock Appointment

Modifying a Dock Appointment

Canceling a Dock Appointment

Managing Docks

Removing a Dock Group Constraint

6.5.1 Searching for a Dock Appointment
You can search for a dock appointment.
To search for a dock appointment:
1.

From the navigation bar, select Inbound > Dock Delivery
Appointments or, select Outbound > Dock Pickup Appointments. The
Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes screen displays.

Enter the search criteria for the dock appointment as applicable. For
more information about the search criteria, see Table 8.47.

Click Search. The Dock Schedule Details screen displays where you
can view the dock appointments for each dock that meets your
search criteria.

6.5.2 Viewing Dock Schedule Details
To view dock schedule details, perform a search for the docks meeting
your desired criteria. See Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock
Appointment" for information about conducting this search. The Dock
Schedule Details screen displays, which provides visibility to the dock

User Guide

Scheduling Dock Appointments

appointment calendar. This screen displays the inbound, outbound, and
both inbound and outbound docks with their:
Q

Available time slots for creating new appointments.

Unavailable time slots due to calendar constraints.

Unavailable time slots due to appointments already taken.

For more information about the Dock Schedule Details screen, see
Table 8–78.

6.5.3 Taking a New Dock Appointment
You can take a new dock appointment.
To take a new dock appointment:
1.

Perform a search for the docks meeting your desired criteria. See
Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock Appointment" for information
about conducting this search.

In the Dock Schedule Details screen, Dock Availability panel, select
the desired free time slot which is indicated by the block shaded in
grey;
. The Dock Appointment screen displays.

Enter the applicable information in the Appointment Details panel.

Click Save.
For specific information about the field requirements for taking a dock
appointment, see Table 8–80.

6.5.4 Modifying a Dock Appointment
You can modify a dock appointment.
To modify a dock appointment:
1.

Perform a search for the docks meeting your desired criteria. See
Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock Appointment" for information
about conducting this search.

In the Dock Schedule Details screen, Dock Availability panel, select
the time slot of the appointment you want to modify which is
indicated by clicking one of these two shaded blocks:
or
.

Enter the appointment details in the Appointment Details panel.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Scheduling Dock Appointments

Click Save.
For specific information about the field requirements when modifying
a dock appointment, see Table 8–80.
Note: In the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation Applications
Manager when performing the task of Defining the Node’s
Attributes, if the Dock Schedules are Managed By field is set
to Sterling TMS, the Dock Schedule Details Screen is non-editable. For more information about Dock Schedule, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.

6.5.5 Canceling a Dock Appointment
You can cancel a dock appointment.
To cancel a dock appointment:
1.

Perform a search for the docks meeting your desired criteria. See
Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock Appointment" for information
about conducting this search.

In the Dock Schedule Details screen, Dock Availability panel, select
the dock appointment that you want to delete which is indicated by
clicking this shaded block:
. The Dock Appointment screen
displays.

Click Cancel.

6.5.6 Managing Docks
You can enter additional constraints for the maximum number of
appointments that can be taken for a group of docks in the Dock Group
Details screen.
To enter additional constraints for a group of docks:

Perform a search for the docks meeting your desired criteria. See
Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock Appointment" for information
about conducting this search.

In the Dock Schedule Details screen, Dock Availability panel, select
Manage Dock Groups action. The Dock Group Details screen displays.

User Guide

Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks

Enter the details in the Dock Group Max No. of Appointments.

Click Save to save the maximum number of dock group appointment
constraints.
For more information about the field requirements for managing
docks, see Table 8–82.

6.5.7 Removing a Dock Group Constraint
You can remove a dock appointment constraint.
To remove a dock appointment constraint:
1.

Perform a search for the docks meeting your desired criteria. See
Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock Appointment" for information
about conducting this search.

In the Dock Schedule Details screen, Dock Availability panel, select
Manage Dock Group action. The Dock Group Details screen displays.

Check the boxes of the dock appointment constraints you want to
remove.

From the Dock Group Max No. of Appointments action bar, click
Remove.

6.6 Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks
The Resource Planning tool provides warehouses with the ability to plan
for expected workload and determine the number of resources required
to complete the activity. Having visibility to expected resources enables a
warehouse to accurately plan for overtime, temporary staffing, and so
forth, thus optimizing the resource costs.
For more information about resource planning, see the Sterling
Warehouse Management System: Concepts Guide.
Resource Planning may involve a combination of the following tasks
which are explained in detail in this section:
Q

Defining Standard Capacity

Viewing Capacity Details
–

Transferring Resources Temporarily

Performing Outbound Tasks

Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks

–
Q

Assigning Shifts

Viewing Demand Details
–

Performing a Demand Search

–

Moving Shipments

Confirming a Plan

6.6.1 Defining Standard Capacity
You can define the standard capacity for each resource pool.
To define the standard capacity for resource pools:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Define Standard
Capacity. The Defining Standard Capacity screen displays.

Select the appropriate resource pool and click Standard Capacity. The
Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Save.

6.6.2 Viewing Capacity Details
You can view the capacity details for various resource pools.
To view the capacity details for various resource pools:

From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Resource Planning. The
Resource Planning Capacity Search screen displays.

In the start date field, enter the date for which you want to begin
planning resources.

In the #of days field, enter the total number of days for which you
want to plan resources.

Next to the Show Demand and Capacity Data in field, choose the unit
of measure in which you want the capacity and demand to be
displayed.

Check the box "Consider Pending Task", if you want to consider the
pending tasks to be completed as a backlog for the chosen date.

Click Search. The Resource Planning Screen displays.

User Guide

Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks

Within the Plan Resources Panel, when a capacity is chosen for a
resource pool on a specific date, the Capacity Details screen displays.

6.6.2.1 Transferring Resources Temporarily
Use the Capacity Details screen to move resources between various
resource pools.
To move resources between resource pools:
1.

Open the Capacity Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Capacity Details screen, see Section 6.6.2, "Viewing
Capacity Details".

Within the Other Resource Pools panel, choose the resources you
want to move and click Pull Resources. The Transfer Resources
Screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Save.

6.6.2.2 Assigning Shifts
You can assign shifts to resources within their resource pools.
To assign shifts to resources within resource pools:
1.

Open the Capacity Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Capacity Details screen, see Section 6.6.2, "Viewing
Capacity Details".

Within the Member Resources panel, choose the resource you want to
assign to the shifts and click Assign Shifts. The Assign Shifts Screen
displays.

Click
fields.

Click Save.

to add new shifts and enter information in the applicable

6.6.3 Viewing Demand Details
You can view the resource demand details.
To view the resource demand details:

Performing Outbound Tasks

Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks

From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Resource Planning. The
Resource Planning Capacity Search screen displays.

In the start date field, enter the date for which you want to begin
planning resources.

In the # of days field, enter the total number of days for which you
want to plan resources.

Next to the Show Demand and Capacity Data in field, choose the unit
of measure in which you want the capacity and demand to be
displayed.

Check the box "Consider Pending Task", if you want to consider the
pending task to be completed as a backlog for the chosen date.

Click Search. The Resource Planning Screen displays.

Choose the demand for a selected date against an appropriate
resource pool, the Demand Details screen displays.

6.6.3.1 Performing a Demand Search
You can search for demands based on the specified criteria.
To search for demand restricted to a constraint:
1.

Open the Demand Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Demand Details screen, see Section 6.6.3, "Viewing
Demand Details".

Within the Demand panel, enter information in the appropriate fields
to restrict the search.

Click Search. The demand break-up by the appropriate choice of
fields displays.

6.6.3.2 Moving Shipments
You can move shipments to an appropriate date.
To move shipments to a later date:

Click

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Move.

User Guide

against the appropriate date. The Move screen displays.

Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks

6.6.4 Confirming a Plan
You can confirm a plan for resources.
To confirm the plan:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Resource Planning. The
Resource Planning Capacity Search screen displays.

In the start date field, enter the date for which you want to begin
planning resources.

In the # of days field, enter the total number of days for which you
want to plan resources.

Next to the Show Demand and Capacity Data in field, choose the unit
of measure in which you want the capacity and demand to be
displayed.

Check the box "Consider Pending Task", if you want to consider the
pending tasks to be completed as a backlog for the chosen date.

Click Search. The Resource Planning Screen displays.

Click on the View Details action. The Planning Summary screen
displays.

Click Confirm Plan.

Performing Outbound Tasks

Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks

User Guide

7
Managing Tasks
You can use the Task Console to manage paper-based tasks such as pick
and count. The Task Console provides task-related information to node
users.
This chapter explains the various task-related activities and how you can
perform them. It covers the following use cases:
Q

Searching for Tasks

Confirming a Batch

Recording Count

Manually Logging Productivity

Searching for Productivity Logs

Deriving Labor Standards

Viewing User Time Sheet

7.1 Searching for Tasks
The following Task Search screens let you search for tasks based on
different criteria:
Q

Task Search By Task Type screen

Task Search By Zone screen

Task Search By Inventory screen

Task Search By Reference screen

Task Search By Exception screen

Managing Tasks

Searching for Tasks

Task Search By Date screen

Task Search By At Risk Tasks screen

To navigate to the search screens:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Task > Task Console. Initially, the
Task Search By Task Type screen displays. Select the applicable
search view from the Views drop-down list.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Task List screen.

7.1.1 Viewing Task Details
You can view task details using the Task Detail screen.
To view task details:
1.

From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.

From the action bar, click View Details. The Task Detail screen
displays.

7.1.2 Assigning Tasks to a User
You can manually assign tasks to a user using the Assign to User screen.
To assign tasks to a user:
1.

From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.

From the action bar, click Assign To User. The Assign to User screen
displays.

In Assign To User, enter the identifier of the user to whom you want
to assign the tasks.

Click Ok.

7.1.3 Reprioritizing Tasks
You can manually reprioritize tasks using the Reprioritize screen.
To reprioritize tasks:

User Guide

Searching for Tasks

From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.

From the action bar, click Reprioritize. The Reprioritize screen
displays.

Select the appropriate value from the Task Priority drop-down list.

Click Ok.

7.1.4 Putting Tasks on Hold
You can manually put tasks on hold using the Hold Reason screen.
To put tasks on hold:
1.

From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.

From the action bar, click Hold. The Hold Reason screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Ok.

7.1.5 Releasing a Task
You can manually release tasks that are put on hold.
To release a task that is put on hold:
1.

From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.

From the action bar, click Release.

7.1.6 Canceling a Task
You can cancel tasks using the Cancel action in the Task List screen. You
can use the Cancel Task Reason screen to enter a reason for cancelling a
task.
To cancel a task:
1.

From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.

Managing Tasks

Recording Count

From the action bar, click Cancel. The Cancel Task Reason screen
displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Ok.

7.2 Confirming a Batch
You can confirm a batch after completing the paper-based tasks.
To confirm a batch:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Task > Confirm Batch. The Confirm
Batch screen displays.

In Batch #, enter the batch number associated with the task you
want to complete.

In Total Minutes Taken to Complete Tasks, enter the total time taken
to complete the task.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Confirm to complete the paper-based task.

Click Confirm with Details to complete the task with more detailed
information. The Complete Batch screen displays.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Save to confirm the batch.

7.3 Recording Count
You can record the results of paper-based count using the Recording
Count Results screen.
To record count results:

100

From the navigation bar, choose Task > Record Count. The Recording
Count Results screen displays.

In Task ID, enter the identifier of the task associated with the count
task you want to complete.

In Location, enter the location where you performed the count.

User Guide

Searching for Productivity Logs

Click Proceed. The Record Count Result Details screen displays.

In the Items panel, enter the quantity of inventory you counted.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Save.

7.4 Manually Logging Productivity
You can manually log productivity for a completed task that is associated
with a productivity type.
To manually log productivity:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Task > Log Productivity. The Log
Productivity screen displays.

In Productivity Type, enter the productivity type against which you
want to log productivity.
You cannot manually log productivity for productivity types that are
associated with certain task types. Such task types are associated
with tasks and are suggested to a user. For example, putaway,
retrieval, and outbound picking.

In User, enter the node user’s identifier.

Enter other information as applicable.

Click Create Productivity. The Productivity Details screen displays.

In Productivity Metrics panel, enter the number of cases.

Enter other information in the applicable fields.

Click Save.

7.5 Searching for Productivity Logs
The Productivity Search By Productivity Type screen lets you search for
productivity logs.

To navigate to the search screen:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Task > Productivity Console. The
Productivity Search By Productivity Type screen displays.

Managing Tasks

101

Deriving Labor Standards

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Productivity List
screen.

7.5.1 Viewing Productivity Log Records
You can view productivity type details using the Productivity Details
screen.
To view productivity type details:
1.

From the Productivity List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable productivity log records.

From the action bar, click View Details. The Productivity Details
screen displays. For more information about logging productivity
details, see Section 7.4, "Manually Logging Productivity".

7.5.2 Deleting a Productivity Log
To manually delete a productivity type:
1.

From the Productivity List screen, select the check boxes of the
productivity types you want to delete.

From the action bar, click Delete.

7.6 Deriving Labor Standards
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation provides the ability to automatically
derive labor standards or Standard Allowable Minutes (SAM) based on
the historical data of tasks or activities performed by warehouse users
over a period of time. The Derive Labor Standards console allows you to
derive labor standards for one activity at a specified time. You can
identify this activity by productivity characteristics defined for a
productivity type associated with the task.
This chapter provides the navigation path to the Derive Labor Standards
screens. Deriving Labor Standards involves the following tasks:

102

Activities Search by Date Range

Viewing Productivity Summary

Derive Labor Standards

User Guide

Viewing User Time Sheet

7.6.1 Activities Search by Date Range
You can search for activities performed during the selected date range.
To search for activities:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Task > Derive Labor Standards. The
Activities Search By Date Range screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Productivity Type List
screen.

7.6.2 Viewing Productivity Summary
You can view productivity summary.
To view productivity summary:
1.

From the navigation bar, choose Task > Derive Labor Standards. The
Activities Search By Date Range screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The Productivity Type List screen displays.

Select the appropriate productivity type from the list and click View
Summary. The Productivity Summary screen displays.

7.6.3 Derive Labor Standards
You can derive labor standards for a productivity type.
To derive labor standards:
1.

From the Productivity Summary screen, choose the appropriate user
name and click Compute SAM. The Derive Labor Standards screen
displays.

Enter SAM values in the applicable fields.

Click Save.

7.7 Viewing User Time Sheet
The Time Sheet screen allows you to view activities performed by node
users, and utilization for a node user, based on a date range.

Managing Tasks

103

Viewing User Time Sheet

To view the User Time Sheet:

104

From the navigation bar, choose Task > User Time Sheet. The User
Time Sheet Search By User screen displays.

Enter information in the applicable fields.

Click Search. The search results display in the Time Sheet screen.

User Guide

Part II
Warehouse Management System Screen
Reference
The chapters in this section provide screen and field descriptions for all
Warehouse Management System screens.
This section contains the following chapters:
Q

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

Receipt Console Screens

Create Inbound Shipment Screens

Receive Console Screens

Inspect Inbound Receipts Screens

Inspect Return Receipts Screens

Create Move Request Screens

Create Count Request Screens

Count Console Screens

Move Request Console Screens

Location Inventory Console Screens

Adjust Location Inventory Screens

Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens

Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens

Receipt Adjustment Screens

Create Work Order Screens

105

106

Work Order Console Screens

Value-Added Services Station Screens

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

Create Outbound Shipment Screens

Wave Console Screens

Create Wave Screens

Pack Station Screens

Manifest Console Screens

Create Load Screens

Load Console Screens

Add To Manifest Screens

Remove From Manifest Screens

Weigh Station Screens

Location Inventory Audit Console Screens

Task Console Screens

Confirm Batch Screens

Record Count Screens

Log Productivity Screens

Productivity Console Screens

Derive Labor Standards Screens

User Time Sheet Screens

Sterling WMS Prints

Sterling WMS Reports

Using Report Studio

User Guide

8
Inbound Shipment Console Screens
This chapter provides the screen and field descriptions for all Inbound
Shipment Console screens.

8.1 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status
Use this screen to search for inbound order shipments that fall under a
specified status.
Table 8–1 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status
Fields
Document Type

Select the appropriate document type for which you
want to search.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to search.

Across Enterprises

Select this option to search across all enterprises.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number for which you want to
search, if applicable.

PO #

Enter the purchase order number for which you want
to search, if applicable.

Customer PO#

Enter the customer’s purchase order number for which
you want to search, if applicable.

Plan #

Enter the plan number of the inbound shipment for
which you are searching, if applicable.

Origin Node

Enter the origin node under which you want to search
for inbound shipments, if applicable.

Destination Node

Enter the destination node under which you want to
search for inbound shipments, if applicable.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

107

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date

Table 8–1

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status

Fields
Status

Select the status range of the inbound shipments for
which you want to search, if applicable.

Include Closed
Shipments

Select this if you want to search for inbound
shipments that have been closed, as well as those that
are open.

Held Shipments

Check this box if you want to search for inbound
shipments that are held.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Inbound Order Shipment List screen displays as a result of your
inbound shipment search by status.

8.2 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date
Use this screen to search for inbound order shipments that fall within a
particular date range.
Table 8–2

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date

Fields

108

Document Type

Select the appropriate document type for which you
want to search.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to search.

Across Enterprises

Select this option to search across all enterprises.

Carrier/Service

Select the carrier or service for which you are
searching, if applicable.

Status

Select the shipment status for which you are
searching, if applicable

User Guide

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier

Table 8–2 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date
Fields
Enter Shipment Dates

Select this check box to enter the shipment date range
for which you want to search.

Enter Delivery Dates

Select this check box to enter the delivery date range
for which you want to search.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Inbound Order Shipment List screen displays as a result of your
inbound shipment search by date.

8.3 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier
Use this screen to search for inbound order shipments that belong to a
specific carrier.
Table 8–3 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier
Fields
Document Type

Select the appropriate document type for which you
want to search.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to search.

Across Enterprises

Select this option to search across all enterprises.

Shipment Mode

Select the shipment mode of transportation for which
you want to search, if applicable

Carrier/Service

Select the carrier or service for which you want to
search, if applicable.

BOL #

Enter the bill of lading number for which you want to
search, if applicable.

Pro #

Enter the Pro number for which you want to search, if
applicable.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

109

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item

Table 8–3

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier

Fields
Trailer #

Enter the trailer number for which you want to search,
if applicable.

Status

Select the shipment status for which you want to
search, if applicable.

Requires Routing

Select this check box if the shipment requires dynamic
routing.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Inbound Order Shipment List screen displays as a result of your
inbound shipment search by carrier.

8.4 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item
Use this screen to search for inbound order shipments based on the item
information such as product class, unit of measure, item ID and so on.
Table 8–4

Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item

Fields
Document Type

Select the appropriate document type for which you
want to search.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to search.

Across Enterprises

Select this option to search across all enterprises.

Item ID

Enter the item ID of the item for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Click

Product Class

110

User Guide

to find the specific item you want to use.

Select the item’s product class for which you want to
search, if applicable.

Inbound Order Shipment List

Table 8–4 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item
Fields
Unit Of Measure

Select the item’s unit of measure for which you want
to search, if applicable.

Buyer

Enter the buyer of the shipment for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Click

use.

Seller

to find the specific buyer you want to

Enter the seller of the shipment for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Click

use.

to find the specific seller you want to

Status

Select the shipment status for which you want to
search, if applicable.

Include Closed
Shipments

Select this check box to search for closed shipments, if
applicable.

Has Hazardous Items

Select check box to search for inbound shipments that
contain hazardous items.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Inbound Order Shipment List screen displays as a result of your
inbound shipment search by item.

8.5 Inbound Order Shipment List
The Inbound Order Shipment List window displays the results of an
inbound order shipment search. You can perform actions on a single
shipment or multiple shipments by selecting the check boxes next to the
shipments you want to perform an action on and then choosing the
applicable action from the action bar.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

111

Inbound Order Shipment List

Table 8–5

Inbound Order Shipment List

Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen where you can view the shipment
details.

Start Receipt

This action takes you to the Start Receipt screen
where you can create a receipt to receive the
shipment.

Receive

This action takes you to the Receive screen where you
can enter the items that you received in to a

warehouse, such as a pallet, case, or SKU.

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the shipment’s documents or labels.

Delete Shipment

This action allows you to delete the selected
shipments.

Add To Delivery Plan

This action takes you to the Add Delivery Plan screen
where you can add shipments to a delivery plan.

Create Pick List

This action takes you to the Create Picklist screen
where you can create a picklist for the selected
shipments, if applicable.

Report/Record receipt

This action takes you to the Receive (Report or Record
Receipt) screen where you can record paper-based
receipt details.

View Holds

This action takes you to the View Holds screen where
you can view the holds applied to the shipment.

Fields
Shipment #

The shipment number. Click this link to go to the
Inbound Order Shipment Details screen. Click this link
to view the shipment details.

Status

The current status of the shipment.

Expected Ship Date

The date the shipment is expected to ship.

Actual Ship Date

The actual date of shipment.

Expected Delivery Date The date the shipment is expected to be delivered.

112

Actual Delivery Date

The actual date the shipment was delivered.

Origin

The shipment’s origin node.

User Guide

Inbound Order Shipment Details

Table 8–5 Inbound Order Shipment List
Destination

The shipment’s destination node.

Mode

The mode of transportation used to ship the shipment.

8.6 Inbound Order Shipment Details
The Inbound Order Shipment Details screen provides various information
about a single shipment. The actions that can be performed in the
Inbound Order Shipment Details screen are explained in the following
tables.
Table 8–6 Inbound Order Shipment Details
View Icons
Loads - This icon takes you to the Loads screen

where you can view the loads that are carrying
the shipment.

Containers - This icon takes you to the Containers
screen where you can view all packed containers

included in the shipment.

Instructions - This icon takes you to the Inbound
Order Shipment Instructions screen where you can
view special instructions pertaining to an inbound

shipment, such as handling instructions.

Shipment Audits - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Audits screen where you can view audit trail
for shipment modifications.
Shipment Dates - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Dates screen where you can modify

inbound shipment dates and delivery dates for
the selected shipment.
Alerts - This icon takes you to the Shipment Alerts
screen where you can view the alerts for the

selected shipments.

Receiving Discrepancies - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Receipt Discrepancy screen where you can

view discrepancies, if any, for the received
shipment. Valid values include Over Receipt,
Under Receipt, and Damaged Receipt.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

113

Inbound Order Shipment Details

Table 8–6

Inbound Order Shipment Details
Receipts - This icon takes you to the Receipts screen
where you can view a list of shipment receipts.
Activity Demand - This icon takes you to the Activity
Demand screen where you can view the shipment’s

activity demand.

Additional Attributes - This icon takes you to the
Additional Attributes screen where you can view

additional attributes for a shipment.
Actions
Record Container
Details

This action takes you to the Record Container Details
screen where you can record container details for a
container that is to be received.

Confirm Shipment

This action allows you to confirm the selected
shipment.

Start Receipt

This action takes you to the Start Receipt screen
where you can create a receipt to receive the
shipment.

Receive

This action takes you to the Receive screen where you
can enter the items that you received in a

warehouse, such as a pallet, case, or SKU.

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the shipment’s documents or labels.

Create Pick List

This action takes you to the Create Picklist screen
where you can create a picklist for the selected
shipments, if applicable.

Create Alert

This action takes you to the Create Alerts screen
where you can alerts for the selected shipment.

Report/Record Receipt

This action takes you to the Receive (Report or Record
Receipt) screen where you can record paper-based
receipt details.

View Holds

This action takes you to the View Holds screen where
you can view the holds applied to the shipment.

Fields

114

Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

User Guide

Inbound Order Shipment Details

Table 8–6 Inbound Order Shipment Details
Plan #

The number of the delivery plan with which the
inbound shipment is associated, if applicable.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier.

Ship Node

The node from which the inbound shipment ships.

Receiving Node

The node that is receiving the shipment.

Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits. Click the
icon to go to
the View Holds screen where you can view holds that
are applied to the inbound shipment.

PO #

The purchase order number associated with the
shipment.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the shipment contains any hazardous item.

Break Bulk Node

This field displays only if the shipment belongs to a
break bulk load.
The break bulk node that is receiving the break bulk
load displays.

Table 8–7 Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen, Ship From
The address from which the shipment is shipped.
Click
to go to the Modify Address screen where you can change the ship
from address.
Table 8–8 Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen, Ship To
The address to which the shipment is shipped.
Click
to go to the Modify Address screen where you can change the ship to
address.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

115

Inbound Order Shipment Details

Table 8–9

Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen, Totals

Fields
Weight

The total weight of the inbound shipment. This field
can be modified.

Volume

The total volume of the inbound shipment. This field
can be modified.

No. of Containers

The number of packed containers in an inbound
shipment.

Table 8–10 Inbound Order Shipment Details, Carrier Info
Fields
Delivery Method

The delivery method for the shipment.

Ship Mode

Select the mode of transportation for the shipment.
Values include 'LTL', 'TL', and 'PARCEL’.

Carrier/Service

Select the carrier service for the outbound shipment.

Trailer #

Enter the outbound shipment’s trailer number.

BOL #

Enter the outbound shipment’s bill of lading number.

Seal #

Enter the outbound shipment’s seal number.

Pro #

Enter the PRO number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment.

Routing Source

Indicates if routing was pre-assigned by the system or
specified through an external system.

Load #

The outbound shipment’s load number.

Routing Error Code

The routing error code automatically displays by the
system, if applicable.

Requested Carrier
Service

The requested carrier service for the outbound
shipment.

Table 8–11 Inbound Order Shipment Details, Charges
View Icon
Charges - This icon takes you to the Charges screen
where you can enter or modify additional charges

imposed to the shipment or container.

116

User Guide

Inbound Order Shipment Details

Table 8–11

Inbound Order Shipment Details, Charges

Fields
Carrier Account #

Indicates the carrier account number for the
shipment.

Freight Terms

Indicates the freight terms used for the shipment.
Valid values include COLLECT, PREPAID, TP-COLLECT,
and TP-PREPAID.

COD Pay Method

Select the COD payment type for the carrier.

Estimated Shipment
Charges

The estimated charge for shipping the outbound
shipment.

Actual Shipment
Charges

The actual charge for shipping the outbound shipment.

Freight Charge

The charge applied by the carrier for shipping the
outbound shipment.

Table 8–12

Shipment Details, Shipment Lines

Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen where you can view the shipment line
attributes for the selected shipments.

Add Release

This action allows you to add an order release to the
shipment. For more information, see the Sterling
Distributed Order Management: User Guide.

Remove Line

This action enables you to remove the selected
shipment lines from the shipment.

Fields
Shipment Line #

Enter the outbound shipment line number.
Click this link to go to the Shipment Line Details
screen and view the shipment line attributes for the
selected shipment line number.

PO #

The purchase order number to which the inbound
shipment line belongs.

Line #

The inbound shipment line number.

Release #

The order release number to which the inbound
shipment line belongs.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

117

Modify Address

Table 8–12 Shipment Details, Shipment Lines
Item ID

The inbound shipment line item’s item identifier.

Description

The inbound shipment line item’s description.

The inbound shipment line item’s product class.

UOM

The inbound shipment line item’s unit of measure.

Expected Serial #

The expected serial number for the order.
Editable if the order is not available on the system.

Mark For

The mark for address associated with the item.

Quantity

The shipment line’s expected quantity.
If a receipt is made against the order, quantity is
displayed as 0.

Received Quantity

Indicates the quantity received for the item in this
shipment. If the receipt is against an order, it indicates
the quantity received for the order.

Important: To receive inventory for a Level 1 node,
choose the Report/Record Receipt button.

8.7 Modify Address
Use this screen to modify the address.

Table 8–13 Shipment Address Details
Field

118

First Name

The first name of the person receiving the shipment.

Middle Name

The middle name of the person receiving the
shipment.

Last Name

The surname of the person receiving the shipment.

Company

The name of the company where the shipment is sent.

Day Time Phone

The daytime phone number for the person receiving
the shipment.

User Guide

Charges

Table 8–13

Shipment Address Details

Field
Evening Phone

The evening phone number for the person receiving
the shipment.

Mobile Phone

The mobile phone number for the person receiving the
shipment.

Fax

The facsimile number for the person receiving the
shipment.

E-Mail

The electronic mailing address for the person receiving
the shipment.

Address Line 1

The first line of the mailing address for the shipment.

Address Line 2

The second line of the mailing address for the
shipment.

Address Line 3

The third line of the mailing address for the shipment.

Address Line 4

The fourth line of the mailing address for the
shipment.

Address Line 5

The fifth line of the mailing address for the shipment.

Address Line 6

The sixth line of the mailing address for the shipment.

City

The city of the mailing address for the shipment.

State

The state of the mailing address for the shipment.

Postal Code

The postal code of the mailing address for the
shipment.

Country

The country of the mailing address for the shipment.

8.8 Charges
This screen provides visibility to any additional charges pertaining to the
inbound shipment.
Table 8–14

Charges Screen, Shipment

Fields
Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

119

Shipment Line Details

Table 8–14 Charges Screen, Shipment
Fields
Plan #

The number of the delivery plan with which the
inbound shipment is associated, if applicable.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier.

Ship Node

The node from which the inbound shipment ships.

Destination

The inbound order’s shipment destination.

Status

The inbound shipment status.

Order #

The order associated with the shipment.

Table 8–15 Charges Screen, Shipment Charges
Fields
Charge
Category/Charge
Name

The name of the additional inbound shipment charge.

Estimated Charge

The estimated additional charge for the inbound
shipment.

Actual Charge

The actual additional inbound shipment charge.

Table 8–16 Charges, Container Charges
Fields
Container #

The container number.

Actual Freight Charge

The carrier’s freight charge for shipping the container.

8.9 Shipment Line Details
This screen provides visibility to the shipment line details for the selected
shipment line number.

120

User Guide

Shipment Line Details

Table 8–17

Shipment Line Details Screen, Shipment Line

Fields
Shipment Line #

The shipment line number.

Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

PO #

The purchase order number to which the inbound
shipment line belongs.

Order Line #

The order line number to which the inbound shipment
line belongs.

Release #

The order release number to which the inbound
shipment line belongs.

Item ID

The inbound shipment line item’s item ID.

Description

Description of the item.

Is Hazardous Item

Displays ’Y’ if the item is a hazardous item, or 'N' if it
is not a hazardous item.

Product Class

The inbound shipment line item’s product class.

Unit of Measure

The inbound shipment line item’s unit of measure.

Expected Serial #

The serial number expected on the order.

Quantity

The shipment line’s expected quantity.
If a receipt is made against an order, quantity is
displayed as 0.

Received Quantity

Indicates the quantity received for the item in this
shipment. If the receipt is against an order, it indicates
the quantity received for the order.

Original Qty

Indicates the original quantity on the order for the
item.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

121

Loads

Table 8–18 Shipment Line Details Screen, Line Attributes
Fields
Segment Type

The segment type of the item. A segment type
indicates an inventory category. Typical values are
MTC (Made To Customer) or MTO (Made To Order).

Segment

The segment number of the item. A segment holds
either the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.

COO

The country of origin.

FIFO #

FIFO number is a date-based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order for which stock arrived at
the node. This is used to send items in the same order
in which they were received into the warehouse (First
In - First Out).

Net Weight

The net weight of the item.

Net Weight UOM

The unit of measure used for the net weight.

Wave #

The wave number.

Customer PO #

The customer purchase order number.

Department Code

The department code associated with the shipment
line.

8.10 Loads
This screen helps you view loads carrying the shipments.
Table 8–19 Loads Screen, Shipment
Fields

122

Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

User Guide

Ship Node Detail

Table 8–19

Loads Screen, Shipment

Fields
Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

Ship Node

The node from which the inbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.

Destination

The inbound order’s shipment destination.

Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.

PO #

The inbound shipment purchase order number.

Table 8–20

Loads Screen, Loads

Actions
View Details

This action allows you to view the details of the load.
For more information, see the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.

Fields
Load #

The load number to which the inbound shipment
belongs.

Load Type

The load type as defined by your business practices.

Carrier/Service

The Carrier or Carrier service that is transporting the
load.

Origin

The location of the load’s origin.

Destination

The location of the load’s destination.

Status

The load status.

8.11 Ship Node Detail
This screen provides visibility to the ship node details for the shipment.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

123

Organization Details

Table 8–21 Ship Node Detail Screen, Ship Node
Fields
Ship Node

The ship node associated with the shipment.

Description

A brief description of the ship node.

Interface

The interface that the node uses to communicate with
the Sterling WMS.

Parent Organization

The identifier of the organization that owns the ship
node.

Parent Organization
Name

The name of the organization that owns the ship node.

Identified By Parent As

The node identifier as it is seen by the parent
organization.

GLN

The Global Location Number used to identify the ship
node as a legal entity.

Table 8–22 Ship Node Detail Screen, Ship Node Address
The street address of the ship node sending the shipment.
Table 8–23 Ship Node Detail Screen, Contact Address
The street address for the contact person at the ship node.

8.12 Organization Details
This screen provides visibility to an organization’s details.
Table 8–24 Organization Details
Field

Description

Organization Information

124

Organization Code

The code that identifies the organization.

Organization Name

The name of the organization.

User Guide

Organization Primary Contact Address Details

Table 8–24

Organization Details

Field

Description

DUNS Number

The unique nine-digit sequence recognized as the
universal standard for identifying and keeping track of
over 92 million businesses worldwide. The Dun and
Bradstreet (D&B) unique nine-digit identification
sequence used to identify and keep track of single
business entity. The Sterling WMS does not associate
any logic with the DUNS number.

Account Number With
Hub

If the organization is not the Hub, this is the account
number that the organization has with the Hub
organization.

Primary Enterprise

The primary enterprise of the organization.

Primary URL

Enter the URL of the organization’s Internet address, if
applicable.

Primary Contact Address
This inner panel displays the current street address for the primary contact for
this organization. Click
to view the Primary Contact Address Details. For
more information about the Primary Contact Address Details window, see
Organization Primary Contact Address Details.
Corporate Address
This inner panel displays the current corporate street address for this
organization. Click
to view the Corporate Address Details. For more
information about the Corporate Address Details window, see Organization
Corporate Address Details.

8.13 Organization Primary Contact Address
Details
This screen provides visibility to the address details for an organization's
primary contact.
Table 8–25

Primary Contact Address Details

Field

Description

First Name

The first name of the organization’s primary contact.

Middle Name

The middle name of the organization’s primary
contact.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

125

Organization Primary Contact Address Details

Table 8–25 Primary Contact Address Details

126

Field

Description

Last Name

The surname of the organization’s primary contact.

Company

The name of the company where the organization’s
primary contact can be reached.

Day Time Phone

The phone number where the organization's primary
contact can be reached.

Evening Phone

The phone number where the organization's primary
contact can be reached in the evening.

Mobile Phone

The mobile phone number for the organization's
primary contact

Fax

The facsimile number for the organization's primary
contact.

E-Mail

The electronic mailing address for the organization's
primary contact.

Address Line 1

The first line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.

Address Line 2

The second line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.

Address Line 3

The third line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.

Address Line 4

The fourth line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.

Address Line 5

The fifth line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.

Address Line 6

The sixth line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.

City

The city for the street address for the organization's
primary contact.

State

The state for the street address for the organization's
primary contact.

Postal Code

The postal code for the street address for the
organization's primary contact.

Country

The country for the street address for the
organization's primary contact.

User Guide

Organization Corporate Address Details

8.14 Organization Corporate Address Details
This screen provides visibility to the corporate address details for an
organization.
Table 8–26

Corporate Address Details

Field

Description

First Name

The first name of the person you are addressing at the
organization's corporate site.

Middle Name

The middle name of the person you are addressing at
the organization's corporate site.

Last Name

The surname name of the person you are addressing
at the organization's corporate site.

Company

The organization's corporate name.

Day Time Phone

The day-time phone number for the person you are
contacting at the organization's corporate site.

Evening Phone

The evening phone number for the person you are
contacting at the organization's corporate site.

Mobile Phone

The mobile phone number for the person you are
contacting at the organization's corporate site.

Fax

The facsimile number for the person you are
contacting at the organization's corporate site.

E-Mail

The electronic mailing address for the person you are
contacting at the organization's corporate site.

Address Line 1

The first line of the organization's corporate street
address.

Address Line 2

The second line of the organization's corporate street
address.

Address Line 3

The third line of the organization's corporate street
address.

Address Line 4

The fourth line of the organization's corporate street
address.

Address Line 5

The fifth line of the organization's corporate street
address.

Address Line 6

The sixth line of the organization's corporate street
address.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

127

Containers

Table 8–26 Corporate Address Details
Field

Description

City

The city of the of the organization's corporate street
address.

State

The state of the of the organization's corporate street
address.

Postal Code

The postal code of the of the organization's corporate
street address.

Country

The country of the of the organization's corporate
street address.

8.15 Containers
This screen provides visibility to packed containers included in an
inbound shipment.
Table 8–27 Shipment Containers Screen, Shipment
Fields

128

Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Destination

The inbound order’s shipment destination.

User Guide

Inbound Order Shipment Instructions

Table 8–27

Shipment Containers Screen, Shipment

Fields
Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.

PO #

The inbound shipment purchase order number.

Table 8–28

Shipment Containers Screen, Containers

Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view the container details.

Delete Containers

This action takes you to the Delete Container screen
where you can remove the container from the
shipment.

Fields
Container #

The container number.

Tracking #

The container’s tracking number used to track the
status and location of the container.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking.

Net Weight

The weight of the container’s content.

Net Weight UOM

The net weight unit of measure associated with the
shipment.

Gross Weight

The weight of the container plus its contents.

Gross Weight UOM

The unit of measure used for the gross weight.

Freight Charge

The charge applied by the Carrier for shipping the
container.

Received

Indicates whether the shipment was received.

8.16 Inbound Order Shipment Instructions
This screen provides visibility to special instructions for an inbound
shipment, such as handling instructions.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

129

Inbound Order Shipment Instructions

Table 8–29 Inbound Order Shipment Instructions Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Receiving Node

The node where the inbound shipment is received.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates whether or not the shipment contains
hazardous items.

Table 8–30 Inbound Order Shipment Instructions Screen, Instructions
Actions
Delete Instruction
Fields

130

User Guide

This action allows you to delete the selected
instructions.

Shipment Status Audits

Table 8–30

Inbound Order Shipment Instructions Screen, Instructions

Instruction Type

The type of instruction, such as Gift, Pick, Pack, Ship,
or Other. This field can be modified.

Text

The specific instructions to be performed on the order
line. This field can be modified.

8.17 Shipment Status Audits
This screen provides visibility to status modification details performed
against an inbound shipment.
Table 8–31

Shipment Status Audits, Shipment

Fields
Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Receiving Node

The node where the inbound shipment is received.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
view the shipment’s status audits.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates whether or not the shipment contains
hazardous items.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

131

Shipment Audits

Table 8–32 Shipment Status Audits, Shipment Status Audits
Fields
Modified By

The user who performed the modification.

Old Status

The inbound shipment status before the status
modification.

Old Status Date

The date the inbound shipment entered the old status.

New Status

The inbound shipment status after the status
modification.

New Status Date

The date the status modification was made.

Reason Code

The assigned code for the modification reason.

Reason Text

Additional information as to why the modification was
made.

8.18 Shipment Audits
This screen provides visibility to status modification details performed
against an inbound shipment.
Table 8–33 Shipment Audits, Shipment
Fields

132

Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

User Guide

Shipment Audits

Table 8–33

Shipment Audits, Shipment

Fields
Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is
shipped. Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail
screen and view the node details for the shipment.

Receiving Node

The node where the inbound shipment is received.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates whether or not the shipment contains
hazardous items.

Table 8–34

Shipment Audits, Shipment Audits

Fields
Date

The date and time on which the shipment was
modified.

Modified By

The user who performed the modification.

Context

The modifications carried out against the shipment.

Modification

The attribute that was modified for the shipment.

Old Value

The attribute value before making the modifications.

New Value

The attribute value after it was modified.

Reason Code

The reason for the modification.

Reason Text

Additional information as to why the modification was
made.

Table 8–35

Shipment Audits, Shipment Line Audits

Fields
Date

The date and time on which the shipment line was
modified.

Modified By

The user who performed the modification.

Context

The modifications carried out against the shipment
line.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

133

Shipment Dates

Table 8–35 Shipment Audits, Shipment Line Audits
Fields
Line #

The shipment line number that was modified.

Modification

The attribute that was modified for the shipment line.

Old Value

The attribute value before making the modifications.

New Value

The attribute value after it was modified.

Reason Code

The reason for the modification.

Reason Text

Additional information as to why the modification was
made.

8.19 Shipment Dates
This screen allows you to modify inbound shipment dates and delivery
dates for the selected shipment.
Table 8–36 Shipment Dates Screen, Shipment
Fields

134

Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Destination

The inbound order’s shipment destination.

User Guide

Shipment Alerts

Table 8–36

Shipment Dates Screen, Shipment

Fields
Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.

PO #

The inbound shipment purchase order number.

Table 8–37

Shipment Dates Screen, System Dates

Fields
Requested Shipment
Date

The requested shipment date associated with the
shipment.

Expected Shipment
Date

The expected shipment date associated with the
shipment.

Actual Shipment Date

The actual shipment date associated with the
shipment.

Requested Delivery
Date

The requested delivery date associated with the
shipment.

Expected Delivery Date The expected delivery date associated with the
shipment.
Actual Delivery Date
Table 8–38

The actual delivery date associated with the shipment.

Shipment Dates Screen, New Dates

Fields
Date Type

The date type. For example, Shipment or Delivery.

Requested

The Buyer requested date for the specified date type.
This field can be modified.

Expected

The expected date for the specified date type. This
field can be modified.

Actual

The actual date for the specified date type. This field
can be modified.

8.20 Shipment Alerts
This screen provides visibility to alerts for the selected shipments.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

135

Shipment Alerts

Table 8–39 Alert List Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Destination

The inbound order’s shipment destination.

Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.

PO #

The inbound shipment purchase order number.

Table 8–40 Alert List Screen, Alert List
Actions
View Details

This action allows you to view alert details. For more
information about alerts, see the Selling and
Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform User
Guide.

Fields
Alert ID

136

User Guide

The alert identifier.

Additional Attributes

Table 8–40

Alert List Screen, Alert List

Type

The type of alert raised. For example, ON_FAILURE or
FAILED_AUTH. For more information about alerts, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform User Guide.

Description

A brief description of the alert.

Queue

The message queue to which the alert has been
assigned to.

Priority

The priority of the alert.

Owner

The user who is handling the alert.

Raised On

The date the alert was raised.

8.21 Additional Attributes
This screen provides visibility to additional attributes for a shipment.
Table 8–41

Additional Attributes Screen, Shipment

Fields
Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Receiving Node

Indicates the node that is receiving the inbound
shipment.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

137

Shipment Receipt Discrepancy

Table 8–41 Additional Attributes Screen, Shipment
Fields
Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the inbound shipment contains hazardous
items.

Table 8–42 Additional Attributes Screen, Additional Attributes
Fields
Overage Allowed

Indicates whether a shipment overage is allowed.
For outbound shipments, overage means shipping
more than was initially intended in a shipment.
For inbound shipments, overage means receiving more
than the expected quantity in a shipment.

Manually Entered

Indicates whether the shipment was manually entered,
or generated automatically.

Order Available On
System

Indicates whether the order that is associated with the
shipment is available in Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation, or if it only exists in an external system.

Case Content
Verification Not
Required

Indicates whether the case content verification is
required for this shipment.

Pallet Content
Verification Not
Required

Indicates whether the pallet content verification is
required for this shipment.

Shipment Entry
Overridden

Indicates whether the shipment entry override is
allowed.

Gift

Indicates if the shipment has gift items.

8.22 Shipment Receipt Discrepancy
This screen provides visibility to view discrepancies for the received

shipment.

138

User Guide

Shipment Receipt Discrepancy

Table 8–43

Shipment Receipt Discrepancy Screen, Shipment

Actions
Manage Receiving
Discrepancies

This action takes you to the Manage Receiving
Discrepancies screen where you can manage any

discrepancies found in the shipments.

Fields
Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Destination

The inbound order’s shipment destination.

Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.

PO #

The inbound shipment purchase order number.

Table 8–44

Shipment Receipt Discrepancy Screen, Receipt Discrepancy

Fields
PO #

The purchase order number.

Line

The purchase order’s line number.

Item ID

The item identifier.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

139

Manage Receiving Discrepancies

Table 8–44 Shipment Receipt Discrepancy Screen, Receipt Discrepancy
Fields
Product Class

The product class of the item.

Unit of Measure

The unit of measure in which the item is measured.

Discrepancy Type

The type of discrepancy.

Discrepancy Quantity

The quantity of discrepancy.

8.23 Manage Receiving Discrepancies
This screen provides management functionality for any discrepancies
found in the inbound shipments.
Table 8–45 Manage Receiving Discrepancies Screen, Shipment
Actions
Reason Entry Complete Click this action to adjust the Discrepancy Reason and
Reason Quantity, if the fields are grayed out. The sum

of the Discrepancy Reasons and Reason
Quantities add up to the Discrepancy Quantity.

Reopen Reason Entry

Click this action if your adjustments add up

correctly, then the fields get grayed out. If the
adjustments do not add up correctly but you
need to close the window, you can finish working
with the receiving discrepancies later.

Fields

140

PO #

The purchase order number.

Line

The purchase order’s line number.

Item ID

The item identifier.

Product Class

The product class of the item.

Unit of Measure

The unit of measure in which the item is measured.

Discrepancy Type

The type of discrepancy.

Discrepancy Quantity

The quantity of discrepancy.

Discrepancy Reason

The reason for the discrepancy.

Reason Quantity

The reason for the discrepancy quantity.

User Guide

Receipt Summary

8.24 Receipts
This screen provides visibility to receipt details for the selected shipment.
Table 8–46

Inbound Order Receipt List Screen, List

Actions
View Summary

This action takes you to the Receipt Summary screen
where you can view the receipt’s summary details.

View Details

This action takes you to the Receipt Details screen
where you can view the receipt details.

Receive

This action allows you to view containers that are
expected to be received in the Receipt Details screen.

Close Prereceipt

This action allows you to close prereceipts.

Close Receipt

This action allows you to close receipts.

Report/Record Receipt

This action takes you to the Receive (Report or Record
Receipt) screen where you can record paper-based
receipt details.

Fields
Receipt #

The receipt number.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the receipt.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the receipt.

Buyer

The Buyer associated with the receipt.

Seller

The Seller associated with the receipt.

Receipt Start Date

The receipt start date.

Receiving Node

The receiving node associated with the receipt.

Receipt Open

Indicates if the receipt is open.

Receipt Status

The receipt status.

8.25 Receipt Summary
This screen provides visibility to the receipt’s summary for the selected
receipts.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

141

Receipt Summary

Table 8–47 Receipt Summary
View Icons
Details - This icon takes you to the Receipt Details

screen where you can view receipt details for the
shipment.

Instructions - This icon takes you to the Receipt
Instructions screen where you can view special

instructions for an inbound shipment, such as
handling instructions.
Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Receipt
Status Audits screen where you can view a list of

status audits for the selected receipt.

Actions
Inventory View

Click this action to go to the location inventory screen
and view inventory details at a location in the
warehouse. For more information about this screen,
see the Sterling Warehouse Management System:

User Guide.
Close Prereceipt

This action allows you to close prereceipts that you
selected.

Close Receipt

This action allows you to close receipts that you
selected.

Receive

This action allows you to view containers that are
expected to be received in the Receipt Details
screen.

Report/Record Receipt

This action takes you to the Receive (Report or Record
Receipt) screen where you can record paper-based
receipt details.

Fields

142

Receipt #

The identifying number of the receipt.

Shipment #

The identifying number of the shipment.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the order.

Buyer

The buyer organization that placed the order. Click this
link to go to the Organization Details screen where you
can view the seller organization details.

User Guide

Receipt Summary

Table 8–47

Receipt Summary

Seller

The seller organization that placed the order. Click this
link to go to the Organization Details screen and view
the seller organization details.

Receipt Start Date

The receipt start date.

Receiving Node

The receiving node. This takes you to the Ship Node
Detail screen where you can view the ship node

details.

Receiving Dock

The dock location that received the receipt.

Receipt Status

The current status of the receipt. Click this link to go
to the Shipment Status Audits screen and view a list of
status audits for the selected receipt.

Receipt Open

Indicates whether the receipt is open or not.

No Of Expected Pallets

The number of pallets expected to receive.

No Of Expected
Cartons

The number of cartons expected to receive.

Table 8–48

Receipt Summary Screen, Items

Actions
View Containers

Click this action to go to the Order Receipt Container
screen and view the receipt’s container details. For
more information, see the appropriate section in this
guide.

Adjust Receipt

Click this action to go to the Adjusting a Receipt
screen and adjust a receipt. For more information, see
the appropriate section in this guide.

Inspect

Click this link to go to the Inspect Inbound Receipts
screens and inspect items you received. For more
information, see the appropriate section in this guide.

Fields
Item ID

The item identifier.

Item Description

The item’s description.

The product classification such as first quality, second
quality, or finished good.

UOM

The line item’s unit of measure.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

143

Receipt Details

Table 8–48 Receipt Summary Screen, Items
Disposition Code

The disposition code to determine the product
classification and inventory status.

Order #

The return associated with the inbound order.

Line #

The inbound shipment order line number.

Release #

The release number to which the inbound shipment
line belongs.

Tag

This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled,
and if the receiving node is configured to capture

tags when receiving inventory into a warehouse
or in all operations performed within the node.

For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Container Serial Details and
view a container’s serial details.

Net Weight

The item’s net weight.

Net Weight UOM

The unit of measure used for the net weight.

Quantity

The number of items.

8.26 Receipt Details
This screen provides visibility to receipt details for the inbound shipment.
Table 8–49 Inbound Order Receipt Details Screen, Receipt
Fields

144

Receipt #

The identifying number for the receipt.

Shipment #

The identifying number for the shipment.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer organization that placed the order.

Seller

The Seller organization that is handling the order.

Receipt Start Date

The start date of the receipt.

Receiving Node

The node that received the order.

Receiving Dock

The location where the order was received.

User Guide

Receipt Details

Table 8–49

Inbound Order Receipt Details Screen, Receipt

Fields
Receipt Status

The status of the receipt.

Receipt Open

Indicates if the receipt is still open.

No Of Pallets

Indicates the number of pallets.

No Of Cartons

Indicates the number of cartons.

Table 8–50

Inbound Order Receipt Details Screen, Receipt Lines

Fields
Item ID

The inbound shipment line item identifier.

Item Description

The description of the receipt line item.

The inbound shipment line item’s product class.

UOM

The inbound shipment line item’s unit of measure.

Disposition Code

The disposition code to determine the product
classification and inventory status.

Order #

The order number to which the inbound shipment line
belongs.

Line #

The inbound order shipment line number.

Release #

The release number to which the inbound shipment
line belongs.

Ship By Date

The date by which the inbound shipment line must
ship by.

COO

The container’s country of origin.

Serial #

The container’s serial number.

Tag

This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled,
and if the receiving node is configured to capture

tags when receiving inventory into a warehouse
or in all operations performed within the node.

The number of items received.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

145

Receipt Line Details

8.27 Receipt Line Details
This screen provides visibility to inbound order’s shipment receipt line
details.
Table 8–51 Receipt Line Details Screen, Container
Fields
Receipt #

The inbound order receipt number associated with the
receipt.

Shipment #

The inbound order shipment number associated with
the receipt.

Order #

The inbound order number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

The enterprise that received the receipt.

Receiving Node

The node that received the receipt.

Receiving Dock

The dock location that received the receipt.

Receipt Status

The status of the receipt that was received.

Case ID

Case LPN that was received.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN that was received.

Table 8–52 Receipt Line Details Screen, Container Details
Fields

146

Item ID

The item identifier of the line item packaged in the
container.

Item Description

The description of the item received.

The product classification of the line item packaged in
the container such as first quality, second quality, or
finished good.

UOM

The unit of measure of the line item packaged in the
container.

Disposition Code

The disposition code to determine the product
classification and inventory status.

Order #

The order number to which the line item packaged in
the container belongs.

User Guide

Receipt Container

Table 8–52

Receipt Line Details Screen, Container Details

Fields
Line #

The order line number to which the line item packaged
in the container belongs to.

Release #

The order release number to which the line item
packaged in the container belongs.

Ship By Date

The date by which the container must be shipped.

COO

Country of origin associated with the item.

Serial #

The serial number associated with the item.

Tag

This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled,
and if the receiving node is configured to capture

tags when receiving inventory into a warehouse
or in all operations performed within the node.

The quantity of the line item packaged in the
container.

8.28 Receipt Instructions
This screen provides visibility to special instructions for an inbound
shipment, such as handling instructions. For more information, see the
appropriate section in this guide.

8.29 Receipt Status Audits
This screen provides visibility to a list of status audits for the selected
receipt. For more information, see the appropriate section in this guide.

8.30 Receipt Container
This screen provides visibility to items packaged in an inbound order
shipment receipt’s container. For more information, see the appropriate
section in this guide.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

147

Activity Demand

8.31 Activity Demand
This screen provides visibility to the shipment’s activity demand.
Table 8–53 Shipment Activity Demand Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Destination

The inbound order’s shipment destination.

Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.

Table 8–54 Shipment Activity Demand Screen, Activity Demand List
Actions
Delete

This action allows you to delete the selected activity
demands.

Fields

148

Shipment Line #

The outbound shipment line number.

Location ID

The item location in the node.

User Guide

Record Container Details

Table 8–54

Shipment Activity Demand Screen, Activity Demand List

Activity Code

The activity to be performed on items belonging to the
work order.

Pallet Id

The pallet LPN that belong to the work order.

Case Id

The case LPN that belong to the work order.

Item ID

The items that belong to the work order.

Priority

Indicates the priority of the demand.

Demand Quantity

The quantity of the order that was demanded.

Satisfied Quantity

The extent to which the demand is satisfied.

Demand Satisfied

Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.

8.32 Record Container Details
This screen provides the ability to record container details for a container
that is to be received.
Table 8–55

Pack Container Screen, Shipment

Fields
Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

149

Record Container Details

Table 8–55 Pack Container Screen, Shipment
Fields
Destination

The inbound order’s shipment destination.

Status

The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.

Table 8–56 Pack Container Screen, Ship To
The address to where the container is shipped.
Table 8–57 Pack Container Screen, Inbound Order Container Details
Fields

150

Container Type

Select whether the container is a pallet or a case.

Container SCM

Enter the shipment container marking number of the
pallet or carton.

Tracking #

Enter the container’s tracking number used to track
the container’s status and location.

Declared Value

Enter the value used to calculate customs charges.
This field is only applicable for international shipments.

Gross Weight

Enter the weight of the container plus its contents.

Net Weight

Enter the weight of the container's contents.

Height

Enter the height of the container.

Width

Enter the width of the container.

Length

Enter the length of the container.

User Guide

Start Receipt

Table 8–58

Pack Container Screen, Unpacked Items

Fields
Tag Details

This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled,
and if the receiving node is configured to capture

tags when receiving inventory into a warehouse
or in all operations performed within the node.

The purchase order number associated with the
unpacked items.

Line #

The order line number to which the line item packaged
in the container belongs.

Release #

The order release number to which the unpacked line
item belongs.

Item ID

The item identifier of the unpacked line item.

The product classification of the unpacked line item.

UOM

The unit of measure of the unpacked line item.

Quantity

The quantity associated with the unpacked items.

Pack Quantity

The quantity of the line item that remains unpacked.

8.33 Start Receipt
This screen provides the ability to create a new receipt to receive a
shipment.
Table 8–59

Start Receipt

Fields
Receipt #

Enter the inbound shipment receipt number associated
with the receipt.

Receiving Dock

The dock location that received the receipt.

Receipt Date

The date you create a receipt.
To change this date, you can use the Calendar lookup.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

151

Table 8–59 Start Receipt
Fields
Shipment #

The inbound order shipment number.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Expected Delivery Date The date the shipment is estimated to arrive.
Receiving Node

The node that received the shipment.

Buyer

The buyer associated with the receipt.

Seller

The seller associated with the receipt.

No Of Expected Pallets

The number of pallets in the receipt.

No Of Expected
Cartons

The number of cartons in the receipt.

Click Save to save the receipt information.

8.34 Receive
This Receipt Details (Execution Console Framework) screen provides the
ability to enter items that you received in a warehouse, such as pallet,
case, and SKU.
For more information about Execution Console Framework, see the
appropriate section in this guide.

8.35 Print
This screen provides print capabilities.
Table 8–60 Print
Fields

152

Print Service Name

Choose the applicable document or label you want to
print.

Printer Name

Choose the printer from which you want to print the
document or label.

No. of Copies

Enter the total number of copies of the document or
label you want to print.

User Guide

Receive (Report or Record Receipt)

8.36 Create Picklist
This screen provides the ability to create picklist for the selected
shipments. When you create a picklist, the status changes to "Shipment
Being Picked". For more information, see the Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen.
Note: You can create a picklist only if the PRINT_PICK_
LIST transaction is valid for the shipment at its current
status in the shipment pipeline. For more information
about transaction details, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.

8.37 Create Alerts
This screen provides the ability to create alerts for the selected shipment
in this screen. For field value descriptions, see Table 8–39 and
Table 8–40.

8.38 Receive (Report or Record Receipt)
This screen provides the ability to record paper-based receipt details.
Table 8–61

Receive, Receipt

Field
Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the receipt.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the receipt.

Buyer

The buyer associated with the receipt.

Seller

The seller associated with the receipt.

Receipt Start Date

The receipt start date.

Receiving Node

The node that received the shipment.

Receipt Status

The receipt status.

Receipt Open

Indicates if the receipt is open.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

153

Receive (Report or Record Receipt)

Table 8–61 Receive, Receipt
Field
No Of Pallets

The number of pallets.

No Of Cartons

The number of cartons.

Table 8–62 Receive, Lines to Receive
Field
Pallet ID

This field is displayed only if you are using the Sterling
WMS.
Click this option button to enter the Pallet ID.

Case ID

Pallet ID

Enter the Pallet ID.

Pallet Completely
Received

Select this check box if the
pallet is completely received.

This field is displayed only if you are using the Sterling
WMS.
Click this option button to enter the Case ID.

None

Case ID

Enter the Case ID.

Case Completely
Received

Select this check box if the case
is completely received.

This field is displayed only if you are using the Sterling
WMS.
Click this option button if neither a pallet nor a case is
received.

Shipment Line #

The shipment line number.

Click
to add unexpected items in the
shipment.

154

PO #

The purchase order number to which the shipment
belongs to.

Release #

The order release number to which the shipment
belongs.

Item ID

The item you are receiving is displayed.

User Guide

Receive (Report or Record Receipt)

Table 8–62

Receive, Lines to Receive

Field
Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Product Class

The shipment line item’s product class.

Total Quantity

The total quantity contained in the shipment line or
order line.

Received Quantity

The quantity that has been received in the shipment
line or order line.

Quantity To Be
Received

The total quantity to be received in the shipment line,
or the quantity of released items in the order line.

Disposition Code

The disposition code is automatically populated by the
system from the receiving rules. Modify the disposition
code, if applicable.

Receiving Quantity

Enter the quantity being received in the shipment line.

If the item is tag-controlled, additional fields are
displayed, depending upon the item’s tag attributes.

Note:

If the item is serial-controlled, an additional field is
displayed to let you enter the serial number.

Table 8–63

Receive, Serial Range

Field

Description

Serial #

Enter the serial number of the item.
Click

to add a new serial number.

Click
to go to the serial range panel, where you
can enter the serial range of the items.
From Serial #

Enter the start serial number.

To Serial #

Enter the end serial number.
Click

to add a new serial range.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

155

Inbound Order Container Search By All Attributes

8.39 Add Delivery Plan
This screen provides the ability to add shipments to a delivery plan.
Table 8–64 Select Delivery Plan Screen, Delivery Plan
Fields
Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Plan #

Enter the delivery plan number to which you want to
add the inbound shipment.
Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
plan number you want to use.

Plan Name

Enter the delivery plan name to which you want to add
the inbound shipment.

Plan Date

Enter the delivery plan date and time through which
the delivery plan you are adding the inbound shipment
to is valid.

8.40 Inbound Order Container Search By All
Attributes
This screen helps you search inbound containers by all attributes.
Table 8–65 Inbound Order Container Search by All Attributes
Fields

156

Document Type

Select the appropriate document type for which you
want to search.

PO #

Enter the purchase order number for which you are
searching, if applicable.

Shipment #

Enter the inbound shipment number for which you are
searching, if applicable.

Container #

Enter the container number for which you are
searching, if applicable.

Container Type

Enter the type of containers for which you are
searching, if applicable.

Tracking #

Enter the tracking number under which you want to
search for containers, if applicable.

User Guide

Inbound Order Container List

Table 8–65

Inbound Order Container Search by All Attributes

Fields
Item ID

Enter the item ID included in the containers for which
you are searching, if applicable.

Container SCM

Enter the container SCM for which you are searching,
if applicable.

Containers With
Logical Kits Only

Select the check box to search for containers only with
logical kits, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of inbound shipments you
want returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

8.41 Inbound Order Container List
The Container List window displays the results of a container search. You
can perform actions on a single container or multiple containers by
selecting the check boxes of the containers you want to perform an
action on and choosing the applicable action from the action bar.
Table 8–66

Inbound Order Container List

Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view the container details.

Pack/Unpack

This action takes you to the Pack or Unpack screen
where you can pack or unpack a container.

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the container’s documents or labels.

Delete

This action takes you to the Delete Container screen
where you can delete an inbound container.

Fields
Container #

The container number.

Shipment #

The inbound shipment to which the container belongs.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

157

Container Details

Table 8–66 Inbound Order Container List
Status

The container status.

Manifested

Indicates if the container was manifested.

Container Type

The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.

Tracking #

The container’s tracking number used to track the
container’s status and location.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking.

Ship Date

The date by which the container must ship.

Received

Indicates whether the shipment has been received.

8.42 Container Details
The Container Detail screen provides various information about an
inbound container. The actions that can be performed in the Container
Detail screen are explained in the following tables.
Table 8–67 Inbound Order Container Details Screen, Container
View Icon
Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Container
Status Audits screen where you can view a list of

status audits that you modified for an inbound
container.

Actions
Print

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the container’s documents or labels.

Fields

158

Container #

The container number.

Shipment #

The inbound shipment to which the container belongs.

Container Type

The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.

Ship Date

The date by which the container must ship.

Container Group

The container group to which the container belongs.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.

User Guide

Container Details

Table 8–67

Inbound Order Container Details Screen, Container

Received

Indicates whether the shipment has been received.

Ship To

The address to where the container is shipped.

Table 8–68

Inbound Order Container Details Screen, Ship To

The address to where the shipment is shipped.
Click

to go to the Modify Address screen and change the ship to address.

Table 8–69

Inbound Order Container Details Screen, Container Info

Fields
Carrier/Service

The Carrier or Carrier service shipping the container.

Tracking #

The container’s tracking number used to track the
container’s status and location.

Pallet/Carton SCM

The shipment container marking number of the pallet
or carton.

Declared Value

The value used to calculate customs charges. This field
is only applicable for international shipments.

Gross Weight

The weight of the container plus the contents.

Actual Weight

The weight of just the container.

Size

The size of the container.

Length

The length of the container.

Width

The width of the container.

Height

The height of the container.

Net Weight

The weight of the container’s content.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

159

Container Details

Table 8–70 Inbound Order Container Details Screen, Container Line
Details
Fields
Tag Details

This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled,
and if the receiving node is configured to capture

tags when receiving inventory into a warehouse
or in all operations performed within the node.

Order #

The order number to which the line item packaged in
the container belongs.

Line #

The order line number to which the line item packaged
in the container belongs.

Release #

The order release number to which the line item
packaged in the container belongs.

Item ID

The item identifier of the line item packaged in the
container.

The product classification of the line item packaged in
the container.

UOM

The unit of measure of the line item packaged in the
container.

Description

The description of the item.

Ship By Date

The date by which the container line must be shipped
by.

Quantity

The quantity of the line item packaged in the
container.

Table 8–71 Inbound Order container Details Screen, Child Containers
Fields

160

Container #

The container number.

Status

The container status.

Container Type

The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.

User Guide

Container Serial Details

Table 8–71

Inbound Order container Details Screen, Child Containers

Fields
Tracking #

The container’s tracking number used to track the
container’s status and location.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking.

8.43 Container Serial Details
You can view a container’s serial details with the help of this screen.
Table 8–72

Serial Details

Fields
Node

Node associated with the item.

Location

Location associated with the item.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the container.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the container.

Serial #

The serial number associated with the container items.

Table 8–73

Serial Details Screen, Child Serials

Fields
Secondary Serial #1

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #2

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #3

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #4

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #5

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #6

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #7

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #8

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #9

Component serial number of the item.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

161

Pack or Unpack

8.44 Container Status Audits
This screen provides visibility to a list of status audits that you modified
for a inbound container.
Table 8–74 Container Status Audits Screen, Container
Fields
Container #

The inbound container number.

Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Container Type

The inbound container type.

Ship Date

The date by which the container must ship.

Container Group

The container group to which the container belongs.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.

Table 8–75 Container Status Audits Screen, Container Status Audits
Fields
Modified By

The user who performed the modification.

Old Status

The inbound shipment status before the status
modification.

Old Status Date

The date the inbound shipment entered the old status.

New Status

The inbound container status after the status
modification.

New Status Date

The date the status modification was made.

Reason Code

The reason for the modification.

Reason Text

Additional information as to why the modification was
made.

8.45 Pack or Unpack
This Pack Details (Execution Console Framework) screen provides the
ability to pack or unpack containers.
For more information about the Execution Console Framework, see the
appropriate section in this guide.

162

User Guide

Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes

8.46 Delete Container
This screen provides the ability to delete an inbound container.
Table 8–76

Delete Container

Fields
Remove quantity from
shipment line

Choose this option to remove the quantity from the
shipment line.

Backorder removed
quantity

Choose this option to backorder the removed quantity.

Click OK.

8.47 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Use this screen to search for dock appointments by all attributes.
Table 8–77

Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes

Fields
Node

The node associated with the docks displays.

Start Date

The start date is defaulted to the current date.
Enter the start date of the appointment for which you
are searching, if applicable.
Choose the calendar lookup to change the date.

Number of Days To
Display

Enter the maximum number of days to be displayed
on the dock schedule calendar as a result of your
search, if applicable. By default, the value displayed is
5.

Location

Enter the dock location, if applicable.
Choose the lookup option to search for dock locations.

Inbound Delivery

Check this checkbox to search for inbound docks, if
applicable.

Outbound Pickup

Check this checkbox to search for outbound docks, if
applicable.

Appointment #

Enter the appointment number for which you are
searching, if applicable.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

163

Dock Schedule Details

Table 8–77 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Fields
Shipment #

Enter the shipment number for which you are
searching for the dock appointment, if applicable.

Order #

Enter the order number for which you are searching
for the dock appointment, if applicable.

Load #

Enter the load number for which you are searching for
the dock appointment, if applicable.

Carrier

Enter the carrier for which you are searching for the
dock appointment, if applicable.

BOL #

Enter the bill of lading number for which you are
searching for the dock appointment, if applicable.

The Dock Schedule Details screen displays as a result of your dock
appointment search by all attributes.

8.48 Dock Schedule Details
This screen provides visibility to the dock appointment calendar. It
displays the inbound, outbound, and both inbound and outbound docks
with their:
Q

Available time slots for creating new appointments.

Unavailable time slots due to calendar constraints.

Unavailable time slots due to appointments already taken.

Table 8–78 Dock Schedule Details, Dock Availability
Actions

164

Manage Dock Group

This action button takes you to the Dock Group Details
screen.

Zoom In

Click this action button to view more definitive details
of the appointment calendar. Two levels of Zoom In
are supported.

User Guide

Dock Appointment

Table 8–78
Zoom Out

Dock Schedule Details, Dock Availability
Click this action button to view a larger area of the
appointment calendar. Two levels of Zoom Out are
supported.

Displays the dock locations for the nodes that are of the dock type INBOUND,
OUTBOUND, and BOTH.

Table 8–79

Dock Schedule Details, Legend
Indicates an appointment for the searched criteria.
Click a slot to modify an existing appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates appointments that do not match the
searched criteria.
Click a slot to modify an existing appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates free slots for which new appointments can
be taken.
Click a slot to create a new dock appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates the unavailable slots due to the calendar
constraints.

8.49 Dock Appointment
You can create new appointments or modify existing appointments with
the help of this screen.
Table 8–80

Dock Appointment, Appointment Details

Actions
Cancel

Click this action button to cancel an appointment.

Fields

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

165

Dock Appointment

Table 8–80 Dock Appointment, Appointment Details
Appointment #

The appointment number associated with the dock
displays, if applicable.
The appointment number displays only for existing
appointments.

Location

The dock location for which you chose to take an
appointment displays here.

Appointment Type

By default, the Outbound Pickup appointment type is
selected for outbound dock locations, and Inbound
Delivery for inbound and both inbound and outbound
dock locations.

Start Date

This start date is defaulted with the date of the
selected slot.
Enter the start date on which you want to take an
appointment or choose the calendar lookup to change
the date.

Start Time

This start time is defaulted with the time of the
selected slot.
Enter the start time of the appointment or choose the
time lookup to change the time.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number you want to associate with
the dock appointment, if applicable.
Choose the lookup icon to search for shipments. The
shipment’s weight, volume, number of cases and
number of pallets automatically displays.

Load #

Enter the load number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.
Choose the lookup icon to search for loads. The
number of cases and number of pallets associated with
the load automatically displays.

166

Order #

Enter the order number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.

BOL #

Enter the bill of lading number you want to associate
with the dock appointment, if applicable.

PRO #

Enter the PRO number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.

Carrier

Select the carrier for which you want to take an
appointment, if applicable.

User Guide

Dock Group Details

Table 8–80

Dock Appointment, Appointment Details

Notes

Enter any additional information associated with the
dock appointment, if applicable.

Weight

Enter the weight of the shipment, if applicable.

Volume

Enter the volume of the shipment, if applicable.

No Of Cases

Enter the number of cases contained in the shipment
or load, if applicable.

No Of Pallets

Enter the number of pallets contained in the shipment
or load, if applicable.

Estimate End Time

Click this button to calculate and display the estimated
end time in the End Time field.
The estimated end time is calculated based on SAM
defined in the productivity type, which is associated
with the task type for trailer loading and unloading
activities.

End Time

To specify a pre-determined end time, enter the end
time.
Choose the time lookup to change the time.

Click Save to save the dock appointment.

8.50 Dock Group Details
You can enter constraints on the maximum number of appointments that
can be taken for the group of docks associated with a node.
Table 8–81

Dock Group Details, Dock Group

Fields
Node

The node associated with the docks displays.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

167

Dock Group Details

Table 8–82 Dock Group Details, Dock Group Max No. of Appointments
Action
Remove

Click this action button to remove the selected
appointment constraints.

Fields
Start Time

Indicates the start time of the time slot for which the
maximum number of appointment constraint needs to
be created.
Click

to create an appointment constraint.

End Time

Indicates the end time of the time slot for which the
maximum number of appointment constraint needs to
be created.

Sunday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Monday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Tuesday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Wednesday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Thursday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Friday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Saturday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window.

Click Save to save the maximum number of dock group appointment
constraints.

168

User Guide

View Holds

8.51 View Holds
You can view holds that are applied to the selected shipments in this
screen.
Table 8–83

View Holds, Inbound Order Shipment

Fields
Shipment #

The inbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The inbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the inbound shipment is
associated with.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the inbound shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the buyer.

Seller

The identifier for the seller.

Ship Node

The node from where the inbound shipment is
shipped.

Receiving Node

The node that is receiving the inbound shipment.

Status

The inbound shipment status.

Release #

The order release number to which the inbound
shipment line belongs.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the inbound shipment contains hazardous
items.

Merge Node

If you have order lines coming from multiple nodes
and want to consolidate them into one load, enter a
node at which you want all of the dependent order
lines to be consolidated with the parent order line.
Note: Merge Node is only relevant in a Deliver
Together dependency.

Table 8–84

View Holds, Shipment Holds

Actions
Add Holds

This action takes you to the Add Holds screen where
you can add holds to the selected inbound shipment.

Fields

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

169

View History

Table 8–84 View Holds, Shipment Holds
Actions
Hold Description

A brief description of the hold.

Hold Status

The current status of the hold.

Hold Comment

Any additional comments for the hold.

Action

Select the action that you want to apply to the hold
from the drop-down list.

Reason

Enter the reason for the hold.

Table 8–85 View Holds, Resolved Holds
Fields
Hold Description

A brief description of the hold.

Reason

The reason for changing this hold to resolved status.

8.52 Add Holds
You can add holds to the inbound shipment on this screen.
Table 8–86 Add Holds, Shipment Holds
Fields
Hold Type

Select the hold type associated with the inbound
shipment from the drop-down list.

Reason

Enter the reason for the hold.

8.53 View History
Every time the status of an order hold changes, useful information
regarding the status change is recorded in Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation. In this screen, you can view the history of an order hold.

170

User Guide

View History

Table 8–87

View History, Primary Information

Fields
Shipment#

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipper’s reference number.

Plan #

The outbound shipment’s plan number

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment

Buyer

The Buyer’s identifier.

Seller

The Seller’s identifier.

Ship Node

The node from which the outbound shipment ships.

Receiving Node

The node which receives the outbound shipment

Status

The status of the outbound shipment.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the shipment contains any hazardous item.

Merge Node

The node that has multiple order lines and is
consolidated into one shipment.

Inbound Shipment Console Screens

171

View History

172

User Guide

9
Receipt Console Screens
The Receipt Console provides:
Q

Extensive search capabilities using granular level information such as
order number, shipment number.

Visibility to receipt summary.

Visibility to receipt details and receipt line details.

Closure of receipts and prereceipts.

This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Receipt
Console.

9.1 Receipt Search By Receipt
The Receipt Search By Receipt screen lets you perform a receipt search
by receipt.
Table 9–1 Receipt Search By Receipt
Fields

Description

Document Type

Select the document type associated with the receipt
you want to search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are searching for.

Across Enterprises

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Receiving Node

The node associated with the receipt displays.

Receiving Dock

Enter the receiving dock associated with the receipt
you are searching for, if applicable.

Receipt Console Screens

173

Receipt Search By Item

Table 9–1

Receipt Search By Receipt

Fields

Description

Receipt #

Enter the receipt number associated with the receipt
you are searching for, if applicable.

Buyer

Enter the buyer associated with the receipt you want
to search for, if applicable.

Seller

Enter the seller associated with the receipt you want
to search for, if applicable.

Order #

Enter the order number associated with the receipt
you are searching for, if applicable.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number associated with the receipt
you are searching for, if applicable.

Receipt Date

Enter the date range through which you want to
search for the receipts, if applicable.

Receipt Status

Select the status of the receipt you want to search for,
if applicable.

Closed Receipts Only

Select Closed Receipts Only if the search is applicable
only for the closed receipts.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of the search.

Choosing Search displays the search results in the Receipt List screen.
Note: It is recommended that you do not use spaces

before or after any text you enter in the search fields, as this
may result in inconsistent or inaccurate results.

9.2 Receipt Search By Item
The Receipt Search By Item screen lets you perform a receipt search by
item.

174

User Guide

Receipt Search By Container

Table 9–2 Receipt Search By Item
Fields

Description

Document Type

Select the document type associated with the receipt
you want to search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are searching for.

Across Enterprises

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Receiving Node

The node associated with the receipt displays.

Item ID

Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.

Product Class

Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.

Unit Of Measure

Select the unit of measure of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.

Serial #

Enter the serial number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Disposition Code

Select the disposition code you are searching for, if
applicable.

Inspection Pending

Select this option if you are searching for inspection
pending receipts.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.

Choosing Search displays the search results in the Receipt List screen.
Note: It is recommended that you do not use spaces
before or after any text you enter in the search fields, as this
may result in inconsistent or inaccurate results.

9.3 Receipt Search By Container
The Receipt Search By Container screen lets you perform a receipt
search by container.

Receipt Console Screens

175

Receipt List

Table 9–3

Receipt Search By Container

Fields

Description

Document Type

Select the document type associated with the receipt
you want to search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are searching for.

Across Enterprises

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Receiving Node

The node associated with the receipt displays.

Pallet ID

Enter the pallet LPN you are searching for.

Case ID

Enter the case LPN you are searching for.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.

Choosing Search displays the search results in the Receipt List screen.
Note: It is recommended that you do not use spaces

before or after any text you enter in the search fields, as this
may result in inconsistent or inaccurate results.

9.4 Receipt List
The Receipt List screen displays the result of a receipt search. You can
perform actions on a single receipt or on multiple receipts by selecting
the check boxes of the relevant receipts and choosing the applicable
action from the action bar.
The fields in the Receipt List screen are always the same, irrespective of
whether you are searching for a Receipt in the Inbound Order Console
(using the Supply Collaboration module), the Inbound Receipt Console or
the Return Receipt Console (using the Warehouse Management System
module), or in the Return Console (using the Reverse Logistics module).
This chapter describes the screens in terms of the Return Receipt
Console. However, the field descriptions hold true in all similar scenarios,
across all consoles mentioned above.

176

User Guide

Return Order Receipt Summary

Table 9–4 Return Receipt List
Actions
View Summary

This action takes you to the Return Order Receipt
Summary screen, which lets you view a receipt
summary.

View Details

This action takes you to the Receipt Details screen,
which lets you view the return receipt details.

Close Prereceipt

This action closes a prereceipt.

Close Receipt

This action closes a receipt.

Report/Record receipt.

This action takes you to the Receive screen, which lets
you record paper based receipt details.

Fields
Receipt #

Receipt number associated with the receipt. Click this
link to view the receipt details.

Shipment #

Shipment number associated with the receipt.

Order #

Order Number associated with receipt.

Enterprise

Enterprise associated with the receipt.

Buyer

Buyer associated with the receipt.

Seller

Seller associated with the receipt

Receipt Start Date

The start date of the receipt.

Receiving Node

The node where inventory was received.

Receipt Open

Indicates if the receipt is open. If open, you can
receive the receipts.

Receipt Status

Status of the receipt.

9.5 Return Order Receipt Summary
The Return Order Receipt Summary screen provides visibility of a
receipt’s summary.

Receipt Console Screens

177

Return Order Receipt Summary

Table 9–5

Return Order Receipt Summary, Return Receipt

Return Receipt
This panel contains basic information about a receipt.
Note: You can choose receipt actions by selecting the view icon in the title bar.
View Icons
Details - This icon takes you to the Receipt Details
screen, which lets you view receipt details.
Instructions - This icon takes you to the Receipt
Instructions screen, which lets you view a receipt’s

summary instruction

Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Receipt
Status Audits screen, which lets you view a

receipt’s summary status audit list.

Expected Receipt - This icon takes you to the
Expected Receipt screen, which lets you view the

details of the expected receipt.

Actions
Inventory View

This action takes you to the Location Inventory
screen, which lets you view location inventory

details for a receipt. For more information about
the Location Inventory screen, see the Sterling
Warehouse Management System: User Guide.

Close Prereceipt
Close Receipt
Receive

This action closes a prereceipt.
This action closes a receipt.
This action takes you to the Receive Details screen,
which lets you record receipt details. For more
information about the Receive Details screen, see
the Sterling Warehouse Management System:

User Guide.

Report/Record Receipt

This action takes you to the Receive screen, which lets
you record paper based receipt details.

Fields
Receipt #

178

User Guide

The receipt number associated with the receipt.

Return Order Receipt Summary

Table 9–5 Return Order Receipt Summary, Return Receipt
Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Choose the Shipment # link to view the shipment
detail for the particular shipment.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the receipt.

Buyer

The buyer associated with the receipt. Click this link to
view buyer details.

Seller

The seller associated with the receipt. Click this link to
view seller details.

Receipt Start Date

The start date of the receipt.

Receiving Node

The node where inventory was received. Click this link
to view the receiving node details.

Receiving Dock

The dock location that received the receipt.
Important: You can receive receipts into multiple
locations.

Receipt Open

Indicates if the receipt is open. If open, you can
receive the receipts.

Receipt Status

The status of the receipt.
Click this link to view the status audits for a receipt.

No Of Expected Pallets

The number of expected pallets in the receipt.

No Of Expected
Cartons

The number of expected cartons in the receipt.

Table 9–6 Return Order Receipt Summary, Items
Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Receipt Line Details
screen, which lets you view a receipt’s item line
details.

Adjust Receipt

This action takes you to the Adjust Receipt
screen, which lets you adjust the receipt of an
item. For more information about the Adjust
Receipt screen, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: User Guide.

Receipt Console Screens

179

Return Order Receipt Summary

Table 9–6

Return Order Receipt Summary, Items

Inspect

This action takes you to the Inspect Return Receipt
Details screen, which lets you view the return receipt
items and the receipts that are already inspected. For
more information about how to inspect return
receipts, see the appropriate section in this guide

or the Sterling Reverse Logistics: User Guide.

Fields
Item ID

The item ID.

Description

A brief description of the item.

Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Disposition Code

The disposition of the item.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Release #

The release number associated with the receipt.

Tag #

The tag number.
Clicking this link lets you view the tag details for an
item.

Quantity

Table 9–7

The number of units in UOM on the receipt.

Return Order Receipt Summary, Containers

Actions

180

View Details

This action takes you to the Receipt Line Details
(Container) screen, which lets you view a receipt’s
container line details.

Adjust Receipt

UnReceive Container

This action lets you unreceive the selected containers.

User Guide

Receipt Line Details

Table 9–7 Return Order Receipt Summary, Containers
Fields
Pallet ID

The pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

The case LPN associated with the container.

9.6 Receipt Line Details
The Receipt Line Details screen lets you view a receipt’s item line details.
Table 9–8 Receipt Line Details, Receipt Line
Fields

Description

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the receipt.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the receipt.

Receiving Node

The node where inventory was received.

Receiving Dock

The location where the shipment is received.

Receipt Status

The status of the receipt.

Item ID

The item ID.

Item Description

A brief description of the item.

Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Line #

The order line number associated with the receipt.

Release #

The release number associated with the receipt.

Table 9–9 Receipt Line Details, Tag Information
Fields

Description

Batch#

The batch number associated with the tag.

Receipt Console Screens

181

Order Receipt Container

9.7 Order Receipt Container
The Order Receipt Container screen lets you view an order receipt’s
container details.
Table 9–10 Order Receipt Container, Item Header
Fields

Description

Receipt #

Receipt number associated with the receipt.

Shipment #

Shipment number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

Enterprise associated with the receipt.

Receiving Node

The node where inventory was received.

Receiving Dock

Location where the shipment is received.

Receipt Status

The status of the receipt.

Item ID

The item ID.

Item Description

A brief description of the item.

Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Line #

The order line number associated with the receipt.

Release #

The release number associated with the receipt.

Table 9–11 Order Receipt Container, Item Containers
Fields

Description

Pallet ID

The pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

The case LPN associated with the container.

Segment Type

The segment type associated with the receipt.
Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.

182

User Guide

Receipt Line Details (Container)

Table 9–11

Order Receipt Container, Item Containers

Fields

Description

Segment #

The segment number associated with the receipt.
Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.

Serial

The serial number associated with the receipt.

Quantity

The number of units in UOM on the receipt.

9.8 Receipt Line Details (Container)
The Receipt Line Details (Container) screen lets you view a receipt’s
container details.
Table 9–12

Receipt Line Details (Container), Container

Fields

Description

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the receipt.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the receipt.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the receipt.

Receiving Node

The node associated with the receipt.

Receiving Dock

The location where the shipment is being received.

Receipt Status

The status of the receipt.

Case ID

The case LPN associated with the container.

Pallet ID

The pallet LPN associated with the container.

Table 9–13

Receipt Line Details (Container), Container Details

Fields

Description

Item ID

The item ID.

Item Description

Description of the item.

Receipt Console Screens

183

Receipt Instructions

Table 9–13 Receipt Line Details (Container), Container Details
Fields

Description

Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Disposition Code

The item’s disposition code.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Release #

The release number associated with the receipt.

Segment Type

The segment type associated with the receipt.
Note: A segment type indicates an inventory
category. Typical values are MTC - Made To Customer
or MTO - Made to Order.

Segment #

The segment number associated with the receipt.
Note: A segment holds either the specific buyer or
specific order number that requires dedication.

Ship By Date

The date reflecting the time sensitivity of the
inventory.

COO

The country of origin associated with the receipt.

Serial #

The serial number associated with the receipt.

Tag #

The tag number associated with the receipt.

Quantity

The number of units in UOM on the receipt.

9.9 Receipt Instructions
The Receipt Instructions screen lets you view a receipt’s summary
instruction.

184

User Guide

Receipt Instructions

Table 9–14

Receipt

Fields

Description

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the receipt.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view shipment details.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the receipt.

Buyer

The buyer associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view buyer details.

Seller

The seller associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view seller details.

Receipt Start Date

The start date of the receipt process.

Receiving Node

The node where inventory was received.
Click this link to view the receiving node details.

Receiving Dock

The location where the shipment was received.

Receipt Open

Indicates if the receipt is open. If open, you can
receive the receipts.

Receipt Status

The status of the receipt.
Click this link to view a receipt’s status audits.

No Of Expected Pallets

The number of expected pallets associated with the
receipt.

No Of Expected
Cartons

The number of expected cartons associated with the
receipt.

Table 9–15

Receipt Summary Instructions, Instructions

Actions
Delete Instruction

This action deletes the selected instruction

Fields

Receipt Console Screens

185

Receipt Status Audits

Table 9–15 Receipt Summary Instructions, Instructions
Instruction Type

Select the type of instruction.

Text

Enter the Instruction text.

Click

to add a new instruction.

9.10 Receipt Status Audits
The Receipt Status Audits screen lets you view a receipt’s summary
status audit list.
Table 9–16 Receipt
Fields

Description

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the receipt.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view shipment details.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the receipt.

Buyer

The buyer associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view buyer details.

Seller

The seller associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view seller details.

Receipt Start Date

The start date of the receipt process.

Receiving Node

The node where inventory was received.
Click this link to view the receiving node details.

Receiving Dock

The location where the shipment was received.

Receipt Open

Indicates if the receipt is open. If open, you can
receive the receipts.

Receipt Status

The status of the receipt.
Click this link to view a receipt’s status audits.

186

User Guide

Receipt Details

Table 9–16

Receipt

Fields

Description

No Of Expected Pallets

The number of expected pallets associated with the
receipt.

No Of Expected
Cartons

The number of expected cartons associated with the
receipt.

Table 9–17

Receipt Summary Status Audits, Status Audit List

Fields

Description

Modified By

The user associated with the modification of the
record.

Old Status

The receipt status before the status modification.

Old Status Date

The date the receipt entered the old status.

New Status

The status of the receipt after the status change.

New Status Date

The status date recorded on the receipt at the most
recent status change.

Reason Code

The reason code indicating the reason for the status
change.

Reason Text

The text reason entered against audit.

9.11 Receipt Details
The Receipt Details screen lets you view receipt details.
Table 9–18

Receipt

Fields

Description

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the receipt.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view shipment details.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the receipt.

Receipt Console Screens

187

Receipt Details

Table 9–18 Receipt
Fields

Description

Buyer

The buyer associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view buyer details.

Seller

The seller associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view seller details.

Receipt Start Date

The start date of the receipt process.

Receiving Node

The node where inventory was received.
Click this link to view the receiving node details.

Receiving Dock

The location where the shipment was received.

Receipt Open

Indicates if the receipt is open. If open, you can
receive the receipts.

Receipt Status

The status of the receipt.
Click this link to view a receipt’s status audits.

No Of Expected Pallets

The number of expected pallets associated with the
receipt.

No Of Expected
Cartons

The number of expected cartons associated with the
receipt.

Table 9–19 Receipt Details, Receipt Lines
Action
Adjust Receipt

Fields

188

Item ID

The item ID.

Description

A brief description of the item.

User Guide

Receipt Details

Table 9–19

Receipt Details, Receipt Lines

Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Disposition Code

The disposition of the item.

Case ID

The case LPN associated with the container.

Pallet ID

The pallet LPN associated with the container.

Order #

The order number associated with the receipt.

Line #

The line number associated with the receipt.

Release #

The release number associated with the receipt.

Ship By Date

The date the inventory must be shipped by.

COO

The country of origin associated with the receipt line
item.

Serial #

The serial number associated with the receipt line
item.

Tag #

The tag number associated with the receipt line item.
Click this link to view a receipt’s tag details.

Quantity

The number of units in UOM on the receipt.

Receipt Console Screens

189

Receive

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
An error message, "There is no inventory for put away at
the SourceLocation" occurs.
Cause
When multiple inbound shipments are received into the
same location, and the inventory being received is not an
LPN.
Resolution
To resolve this issue, do one of the following:
Q

Manually create move requests for receipts that you
already received. For more information about creating
move requests, see Create Move Request.
For receipts that are expected to be received, ensure
that the inventory is license plated and that you don't
receive inbound shipments and inventory for put away
into the same location.

9.12 Receive
The Receive screen lets you record paper-based receipt details.
Table 9–20 Receive, Receipt

190

Fields

Description

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the receipt.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the receipt.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the receipt.

Buyer

The buyer associated with the receipt.

Seller

The seller associated with the receipt.

Receipt Start Date

The receipt start date.

Receiving Node

The node that received the shipment.

User Guide

Receive

Table 9–20

Receive, Receipt

Fields

Description

Receipt Status

The receipt status.

Receipt Open

Indicates if the receipt is open.

No Of Pallets

The number of pallets.

No Of Cartons

The number of cartons.

Table 9–21

Receive, Lines to Receive

Fields

Description

Pallet ID

Select this to receive an expected pallet and enter the
pallet identifier.
Check the Pallet Completely Received box to close the
pallet.

Case ID

Select this to receive an expected case and enter the
case identifier.
Check the Case Completely Received box to close the
case.

None
Tag Details

Select this to receive loose inventory.
Click on the

icon, to view and hide tag details.

The lot number associated with the tag displays, if
applicable.
Shipment Line #

The shipment line number.

Order #

The order number to which the shipment belongs.

Release #

The order release number to which the shipment
belongs.

Item ID

The item you are receiving displays.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

The item’s product class.

Total Quantity

The total quantity contained in the shipment line.

Received Quantity

The total quantity received in the shipment line.

Quantity To Be
Received

The quantity available for receiving in the shipment
line.

Receipt Console Screens

191

Receive

Table 9–21 Receive, Lines to Receive

192

Fields

Description

Disposition Code

The disposition code is automatically populated by the
system from the receiving rules. Modify the disposition
code, if applicable.

Receiving Quantity

Enter the quantity you want to receive in the shipment
line.

Tag Identifiers

Enter the identifier for the tag, such as, Lot #, Batch
#, etc.

User Guide

10
Create Inbound Shipment Screens
Shipments (ASN) are transmitted to warehouses through EDI downloads,
fax, or e-mail, and also when a trailer arrives with no prior notice.
The shipment entry console enables you to manually create shipments
from fax, e-mail or telephone conversations, and also for those trailers
that arrive with no prior notice.
The Shipment Entry screen enables you to create an inbound shipment.

10.1 Shipment Entry
Use this screen to create an inbound shipment.
Table 10–1

Shipment Entry

Actions
Supervisory Overrides

This action takes you to the Shipment Supervisory
Overrides screen where you can set up supervisory
overrides for an inbound shipment.

Fields
Document Type

Select the document type associated with the
shipment you are creating for.
Valid values are 'Purchase Order' or 'Transfer Order'.
For an outbound shipment, valid value is 'Sales Order'

Receiving Node

The receiving node where the receipt is being
performed.
This is automatically populated by the system based
on the user profile.

Create Inbound Shipment Screens

193

Shipment Supervisory Overrides

Table 10–1 Shipment Entry
Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the shipment you
are creating for, if applicable.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number for the shipment you are
creating, if applicable. A unique number is
automatically generated by the system, if number is
not specified.

Ship Node

Enter the shipping node associated with the shipment.
This represents the seller's ship node.

Buyer

Enter the buyer associated with the shipment you
want to create, if applicable.

Seller

Enter the seller associated with the shipment you want
to create.

PO #

Enter the purchase order number associated with the
shipment.

Release#

Enter the release number of the order against which
the shipment is being created, if applicable.

Pro#

Enter the PRO number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment you are creating, if applicable.

Carrier/Service

Select the carrier service availed for transporting the
shipment, if applicable.

BOL#

Enter the bill of lading number of the shipment you
are creating, if applicable.

Trailer#

Enter the trailer number of the shipment you are
creating, if applicable.

Click Create Shipment to create an inbound order shipment. For more
information, see the appropriate section in this guide.

10.2 Shipment Supervisory Overrides
Use this screen to set up supervisory overrides for an inbound shipment.

194

User Guide

Shipment Supervisory Overrides

Table 10–2

Shipment Supervisory Overrides

Fields
Override Shipment
Entry

Select this check box to override shipment entry.

Do not verify Pallet
Content

Select this check box to skip pallet content verification
for the shipment.

Do not verify Case
Content

Select this check box to skip case content verification
for the shipment.

Suppress Overage
Check

Select this check box to suppress overage check.

Allow receiving
unexpected Items on
Shipment

Select this check box to allow receiving of unexpected
items in the shipment.

Click OK.

Create Inbound Shipment Screens

195

Shipment Supervisory Overrides

196

User Guide

11
Receive Console Screens
The Receive console enables you to receive expected containers, build
cases or pallets, receive blind receipts, and receive over-receipt quantity.
This console is designed to support scanning of information, utilizing the
available barcodes. You can also enter information manually.
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Receive
Console.

11.1 Receive Details
The Receive Details screen provides a detailed information about a
receipt.
Table 11–1

Receive Details, Receive

Actions
Close Pallet

This action closes the pallets received. Alternatively,
press Alt+P.

Close Case

This action closes the pallets received. Alternatively,
press Alt+C.

Save

This action saves the information entered.

Reset

This action clears the information entered.
Alternatively, press Alt+P.

Receive Console Screens

197

Receive Details

Table 11–1 Receive Details, Receive
Fields
Shipment #

Enter the shipment number associated with the
receipt.
Choose the field and lookup icon or press Alt+L to find
the specific shipment number you want to use.

Receipt #

Enter the receipt number for the shipment associated
with the receipt.
Choose the field and lookup icon or press Alt+L to find
the specific receipt number you want to use.

Enterprise

The enterprise is automatically populated by the
system.

Order #

The order number is automatically populated by the
system, if applicable.
For shipments received without order, the order
number is not available.

Seller

This value is automatically populated by the system.

Ship Node

The ship node is automatically populated by the
system.

Pallet ID/Case ID

Enter the pallet or case LPN, if applicable.
This value is required only if pallets or case LPNs are
being associated to inventory during receipt or for a
Pallet LPN pre-associated with the shipment. For case
LPNs pre-associated with the shipment, use the 'Item
ID/Case ID' field.

Location

Enter the location where inventory is being received.
Choose the field and lookup icon or press Alt+L to find
the specific location you want to use.
If an open receipt exists for a shipment, the location
corresponding to the receipt’s receiving location
automatically displays.

Item ID/Case ID

Enter the item ID or case LPN.
The case LPN, if entered, could be an existing LPN or a
new pre-printed LPN. Once the receipt of the case LPN
is completed, scan the next item or case LPN, if
applicable.

198

User Guide

Receive Details

Table 11–1

Receive Details, Receive

Case ID

The case LPN corresponding to the last item scanned
displays.

Disposition Code

The disposition code is automatically populated by the
system from the receiving rules. Modify the disposition
code, if necessary.
Choose the field and lookup icon or press Alt+L to find
the specific disposition code you want to use.

Item ID

The item ID corresponding to the last item scanned
displays, if applicable.
Q

COO

If the item is serial tracked, the Serial Entry
screen displays, which lets you capture the serial
number.
If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen
displays, which lets you capture the tag details.
If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date
Entry screen displays, which lets you capture the
expiration date.
If the item is serial-tracked and if you are
performing Returns Receiving, the Serial Entry
screen displays, which lets you capture the serial
number.

The country of origin associated with the item is
automatically populated by the system.
Choose the field and lookup icon or press Alt+L to find
the specific country of origin you want to use.

Description

The item’s description.

Quantity

Enter the quantity received in the UOM, if applicable.
The quantity for a UPC Code, UPC Case Code or valid
Case LPN scanned is automatically recognized by the
system.

UOM

Select the UOM corresponding to the quantity.

UOM Quantity

The UOM quantity is automatically populated by the
system.

Total Quantity

The total quantity is automatically populated by the
system.

Inspection Comments

Enter any additional comments, if applicable.

Receive Console Screens

199

Serial Entry

Note: If you select "Do Not Verify Pallet Contents" or "Do

Not Verify Case Contents" check-boxes, you need not
enter or scan the item details.

Table 11–2 Receive Details, Receive Instructions
The item’s receiving instructions code and text displays, if available.
Table 11–3 Receive Details, Activity Demand Instruction
Activity Demand Instruction
The activity demand instructions for the inventory received displays, if
available.
Fields
Activity Code

The activity to be performed on items belonging to the
receipt.
Examples of activities during a receipt include
Cross-Dock, QC, VAS for repacking.

Demand Quantity

The current demand for the item.

Demand Satisfied

Indicates whether the demand is satisfied.

Is Infinite Demand

Indicates whether the demand is infinite.

Table 11–4 Receive Barcode Types
Fields
Pallet/Case ID

ShippingOrInventoryContainer

Location

Item ID/Case ID

ItemOrShippingContainer

Item ID

Item

11.2 Serial Entry
The Serial Entry screen enables you enter or scan the item’s serial
number.

200

User Guide

Serial Entry

The Serial Entry screen also enables you enter the serial number range
of an item.
Table 11–5

Serial Entry

Field
Count

The total count of items scanned is automatically
populated by the system.

Serial #

The component serial number of the item.

Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.

Table 11–6

Serial Entry, Serial Range

Field
Count

The total count of items scanned is automatically
populated by the system.

From Serial #

The start serial number of the item.

To Serial #

The end serial number of the item.

Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary
serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.

Receive Console Screens

201

Expiration Date Entry

11.3 Tag Entry
Note: You can enter the item’s tag attributes when

receiving inventory in a warehouse that is configured to
capture the tag details, or when performing operations
within the node. For more information about capturing the
tag attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.

The Tag Entry screen enables you capture the tag numbers, such as,
Lot# and Batch#, associated with the tag tracked SKU.
Table 11–7 Tag Entry
Field
Batch #

Enter the batch number associated with the tag.

Note: The fields displayed in the Tag Entry window vary

depending on the item scanned.

11.4 Expiration Date Entry
The Expiration Date Entry screen enables you capture the expiration
date.
Table 11–8 Expiration Date Entry
Field
Expiration
Date

202

User Guide

The item’s expiration date. To change this date, choose the
Calendar lookup or press Alt+L.

12
Inspect Inbound Receipts Screens
The Inspect Inbound Receipt Console lets you inspect inbound receipts.
The procedure for inspecting an inbound receipt is similar to inspecting a
return receipt. For more information about screen and field description,
see Chapter 13, "Inspect Return Receipts Screens".

Inspect Inbound Receipts Screens

203

204

User Guide

13
Inspect Return Receipts Screens
The Inspect Return Receipt console enables you to:
Q

Record inspection details
View next disposition suggestions based on the current disposition
status

Enter appropriate inspection comments while inspecting an item

View item inspection details for a receipt

Search for receipts by disposition code

Inspect receipts from receipt summary screen

13.1 Inspect Receipt
You can enter the return receipt criteria in this screen.
Table 13–1

Inspect Receipt

Fields
Node

Select the node where the receipt has been received.

Location

Enter the location where the receipt has been
received.
Choose lookup option to find the specific Location you
want to search for.

Item ID

Enter the item ID you want to inspect associated with
the receipt.
Choose lookup option to find the specific Item ID you
want to search for.

Inspect Return Receipts Screens

205

Inspect Return Receipt Details

Table 13–1 Inspect Receipt
Fields
Receipt #

Enter the return receipt number you want to inspect.
Choose lookup option to find the specific Receipt
Number you want to search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the return
receipt.

Pallet ID

Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container.

Product Class

Select the product class. Product class indicates the
item’s inventory categorization.
Orders are placed for an item and product class.
Typical examples are Irregular, FD (Factory Defects).

Serial #

Enter the item’s serial number you want to inspect, if
applicable.

Case ID

Enter the case LPN associated with the container.

Unit Of Measure

Select the unit of measure you want to inspect.

Inventory Status

Select the inventory status of the receipt you want to
inspect.

Click Proceed. The Inspect Return Receipt Details screen is displayed and
you can view the return receipt’s item details.

13.2 Inspect Return Receipt Details
This screen provides visibility to return receipt item details and receipt
lines that are already inspected. You can also inspect receipts that are
not inspected.
Table 13–2 Inspect Return Receipt Details, Return Receipt Item
Fields

206

Receipt #

The return receipt number associated with the item.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the return
receipt.

Return #

The return order number.

User Guide

Inspect Return Receipt Details

Table 13–2

Inspect Return Receipt Details, Return Receipt Item

Fields
Item ID

The item ID.

Product Class

The product class indicating the item’s inventory
categorization.
Orders are placed for an item and product class.
Typical examples are Irregular, FD (Factory Defects).

Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Receipt Status

The status of the receipt.

Receiving Node

The receiving node.

Receiving Dock

The dock location that received the receipt.

Location

The location.

Inventory Status

The inventory status of the receipt.

Location Quantity

The return receipt quantity currently available in the
location.

Table 13–3
Inspected

Inspect Return Receipt Details, Receipt Lines to be

Fields
Line

The receipt line number.

Serial #

The item’s serial number.

Pallet ID

The pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

The case LPN associated with the container.

Ship By Date

The date by which the inventory must be shipped.

Disposition

The disposition entered while accepting the return
against the quantity.

Remaining Qty

The quantity against the disposition.

Comments

Enter any additional comments, if necessary.

New Disposition

Select the new disposition receipt details.

Disposition Qty

Enter the disposition quantity for the receipt.

Disposition Comments

Enter any additional comments for the disposition.

Inspect Return Receipts Screens

207

Inspect Return Receipt Details

Table 13–4 Inspect Return Receipt Details, Receipt Lines Already
Inspected
Fields

208

Line

The receipt line number that has already been
inspected.

Serial #

The receipt serial number that has already been
inspected.

Ship By Date

The date by which the inventory must be shipped.

Quantity

The receipt quantity that has already been inspected.

Disposition Code

The disposition code associated with the receipt
quantity.

Inspection Date

The inspection date when the receipt was inspected.

User

The user that inspected the receipt.

Comments

The inspection comments for the receipt, if available.

User Guide

14
Create Move Request Screens
The Create Move Request console enables you to create ad-hoc move
requests.

14.1 Create Move Request
You can create a move request with the help of this screen. For more
information about Move Request Console screens, see Move Request
Console Screens.
Table 14–1

Create Move Request, Move Request Header

Fields
Node

Select the node associated with move request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are creating the request for.

Activity Group

Select the activity group for the move request you are
creating.
This is a mandatory field and corresponds to a group
that performs work at a station.

For Activity Code

Select the activity code associated with the activity
group.

Move Request #

Enter the move request number you want to move.

Source Location

Enter the source location for the move request you
want to create. A source location is typically given
when creating move requests for putaway.
This field is mandatory if Target Location is not given.

Create Move Request Screens

209

Create Move Request

Table 14–1 Create Move Request, Move Request Header
Fields
Target Location

Enter the target location for the move request you
want to create. A target location is typically given,
when creating move requests for retrieval.
This field is mandatory if Source Location is not given.

Requested By

Enter the user who requested the move.

Receipt #

Enter the receipt number for the move request you
want to create, if applicable.
The receipt number is used to limit the move request
to a specific inbound shipment.

Segment Type

Select the segment type for the move request you
want to create, if applicable.
The segment type is used to limit the move request to
specific inventory.

Segment #

Enter the segment number for the move request you
want to create, if applicable.

Start No Earlier Than

Enter the start date and time of the tasks for the move
requests, if applicable.
The system defaults the values to the current date and
time.

Finish No Later Than

Enter the date and time by which the task is expected
to be completed, if applicable.
The start and finish times provides resource planning
capabilities by determining the shift that performs the
tasks.

Priority

Select the priority for the move request you are
creating.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low. This is
used to group and sequence tasks for users. A task
with 'Urgent' priority is assigned to the next available
user. The default value is 'Normal'.

Release Immediately

210

User Guide

Select the check box if the move request is to be
released immediately.

Create Move Request

Table 14–2

Create Work Order, Move Request References

Fields
Shipment #

Enter the shipment number associated with the move
request, if applicable
Choose the lookup icon to find the specific shipment
number you want to use.

Wave #

Enter the wave number associated with the move
request you want to search for, if applicable.
Choose the lookup icon to find the specific wave
number you want to use.

Work Order #

Enter the work order associated with the move request
you want to search for, if applicable.
Choose the lookup icon to find the specific work order
number you want to use.

Table 14–3

Create Move Request, Move Request Items

Fields
Item ID

Enter the item you want to move.
This is required if target location is specified and none
of Receipt #, Segment Type and Segment# is
specified.
Click on

to add item details.

Product Class

Select the product class of the item you want to move.

UOM

Select the unit of measure of the item you want to
move.

Inventory Status

Select the inventory status of the item you want to
move.

Quantity

Enter the quantity of the item you want to move.
This is mandatory if item is specified.

Create Move Request Screens

211

Create Move Request

Table 14–4 Create Move Request, Move Request Containers
Fields
Pallet ID

Enter the pallet LPN of the container you want to
move.
Click on

Case ID

to add container details.

Enter the case LPN of the container you want to move.

NOTE: The move request criteria entered can be provided

in part or complete. The following examples provides a
better understanding of such combinations.

212

User Guide

Example 1: To putaway inventory at a location, specify
only the Source Location.
Example 2: To retrieve inventory to a location, specify
the Target Location along with Item or Quantity, or a
receipt number, segment type and number.
Example 3: To putaway inventory at a container level,
specify only the pallet and/or case LPN.

Create Move Request

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
Not able to release Move Request created for a Pallet
containing Multi-SKU or Multi-level Containers with the
‘Putaway each SKU separately for Multi-SKU’ check box
selected in ‘Putaway Preference For Multi-level Containers’.
Cause
The Putaway each SKU separately for Multi-SKU check
box is selected.
Resolution
Define the Putaway Strategy Rule from the Source Zone to
a blank Target Zone.
For more information about the Shipment Selector Details
screen, see the section Setting Up Activity Constraints for
Multi-Level Container in the chapter Configuring Quality
Control in the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
Configuration Guide.

Create Move Request Screens

213

Create Move Request

214

User Guide

15
Create Count Request Screens
The Create Count Request screen enables you to create count requests.

15.1 Create Count Request
Use the Create Count Request screen to create a count request. For more
information about Count Console, see Count Console Screens.
Table 15–1

Create Count Request, Primary Information Panel

Field
Click

and select Create Count Request from the drop-down list, if applicable.

Node

Select the node associated with the count request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are creating the count
request for.

Across Enterprises

Choose this option if you are creating the count
request across enterprises.

Count Request #

Enter the count request number associated with the
count request you are creating, if applicable.
The system generates a unique request number, if a
value is not specified.

Request Type

Select the request type associated with the count
request, if applicable.
For more information about setting a request type, see
the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
Configuration Guide.

Create Count Request Screens

215

Create Count Request

Table 15–2 Create Count Request, Count Request Criteria
Actions
Get Number Of
Locations

This action takes you to the Number Of Locations
screen where you can view the total number of
locations for count within the specified range.

Fields
Zone

Enter the zone associated with the count request you
want to create, if applicable.
When all locations in a zone are to be counted, only
zone is entered.

Pallet ID

Enter the container’s pallet LPN associated with the
count request you are creating, if applicable.

Receipt #

Enter the specific receipt number associated with the
count request you want to create, if applicable.

Location

Enter the specific location identifier associated with the
count request you want to create, if applicable.

Case ID

Enter the container’s case LPN associated with the
count request you are creating, if applicable.
Either Case or Pallet LPN can be entered.

216

Product Class

Select the product class of the item associated with
the count request you are creating, if applicable.

From Location

Enter the start location, if you are counting a range of
locations.

To Location

Enter the end location, if you are counting a range of
locations.

Aisle Number

Enter the number of the aisle at the location.

Bay Number

Enter the number of the bay at the location.

Level Number

Enter the number of the level at the location.

By Item

Choose this option if you are creating the count
request for an item.

By Item Classification

Choose this option if you are creating the count
request for an item classification.

User Guide

Create Count Request

Table 15–2

Create Count Request, Count Request Criteria

Item ID

Enter the item ID of the item associated with count
request you are creating, if applicable. This is
applicable only when count request is created for
items.

Unit Of Measure

Select the unit of measure of the item associated with
the count request you are creating, if applicable. This
is applicable only when count request is created for
items.

Item Classification

Enter the classification of the item associated with
count request you are creating, if applicable. This is
applicable only when count request is created for item
classification.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the count classifications configurations.

Table 15–3

Create Count Request, Count Request Information

Fields
Priority

Select the priority for the count request you are
creating, if applicable.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low. This is
used to group and sequence tasks for users. A task
with 'Urgent' priority is assigned to the next available
user.
The default value is 'Normal'.

Requesting User ID

The current user id is automatically populated by the
system.
Enter the requesting user ID associated with the count
request, if applicable.

Start No Earlier Than

The current system date is automatically populated.
Enter a different start date and time for the count
request, if applicable.

Finish No Later Than

Enter the end date and time for the count request, if
applicable.

After entering the relevant information in the above fields, the count
request is created upon clicking the Create Count Request button. The
Count Request Details screen displays.

Create Count Request Screens

217

Create Count Request for Location Range

15.2 Create Count Request for Location Range
Use the Create Count Request for Location Range to create a count
request based on location level. For more information about Count
Console, see Count Console Screens.
1.

Click
and select Create Count Request For Location Range from the
drop-down list.

Table 15–4 Create Count Request for Location Range, Count Request
Criteria
Field

Description

Node

Select the node associated with the count request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are creating the count
request for.

Across Enterprises

Choose this option if you are creating the count
request across enterprises.

Request Type

Select the request type associated with the count
request, if applicable.
For more information about setting a request type, see
the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
Configuration Guide.

From Location

Enter the start location, if you are counting a range of
locations.

To Location

Enter the end location, if you are counting a range of
locations.

Priority

Requesting User ID

The current user id is automatically populated by the
system.
Enter the requesting user ID associated with the count
request, if applicable.

218

User Guide

Create Count Request for Location Range

Table 15–4
Criteria

Create Count Request for Location Range, Count Request

Field

Description

Start No Earlier Than

The current system date is automatically populated.
Enter a different start date and time for the count
request, if applicable.

Finish No Later Than

Enter the end date and time for the count request, if
applicable.

After entering the relevant information in the above fields, the count
request is created upon clicking the Create Count Requests.

Click Get Number Of Locations In Range, the Location List Detail
screen is displayed.
When a From Location and To Location range is specified, the
Location List Detail screen displays all the locations starting with the
From Location ID, but within the numerical range specified. If, for
example, the From Location is L1 and the To Location is L2, all the
locations starting with L1*(where * is any numeric value) are
displayed.

Create Count Request Screens

219

Create Count Request for Location Range

220

User Guide

16
Count Console Screens
The Count Console provides:
Q

Comprehensive visibility into count request status and count results
that are recorded.
Extensive search capabilities using granular level information.

16.1 Count Request Search By Count Request
Attributes
You can search for count requests by count request attributes with the
help of this screen.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Table 16–1

Count Request Search By Count Request Attributes

Fields
Node

Select the node associated with the count request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the count
request.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching for the count
requests across enterprises.

Request Type

Select the request type associated with the count
request you want to search for, if applicable.

Count Console Screens

221

Count Request Search By Count Criteria

Table 16–1 Count Request Search By Count Request Attributes
Fields
Count Request #

Enter the count request number you are searching for,
if applicable.

Requesting User ID

Enter the requesting user ID associated with the count
request, if applicable.

Priority

Select the priority associated with the count request
you are searching for, if applicable

Start No Earlier Than

Enter the start date and time range for the count
request, if applicable.

Finish No Later Than

Enter the date and time range by which the count
request is expected to be complete, if applicable.

Status

Select the status range of the count request you are
searching for, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

The Count Request List screen displays as a result of this search.

16.2 Count Request Search By Count Criteria
You can search for count requests by count criteria with the help of this
screen.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Table 16–2 Count Request Search By Count Criteria
Fields

222

Node

Select the node associated with the count request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the count
request.

Across Enterprises

Choose this option if you are searching for count
requests across enterprises.

User Guide

Count Request Search By Count Criteria

Table 16–2

Count Request Search By Count Criteria

Fields
Request Type

Select the request type associated with the count
request you want to search for, if applicable.

Count Request #

Enter the count request number you are searching for,
if applicable.

Request Name

Enter the count request name you are searching for, if
applicable.

Zone

Enter the zone associated with the count request you
are searching for, if applicable.

Location

Enter the location associated with the count request
you want to search for, if applicable

Pallet ID

Enter the container’s pallet LPN associated with the
count request you are searching for.

Case ID

Enter the container’s case LPN associated with the
count request you are searching for.
Note: Either the Case ID or Pallet ID may be specified.

Receipt #

Enter the receipt number associated with the count
request you are searching for, if applicable.

Item ID

Enter the item’s item ID associated with the count you
want to search for, if applicable.

Product Class

Select the item’s product class associated with the
count request you are searching for if applicable.

Unit Of Measure

Select the item’s unit of measure associated with the
count request you are searching for, if applicable.

Physical Count Plan

Enter the particular physical count plan name you are
searching for, if applicable.

Item Classification

Enter the item classification associated with the count
request you are searching for, if applicable.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the Count Classifications configurations.

Status

Select the status range of the count request you are
searching for, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Count Console Screens

223

Count Request List

The Count Request List screen displays as a result of this search.

16.3 Count Request Search By Location Range
You can search for Count Requests for Location Range with the help of
this screen.
Table 16–3 Count Request Search By Location Range
Field

Description

Node

Select the node associated with the count request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the count
request.

Across Enterprises

Choose this option if you are searching for count
requests across enterprises.

Request Type

Select the request type associated with the count
request you want to search for, if applicable.

From Location

Enter the start location, if you are counting a range of
locations.

To Location

Enter the end location, if you are counting a range of
locations.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

16.4 Count Request List
The Count Request List window displays the results of a count request
search. You can perform actions on a single count request or multiple
count requests by selecting the check boxes of the count requests you
want to perform an action on and choosing the applicable action from the
action bar.
Table 16–4 Count Request List
Actions
View Details

224

User Guide

This action takes you to the Count Request Details
screen where you can view count request details for
the selected count requests.

Count Request Details

Table 16–4

Count Request List

Cancel

This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the select count requests.

Fields
Count Request #

The count request number associated with the count
request. Click this link to view count request details.

Request Name

The count request name associated with the automatic
cycle count request.

Location

The location identifier.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the count request.

Item ID

The Item ID associated with the count request.

Description

The item’s description.

Priority

The count request priority.

Start No Earlier Than

The date and time after which the count task is
suggested.

Requesting User

The user who placed the count request.

Status

The count request status.

16.5 Count Request Details
You can view count request details with the help of this screen.
Table 16–5

Count Request Details, Primary Information

Actions
Cancel

This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the select count requests.

Fields
Node

The node associated with the count request.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with count request.

Count Request #

The count request number associated with the count
request.

Count Console Screens

225

Count Request Details

Table 16–5 Count Request Details, Primary Information
Request Name

The count request name associated with the count
request.

Request Type

The request type associated with the count request.

Pipeline ID

The pipeline identifier that the count request goes
through.

Status

The count request status.

Table 16–6 Count Request Details, Count Request Criteria
Fields
Zone

The zone associated with the count request.

Pallet ID

The container’s Pallet LPN associated with the count
request.

Receipt #

The receipt Number associated with the count request.

Location

The location Identifier associated with the count
request.

Case ID

The container’s Case LPN associated with the count
request.

Product Class

The item’s product class.
Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

Item ID

The Item ID associated with the count request.

Description

The item’s description.

Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Table 16–7 Count Request Details, Count Request Information
Fields

226

Priority

The count request priority.

Requesting User

The user for whom the count request is placed.

User Guide

Count Result List

Table 16–7

Count Request Details, Count Request Information

Fields
Start No Earlier Than

The date and time after which the count task is
suggested.

Finish No Later Than

The date and time before which the count task is
expected to be complete.

Table 16–8

Count Request Details, Count Result Summary

Actions
Accept Variance

This action takes you to the Acceptance Variance
Reason where you can enter appropriate reasons

for accepting the variance.
Fields
# of count results

The number of count results associated with the count
iteration.

# of variances

Number of variances associated with the count
iteration.
This link is enabled only if the number of count
variances is less than the maximum records displayed.
Click this link to go to the Count Result List screen
where you can view a list of count results for which
you want to accept variance.

Count Accuracy

The percentage of the count result accuracy.

16.6 Count Result List
You can view a list of count results with the help of this screen.
Table 16–9

Count Result List, Count Request Results

Actions
Accept Variance

This action takes you to the Acceptance Variance
Reason where you can enter appropriate reasons

for accepting the variance.

Count Console Screens

227

Count Result List

Table 16–9 Count Result List, Count Request Results
View Audit

This action enables you to view the audits for all the
inventory adjustments relating to this count request.
For more information, see the Location Inventory

Audit Console Screens.
Fields
Count Request #

The count request number associated with the count
result.

Count Iteration

The number of times a count request has undergone
iterations.

# Of Locations In
Variance

The number of locations in variance associated with
the count iteration.

# Of Items In Variance

The number of items in variance associated with the
count iteration.

Item ID

The item ID associated with the count iteration.

Net Variance Quantity

The net quantity in variance associated with the count
iteration.

Net Variance Value

The net value associated with the net quantity in
variance.
This is computed as the VARIANCE_QUANTITY *
UNIT_COST where the variance quantity is for the
Inventory UOM.

Currency

Table 16–10

The currency code associated with the net variance
value.

Count Result List, Item Details

Actions
Create Count Request

This action takes you to the Create Count Request
screen where you can create count requests.

Fields
Details

228

Click on the
icon to alternatively hide and display
the count result details.

Organization

The organization associated with the count request.

Location

The location identifier.

User Guide

Count Result List

Table 16–10 Count Result List, Item Details
Original Location

The location where the LPN or serial-tracked item was
present before the count is performed.

Parent Case ID

The case LPN that contains child LPNs, which were
counted.

Pallet ID

The container’s pallet LPN associated with the count
request.

Case ID

The container’s case LPN associated with the count
request.

Item ID

The item ID associated with the count request.

Description

The item’s description.

The item’s product class.
Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Net Variance Quantity

The net quantity in variance associated with the count
iteration.

Net Variance Value

The net value associated with the net quantity in
variance.
This is computed as the VARIANCE_QUANTITY *
UNIT_COST where the variance quantity is for the
Inventory UOM.

Currency

The currency code associated with the net variance
value.

Count Console Screens

229

Count Result List

Table 16–10

Count Result List, Item Details

Inventory Status

The item’s inventory status.
An inventory status indicates an inventory
sub-classification. Typical values are ONHAND or
HELD.

Tag #

The item’s tag number.
You can view the tag number, if the node being
counted is configured to capture the tag attributes
in all operations performed within the node. For
more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration
Guide.

Segment Type

The item’s segment type.
A segment type indicates an inventory category.
Typical values are MTC - Made To Customer or
MTO - Made to Order.

Segment

The item’s segment number.
A segment number indicates either the specific
buyer or specific order number that requires
dedication.

230

User Guide

Ship By Date

The date the item must be shipped by.

Serial #

The item’s serial number.

System Quantity

The system reported quantity for the count criteria.

Count Quantity

The quantity counted physically for the count
criteria.

Variance Quantity

The difference of Count quantity and System
quantity.

Count Result List

Table 16–10 Count Result List, Item Details
Variance Value

The value associated with the quantity in
variance.
This is computed as VARIANCE_QUANTITY *
UNIT_COST where the variance quantity is for the
Inventory UOM.

Currency

The currency code associated with the variance
value.

Last Variance Quantity

The variance quantity prior to the present
variance quantity.

Last But One Variance
Quantity

The variance quantity prior to the previous
variance quantity.

Variance Type

The variance type can be:
Q

Variance Accepted

'New' if new inventory (not on system) is
counted at the location.
'Missing' if inventory expected at the location
by the system is not counted.
'No Variance' if there is no discrepancy.

Indicates if the variances was accepted.

Table 16–11 Count Result List, Container Details
Fields
Location

The location identifier associated with the count
request.

Organization

The organization associated with the count request.

Parent Case ID

The case LPN that contains child LPNs, which were
counted.

Pallet ID

The container’s Pallet LPN associated with the count
request.

Count Console Screens

231

Create Count Request

Table 16–11

Count Result List, Container Details

Fields
Case ID

The container’s Case LPN associated with the count
request.

Variance Type

The variance type can be:
Q

'New' if new inventory (not on system) is counted
at the location.
'Missing' if inventory expected at the location by
the system is not counted.
'No Variance' if there is no discrepancy.

16.7 Acceptance Variance Reason
Use this screen to enter appropriate reasons for accepting the variance.
Table 16–12

Acceptance Variance Reason

Fields
Reason Code

Enter the reason code to associate with the variance
being accepted.

Reason Text

Enter text to associate with the variance being
accepted.

Click OK to accept variance at the selected location. The variance quantity
is deposited into a bin for verification, if the adjustment reason code is
associated with a virtual bin location during warehouse configuration. For
more information about variance acceptance, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.

16.8 Create Count Request
You can create count requests with the help of this screen. For more
information about creating count requests, see Create Count Request
Screens.

232

User Guide

Cancellation Reason

Table 16–13 Create Count Request, Count Request Information
Fields
Count Request #

Enter the count request number for the count request
you are creating.

Priority

Requesting User ID

The current user id is automatically populated by the
system.
Enter the requesting user ID associated with the count
request, if applicable.

Start No Earlier Than

The current system date is automatically populated.
Enter a different start date and time for the count
request, if applicable.

Finish No Later Than

Enter the end date and time for the count request, if
applicable

Click OK. A new count request is initiated for the entered criteria.

16.9 Cancellation Reason
You can cancel a count request with the help of this screen.
Table 16–14 Cancellation Reason
Fields
Cancellation Reason
Code

Select the reason code for cancellation of the count
request.

Reason Text

Enter the reason for the count request cancellation.

Count Console Screens

233

Record Count Result Details

16.10 Record Count Result Details
Use this screen to record count results to indicate the completion of a
count task operation.
Table 16–15

Record Count Result Details, Count Request Details

Fields
Task ID

The task’s ID. Click this link to go to the Summary
Task Detail where you can view summary task details.

Task Type

The name of a task type.

Count Iteration

The number of iterations performed in executing the
count request.

Node

The node where count is performed.

Enterprise

The enterprise whose product is counted.

Count Request #

The count request number against which the count
result is recorded.

Zone

The zone where count is performed.

Location

The location that is counted.

User

The user performing the count.

Case ID

The case LPN.

Pallet ID

The pallet LPN.

Receipt #

The receipt number to which the inventory being
counted belongs.

User

The user associated with the count.

Item ID

The Item ID associated with the count.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Product Class

The item’s product class.
Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

234

User Guide

Record Count Result Details

Table 16–15 Record Count Result Details, Count Request Details
Fields
Item Classification

The classification of the item associated with count
request you are creating, if applicable. This is
applicable only when count request is created for item
classification.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the count classifications configurations.

Status

The count request status.

Table 16–16 Record Count Result Details, Items
Fields
Click on

to add a new item details.

Tag/Serial

Click

to enter the tag or serial details.

You can view the tag details, if the node being counted
is configured to capture the tag attributes in all
operations performed within the node. For more
information about capturing the tag attributes, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Serial #

Enter the serial number of the item.

Count Quantity

Enter the count quantity for an item tag.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Parent Case ID

The case LPN that contains child LPNs, which were
counted.

Pallet ID

The container’s pallet LPN containing the item or case
LPN.

Case ID

The container’s case LPN containing the item.

Item ID

The item’s ID.

Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).

UOM

The unit of measure: The item’s unit of measure.

Count Console Screens

235

Record Count Result Details

Table 16–16

Record Count Result Details, Items

Fields
Inventory Status

The item’s inventory status.
An inventory status indicates an inventory
sub-classification. Typical values are ONHAND or
HELD.

System Quantity

The system quantity for the count criteria.

Count Quantity

Enter the count quantity for the item.

Serial #
From_Serial_#

The start serial number of the serial range.

End_serial_#

The end serial number of the serial range.

Table 16–17

Record Count Result Details, Serial

Field

Description

Serial #

Enter the serial number of the item.

Count Quantity

Enter the count quantity for the item.

Click

to add a new serial number.

Click
to go to the serial range panel where you can enter the serial range of
the items
From Serial #

Enter the start serial number.

To Serial #

Enter the end serial number.

Click

to add a new serial number.

Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary

serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.

236

User Guide

Count Result Search By Variance

Table 16–18 Record Count Result Details, Containers
Fields
Click on

to add new container details.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the container.

Parent Case ID

The case LPN that contains child LPNs, which were
counted.

Pallet ID

The pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

The case LPN associated with the container.

Variance Type

The variance type can be:
Q

'New' if new inventory (not on system) is counted
at the location.
'Missing' if inventory expected at the location by
the system is not counted.
'No Variance' if there is no discrepancy.

Click Save to record the count results.

16.11 Count Result Search By Variance
The count requests result in task creation, which can be completed
through RF or batch sheets. You can view the count request results in the
Count Result Console.
The Count Result Search window provides extensive search capabilities
using granular level information such as variance value, variance
quantity and provides a list of count results having variances.
You can search for count results by variance with the help of this screen.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Count Console Screens

237

Count Result Search By Variance

Table 16–19

Count Result Search By Variance

Fields
Node

Select the node associated with the count result.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise whose count result you are
searching for.

Across Enterprises

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Count Request #

Enter the count request number associated with the
count result you are searching for.

Item ID

Enter the item ID you want to search for, if applicable.

Product Class

Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.

Unit Of Measure

Select the unit of measure of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.

Variance Quantity

Enter the variance quantity of the count result you are
searching for, if applicable.
This limits the search to count results that comply with
the variance quantity. For example, show all count
results for variance quantity greater than 10 for the
UOM specified.

Variance Value

Enter the variance value of the count result you are
searching for, if applicable.
This limits the search to count results that comply with
the variance value. For example, show all count
results for variance value greater than 100.

Latest summary Task

238

User Guide

Check this option to limit the results to the last
summary task for the criteria entered. Summary task
represents the grouped tasks by reference value. For
example, by count request number.

Count Result Details

Table 16–19 Count Result Search By Variance
Fields
Variance Value

Choose either 'Negative', 'Positive' or 'Any' to limit
results based on the variance value.
'Negative' - limits result to all variances, which has
reduced inventory.
'Positive' - limits results to all variances, which has
incremented inventory.
'Any' - shows results for all variances

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

The Count Result Details screen displays as a result of this search.

16.12 Count Result Details
You can view the count result details with the help of this screen.
Table 16–20 Count Result Details, Item Details
Fields
Details

Click on the
icon, to alternatively view and hide the
count result details.

Count Request #

The count request number associated with the count
result.

Count Iteration

The number of iterations performed in executing the
count request.

Organization

The organization associated with the count request.

Location

The location identifier.

Item ID

The Item ID.

Description

The item’s description.

Product Class

The item’s product class
Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

Count Console Screens

239

Count Result Details

Table 16–20

Count Result Details, Item Details

Fields
UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Net Variance Quantity

The net quantity in variance associated with the count
iteration.

Net Variance Value

The net value associated with the net quantity in
variance.
This is computed as the VARIANCE_QUANTITY *
UNIT_COST where the variance quantity is for the
Inventory UOM.

Currency

Table 16–21

The currency code associated with the net variance
value.

Count Result Details, Container Details

Fields
Count Request #

The count request number associated with the count
result.

Count Iteration

The number of iterations performed in executing the
count request.

Location

The location identifier associated with the count
request.

Organization

The organization associated with the count request.

Pallet ID

The container’s Pallet LPN associated with the count
request.

Case ID

The container’s Case LPN associated with the count
request.

Variance Type

The variance type can be:
Q

240

User Guide

'New' if new inventory (not on system) is counted
at the location.
'Missing' if inventory expected at the location by
the system is not counted.
'No Variance' if there is no discrepancy.

Invoke Count Service

16.13 Invoke Count Service
You can create count requests with the help of this screen.
Table 16–22 Invoke Count Service, Invoke Service
Fields
Document Type

The count document type displays.

Node

The node for which additional count requests are
created displays.

Agent Criteria

Enter the agent criteria to invoke the create count
request service. Use the lookup icon to choose the
agent criteria from the Agent Criteria List screen.

Count Console Screens

241

Invoke Count Service

242

User Guide

17
Create Physical Count Screens
Physical count in a warehouse is process of taking stock of inventory
after shutting down the warehouse, after which the warehouses start
planning in advance and also stops certain activities for starting the
physical count.
The Create Physical Count Plan screen enables you to create a physical
count plan.
The activities of the following activity groups should be stopped before
starting a physical count:
Q

Putaway

Replenishment

Retrieval

Outbound Picking

Receipt

Count

Value-Added Service

Packing

Outbound Inventory Container Build

Shipping Container Build

Shipping

Inspection

After the physical count is completed, all the activities should be enabled
again.

Create Physical Count Screens

243

Create Physical Count Plan

17.1 Create Physical Count Plan
The Create Physical Count Plan screen is used to create a plan for the
physical count.
Table 17–1 Create Physical Count Plan
Fields
Node

The node for which you want to create the physical
count.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want create the
physical count.

Plan Name

Enter the plan name for which you want create the
physical count.

Plan Date

Enter the date and time on which to create the
physical count.

Duration

Select the duration of the physical count (you can
select the appropriate number of days from the dropdown list).

Click Create Plan, to go to the Plan for Physical Count Details screen. For
more information about the screen, see Section 18.3, "Physical Count
Plan Details" in Chapter 18, "Physical Count Console Screens".

244

User Guide

18
Physical Count Console Screens
The Physical Count Console provides the capability to view the physical
count plans.

18.1 Physical Count Plan Search
You can search for a planned physical count, based on the enterprise,
plan name, status, and date range.
Table 18–1

Physical Count Plan Search

Fields
Enterprise

The enterprise for which you want to search.

Across Enterprise

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Plan Name

Enter the plan name you are searching.

Plan Date

Enter the start date and time associated with the plan
name you are searching.
To - Enter the end date and time associated with the
plan name you are searching.

Status

The status associated with the plan name you are
searching.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records that you want
listed as search result.

The Physical Count Plan List screen displays the search results.

Physical Count Console Screens

245

Physical Count Plan Details

18.2 Physical Count Plan List
The Physical Count Plan List screen displays the search results, based on
the plan name search.
Table 18–2 Physical Count Plan List
Actions
View Details

This takes you to the Physical Count Plan Details
screen, where you can view the details of the physical
count plan and perform various actions on the physical
count plan.

Start

This takes you to the beginning of the plan.

End

This changes the status of the physical count plan to
’Completed’. This can be used only when the physical
count status is ’In Progress’.

Cancel

This displays a Cancellation Reason screen for
cancelling a selected plan.

Delete

This action deletes the physical count plan.

Fields
Plan Name

The plan name of the physical count plan.

Start Date

The start date associated with the plan name.

Duration

The duration of the physical count plan.

Duration UOM

The Unit Of Measure for the duration of the physical
count plan.

Plan Status

The status of the plan.

18.3 Physical Count Plan Details
The Physical Count Details screen displays all the categories that are
available in the YFS_PHY_CNT_CATEGORY table. The 12 categories that
are provided out of the box and available in the YFS_PHY_CNT_
CATEGORY table have the same name as that of activities.These
categories can be stopped before starting a physical count. You can
group the activities, and provide each group with a logical name. After
the grouping, the YFS_PHY_ CNT_CATEGORY table will contain only a
single entry, which is the logical name you provided to the grouping you
created, instead of individual entries for each of the activities.

246

User Guide

Physical Count Plan Details

Let us consider an example. If you want to group PUTAWAY, RECEIPT,
and RETREIVAL into a logical group name, and you call this group
InWarehouseMovements, the YFS_PHY_CNT_CATEGORY table will have a
single entry, that is, InWarehouseMovements, instead of individual
entries for PUTAWAY, RECEIPT, and RETREIVAL.
However, the YFS_PHY_CNT_CAT_ACT_GRP table will contain three
entries corresponding to InWarehouseMovements against each of the
three activities grouped under it, for example, InWarehouseMovements is
the category name and PUTAWAY is the activity name,
InWarehouseMovements is the category name and RECEIPT is the
activity name, and InWarehouseMovements is the category name and
RETREIVAL is the activity name.
In the Physical Count Details screen, when you hover the mouse over the
logical name, in this case, InWarehouseMovements, the list of activities
under that group is displayed.
To stop an activity that is available in the YFS_ACTIVITY table, the
activity should be present in the YFS_PHY_CNT_CAT_ACT_GRP table, and
you should have a corresponding relationship with the YFS_PHY_CNT_
CAT_ACT_GRP table and YFS_PHY_CNT_CATEGORY table. Henceforth,
the name to which the activity has been mapped in the YFS_PHY_CNT_
CATEGORY table will be shown in the Physical Count Plan Details screen.
You can view the physical count plan details with the help of this screen.
Table 18–3

Physical Count Plan Details

Fields
Node

The node for which the physical count was created.

Enterprise

The enterprise for which the physical count was
created.

Plan Name

The plan name for which the physical count was
created.

Start

Enter the date and time for which the physical count
was created.

Duration

The duration for physical count.

Status

The status of the physical count plan.

Enter the duration before which the following activities need to be stopped

Physical Count Console Screens

247

Physical Count Plan Details

Table 18–3 Physical Count Plan Details
Fields
Putaway

Enter the appropriate duration to stop putting an item
(pallet, case, single) into storage.

Replenishment

Enter the appropriate duration to stop replenishing.

Retrieval

Enter the appropriate duration to stop retrieving.

Outbound Picking

Enter the appropriate duration to stop outbound
picking.

Receipt

Enter the appropriate duration to stop receiving.

Count

Enter the appropriate duration to stop cycle count.

Value Added Services

Enter the appropriate duration to stop confirmation of
value added service.

Packing

Enter the appropriate duration to stop packing.

Outbound Inventory
Container Build

Enter the appropriate duration to stop the outbound
inventory container build.

Shipping Container
Build

Enter the appropriate duration to stop the shipping
container build.

Shipping

Enter the appropriate duration to stop shipping.

Inspection

Enter the appropriate duration to stop inspection of
received items.

Note: At the time of configuration if you check the 'Allow

other inventory operations during Physical count' box at
the node level, then in such scenario none of the activities
can be stopped before creating the physical count.
In such case, if you create the Physical Count the
’Inventory Operations are allowed during Physical Count
Planning cannot be done at activity group level’ message
displays in the Physical Count Plan Details screen.

248

User Guide

Physical Count Plan Details

Note: If you want to remove the duration of an activity
that you have entered in the Physical Count Plan Details
screen, in such scenario you need to enter the duration as
0 days/hours.

Note: You can cancel a physical count plan, thereby
canceling the tasks associated with that physical count
plan. However, when you cancel only the individual tasks
associated with a physical count plan, the individual tasks
get cancelled, but the corresponding physical count plan
does not get cancelled.

Physical Count Console Screens

249

Physical Count Plan Details

250

User Guide

19
Move Request Console Screens
The Move Request Console is used to manage all processes for a move
request, including the abilities to view and modify the move requests.
The Move Request Console provides:
Q

Comprehensive visibility of move request details in addition to move
request line details.
Extensive search capabilities using granular level information.

19.1 Move Request Search By Item
You can search for move requests based on the item information such as
product class, unit of measure, item ID and so on.
Table 19–1

Move Request Search By Item

Fields
Node

Select the node associated with move request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are searching for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Activity Group

Select the activity group you are searching for, if
applicable.

For Activity Code

Select the activity code associated with the activity
group you are searching for, if applicable.

Move Request #

Enter the move request number you are searching for,
if applicable.

Move Request Console Screens

251

Move Request Search By Location

Table 19–1 Move Request Search By Item
Fields
Item ID

Enter the item ID you want to search for, if applicable.

Priority

Select the move request priority you are searching for.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low. This is
used to group and sequence tasks for users. A task
with 'Urgent' priority is assigned to the next available
user. The default value is 'Normal'.

Segment Type

Enter the segment type you are searching for, if
applicable.

Segment #

Enter the segment number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Receipt #

Enter the receipt number you want to search for, if
applicable.

Move Request Status

Enter the move request status you are searching for, if
applicable.

Has Exceptions

Choose Has Exceptions, if you want to search for
move requests that have exceptions.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Move Request List screen displays as a result of move request search
by item.

19.2 Move Request Search By Location
You can search for move requests based on the location in this screen.

252

User Guide

Move Request Search By Location

Table 19–2

Move Request Search By Location

Fields
Node

Select the node associated with move request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are searching for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Activity Group

Select the activity group you are searching for, if
applicable.

For Activity Code

Select the activity code associated with the activity
group you are searching for, if applicable.

Source Location

Enter the source location associated with the move
request you are searching for, if applicable.

Target Location

Enter the target location associated with the move
request you are searching for, if applicable.

Pallet ID

Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container, you
are searching for.

Case ID

Enter the case LPN associated with the container you
are searching for.

Move Request Status

Enter the move request status you are searching for, if
applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Move Request List screen displays as a result of move request search
by location.

Move Request Console Screens

253

Move Request Search By Date

19.3 Move Request Search By Date
You can search for move requests based on the dates in this screen.
Table 19–3 Move Request Search By Date
Fields
Node

Select the node associated with move request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are searching for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Activity Group

Select the activity group you are searching for, if
applicable.

For Activity Code

Select the activity code associated with the activity
group you are searching for, if applicable.

Requesting User ID

The current user id is automatically populated by the
system.
Choose the field and lookup icon to find the specific
Requesting User ID associated with the move request
you want to use.

Start No Earlier Than

The current system date and time is automatically
populated.
Enter different start date and time for the move
request, if applicable.

Finish No Later Than

The current system date and time is automatically
populated.
Enter the different finish date and time for the move
request you are searching for, if applicable.

254

Priority

Select the priority associated with the request you are
searching for, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

User Guide

Move Request Search By References

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Move Request List screen displays as a result of move request search
by date.

19.4 Move Request Search By References
You can search for move requests based on the references in this screen.
Table 19–4

Move Request Search By References

Fields
Node

Select the node associated with move request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are searching for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Activity Group

Select the activity group you are searching for, if
applicable.

For Activity Code

Select the activity code associated with the activity
group you are searching for, if applicable.

Requesting User ID

Choose the field and lookup icon to find specific
Requesting User ID associated with the move request
you want to use.

Wave #

Enter the wave number associated with the move
request you want to search for, if applicable.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number associated with the move
request you want to search for, if applicable.

Work Order #

Enter the work order number associated with the
move request you want to search for, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Move Request Console Screens

255

Move Request Search By Tag Attributes

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Move Request List screen displays as a result of move request search
by references.

19.5 Move Request Search By Tag Attributes
You can search for move request based on tag attributes in this screen.
Table 19–5 Move Request Search By Tag Attributes
Fields

256

Node

Select the node associated with move request.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are searching for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Activity Group

Select the activity group you are searching for, if
applicable.

For Activity Code

Select the activity code associated with the activity
group you are searching for, if applicable.

Item ID

Enter the item ID you want to search for, if applicable.

Product Class

Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.

Unit Of Measure

Select the unit of measure of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.

Tag #

Enter tag number corresponding to item.

Serial #

Enter the serial number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

User Guide

Move Request List

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Move Request List screen displays as a result of move request search
by tag attributes.

19.6 Move Request List
The Move Request List window displays the results of a move request
console search. You can perform actions on a single move request or
multiple move requests by selecting the check boxes of the move
requests you want to perform an action on and choosing the applicable
action from the action bar.
Table 19–6

Move Request List

Actions
View All Lines

This action takes you to the Move Request Details
screen where you can view move request details for all
lines.

Release

This action lets to release a move request. On
releasing a move request, tasks get created.

View Tasks

This action takes you to the Task List screen where
you view a list of tasks associated with the move
request.

Cancel

This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the move request.

View Lines With
Exceptions

This action takes you to the Move Request Details
screen where you can view move request details for
lines with exceptions.

Fields

Move Request Console Screens

257

Move Request Details

Table 19–6 Move Request List
Move Request #

Move request number associated with the move
request.
Click this link to go to the Move Request Details screen
to view lines having exceptions for the selected move
request.

Activity Group

The requesting department. Valid values include
RECEIPT, SHIPPING, VAS, PACKING and QC.

For Activity Code

The activity code associated with the activity group.

Priority

The priority of the move request.

Requesting User ID

The user who requested the move.

Has Exceptions

Indicates if exceptions are found while releasing a
move request.
You can view exceptions associated with a move
request in the Alert Detail window. For more
information, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform User Guide.

Start No Earlier Than

Enter the earliest date and time a task should be
started.

Status

The current status of the move request.

19.7 Move Request Details
You can view move request details in this screen.
Table 19–7 Move Request Details, Move Request
View Icons
Alerts - This icon takes you to the Move Request
Alerts screen where you can view alerts for the

move request.

Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Status
Audit Details where you can view a list of status audits
for the move request.
Actions

258

User Guide

Move Request Details

Table 19–7

Move Request Details, Move Request

Release

This action lets to release a move request. On
releasing a move request, tasks get created.

View Tasks

This action takes you to the Task List screen where
you view a list of tasks associated with the move
request.

Cancel

This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the move request.

Fields
Activity Group

The requesting department. Valid values include
RECEIPT, VAS, PACKING and QC.

For Activity Code

The activity code associated with the activity group.

Node

Node associated with the move request.

Move Request #

Move request number associated with the move
request.

Requested By

The user who requested the move

Status

Indicates status of the move request.

Has Exceptions

Priority

Table 19–8

The priority of the move request.

Move Request Details, Task References

Fields
Shipment #

Shipment number associated with the request.

Wave #

Wave number to which a request belongs

Work Order #

Work order number associated with the request.

Move Request Console Screens

259

Move Request Details

Table 19–8 Move Request Details, Task References
Fields
Start No Earlier Than

Enter the earliest date and time a task should be
started.

Finish No Later Than

Enter the latest date and time a task should be
completed.

Table 19–9 Move Request Details, Move Request Items
Actions

260

View Details

This action takes you to the Move Request Line Details
screen where you can view move request line details.

View Tasks

This action takes you to the Task List screen where
you view a list of tasks associated with the move
request.

Cancel

This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the move request.

Source Location

Location where the task starts.

Target Location

Location where the task ends.

Enterprise

Enterprise associated with the request.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the container.

Item Id

The Item ID

Product Class

Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Inventory Status

Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.

Requested Quantity

Quantity in the Item's unit of measure that is required
to be moved.

User Guide

Move Request Details

Table 19–9

Move Request Details, Move Request Items

Released Quantity

Quantity in the Item's unit of measure for which tasks
have been created.

Released

Indicates whether a line is fully tasked.

Is Cancelled

Indicates whether the request has been cancelled.

Tag #

The tag number associated with a tag-controlled item.

The tag number displays only when the node
performing the move request is configured to
capture the tag attributes in all operations within
the node. For more information about capturing
the tag attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration
Guide.

Table 19–10 Move Request Details, Move Request Containers
Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Move Request Line Details
screen where you can view move request line details.

View Tasks

This action takes you to the Task List screen where
you view a list of tasks associated with the move
request.

Cancel

This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the move request.

Fields
Source Location

Location where the task starts.

Target Location

Location where the task ends.

Enterprise

Enterprise associated with the request.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the container.

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the request.

Move Request Console Screens

261

Move Request Alerts

Table 19–10

Move Request Details, Move Request Containers

Released

Indicates whether a line is fully tasked.

Is Cancelled

Indicates whether the request is cancelled.

19.8 Move Request Alerts
You can view alters for the move request in this screen.
Table 19–11

Move Request Alerts, Move Request

Fields
Activity Group

The requesting department. Valid values include
RECEIPT, VAS, PACKING and QC.

Node

Node associated with the move request.

Move Request #

Move request number associated with the move
request.

Priority

Priority of the move request.

Requested By

User who requested the move

Status

Indicates status of the move request.

Has Exceptions

Indicates if exceptions were found while releasing a
move request.
You can view exceptions associated with a move
request in the Alert Detail window. For more
information, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform User Guide.

Table 19–12

Move Request Alerts, Alerts

Actions
View Details

This action provides visibility to alert details. For more
information, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform User Guide.

Fields
Alert ID

262

User Guide

The alert identifier associated with the alert.

Status Audit Details

Table 19–12 Move Request Alerts, Alerts
Type

Indicates the alert type.

Description

A brief description of the alert.

Queue

The queue associated with the alert.

Priority

Indicates the priority of the alert.

Status

The alert status.

Owner

The user who raised the alert.

Raised On

The date and time the alert was raised.

19.9 Status Audit Details
You can view a list of status audit for the move request in this screen.
Table 19–13 Status Audit Details, Move Request
Fields
Activity Group

The requesting department. Valid values include
RECEIPT, VAS, PACKING and QC.

For Activity Code

The activity code associated with the activity group.

Node

Node associated with the move request.

Move Request #

Move request number associated with the move
request.

Requested By

User who requested the move.

Status

Indicates status of the move request.

Has Exceptions

Priority

Priority of the move request.

Move Request Console Screens

263

Move Request Line Details

Table 19–14

Status Audit Details, Status Audit List

Fields
Old Status

Old status of the move request.

Old Status Date

Previous date on which status of the move request
was changed.

New Status

New status of the move request.

New Status Date

Date on which move request was changed to new
status.

19.10 Cancellation Reason
You can enter appropriate reason for cancelling a move request in this
screen.
Table 19–15

Cancellation Reason

Fields
Reason Code

Select the applicable reason for the cancellation.

Reason Text

Enter any additional comments for the cancellation.

19.11 Move Request Line Details
You can view move request line details for items or containers in this
screen.
Table 19–16

Move Request Line Details, Move Request Line Header

View Icon
This action takes you to the Move Request Line
Activity Demand where you can view a list of activity
demands for the move request line.
Fields
Move Request #

264

User Guide

Move request number associated with the move
request.

Move Request Line Details

Table 19–16 Move Request Line Details, Move Request Line Header
Target Location

Location where the task ends.

Source Location

Location where the task starts.

Enterprise

Enterprise associated with the request.

Requested Quantity

Quantity in the Item's unit of measure that is required
to be moved.

Is Cancelled

Indicates whether the request is cancelled.

Released Quantity

Quantity in the Item's unit of measure for which tasks
have been created.

Released

Indicates whether a line is fully tasked.

Has Exceptions

Table 19–17 Move Request Line Details, Move Request Line Details
Fields
Item Id

The Item ID

Product Class

Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the container.

Ship By Date

The date by which the item must be shipped so that it
is usable.

Inventory Status

Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.

Segment Type

A segment type indicates an inventory category.
Typical values are MTC – Made to Customer, and MTO
- Made to Order.

Move Request Console Screens

265

Move Request Line Activity Demand

Table 19–17

Move Request Line Details, Move Request Line Details

Fields
Segment

A segment holds either the specific buyer or specific
order number.

Country Of Origin

The manufacturing country code.

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the request.

Serial #

The serial number associated with the request.

Target Location

The location where the task ends.

19.12 Move Request Line Activity Demand
You can view a list of activity demand for the move request line in this
screen.
Table 19–18
Header

Move Request Line Activity Demand, Move Request Line

Fields
Move Request #

Move request number associated with the move
request.

Target Location

Location where the task ends.

Source Location

Location where the task starts.

Enterprise

Enterprise associated with the request.

Requested Quantity

Quantity in the Item's unit of measure that is required
to be moved.

Is Cancelled

Indicates whether the request is cancelled.

Released Quantity

Quantity in the Item's unit of measure for which tasks
have been created.

Released

Indicates whether a line is fully tasked.

Has Exceptions

266

User Guide

Activity Demand

Table 19–19 Move Request Line Activity Demand, Activity Demand List
Actions
Delete

This action allows you to delete the selected activity
demands.

Fields
Location ID

The item location in the node. Click this link to go to
the Activity Demand screen where you can view the
activity demand details for the selected location.

Activity Code

The activity to be performed on items belonging to the
work order.

Pallet Id

The pallet LPN that belong to the work order.

Case Id

The case LPN that belong to the work order.

Item ID

The items that belong to the work order.

Demand Quantity

The current demand for the item.

Satisfied Quantity

The extent to which the demand is satisfied.

Demand Satisfied

Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.

19.13 Activity Demand
You can view the activity demand details for the selected location in this
screen.
Table 19–20 Activity Demand, Activity Demand
Fields
From Activity Group

The requesting department. Valid values include
RECEIPT, SHIPPING, VAS, PACKING and QC.

From Activity Code

The activity code associated with the activity group.

Node

The node associated with the activity demand.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the activity demand.

Priority

The priority of the demand.

Is Infinite Demand

Indicates if the demand is infinite.

Move Request Console Screens

267

Activity Demand

Table 19–20

Activity Demand, Activity Demand

Fields
Demand Quantity

The current demand for the item.

Satisfied Quantity

The extent to which the demand is satisfied.

Demand Satisfied

Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.

Table 19–21

Activity Demand, Activity Demand Details

Fields
Demand Location Id

The location where demand exists.
Choose the lookup icon to find the specific location you
want to use.

Pallet Id

The pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case Id

The case LPN associated with the container.

Item ID

The items associated with the activity demand.

Product Class

Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Inventory Status

Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.

Segment Type

The segment type associated with the activity
demand.

Segment

The segment number associated with the activity
demand.

Table 19–22

Activity Demand, Activity Demand References

Fields

268

From Shipment No

Indicates inventory associated with the shipment.

For Shipment No

The shipment number associated with the shipment
line.

User Guide

Activity Demand

Table 19–22 Activity Demand, Activity Demand References
Fields
For Shipment Line No

The shipment line number for which the demand
exists.

From Work Order #

The work order number associated with the activity
demand.

For Work Order #

The work order number for which the demand was
placed.

Move Request #

The move request number associated with the activity
demand.

Move Request Console Screens

269

Activity Demand

270

User Guide

20
Location Inventory Console Screens
The operations in a warehouse are broken into different processes such
as receiving, picking, packing, VAS, returns. It is critical to capture and
track inventory at granular levels for these processes. Visibility is
required at the granular level to provide comprehensive management of
inventory in a warehouse.
Location Inventory Console provides:
Q

Comprehensive visibility to inventory at an enterprise and node level.
Extensive search capabilities using granular level information such as
serial number, lot number at a warehouse location.

Ability to alter inventory at a location level.

Ability to modify granular inventory attributes at a location.

Visibility to audits of inventory changes at a location level.

20.1 Location Inventory Search By Item
You can search for location inventory for a particular item with the help
of this screen.
Table 20–1

Location Inventory Search By Item

Fields
Node

Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.

Location Inventory Console Screens

271

Location Inventory Search By Item

Table 20–1 Location Inventory Search By Item
Fields

272

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Item ID

Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.

Product Class

Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.

Unit Of Measure

Select the item’s unit of measure you are searching
for, if applicable.

Inventory Status

Select the inventory status of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.

Zone

Enter the zone you want to search for, if applicable.

Location

Enter the location ID you want to search for, if
applicable.

Locations Frozen

Select the appropriate check boxes to search for
locations that are frozen for pick, and/or due to count
variance, if applicable.

Show Inventory From
Consumable
Organizations

Select to include a consumable organization’s
inventory as part of the search.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

User Guide

Location Inventory Search By Container

Note: When Inventory Organizations, say E1, V1 and V2
have items with the same GTIN but different Item ID in
different catalogs, then the following needs to be selected
as a search criteria to search for an inventory by item:
Q

Consuming inventory organization (E1) should be
specified as an Enterprise

Item Id

UOM

Select Show Inventory From Consumable
Organizations.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Note: If you want to view the entire inventory of an item
across enterprises with the same GTIN for different catalogs,
select the Show Inventory From Consumable Organizations
box, enter the UOM, Enterprise associated with the item, and
the Item ID.

The Location Inventory screen displays as a result of location inventory
search by item.

20.2 Location Inventory Search By Container
You can search for location inventory for a particular container with the
help of this screen.

Location Inventory Console Screens

273

Location Inventory Search By Additional Attributes

Table 20–2 Location Inventory Search By Container
Fields
Node

Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Pallet ID

Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

Enter the case LPN associated with the container.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Location Inventory screen displays as a result of location inventory
search by container.

20.3 Location Inventory Search By Additional
Attributes
You can search for location inventory by additional attributes with the
help of this screen.
Table 20–3 Location Inventory Search By Additional Attributes
Fields

274

Field

Description

Node

Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.

User Guide

Location Inventory Search By Segment

Table 20–3

Location Inventory Search By Additional Attributes

Fields
Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Item ID

Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.

Serial #

Enter the serial number associated with the item you
are searching for, if applicable.

Country Of Origin

Enter the manufacturing country code, if applicable.

Ship By Date

Enter the date by which the item must be shipped, if
applicable.

Receipt #

Enter the receipt number, if applicable.

Inventory Age (days)

Enter the number of days that inventory has been in
the node, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Location Inventory screen displays as a result of location inventory
search by additional attributes.

20.4 Location Inventory Search By Segment
You can search for location inventory that fall within a particular segment
with the help of this screen.

Location Inventory Console Screens

275

Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes

Table 20–4 Location Inventory Search By Segment
Fields
Field

Description

Node

Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Item ID

Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.

Segment Type

Select the segment type of the item you are searching
for, if applicable.

Segment #

Enter the segment number of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Location Inventory screen displays as a result of location inventory
search by segment.

20.5 Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes
You can search for location inventory by tag attributes with the help of
this screen.

276

User Guide

Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes

Table 20–5

Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes

Fields
Field

Description

Node

Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Item ID

Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.

Product Class

Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.

Unit Of Measure

Select the item’s unit of measure you are searching
for, if applicable.

Tag #

Select the tag number associated with the
tag-controlled item.
The tag number displays only when the node that is
tracking inventory is configured to capture the tag
attributes in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Location Inventory screen displays as a result of location inventory
search by tag attributes.

Location Inventory Console Screens

277

Location Inventory

20.6 Location Inventory
The Location Inventory list window displays the results of a location
inventory search. You can perform actions at a single location or multiple
locations by selecting the check boxes of the locations you want to
perform an action on and choosing the applicable action from the action
bar.
Table 20–6 Location Inventory, Items
Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Location Inventory Details
screen where you can view location inventory details
for the selected items.

Change Inventory
Attributes

This action takes you to the Change Location
Inventory Attributes (Criteria) screen where you can
modify inventory attributes for an item.

Node Level Inventory

This action takes you to the Node Level Inventory
screen where you can view item’s inventory at a node
level.

Create Count Request

This action takes you to the Create Count Request
screen where you can create count requests for the
selected items.

Create Move Request

This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.
Note: If you have multiple inventories at a location,
you cannot create a move request. Instead, go to the
Location Inventory Details screen to create a move
request.

Fields

278

Location

The location associated with the item. Click this link to
go to the Location Details screen where you can view
location details.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Item ID

The item ID.

User Guide

Location Inventory

Table 20–6

Location Inventory, Items

Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Description

A brief description of the item.

Status

Inventory Status: Refers to an inventory sub
classification based on the results of the inventory
control processes within the warehouse.

Quantity

The item quantity that exists in the location.

Table 20–7

Location Inventory, Containers

A case or pallet with LPNs that are directly associated with the criteria
displays. Given an LPN as a criteria, the next level of LPNs associated
with the criteria LPN displays.
Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view container details.

Create Count Request

This action takes you to the Create Count Request
screen where you can create a count request for the
selected containers.

Create Move Requests

This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.

Break LPN

This action takes you to the Break License Plate
Number screen where you can break an LPN to

remove contents from the LPN.

Fields
Location

The location associated with the container. Click this
link to go to the Location Details screen where you can
view location details.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the container.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the container.

Location Inventory Console Screens

279

Location Inventory Details

Table 20–7 Location Inventory, Containers
Receipt #

The number used to identify all stock attached to a
receipt.

Is Outbound Container

Displays ’Y’ if the container is an outbound container.

20.7 Location Inventory Details
This screen provides visibility to item inventory details at a location.
Table 20–8 Location Inventory Details, Location Inventory
View Icons
Audit - This icon provides visibility to location
inventory audits at a node. For more information, see
the Location Inventory Audit List.
Serials - This icon takes you to the Location Inventory
Serial Details screen where you can view location
inventory serial details at a node.
Fields

280

Node

The node associated with the item.

Location

The location associated with the item. Click this link to
go to the Location Details screen where you can view
location details.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Item ID

The item ID. Click this link to go to the Item Details
screen where you can view item details.

Item Description

Description of the item.

Product Class

Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

On Hand Quantity

Number of units of the item this location.

Pend In Quantity

Number of units of the item having open tasks to
move into the location.

User Guide

Location Inventory Details

Table 20–8

Location Inventory Details, Location Inventory

Pend Out Quantity

Number of units of this item having open tasks to
move out of the location.

Net Quantity

Total number of units of the item available, calculated
as OnHand Qty + PendIn Qty - PendOut Qty.

Table 20–9

Location Inventory Details, Location Inventory Details

Actions
Adjust Location
Inventory

This action allows you to adjust inventory at a
location. For more information, see the Adjust Location
Inventory Details screen.

Transfer Inventory
Ownership

This action takes you to the Transfer Inventory
Ownership screen.

Change Inventory
Attributes

This action takes you to the Change Location
Inventory Attributes (Criteria) screen where you can
modify inventory attributes for an item.

Create Move Requests

This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.

Fields
Status

Inventory Status: Refers to an inventory sub
classification based on the results of the inventory
control processes within the warehouse.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the criteria.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the criteria.

Quantity

Number of units of the item on-hand at the location

Pend Out Quantity

Number of units of this item waiting to move out of
the location.

Pend In Quantity

Number of units of this item waiting to move into the
location.

Segment Type

Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.

Location Inventory Console Screens

281

Location Inventory Serial Details

Table 20–9 Location Inventory Details, Location Inventory Details
Segment #

Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.

COO

Country Of Origin: Manufacturing country code

Ship By Date

Date by which the item must be shipped so that it is
usable.

FIFO #

FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order in which stock arrived at
the node. This is used to send out items that arrived
first than the ones that arrived later.

Receipt #

The number used to identify all inventory attached to
a receipt.

Tag #

The tag number associated with the serial number.
The tag number displays only when the node that is
tracking inventory is configured to capture the tag
attributes in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Location Inventory Tag
Details screen where you can location inventory tag
details.

20.8 Location Inventory Serial Details
You can view location inventory serial details for the selected item with
the help of this screen.
Table 20–10

Item Serial Details, Item

Fields

282

Node

The node associated with the item.

Location

Location Identifier.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Item ID

The item ID.

User Guide

Location Details

Table 20–10 Item Serial Details, Item
Fields
Product Class

Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).

Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure

Item Description

Description of the item

On Hand Quantity

Number of units of the item on-hand at this location.

Pend In Quantity

Number of units of the item having open tasks to
move into the location.

Pend Out Quantity

Number of units of this item having open tasks to
move out of the location.

Net Quantity

Total number of units of the item available, calculated
as On Hand Quantity + Pend In Quantity - Pend Out
Quantity.

Table 20–11 Location Inventory Serial Details, Serial List
Actions
Create Move Requests

This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.

Fields
Serial #

Serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial # 1

Component serial numbers of the item.

Secondary Serial # 2

Component serial numbers of the item.

Secondary Serial # 3

Component serial numbers of the item.

20.9 Location Details
You can view location details at a node with the help of this screen.

Location Inventory Console Screens

283

Location Details

Table 20–12

Location Details, Location Information

Actions
Dedications

This action takes you to the Location SKU Dedications
screen where you can view location SKU

dedications at node.

Fields
Location

Location Identifier.

Location Type

Type of location in the warehouse. Valid values are
INTRANSIT (Mobile locations), STAGING (drop-off,
sorting), VIRTUAL, REGULAR and DOCK.

Zone

Zone to which the location belongs.

Velocity Code

Velocity code associated to the location.
The velocity code associates the location to a SKUs
throughput. Typically, fast moving items are stored in
the lower level locations, or locations reachable by
hand, in the bulk zone.

Freeze Move In

Displays 'Y' if the location is frozen for putaway, else
displays 'N'.

Freeze Move Out

Displays ’Y’ if the location is frozen for pick, else
displays 'N'.

Storage Code

Storage code associated with the location.
Location storage code allows the warehouse to store
items that match the storage profile of a location. For
example, hazardous inflammable items need locations
close to fire extinguishers.

284

In Staging Location

Displays the staging location for inventory being
putaway to the location.

Out Staging Location

Displays the staging location for inventory being
retrieved from the location

Dedicated Location

Displays 'Y', if location is dedicated to a SKU. Displays
'N', if location is not dedicated to any SKU.

User Guide

Location Details

Table 20–13 Location Details, Location Size Information
Fields
Location Size Code

Defines the capacity of a location.

Infinite Capacity

Display a checked box, if the size code is marked as
INFINITE

Maximum Weight

The maximum weight that a location can hold in the
UOM.
The weight UOM is populated automatically from the
node's locale.

Length

The length measurement of the location in the UOM.
The length UOM is populated automatically from the
node’s locale.

Width

The width measurement of the location in the UOM.
The width UOM is populated automatically from the
node’s locale.

Height

The height measure of the location in the UOM.
The height UOM is populated automatically from the
node’s locale.

Table 20–14 Location Details, Location Transactional Attributes
Fields
Freeze On Variance

Indicates if the location is frozen due to count
variance.

Fill Code

Fill code indicates if the location is Empty, Partially Full
or Full. These values are automatically updated during
inventory updates at the location.

Available Volume

Available volume indicates unoccupied physical volume
of the location.

Available Weight

Available weight indicates the additional physical
weight the location can hold.

Location Inventory Console Screens

285

Location SKU Dedications

20.10 Location SKU Dedications
You can view location SKU Dedications at a node with the help of this
screen.
Table 20–15

Location SKU Dedications, Locations

Fields
Location

Location Identifier.

Location Type

Type of location in the warehouse. Valid values are
INTRANSIT (Mobile locations), STAGING (drop-off,
sorting), VIRTUAL, REGULAR and DOCK.

Zone

Zone to which the location belongs

Velocity Code

Freeze Move In

Displays 'Y' if the location is frozen for putaway, else
displays 'N'.

Freeze Move Out

Displays ’Y’ if the location is frozen for pick, else
displays 'N'.

Storage Code

286

In Staging Location

Displays the staging location for inventory being
putaway to the location.

Out Staging Location

Displays the staging location for inventory being
retrieved from the location

Dedicated Location

If 'Y' if the location is dedicated to a SKU. If 'N', if the
location is not dedicated to a SKU.

User Guide

Item Details

Table 20–16 Location SKU Dedications, SKU Dedications
Fields
Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Item ID

The item ID.

Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure

Status

The current inventory status.
Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.

Segment Type

Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.

Segment #

Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.

Minimum Quantity

The minimum SKU quantity that should be maintained
in the location.
The inventory monitor uses this value to trigger
replenishments from the bulk area.

Maximum Quantity

Enter the maximum SKU quantity that the location can
hold.
The inventory monitor uses this value to estimate the
quantity to be replenished from the bulk area. The
quantity replenished is the difference between the
maximum quantity and the minimum quantity,
considering the demand at the location and inventory
UOM for the SKU.

20.11 Item Details
You can view location inventory item details at a node with the help of
this screen.

Location Inventory Console Screens

287

Item Details

Table 20–17

Item Details, Item Attributes

Fields
Item ID

The item ID.

Organization

The organization code associated with the Item.

Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Unit Cost

The cost of one unit of the item.

GTIN

The item’s Global Trade Item Number.

Is Hazardous Item

Displays ’Y’ if the item is a hazardous item, or 'N' if it
is not a hazardous item.

Item Description

A brief description of the item.

Table 20–18

Item Details, Inventory Tracking Attributes

Fields
Serial Tracked

Displays 'Y' if the item is serial-tracked, else displays
'N'.

Tag Tracked

Displays 'Y' if the item is tagged, else displays 'N'.

Time Sensitive

Displays 'Y' if the item is time sensitive, else displays
'N'.

Table 20–19

Item Details, Standard Quantities

Fields

288

Alternate UOM

The item’s alternate unit of measure.

Units

Units of the item for the alternate UOM.

User Guide

Item Details

Table 20–20 Item Details, Hazmat Information
Fields
Proper Shipping Name

The proper shipping name or description of the
hazardous item.

Hazard Class

The item’s hazard class.

UN Number

The four-digit number that identifies the hazardous
items (such as explosives and poisonous materials) of
commercial importance. This is widely used in
international commerce. For example, the contents
packaged in the shipping containers.

Packing Group

Indicates the degree of danger of a hazardous item
within its hazard class or division, and the type of
packaging required for the item. The valid values are:
Packing Group I - high danger, Packing Group II medium danger, Packing Group III - Low danger.

Label Code

The label code of the hazardous item.

Special Provisions

Special provisions to be provided for shipping the
hazardous item.

Symbol

Indicates the hazmat symbol of the hazardous item.

Sort Order

A unique number assigned to identify a hazardous
item.

Exception

The packing exception for shipping the hazardous
item.

Packing Instructions
NonBulk

Indicates additional requirements for non-bulk
packaging.

Bulk

Indicates additional requirements for bulk packaging.

Passenger Air

Indicates the maximum quantity that can be shipped
when shipping on a passenger aircraft or rail.

Cargo Air

Indicates the maximum quantity that can be shipped
when shipping on a cargo aircraft.

Vessel

The vessel stowage location code used to identify
where the cargo is stowed on a vessel.

Vessel SP

The other vessel stowage plans.

Location Inventory Console Screens

289

Location Inventory Tag Details

20.12 Location Inventory Tag Details
You can view location inventory tag details at a node with the help of this
screen.
Table 20–21

Location Inventory Tag Details, Location Inventory

Fields
Node

The node associated with the item.

Location

Location Identifier.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Item ID

The item ID.

Item Description

Description of the item.

Product Class

Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

Unit of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Inventory Status

inventory Status: Refers to an inventory sub
classification based on the results of the inventory
control processes within the warehouse.

Tag Details

The tag details are restricted to a container level or at
an item level at the location based on the appropriate
action chosen.

Table 20–22

Location Inventory Tag Details, Tag Details

Fields
The item’s tag information displays only when the node that is tracking
inventory is configured to capture the tag attributes in all operations performed
within the node. For more information about capturing the tag attributes, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform Configuration
Guide.

290

Revision #

Revision number associated with the tag.

Lot #

Lot number associated with the tag.

Batch #

Batch number associated with the tag.

User Guide

Change Location Inventory Attributes

Table 20–23 Location Inventory Tag Details, Tag Attributes
Fields
Manufacturing Date

Lot manufacturing date

Lot Attribute 1

Other lot attribute

Lot Attribute 2

Other lot attribute

Lot Attribute 3

Other lot attribute

Lot Key Reference

Stores reference information for the lot number.

Lot Expiration Date

Expiry date of Lot associated with the tag.

20.13 Change Location Inventory Attributes
(Criteria)
You can enter the criteria to modify location inventory attributes for an
item with the help of this screen.
Table 20–24 Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory
Fields
Node

The node associated with the item.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Location

Location Identifier.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the criteria.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the criteria, if applicable

Item ID

The item ID.

Unit of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Click Proceed. The Change Location Inventory Attributes screen displays.

20.14 Change Location Inventory Attributes
You can modify location inventory attributes for an item with the help of
this screen.

Location Inventory Console Screens

291

Change Location Inventory Attributes

Table 20–25

Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory

Fields
Node

The node associated with the item.

Location

Location Identifier.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the criteria.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the criteria, if applicable

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Item ID

The item ID.

Unit of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Item Description

A brief description of the item.

Table 20–26
Attributes

Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory

Fields

292

Product Class

Select the product class of the item.

Inventory Status

Select the inventory status of the item.

Country Of Origin

Select the manufacturing country code

Ship By Date

Enter the date by which the item must be shipped.

Segment Type

Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.

Segment #

Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.

Serial #

The item’s serial number displays if there is only one
quantity at the location.

Receipt #

The number used to identify all stock attached to a
receipt.

FIFO #

Enter the FIFO number.

Revision #

Revision Number

User Guide

Node Level Inventory

Table 20–26 Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory
Attributes
Fields
Lot #

The lot number of the line item packaged in the
container.

Quantity

Number of units of the item on-hand at this location.

Table 20–27 Change Location Inventory Attributes, Audit Reason
Fields
Adjustment Reason
Code

Reason for the inventory transaction. Filled in typically
when user does an inventory adjustment.

Reason Text

Description of the adjustment status.

Table 20–28 Change Location Inventory Attributes, References
Fields
Reference#1

Generic references.

Reference#2

Generic references.

Reference#3

Generic references.

Reference#4

Generic references.

Reference#5

Generic references.

20.15 Node Level Inventory
You can view node level inventory for an item with the help of this
screen.
Table 20–29 Node Level Inventory, Item Information
Fields
Node

The node associated with the item.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Location Inventory Console Screens

293

Node Level Inventory

Table 20–29

Node Level Inventory, Item Information

Fields
Item ID

The item ID.

Product Class

Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Description

A brief description of the item.

Table 20–30

Node Level Inventory, Supply

Fields
Supply Type

Indicates the supply type associated with the
inventory status. The supply type indicates
classification of the inventory. This value is populated
automatically by the Sterling WMS from the inventory
status configuration. Typical values include ONHAND,
INTRANSIT.

Quantity

The total quantity for the supply type against an item
at the node.

On Hand Supply

Number of units of the item on-hand at this location.

Table 20–31

Node Level Inventory, Demand

Fields

294

Demand Type

Indicates the type of demand against the inventory. A
demand type is associated with events against an
order including order create, order release and the
supply type for available inventory. Typical values
include ALLOCATED, FORECAST.

Quantity

The total quantity for the demand type against an item
at the node.

User Guide

Container Details

Table 20–31 Node Level Inventory, Demand
Fields
Promised Demand

Displays 'Y', if the demand is a promised demand, else
displays 'N'. A demand is promised if placed against an
outbound order or work order

Allocated Demand

Displays 'Y', if the demand is an allocated demand,
else displays 'N'. A demand is allocated upon release
against an outbound order or work order.

20.16 Container Details
You can view container details at a location with the help of this screen.
Table 20–32 Container Details, Container
View Icons
Audit - This icon provides visibility to location
inventory audits at a node. For more information, see
the Location Inventory Audit List.
Serials - This icon takes you to the Container Serial
Details screen where you can view container’s serial
details at a node.
Fields
Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the criteria, if applicable.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the criteria, if applicable.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the Container.

Node

The node associate with the container.

Location

The location associated with the container. Click this
link to go to the Location Details screen where you can
view location details.

Receipt #

The number used to identify all stock attached to a
receipt.

Parent Container ID

The parent container ID of the case LPN displays, if
applicable.

Location Inventory Console Screens

295

Container Details

Table 20–32

Container Details, Container

Outer Most Case ID

The outermost case LPN of the case LPN displays, if
applicable

Is Outbound Container

Indicates whether the container is an outbound
container.

Table 20–33

Container Details, Container Details

Actions
View Item Details

This action takes you to the Item Details screen where
you can view the item details.

Adjust Container
Inventory

This action allows you to adjust inventory at a
location. For more information, see the Adjust Location
Inventory Details screen.

Change Inventory
Attributes

This action takes you to the Change Location
Inventory Attributes (Criteria) screen where you can
modify inventory attributes for an item.

Create Move Requests

This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.

Fields

296

Case Id

Case LPN associated with the criteria.

Item ID

The item ID.

Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Description

A brief description of the item.

Status

Inventory Status: Refers to an inventory sub
classification based on the results of the inventory
control processes within the warehouse.

Quantity

Number of units of the item on-hand at this location.

Pend Out Quantity

Number of units of this item having open tasks to
move out of the location.

User Guide

Container Serial Details

Table 20–33 Container Details, Container Details
Segment Type

Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.

Segment #

Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.

COO

Country Of Origin: Manufacturing country code.

Ship By Date

Date by which the item must be shipped so that it is
usable.

FIFO #

FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order in which stock arrived at
the node. This is used to send out items that arrived
first than the ones that arrived later.

Receipt #

The number used to identify all stock attached to a
receipt.

Tag #

Tag associated with the serial number.
The tag number displays only when the node that is
tracking inventory is configured to capture the tag
attributes in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Location Inventory Tag
Details where you can view the tag details.

20.17 Container Serial Details
You can view container’s serial details at a node with the help of this
screen.
Table 20–34 Container Serial Details, Container
Fields
Pallet ID

The pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

The case LPN associated with the container.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the container.

Node

The node associated with the item.

Location Inventory Console Screens

297

Create Count Request

Table 20–34

Container Serial Details, Container

Fields
Location

The location associated with the item.

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the container
items.

Table 20–35

Container Serial Details, Serial List

Actions
Create Move Requests

This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.

Fields
Serial #

The item’s serial number.

Item ID

The items’ item ID.

The product class of the item.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Description

A brief description of the item.

20.18 Create Count Request
You can create a count request for the selected items or containers in
this screen.

298

User Guide

Create Move Request

Table 20–36 Create Count Request, Count Request Information
Fields
Priority

Requesting User ID

The current user id is automatically populated by the
system.
Enter the requesting user ID associated with the count
request, if applicable.

Start No Earlier Than

The current system date is automatically populated.
Enter a different start date and time for the count
request, if applicable.

Finish No Later Than

Enter the end date and time for the count request, if
applicable.

Click OK.

20.19 Create Move Request
You can create a move request for the selected items or containers in
this screen.
Table 20–37 Create Move Request, Move Request Header
Fields
Activity Group

Select the activity group for the move request you are
creating.

For Activity Code

Select the activity code associated with the activity
group.

Move Request #

Enter a move request number, if applicable.
The system generates a unique request number
automatically, if you do not enter any value.

Location Inventory Console Screens

299

Break License Plate Number

Table 20–37

Create Move Request, Move Request Header

Fields
Priority

Target Location

Enter the target location for the move request you
want to create. A target location is typically entered
when creating move requests for retrieval.
This field becomes mandatory if you do not specify the
Source Location.

Requested By

Enter the user that requested for move request
creation.
The system automatically displays the current user.

Start No Earlier Than

Enter the start date and time of the tasks for the move
requests, if applicable.
The system automatically displays the current date
and time.

Finish No Later Than

Release immediately

Check the check box if you want to immediately
release the move request being created.

Click OK.

20.20 Break License Plate Number
When you break an LPN, all contents from the LPN are removed and
placed directly into the current location. On breaking an LPN, the LPN is
deleted from inventory. Use this screen to enter appropriate reasons for
breaking an LPN.

300

User Guide

Break License Plate Number

Note: You cannot remove contents from LPNs for an
outbound containers.

Table 20–38 Break LPN Reason, Break LPN Reason Code
Fields
Reason Code

Enter the applicable reason for breaking LPN or search
for the reason code.
Click the lookup icon to select the adjust reason code
from the list.
All reason codes not associated with the bin location
are displayed.

Reason Text

Enter additional information as to why the LPN was
broken.

Click OK. The system places all the contents of the LPN into the location
and removes the LPN from inventory. On removing the LPN from
inventory, the LPN cannot be built again.

Location Inventory Console Screens

301

Break License Plate Number

302

User Guide

21
Adjust Location Inventory Screens
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Adjust Location
Inventory screens.

21.1 Adjust Location Inventory Criteria
You can enter the adjust location inventory criteria in this screen.
Table 21–1

Adjust Location Inventory, Adjust Location Inventory

Fields
Node

Select the node associated with the Item, if applicable.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are adjusting the inventory
for, if applicable.

Location

Enter the location ID you want to adjust inventory for.

Pallet ID

Enter the pallet LPN you are adjusting inventory for.
Note: You can also enter a non-existing pallet LPN.

Case ID

Enter the case LPN you are adjusting inventory for.
Note: You can also enter a non-existing case LPN.

Item ID

Enter the item ID for which you want to adjust the
quantity.
This field is mandatory.

Product Class

Select the product class for the item you are adjusting
for.
This field is mandatory.

Adjust Location Inventory Screens

303

Adjust Location Inventory Details

Table 21–1 Adjust Location Inventory, Adjust Location Inventory
Fields
Unit Of Measure

Select the unit of measure of the item you are
adjusting for.
This field is mandatory.

Inventory Status

Select the inventory status of the item you are
adjusting for.
This field is mandatory.

Click Proceed. The Adjust Location Inventory Details screen displays
where you can view location inventory details and adjust the quantity
appropriately.

Note: Location ID is mandatory if case ID or pallet ID is

not entered.

21.2 Adjust Location Inventory Details
You can view the location’s inventory details and adjust the quantity
appropriately in this screen.
Table 21–2 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Adjust Location
Inventory
Fields

304

Node

The node associated with the item.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Location

Location identifier.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN to be adjusted.

Case ID

Case LPN to be adjusted.

Item ID

The item ID.

User Guide

Adjust Location Inventory Details

Table 21–2
Inventory

Adjust Location Inventory Details, Adjust Location

Product Class

Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).

Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Item Description

A brief description of the item.

Inventory Status

Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.

Table 21–3
Attributes

Adjust Location Inventory Details, Additional Inventory

Fields
Receipt #

Enter the receipt number for the inventory, if
applicable.
The number used to identify all inventory attached to
a receipt.

FIFO #

Enter the FIFO number to associate with the
inventory, if applicable.
FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order in which inventory arrived
at the node. This is used to send out inventory that
arrived first than the ones that arrived later.

Country Of Origin

Enter the manufacturing country code to associate
with the inventory.

Segment Type

Enter the segment type to associate with the
inventory.
A segment type indicates an inventory category.
Typical values are MTC - Made To Customer or MTO Made to Order.

Adjust Location Inventory Screens

305

Adjust Location Inventory Details

Table 21–3 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Additional Inventory
Attributes
Fields
Segment #

Enter the segment number to associate with the
inventory.
Typically, a segment holds either the specific buyer or
specific order number that requires dedication.

Ship By Date

Enter date by which the item must be shipped, if
applicable.
Used for products with shelf life or perishables.

Table 21–4 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Add Serials
Fields
Serial #

Enter the serial number of the items.

Click
to go to the serial range panel, where you can enter the serial range of
the items.
From Serial #

Enter the start serial number.

To Serial #

Enter the end serial number.

Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary

serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.

Table 21–5 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Quantity
Actions
Adjustment Cost

This action takes you to the Adjustment Cost Details
where you can view an item’s adjustment cost

details.

306

User Guide

Adjustment Cost Details

Table 21–5

Adjust Location Inventory Details, Quantity

Fields
Current Quantity

Number of units of the item on-hand at the location.

Adjust Quantity

Enter the quantity you want to adjust.
Use '-' sign before entering quantity to reduce
inventory.

Table 21–6

Adjust Location Inventory Details, Modification Reason

Fields
Reason Code

This field is mandatory.
Select the reason code associated with adjustment.
This is used for tracking and reporting purposes.

Reason Text

Table 21–7

Enter text to indicate the reason for the adjustment.

Adjust Location Inventory Details, References

Fields
Reference #1

Enter any other references to be used.
Typical values are order #, count request #.

Reference #2

Enter any other references to be used.
Typical values are order #, count request #.

Reference #3

Enter any other references to be used.
Typical values are order #, count request #.

Reference #4

Enter any other references to be used.
Typical values are order #, count request #.

Reference #5

Enter any other references to be used.
Typical values are order #, count request #.

21.3 Adjustment Cost Details
You can view the adjustment cost details for an item in this screen.

Adjust Location Inventory Screens

307

Adjustment Cost Details

Table 21–8 Adjustment Cost Details, Adjustment Cost
Fields

308

Item ID

The item ID.

Item Description

Description of the item.

Current Quantity

Number of units of the item on-hand at the location.

Adjustment Quantity

Number of adjusting units of the item at the location.

Quantity After
Adjustment

Number of units of the item on-hand after making the
adjustments.

Unit Cost

The unit cost of an item.

Adjustment Cost

The adjustment cost for an item.

User Guide

22
Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Accounting Bin
Adjustment screens.

22.1 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details Criteria
You can enter the accounting bin adjustment details criteria in this
screen.
Table 22–1 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details, Accounting Bin
Adjustment Details
Fields
Node

The node to which you need to empty the accounting
bin.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to empty the
accounting bin from the drop-down list, if applicable.

Location

Enter the identifier of the location to which you want
to empty the accounting bin.

Click Proceed. The Accounting Bin Adjustment Details screen displays.

22.2 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details
You can view the inventory details for a location and empty the
accounting bin appropriately.

Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens

309

Accounting Bin Adjustment Details

22.2.1 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details
You can view the inventory details and empty the accounting bin
appropriately
Table 22–2 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details, Accounting Bin
Adjustment Details
Fields
Node

The node to which you need to empty the accounting
bin.

Enterprise

The enterprise for which the accounting bin needs to
be emptied.

Location

The identifier of the location to which the accounting
bin needs to be emptied.

22.2.2 Location Inventory Details
You can view the inventory details for a particular location.
Table 22–3 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details, Location Inventory
Details
Fields

310

# of Inventory Items

Displays number of inventory items in the accounting
bin.

Total Value

Displays the total cost of all items in the accounting
bin.

User Guide

Accounting Bin Adjustment Details

Note: Depending on the adjustments made in the count
location, the inventory in the bin location may be positive
or negative. The total number of units and the total value
of all items in the accounting bin depends on the positive
or negative inventory that is present in the bin location.
For example, if the bin location has:

ITEM01 = +10 units
ITEM02 = -15 units
The total number of units present in the bin location is -5
units and not +25 units.

22.2.3 Accounting Bin Adjustment Reasons
You can select the reason for cleaning out the accounting bin.
Table 22–4 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details, Accounting Bin
Adjustment Reasons
Fields
Reason Code

Select the appropriate reason code for cleaning out
the accounting bin.
This field is used for tracking and reporting purposes.
This field is mandatory.

Reason Text

Enter the reason for cleaning out the accounting bin, if
applicable.

Note: When you click the Save button, the system raises
the ZEROOUT_LOC_IS_INITIATED event on the ZEROOUT_
LOCATION_INV transaction, which is triggered externally.
For more information about externally triggered
transactions, see the Sterling Warehouse Management
System: Configuration Guide.

Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens

311

Accounting Bin Adjustment Details

312

User Guide

23
Transfer Inventory Ownership
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Transfer Inventory
Ownership screens.

23.1 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes
You can transfer the inventory ownership for an item at a particular
location with the help of the Transfer Inventory Ownership screen.
Table 23–1

Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, Inventory

Field

Description

Node

The node associated with the item.

Location

Location identifier.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the criteria.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the criteria, if applicable

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Item ID

The item ID.

Unit of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Item Description

A brief description of the item.

Table 23–2

Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, Inventory Detail

Field

Description

Product Class

The product class of the item.

Inventory Status

The inventory status of the item.

Transfer Inventory Ownership

313

Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes

Table 23–2 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, Inventory Detail
Field

Description

Country Of Origin

The manufacturing country code.

Ship By Date

The date by which the item must be shipped.

Segment Type

Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.

Segment #

Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer number or specific order number
that requires dedication.

Serial #

The item’s serial number is displayed if there is only
one quantity at the location.

Receipt #

The number used to identify all the stock attached to a
receipt.

FIFO #

The FIFO number.

Table 23–3 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, Transfer Detail
Field

Description

Inventory Organization
Code

Organization code of the consumable inventory
organization.

Quantity

Number of units of the item on-hand at this location.

Table 23–4 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, Audit Reason
Field

Description

Reason Code

Reason for the inventory transaction. Filled in typically
when a user carries out an inventory adjustment.

Reason Text

Description of the adjustment status.

Table 23–5 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, References

314

Field

Description

Reference#1

Generic references.

Reference#2

Generic references.

User Guide

Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes

Table 23–5

Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, References

Field

Description

Reference#3

Generic references.

Reference#4

Generic references.

Reference#5

Generic references.

Transfer Inventory Ownership

315

Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes

316

User Guide

24
Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Print SKU Labels
screens.

24.1 Print Stock Keeping Unit Search By Item
Use this screen to search items for which you want to print the SKU
labels.
Table 24–1

Print SKU Labels Search By Item

Fields
Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to search, if
applicable.
Choose Across Enterprises to search across all
enterprises in the system.

Item ID

Enter the item identifier for which you want to search.

Default Product Class

Select the item’s product class for which you want to
search, if applicable.

Unit Of Measure

Select the item’s unit of measure for which you want
to search, if applicable.

Short Description

Select the item’s short description for which you want
to search, if applicable.

Master Catalog ID

Select the item’s identifier in the master catalog for
which you want to search, if applicable.

Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens

317

Item List

Table 24–1 Print SKU Labels Search By Item
Fields
GTIN

Select the item’s Global Trade Item Number for which
you want to search, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Item List screen displays as a result of your print SKU label search
by item.

24.2 Item List
The Item List window displays the results of an item search. You can
perform actions on a single item or multiple items by selecting the
checkboxes of the items you want to print the labels and choosing the
Print action from the action bar.

318

User Guide

Table 24–2

Item List

Action
Print

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the container’s documents or labels.

Fields
Item ID

The item identifier.

Default PC

The item’s default product class.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Short Description

A brief description of the item.

Master Catalog ID

The item’s identifier in the catalog it belongs to.

Catalog Organization

The organization that owns the catalog containing the
item.

24.3 Print
You can print the SKU labels for hazardous items with the help of this
screen.
Table 24–3

Fields
Print Service Name

Choose the applicable label you want to print.

Printer Name

Choose the printer to print the label from.

No. of Copies

Enter the total number of copies of the label you want
to print.

Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens

319

320

User Guide

25
Receipt Adjustment Screens
Use the Receipt Adjustment screen to adjust the receipt quantity for
inventory that you have already received.

25.1 Receipt Adjustment
Use this screen to enter the inventory adjustment criteria.
Table 25–1

Receipt Adjustment

Fields
Document Type

Select the appropriate document type.
Valid values include Purchase Order and Transfer
Order.

Node

Select the node associated with the receipt.
The node automatically populates based on the user.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the receipt you
are adjusting.

Receipt #

Enter the receipt number to adjusting receipt against.
Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Receipt you want to use.

Pallet ID

Enter the LPN corresponding to the pallet that you
want to adjust receipt of, if applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the Adjust Receipt
window. For more information, see the Adjust Receipt
screen.

Receipt Adjustment Screens

321

Adjust Receipt

Table 25–1 Receipt Adjustment
Fields
Case ID

Enter the LPN corresponding to the case that you want
to adjust receipt of, if applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the Adjust Receipt
window. For more information, see the Adjust Receipt
screen.

Item ID

Enter the item associated with the receipt that you are
adjusting receipt of, if applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the Adjust Receipt
window. For more information, see the Adjust Receipt
screen.
Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Item you want to use.

Product Class

Select the product class associated with the receipt, if
applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the adjustment details
panel.

Unit of Measure

Select the UOM associated with the receipt, if
applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the Adjust Receipt
window. For more information, see the Adjust Receipt
screen.

Serial #

Enter the serial number associated with the receipt, if
applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the Adjust Receipt
window. For more information, see the Adjust Receipt
screen.

Click Proceed. The Adjust Receipt screen is displayed where you can
validate the criteria you entered against the receipt number for filtering
the results.

25.2 Adjust Receipt
This screen enables you to validate the criteria you entered in the Receipt
Adjustment screen against the receipt number for filtering the results.

322

User Guide

Adjust Receipt

Table 25–2

Adjust Receipt, Receipt

Fields
Enterprise Code

The enterprise you are adjusting for is displayed.

Node

The node you are adjusting for is displayed.

Receipt #

The receipt number you are adjusting for is displayed.

Location

The dock location.
Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
location you want to use.

Pallet ID

The LPN corresponding to the pallet you are adjusting
for is displayed, if applicable.

Case ID

The LPN corresponding to the case you are adjusting
for is displayed, if applicable.

Item ID

The item you are adjusting for is displayed, if
applicable.

Product Class

The product class of the item you are adjusting for is
displayed, if applicable.

Unit of Measure

The UOM of the item you are adjusting for is
displayed, if applicable.

Table 25–3

Adjust Receipt, Receipt Lines

Fields
Item ID

The item you are adjusting for is displayed, if
applicable.

Product Class

The product class of the item you are adjusting for is
displayed, if applicable.

Unit of Measure

The UOM of the item you are adjusting for is
displayed, if applicable.

Serial #

The serial number of the item that you are adjusting
for is displayed, if applicable.

Inventory Status

Select the inventory status that you are adjusting for.

Receipt Adjustment Screens

323

Modification Reason

Table 25–3 Adjust Receipt, Receipt Lines
Fields
Quantity

The quantity received for the item, product class and
UOM for the receipt is displayed.

UnReceive Quantity

Enter the quantity that you are removing from the
receipt for the item, product, class, UOM and
inventory status.

Click Adjust. The Modification Reason screen is displayed where you
enter appropriate reasons for adjusting the received quantity.

25.3 Modification Reason
You can enter appropriate reasons for adjusting the received quantity.
Table 25–4 Modification Reason
Fields
Reason Code

Select the applicable reason for the modification.

Reason Text

Enter any additional comments for the modification.

Click OK.

324

User Guide

26
Create Work Order Screens
Work orders are generated in a warehouse to support VAS activities.
These work orders may be generated automatically from an order, based
on min/max levels configured for an item (using events) or created
manually.
The Create Work Order console allows you to create work orders for the
selected service.

26.1 Create Work Order
You can create a work order for VAS related activities with the help of
this screen.
Table 26–1

Create Work Order Screen, Primary Information

Fields
Node

Select the node associated with the work order you
are creating.
The node is automatically populated based on the
user.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the work order
you are creating.

Work Order #

Enter the work order number for the work order you
are creating.
The system automatically generates a unique number
if a value is not entered.

Create Work Order Screens

325

Create Work Order

Table 26–1 Create Work Order Screen, Primary Information
Fields
Service Item Group

Select the appropriate service item group for the work
order you are creating.
Valid values are KITTING, DEKITTING, INVENTORY
CHANGES, INVENTORY COMPLIANCE.
Note: You can create work orders for the
"KITTING" service item group without specifying

the components.

Purpose

Select the purpose associated with the work order you
are creating.
Valid values are Order, Stock, Ship.

Priority

Select the priority for the work order you are creating,
if applicable. Appropriate priority Is assigned to all
tasks for the work order.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low.

Start No Earlier Than

Enter the start date and time for the work order, if
applicable.

Finish No Later Than

Enter the end date and time for the work order, if
applicable

Service Item ID

Enter the service item ID associated with the item you
want to create.
If not entered the service associated with the parent
item in the catalog based on service item group
chosen is populated.

326

Ignore Run Quantity

Select this check box to ignore the run quantity.

Release Immediately

Select this check box if work order is released
immediately on completion of allocation process.

User Guide

Additional Item Details

Table 26–2

Create Work Order Screen, Work Order Item Data

Fields
Item ID

Enter the item created as a result of the work order.
Also referred to as 'Kit Item' or 'Parent Item'.
This is mandatory for service item groups of
KITTING,DE-KITTING, INVENTORY CHANGE,
INVENTORY COMPLIANCE.

Unit Of Measure

Select the unit of measure of the item associated with
the work order you are creating.

Product Class

Select the product class of the item associated with
the work order you are creating

Segment Type

Select the segment type of the item associated with
the work order you are creating, if applicable.
Typical values include 'MTO' - Made to Order or 'MTC' Made To Customer.

Segment

Enter the specific order number or customer number
associated with the work order you are creating.
This is applicable only if Segment Type is chosen.

Requested Quantity

Enter the quantity of the item being created on the
work order.

After entering the relevant information in the above fields, the work
order is created upon clicking the Proceed button. The Work Order
Details screen displays.

26.2 Additional Item Details
You can enter additional tag details pertaining to the item selected for
the work order in the Work Order Details screen.

Create Work Order Screens

327

Work Order Details

Table 26–3 Additional Item Details Screen, Tag Details
Fields
Tag Identifiers

Tag Attributes

Enter the unique tag identifiers you have specified for
the item. For example, Lot #.

Lot #

Enter the Lot number
associated with this tag
identifier.

Batch #

Enter the Batch number
associated with this tag
identifier.

Revision #

Enter the Revision number
associated with this tag
identifier.

Enter any descriptive identifiers specified for the item.
For example, Manufacture Date.

Lot Key
Reference

Enter the Lot key reference
associated with this tag
attribute.

Manufacturing
Date

Enter the manufacturing date
for this tag attribute.

Lot Attribute 1

Enter the lot attribute 1 with
this tag attribute.

Click OK to return to the Work Order Details screen.

26.3 Work Order Details
This screen lets you enter some more information related to the work
order creation process such as Component Items, Activities and
Additional Item Data.

328

User Guide

Work Order Details

Table 26–4

Work Order Details Screen, Primary Information

Fields
Node

The node associated with the work order displays.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the work order
displays.

Work Order #

The work order number for the work order displays.

Service Item Group

The service item group associated with the work order
is automatically populated.

Status

The of the work order displays.

Service Item ID

The identifier of the service item displays.

Purpose

The purpose associated with the work order displays.

Table 26–5

Work Order Details Screen, Work Order Item Data

Actions
Additional Item Details

This action takes you to the Additional Item Details
screen to enter tag details for the item.
You can enter the tag details only when the node
fulfilling the work order is configured to capture the
tag attributes in all operations performed within the
node. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.

Fields
Item ID

The item created as a result of the work order. Also
referred to as 'Kit Item' or 'Parent Item'.
This is mandatory for service item groups of
KITTING,DE-KITTING, INVENTORY CHANGE,
INVENTORY COMPLIANCE.

Unit Of Measure

The unit of measure of the item associated with the
work order you created displays.

Product Class

The product class of the item associated with the work
order you are creating displays.

Description

The description of the item displays.

Create Work Order Screens

329

Work Order Details

Table 26–5 Work Order Details Screen, Work Order Item Data
Segment Type

The segment type of the item associated with the work
order you created displays.
Typical values include 'MTO' - Made to Order or 'MTC' Made To Customer.

Segment

The specific order number or customer number
associated with the work order you created displays.
This is applicable only if Segment Type is chosen.

Requested Quantity

The quantity of the item being created on the work
order.

Table 26–6 Work Order Details Screen, Quantity
Fields
Requested

The requested quantity of items displays.

Confirmed

The confirmed quantity of items displays.

Allocated

The allocated quantity of items displays.

Cancelled

The cancelled quantity of items displays.

Released

The released quantity of items displays.

The container details appear only for the Dekitting service item group.
Table 26–7 Work Order Details Screen, Container Details
Fields
Pallet ID

Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

Enter the case LPN associated with the container.

Serial #

Enter the serial number.

Table 26–8 Work Order Details Screen, Component Items
Actions
Delete
Fields

330

User Guide

This action allows you to delete the selected tag
details.

Work Order Details

Table 26–8

Work Order Details Screen, Component Items

Tag Details

You can view the tag details only when the node
fulfilling the work order is configured to capture the
tag attributes in all operations performed within the
node. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.

Item ID

The component item details display.

Product Class

The product class associated with component item
displays.

Unit Of Measure

The unit of measure of the item associated with the
work order displays.

Description

The component item’s description displays.

Qty Per Kit

The component item quantity required for the parent
item displays.

Segment Type

The segment type for the component inventory
displays, if applicable.

Segment

The order number or customer name for the
component inventory displays, if applicable.

Activities are populated from the service item associated with the work
order or the item. All activities to be associated with the item being
created are specified for the component quantity.
Table 26–9

Work Order Details Screen, Activities

Actions
Delete

This action allows you to delete the selected tag
details.

Fields
Instructions

Enter any additional instructions for the activity.

Create Work Order Screens

331

Work Order Details

Table 26–9 Work Order Details Screen, Activities
Location Details

The location where the activity is performed displays.
Click on the
details.

Preferred
Location
Requested
Quantity

icon, to view and hide location

Click on the
location.

icon to add new

Enter the quantity you want to
move into the location.

Inv Upd Activity

Inventory updated for the activity.

Seq #

Enter a sequence for the activity being performed.

Activity Code

Select the activity code to associate with the location
and quantity.
Choose the field and lookup icon to find the specific
activity code you want to use.

The following note is essential if you want to view the inventory
compliance for an item.
Note: The screen that displays when you select Inventory
Compliance as the service group code, depends on the
Service Involves Segment Change field configuration. For
more information about configuring the Service Involves
Segment Change field, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.

332

User Guide

27
Work Order Console Screens
Work Order Console provides:
Q

Extensive search capabilities using granular level information such as
work order number, segment type, segment number.
Comprehensive visibility at an enterprise and node level.

27.1 Work Order Search By Item
You can perform work order search by a service item or a product item
ID.
Table 27–1

Work Order Search By Item

Fields
Node

Select the node for which you want to search.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to search.

Across Enterprise

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Allocated

Select the appropriate allocation level for the work
order you are searching.

Released

Select the appropriate released level for the work
order you are searching for.

Service Item Group

Select the appropriate service item group for the work
order you are searching.
Valid values are KITTING, DEKITTING,PROVIDED
SERVICE,INVENTORY CHANGE,INVENTORY
COMPLIANCE.

Work Order Console Screens

333

Work Order Search By Container

Table 27–1 Work Order Search By Item
Fields
Service Item ID

Select the appropriate service item ID for the work
order for which you want to search.

Work Order Status
Range

Select the status range associated with the work order
you are searching of, if applicable.

Held Work Orders With
Hold Type

Select the check box and select the hold type from the
list that you want to search for work orders with that
hold type, if applicable.

Work Order #

Enter the work order number associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.

Segment Type

Select the segment type associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.

Segment #

Enter the segment number associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.

Priority

Select the priority associated with the work order you
are searching for, if applicable.

Item ID

Enter the item ID associated with work order you want
to search for, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.

The Work Order List screen displays the search results.

27.2 Work Order Search By Container
You can perform work order search by the pallet or case IDs or the serial
number of the container.
Table 27–2 Work Order Search By Container
Fields

334

Node

Select the node for which you want to search.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to search.

Across Enterprise

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

User Guide

Work Order Search By Date

Table 27–2

Work Order Search By Container

Fields
Allocated

Select the appropriate allocation level for the work
order you are searching.

Released

Select the appropriate released level for the work
order you are searching for.

Service Item Group

Select the appropriate service item group for the work
order you are searching.
Valid values are KITTING, DEKITTING,PROVIDED
SERVICE,INVENTORY CHANGE,INVENTORY
COMPLIANCE.

Status Range

Select the status range associated with the item you
are searching of, if applicable.

Work Order #

Enter the work order number associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.

Segment Type

Select the segment type associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.

Segment #

Enter the segment number associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.

Priority

Select the priority associated with the work order you
are searching for, if applicable.

Pallet ID

Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container, if
applicable.

Case ID

Enter the case LPN associated with the container, if
applicable.

Serial #

Enter the serial number associated with the container
you are searching for, if applicable

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.

The Work Order List screen displays the search results.

27.3 Work Order Search By Date
You can perform work order search by the start and finish dates of the
work order.

Work Order Console Screens

335

Work Order Search By Date

Table 27–3 Work Order Search By Date
Fields
Node

Select the node for which you want to search.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to search.

Across Enterprise

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Allocated

Select the appropriate allocation level for the work
order you are searching.

Released

Select the appropriate released level for the work
order you are searching for.

Service Item Group

Select the appropriate service item group for the work
order you are searching.
Valid values are KITTING, DEKITTING,PROVIDED
SERVICE,INVENTORY CHANGE,INVENTORY
COMPLIANCE.

Service Item ID

Select the appropriate service item ID for the work
order for which you want to search.

Status Range

Select the status range associated with the work order
you are searching for, if applicable.

Priority

Select the priority associated with the work order you
are searching for, if applicable.

Start No Earlier Than

By default, the system displays Start No Earlier Than
date and time.
Enter the Start No Earlier Than date and time
associated with the work order for which you want to
search.

Finish No Later Than

By default, the system displays Finish No Later Than
date and time.
Enter the Finish No Later Than date and time
associated with the work order for which you want to
search.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.

The Work Order List screen displays the search results.

336

User Guide

Work Order Search By Components

27.4 Work Order Search By Activity
You can perform work order search by an activity code.
Table 27–4

Work Order Search By Activity

Fields
Node

Select the node for which you want to search.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to search.

Across Enterprise

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Allocated

Select the appropriate allocation level for the work
order you are searching.

Released

Select the appropriate released level for the work
order you are searching for.

Service Item Group

Select the appropriate service item group for the work
order you are searching.
Valid values are KITTING, DEKITTING,PROVIDED
SERVICE,INVENTORY CHANGE,INVENTORY
COMPLIANCE.

Item ID

Enter the service item ID associated with the work
order you want to search for, if applicable.

Status Range

Select the status range associated with the work order
you are searching for, if applicable.

Activity Code

Enter the activity code associated with the work order
for which you want to search.

Activity location

Enter the activity location associated with the work
order for which you want to search.

Is Complete

Select this option if you are searching for only
completed work orders.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.

The Work Order List screen displays the search results.

27.5 Work Order Search By Components
You can perform work order search by an component item ID.

Work Order Console Screens

337

Work Order List

Table 27–5 Work Order Search By Components
Fields
Node

Select the node for which you want to search.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to search.

Across Enterprise

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Allocated

Select the appropriate allocation level for the work
order you are searching.

Released

Select the appropriate released level for the work
order you are searching for.

Product Class

Select the product class of the item you are searching
for, if applicable.

Status Range

Select the status range associated with the work order
you are searching for, if applicable.

Component Item ID

Enter the component item ID associated with the work
order you want to search for, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.

The Work Order List screen displays the search results.

27.6 Work Order List
The Work Order List window displays the results of an work order search.
You can perform actions on a single work order line or multiple work
order lines by selecting the check boxes of the work order lines you want
to perform an action on and choosing the applicable action from the
action bar.
Table 27–6 Work Order List
Actions
View Details

338

User Guide

This action takes you to the Work Order Details screen
where you can view the details of the work order and
perform various actions on the work order.

Work Order List

Table 27–6

Work Order List

View Tasks

This action takes you to the task search screen. For
more information about viewing the tasks, see the
Sterling Warehouse Management System: User Guide.
Note: You can view tasks only for a single work order
at a time.

View Move Request

This action takes you to the move request search
screen. For more information about viewing the move
requests, see the Sterling Warehouse Management
System: User Guide.
Note: You can view tasks only for a single work order
at a time.

Confirm

This action lets you confirm the work order by taking
you to the VAS station. For more information about
viewing VAS stations, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: User Guide.

Cancel

This action pops up a Cancellation Reason screen for
cancelling the selected work orders.

Fields
Work Order #

The work order number associated with the work
order. Click this link to view the work order details.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the work order.

Service Item Group

The service item group associated with the work order.

Item ID

The Item ID of the item associated with the work
order.

UOM

The UOM code of the item associated with the work
order.

Priority

The work order priority.

Segment Type

Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.

Segment #

Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.

Work Order Console Screens

339

Work Order Details

Table 27–6 Work Order List
Order #

The order number of the item.

Status

The work order status.
This
hold.

icon displays only if the work order is put on

27.7 Work Order Details
The work order detail screen enables you to perform certain actions such
as confirm, cancel or allocate a work order. You can also view the status
audits and outbound shipments from this screen.
Table 27–7 Work Order Details Screen, Primary Information
View Icons
This icon takes you to the shipments screen where you
can view the outbound shipment details.
This icon takes you to the Work Order Status Audits
screen which displays audit activity information
pertaining to the specific work order.
Activity Demand - This icon takes you to the Work
Order Activity Demand screen where you can view the

work order’s activity demand.
Actions
Confirm

This action lets you confirm the work order by taking
you to the VAS station. For more information about
viewing VAS stations, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: User Guide.

Allocate

This action enables you allocate a work order.

Release

This action enables you to release a work order.
Note: You cannot create retrieval move requests when
releasing work orders for the "KITTING" service item
group that does not have components.

Cancel

340

User Guide

This action pops up a Cancellation Reason screen
where you can cancel the selected work orders.

Work Order Details

Table 27–7

Work Order Details Screen, Primary Information

View Holds

This action takes you to the Work Order Holds screen
where you can view holds that are applied to the work
order.

Fields
Node

The node associated with the work order.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the work order.

Work Order #

The work order number associated with the work
order.

Service Item Group

The service item group associated with the work order.

Status

The work order status.
Click on
to go to the Work Order Holds where you
can view various holds that are applied to the work
order.

Priority

Select the priority for the work order you are creating,
if applicable. Appropriate priority is assigned to all
tasks for the work order.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low.

Start No Earlier Than

Work order date to start no earlier than.

Finish No Later Than

Work date to finish no later than.

Service Item ID

The service item ID associated with the item.

Purpose

The purpose associated with the work order.

Table 27–8

Work Order Details Screen, Work Order Item Data

Action
Additional Item Details

This action takes you to the Additional Item Details
screen to enter tag details for the item.
You can enter the tag details, if you have selected the
option, When performing any node operation
during the ship node tag capture configuration. For
more information about capturing tag attributes, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.

Fields

Work Order Console Screens

341

Work Order Details

Table 27–8 Work Order Details Screen, Work Order Item Data
Item ID

Enter the item created as a result of the work order.
Also referred to as 'Kit Item' or 'Parent Item'.
This is mandatory for service item groups of KITTING,
DE-KITTING, INVENTORY CHANGE, INVENTORY
COMPLIANCE.

Unit Of Measure

Select the unit of measure of the item associated with
the work order you are creating.

Product Class

Select the product class of the item associated with
the work order you are creating

Segment Type

Select the segment type of the item associated with
the work order you are creating, if applicable.
Typical values include 'MTO' - Made to Order or 'MTC' Made To Customer.

Segment

Enter the specific order number or customer number
associated with the work order you are creating.
This is applicable only if Segment Type is chosen.

Requested Quantity

Enter the quantity of the item being created on the
work order.

Table 27–9 Work Order Details Screen, Quantity
Fields
Requested

Quantity requested by the work order.

Confirmed

Quantity confirmed by the work order.

Allocated

Quantity allocated to the work order.

Cancelled

Quantity cancelled from the work order.

Released

Quantity released by the work order.

Table 27–10

Work Order Details Screen, Container Details

Fields

342

Pallet ID

Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

Enter the case LPN associated with the container.

Serial #

Enter the serial number.

User Guide

Work Order Details

Table 27–11 Work Order Details Screen, Component Items
Action
Delete

This action deletes the selected tag details.

Fields
Tag Details

Click on

to view the tag details.

You can view the tag details only if the inventory tag
attributes are captured in all operations performed
within the node. For more information about capturing
the tag attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Item ID

Enter the component associated with parent item you
want to create.
Click on

to add component item details.

Select the product class associated with component
item.

UOM

Select the unit of measure of the item associated with
the work order you are creating.

Qty Per Kit

Enter the component item quantity required for the
parent item.

Segment Type

Select segment type for the component inventory, if
applicable.

Segment

Enter order number or customer name for the
component inventory, if applicable.

This action deletes activities that you have selected.

Fields
Instructions

Enter any additional instructions for the activity.

Work Order Console Screens

343

Work Order Status Audits

Table 27–12

Work Order Details Screen, Activities

Location Details

The location where the activity is performed displays.
Click on the
details.

Preferred
Location
Requested
Quantity

icon, to view and hide location

Click on the
location.

icon to add new

Enter the quantity you want to
move into the location.

Inv Upd Activity

Inventory updated for the activity.

Seq #

Enter a sequence for the activity being performed.

Activity Code

Select the activity code to associate with the location
and quantity.
Choose the field and lookup icon to find the specific
activity code you want to use.

27.8 Work Order Status Audits
You can view any status modifications performed against a work order.
Table 27–13

Work Order Status Audits Screen, Primary Information

Fields

344

Node

The node associated with the work order.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the work order.

Work Order #

The work order number associated with the work
order.

Service Item Group

The service item group associated with the work order.

Status

The work order status.

Start No Earlier Than

Work order date to start no earlier than.

Finish No Later Than

Work date to finish no later than.

Service Item ID

The service item ID associated with the item.

User Guide

Work Order Activity Demand

27.9 Work Order Activity Demand
This screen provides visibility to the work order’s activity demand.
Table 27–14 Work Order Activity Demand, Primary Information
Fields
Node

The node associated with the work order.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the work order.

Work Order #

The work order number associated with the work
order.

Service Item Group

The service item group associated with the work order.

Status

The work order status.
Click on
to go to the Work Order Holds where you
can view holds that are applied to the work order.

Priority

Select the priority for the work order you are creating,
if applicable. Appropriate priority is assigned to all
tasks for the work order.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low.

Start No Earlier Than

Work order date to start no earlier than.

Finish No Later Than

Work date to finish no later than.

Service Item ID

The service item ID associated with the item.

Purpose

The purpose associated with the work order.

Table 27–15 Work Order Activity Demand, Activity Demand List
Action
Delete

This action allows you to delete the selected activity
demands.

Fields
Location ID

The item location in the node.

Activity Code

The activity to be performed on items belonging to the
work order.

Pallet Id

The pallet LPN that belong to the work order.

Case Id

The case LPN that belong to the work order.

Work Order Console Screens

345

Work Order Holds

Table 27–15

Work Order Activity Demand, Activity Demand List

Item ID

The items that belong to the work order.

Demand Quantity

Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.

Satisfied Quantity

The extent to which the demand is satisfied.

Demand Satisfied

Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.

27.10 Work Order Holds
You can view the various types of holds that are applied to the work
order.
Table 27–16

Work Order Holds Screen, Primary Information

Fields
Node

The node associated with the work order.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the work order.

Work Order #

The work order number associated with the work
order.

Service Item Group

The service item group associated with the work order.

Status

The work order status.

Start No Earlier Than

Work order date to start no earlier than.

Finish No Later Than

Work date to finish no later than.

Service Item ID

The service item ID associated with the item.

Table 27–17

Work Order Holds Screen, Work Order Holds

Actions
Add Holds

This action takes you to the Add Holds screen where
you can add holds for the selected work order.

Fields
Click this icon to go to the View History screen where
you can view the hold history for the selected hold.

346

Hold Description

A brief description of the hold.

Hold Status

The current status of the hold.

User Guide

View History

Table 27–17 Work Order Holds Screen, Work Order Holds
Hold Comment

Any additional comments for the hold.

Action

Select the action from the list that you want to apply
for the hold.

Reason

Enter the reason for the hold.

Table 27–18 Work Order Holds Screen, Approved Holds
Fields
Click this icon to go to the View History screen where
you can view the hold history for the selected hold.
Hold Description

A brief description of the hold.

Reason

The reason for the hold.

27.11 Add Holds
You can add holds for the work order with the help of this screen.
Table 27–19 Add Holds Screen, Work Order Holds
Fields
Hold Type

Select the work order hold type from the list.

Reason

Enter the reason for the hold.

27.12 View History
In this screen you can view the hold history for the selected hold.
Table 27–20 View History Screen, Primary Information
Fields
Node

The node associated with the work order.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the work order.

Work Order #

The work order number associated with the work
order.

Service Item Group

The service item group associated with the work order.

Status

The work order status.

Work Order Console Screens

347

Work Order Details for Provided Service Items

Table 27–20

View History Screen, Primary Information

Fields
Start No Earlier Than

Work order date to start no earlier than.

Finish No Later Than

Work date to finish no later than.

Service Item ID

The service item ID associated with the item.

Table 27–21

View History Screen, Work Order Holds

Fields
Hold Type

The hold type.

Date/Time

The date and time at which the hold was created.

User ID

The user who created the hold.

Status

The current status of the hold.

Comment

Any additional comments for the hold.

Hold Transaction

The hold transaction.

27.13 Cancellation Reason
You can cancel a work order from the Work Order List screen by selecting
the appropriate work orders or from the Work Order Details screen for
cancelling a particular work order.
Table 27–22

Cancellation Reason

Fields
Cancellation Reason
Code

Select the reason code associated with cancellation.
This field is mandatory.

Reason Text

Enter any additional comments for the cancellation.

27.14 Work Order Details for Provided Service
Items
You can view work order details for provided service items from the work
order Work Order List screen. From the work order list, select the check
boxes of PS service item group work orders and view the work order
details.

348

User Guide

Appointment Details

Table 27–23 Work Order Details for Provided Service Items
Fields
Node

The node associated with the work order.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the work order.

Work Order #

The work order number associated with the work
order.

Quantity Requested

The quantity requested by the work order.

Status

The work order status.

Priority

Select the priority for the work order you are creating,
if applicable. Appropriate priority is assigned to all
tasks for the work order.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low.

Appointment

The appointment associated with the work order. Click
on

to view the appointment details.

Service Item ID

The service item ID associated with the item.

Purpose

The purpose associated with the work order.

Ship To

Details of the location the item is being shipped to.

27.15 Appointment Details
You can plan an appointment for a work order of provided service item
group. In Appointment, click on
icon. The Plan Appointment window
displays.
Table 27–24 Appointment Details
Fields
Currently Chosen
Appointment Slot
Start Date

Delay Window

Appointment Slot chosen for the work order.

The start date of the work order. Click on
the calendar.

to view

The days to be delayed for the work order.

Work Order Console Screens

349

Appointment Details

350

User Guide

28
Value-Added Services Station Screens
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for all Value-Added
Services Station screens.

28.1 VAS Station
VAS activities are performed in their appropriate locations. For example,
monogramming is done in a different location from packaging. Each
individual location is a VAS Station.
This screen provides:
Q

The ability to scan outbound container number or work order number
to identify work order.
The ability to confirm at an activity level in the appropriate station.

Table 28–1

VAS Station, Work Order

Actions
Save

This action confirms that a certain activity specified in
the Activities panel is complete for the quantity
specified.
Clicking Save after the completion of the last activity
confirms the work order.

Reset

This action clears all the entries in the Work Order
Panel.

Value-Added Services Station Screens

351

VAS Station

Table 28–1 VAS Station, Work Order
Scan

Enter or scan container number or work order number.
Container number represents an outbound container
for which the work order is created.
Serial number may also be scanned to determine the
work order, if the work order was created for a specific
serial number.
If the work order is being completed into a pallet or
case with LPN, the LPN to be associated with is
scanned here for an activity. For all subsequent
activities the LPN may be scanned here as well.

Location

Select the location associated with the station.

Work Order #

The work order number associated with the work
order.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the work order.

Service Item Group

The item service group associated with the work
order.

Note: To be able to confirm a Work Order you should

have an Inventory Status Transition Rule setup for the
Zone that the VAS location belongs. This Inventory Status
Transition Rule should be defined from Blank to an
Inventory Status that is associated with an ONHAND
Supply Type.

Table 28–2 VAS Station, Work Order Item Data
Fields

352

Item ID

The item on the work order displays, if applicable.

Unit Of Measure

The unit of measure on the work order displays, if
applicable.

Product Class

The product class on the work order displays, if
applicable.

Service Item ID

The service item identifier on the work order displays.

User Guide

VAS Station

Table 28–2

VAS Station, Work Order Item Data

Segment Type

The segment type for the item on the work order
displays, if applicable. Typical values are MTO - Made
To Order, MTC - Made To Customer.

Segment

The segment number for the item on the work order
displays, if applicable. Typical values are the order
number or the customer number corresponding to the
Segment Type.

Table 28–3

VAS Station, Container/Serial #

Fields
Pallet ID

The pallet LPN into which the work order quantity
being built displays.

Case ID

The case LPN into which the work order quantity being
built displays.

Serial #

The serial number displays.

Table 28–4

VAS Station, Activities

Displays the activities corresponding to the service item.

Table 28–5

VAS Station, Quantity

Fields
Qty Completed

Quantity completed on the work order displays.

Qty Remaining

Quantity remaining to be completed on the work order
displays.

Qty To Process

Enter the quantity to process for the corresponding
activity.

Value-Added Services Station Screens

353

Serial Entry

Table 28–5 VAS Station, Quantity
Start Time Stamp

By default, the system’s date and time displays.
Enter the work order activity’s start date and time, if
applicable.

End Time Stamp

By default, the system’s date and time displays.
Enter the work order activity’s end date and time, if
applicable.

Table 28–6 VAS Station, Activity Instructions
Fields
Instruction Text

Instruction corresponding to the activity selected
displays.

Instruction Usage

Instruction Usage corresponding to the activity
selected displays.

Table 28–7 VAS Station, Component Items
Fields
Item

The component item for the work order, if applicable.

Description

The component item description.

Quantity

Number of units of the item in inventory UOM.

28.2 Serial Entry
The Serial Entry screen lets you capture the item’s serial number.

354

User Guide

Serial Entry

Tag Entry

Table 28–8

Serial Entry

Action
Close

This action closes the Serial Entry screen.

Fields
Count

The total count of items scanned is automatically
populated by the system.

Item ID

The item’s item ID is automatically populated by the
system.

Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure is automatically populated
by the system.

Requested Serial #

The serial number requested in the work order.

Serial #

The serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #1

The component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #2

The component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #3

The component serial number of the item.

Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry screen vary
depending on the item scanned.

Note: In the Serial Entry screen when you click on Toggle
Serial Range button, you can enter the serial range.

Table 28–9

Serial Entry, Serial Range

Fields
Count

The total count of items scanned is automatically
populated by the system.

Item ID

The item’s identifier is automatically populated by the
system.

Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure is automatically populated
by the system.

Value-Added Services Station Screens

355

Serial Entry

Table 28–9 Serial Entry, Serial Range
Fields
Requested Serial #

The serial number requested in the work order.

From Serial #

The start serial number of the item.

To Serial #

The end serial number of the item.

Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary

serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.

Note: You can enter the tag attributes only when the

node that is confirming the work order is configured to
capture the tag attributes in all operations performed
within the node. For more information about capturing the
tag attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.

The Tag Entry screen lets you capture the tag numbers associated with
the tag tracked SKU. You can use the Tag Entry screen to track Lot#,
Batch#, and so on.

356

User Guide

Expiration Date Entry

Table 28–10 Tag Entry
Action
Close

This action closes the Tag Entry screen.

Fields
Item ID

The item ID of the item.

Unit Of Measure

The unit of measure of the item.

Batch #

Enter the batch number associated with the tag.

Revision #

Enter the revision number.

Note: The fields displayed in the Tag Entry screen vary
depending on the item scanned.

28.3 Expiration Date Entry
The Expiration Date Entry screen lets you capture the expiration date.
Table 28–11 Expiration Date Entry
Action
Close

This action closes the Expiration Date Entry screen.

Fields
Item ID

The item ID of the item.

Expiration Date

Enter the item’s expiration date.
Choose the field and lookup icon to find the specific
expiration date you want to use.

Note: The fields displayed in the Expiration Date Entry
screen vary depending on the item scanned.

Value-Added Services Station Screens

357

Expiration Date Entry

358

User Guide

29
Outbound Shipment Console Screens
The Outbound Shipment Console provides:
Q

Extensive search capabilities using granular level information such as
plan #, customer PO#.

Ability to modify outbound shipment instruction.

Ability to view discrepancies found in the outbound shipments.

29.1 Outbound Shipment Search By Status
You can search for shipments that fall under a particular status with the
help of this screen.
Table 29–1

Shipment Search By Status

Fields
Document Type

Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable.

Enterprise

Defining Teams in the chapter Configuring User Security
of the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number to search for, if applicable.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

359

Outbound Shipment Search By Status

Table 29–1 Shipment Search By Status
Fields
Order #

Enter the order number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Customer PO #

Enter the number of the customer’s purchase order
number you are searching for, if applicable.

Plan #

Enter the plan number the outbound shipment you are
searching for belongs to, if applicable.

Origin Node

Enter the origin node you want to search for outbound
shipments under, if applicable.

Destination Node

Enter the destination node you want to search for
outbound shipments under, if applicable.

Status

Select the status range of the outbound shipments you
want to search for, if applicable.

Include Closed
Shipments

Select this if you want to search for outbound
shipments that have been closed, as well as those that
are open, if applicable.

Pack And Hold
Shipment

Select this if you want to search for outbound
shipments that are packed and kept on hold, if
applicable.

Held Shipments

Check this box if you want to search for outbound
shipments that are held.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of outbound shipments
you want returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Shipment List screen displays as a result of outbound shipment
search by status.

360

User Guide

Outbound Shipment Search By Date

29.2 Outbound Shipment Search By Date
You can search for shipments that fall within a particular date range with
the help of this screen.
Table 29–2

Shipment Search By Date

Fields
Document Type

Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable.

Enterprise

Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use.
Choose Across Enterprises to search across all
Enterprises in the system.
Note: If you belong to a team, the system only
searches across the Enterprises allowed by that group.
For more information about teams, see the section
Defining Teams in the chapter Configuring User
Security of the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.

Carrier/Service

Choose the Carrier/Service you want to search for
outbound shipments under, if applicable.

Status

Choose the shipment status you are searching for, if
applicable.

Enter Shipment Dates

Enter the requested ship date range, expected ship
date range, actual ship date range you want to search
for outbound shipments through, if applicable.

Enter Delivery Dates

Enter the requested delivery date range, expected
delivery date range, actual delivery date range you
want to search for outbound shipments through, if
applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of outbound shipments
you want returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Shipment List screen displays as a result of outbound shipment
search by date.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

361

Outbound Shipment Search By Carrier

29.3 Outbound Shipment Search By Carrier
You can search for shipments that belong to a particular carrier with the
help of this screen.
Table 29–3 Shipment Search By Carrier
Fields
Document Type

Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable.

Enterprise

362

Shipment Mode

Select the shipment mode, if applicable

Carrier/Service

The Carrier/Service you want to search for outbound
shipments under, if applicable.

BOL #

The bill of lading number of the outbound shipments
you are searching for, if applicable.

PRO #

The PRO number of the outbound shipments you are
searching for, if applicable.

Trailer #

The trailer number of the outbound shipments you are
looking for, if applicable.

Status

Select the shipment status you are searching for, if
applicable.

Requires Routing

Choose this option if the shipment requires dynamic
routing.

Max Records

The maximum number of outbound shipments you
want returned from your search.

User Guide

Outbound Shipment Search By Item

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Shipment List screen displays as a result of outbound shipment
search by carrier.

29.4 Outbound Shipment Search By Item
You can search for shipments based on the item information such as
product class, unit of measure, item ID and so on.
Table 29–4

Shipment Search By Item

Fields
Document Type

Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable.

Enterprise

Item ID

The item ID.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

Unit of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller.

Status

Select the shipment status you are searching for, if
applicable.

Include Closed
Shipments

Select this if you want to search for outbound
shipments that have been closed, as well as those that
are open, if applicable.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

363

Outbound Shipment Search By Wave

Table 29–4 Shipment Search By Item
Fields
Has Hazardous Items

Select this check box to search for outbound
shipments that contain hazardous items, if applicable.

Max Records

The maximum number of outbound shipments you
want returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Shipment List screen displays as a result of outbound shipment
search by item.

29.5 Outbound Shipment Search By Wave
You can search for outbound shipment that fall within a particular wave
in this screen.
Table 29–5 Shipment Search By Wave
Fields

364

Document Type

Select the document type to you want to search for, if
applicable.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you are searching.

Across Enterprise

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Wave #

Enter the wave number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Load #

Enter the load number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Carrier/Service

Select the carrier/service you are searching for, if
applicable.

Buyer

Enter the buyer associated with the shipment you
want to search for, if applicable.

User Guide

Outbound Shipment Search By Profiling

Table 29–5

Shipment Search By Wave

Fields
Status

Select the shipment status you are searching for, if
applicable.

Shipment In Wave

Choose this option if you are searching for the
shipments in wave.

Shipment Not In Wave

Choose this option if you are searching for the
shipments not in wave.

Ignore Cancelled
Shipment Lines

Select this check box if you are considering only
Shipment Lines with quantity greater than zero. This
check box displays only when "Shipment Not In Wave"
is selected.

All

Choose this option if you are searching for all the
shipments.

Has Shortage

Choose this option

Enter Shipment Dates

Choose to enter shipment date range you want to
search for outbound shipments, if applicable.

Enter Delivery Dates

Choose to enter delivery date range you want to
search for outbound shipments, if applicable.

Max Record

Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Shipment List screen displays as a result of outbound shipment
search by wave.

29.6 Outbound Shipment Search By Profiling
The warehouse supervisor can choose the pick strategy based on the
profile identifier density of the shipments. Usually, large shipments are
picked individually and small shipments are group together and picked
together, and sorted later.
You can search for shipments based on their profile identifiers.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

365

Outbound Shipment Search By Profiling

Table 29–6 Shipment By Profile Search
Fields

Description

Enterprise

Select the enterprise.

Profile ID

Select the profile ID from the drop down list.
You can also click

Consider Profiles

to select the Profile ID.

Select this to view the shipment’s state There are
three options:
Already In Wave - Select this to view the shipments
that are in wave.
Not In Wave - Select this to view the shipments that
are not in wave.
All - Select this to view all the shipments.

Show Profiles

Select to view the More number of Shipment First and
Less number of Shipment First. There are two options:
More number of Shipment First - Select this to view
high- density profile ID shipments first.
Less number of Shipment First - Select this to view
low-density profile ID shipments first.

Max Records

Enter the number to display the maximum records.

Table 29–7 Shipment Profile Summary
Actions
View Details

This takes you to the Shipment Details screen, where
you can view the shipment details.

Create Wave

This takes you to the Create Wave screen, where you
can create a wave for the selected shipment group.

Fields

366

Profile ID

The identifier of a shipment.

# of Shipments

The number of shipments.

User Guide

Shipment List

Table 29–7

Shipment Profile Summary

# of Shipments in
Wave

The number of waved shipments.

# of Shipments Not in
Wave

The number of shipments that are not waved.

29.7 Shipment List
The Shipment List window displays the results of a shipment search. You
can perform actions on a single shipment or multiple shipments by
selecting the check boxes of the shipments you want to perform an
action on and choosing the applicable action from the action bar.
Table 29–8

Shipment List

Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Shipment Details screen
where you can view the shipment details.

Modify Shipment

This action takes you to the Modify Shipment screen
where you can modify a shipment.

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the shipment’s documents or labels.

Cancel

This action takes you to the Cancel Selected
Shipments screen where you can cancel an outbound
shipment.

Create Wave

This action takes you to the Create Wave screen where
you can create wave for the selected shipment group.

Add To Delivery Plan

This action takes you to the Select Delivery Plan
screen where you can add shipment to a delivery plan.

Delete Shipment

This action allows you to delete the selected
shipments.

Remove From Wave

This action allows you to remove the selected
shipments from a wave.

View Holds

This action takes you to the View Holds screen where
you can view the holds applied to the outbound
shipment.

Fields
Shipment #

The shipment number.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

367

Shipment Details

Table 29–8 Shipment List
Status

The shipment status.

Buyer

The identifier for the buyer.

Carrier/Service

The Carrier and Carrier service use to ship the
outbound shipments.

Expected Ship Date

The date the shipment is estimated to ship on.

Origin

The shipment’s origin node.

Destination

The shipment’s destination node.

Total Weight

The total weight of the outbound shipment.

Total Volume

The total volume of the outbound shipment.

Tag/Serial Requested

Indicates if tag or serial details exist for the outbound
shipment.

The tag details for a tag-controlled item displays,
if the ship node is configured to capture tags in
all operations performed within the node, or if
the buyer on a shipment mandates it as a part of
their inbound compliance. For more information
about capturing tag attributes, see the Selling
and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.

29.8 Shipment Details
The Shipment Details screen provides shipment information for the
selected shipments. The actions that you can perform in the Shipment
Details screen are explained in the following tables.
Table 29–9 Shipment Details, Shipment
View Icons
Loads - This icon takes you to the Shipment Loads
screen where you can view any load carrying an
outbound shipment.
Containers - This icon takes you to the Shipment
Containers screen where you can view all packed

containers included in the outbound shipment.

368

User Guide

Shipment Details

Table 29–9

Shipment Details, Shipment
Instructions - This icon takes you to the Shipment
Instructions screen where you can add, modify or
delete the instructions for a shipment.
Shipment Audits - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Audits screen where you can view audit trail
for shipment modifications.
Shipment Dates - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Dates screen where you can view and

modify outbound shipment dates and delivery
dates.

Alerts - This icon takes you to the Alerts screen where
you can view the alerts for an outbound shipment.
Additional Attributes - This icon takes you to the
Additional Attributes screen where you can view
additional attributes for the selected shipment.
Activity Demand - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Activity Demand screen where you can view

the shipment’s activity demand.
Actions
Confirm Shipment

This action allows you to manually confirm an
outbound shipment, if the shipment is not
automatically confirmed.

Pack Containers

This action takes you to the Pack Containers screen
where you can pack any unpacked items into
containers for shipping.

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the shipping documents or labels.

Cancel

This action takes you to the Cancel Selected
Shipments screen where you can cancel an outbound
shipment.

Create Pick List

This action enables you to create a picklist for the

Split Shipment

This action takes you to the Split Shipment screen
where you can split an outbound shipment.

Create Alert

This action takes you to the Create Alerts screen
where you can create an alert for the shipment.

selected shipments, if applicable.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

369

Shipment Details

Table 29–9 Shipment Details, Shipment
Release From ESP Hold

This action allows you to release a shipment from the
ESP Hold.

Remove From Wave

This action allows you to remove the shipment from a
wave.

View Holds

This action takes you to the View Holds screen where
you can view the holds applied to the outbound
shipment.

Fields
Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

Enter the outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

Indicates the buyer associated with the shipment.
Click this link to go to the Organization Details to view
the buyer organization details.

Seller

Indicates the seller associated with the shipment. Click
this link to go to the Organization Details to view the
seller organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen to
view the node details for the shipment.

Receiving Node

Indicates the node that is receiving the outbound
shipment. Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail
screen to view the shipment’s receiving node details.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits to view shipment status
audits. Click the
icon to go to the View Holds
screen where you can view holds that are applied to
the outbound shipment.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.

Break Bulk Node

This field displays only if the shipment belongs to a
break bulk load.
The break bulk node that is receiving the break bulk
load displays.

370

User Guide

Shipment Details

Table 29–10 Shipment Details, Execution Attributes
Actions
View Tasks

This action takes you to the Task List screen where
you can view a list of tasks associated with the
shipment. For more information about this, see

Section 41.12, "Task List".
Fields
Execution Status

The status of wave corresponding to the shipment.

Pack And Hold

Select the check box to pack and hold the outbound
shipment, if applicable.

Shipment Sort Lane

The lane where containers are sorted by shipment,
when 'Sort by Shipment' option is chosen.

Carrier Sort Lane

The lane where containers are sorted by carrier, when
'Sort by Carrier' option is chosen.

Wave #

The wave number to which the outbound shipment
belongs to.

Has Shortage

Indicates if the outbound shipment has inventory
shortage when included in the wave.

Packed Quantity

Indicates the total quantity packed.

Table 29–11 Shipment Details, Ship To
View Icon
Address Details - Choose this icon to view or modify
the Ship To addresses. For more information about the
screen, see Address Details.
The name and address of the person or organization where the shipment is
shipped.
Table 29–12 Shipment Details, Totals
Fields
Weight

Enter the total weight associated to the shipment in
the appropriate UOM.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

371

Shipment Details

Table 29–12

Shipment Details, Totals

Fields
Volume

Enter the total volume associated to the shipment in
the appropriate UOM.

No. of Containers

Displays the total number of containers available in
the shipment.

Table 29–13

Shipment Details, Carrier Info

Actions
Manage Special
Services

This action takes you to the Special Services List
screen where you can select special services for the
carrier.

Fields

372

Delivery Method

The delivery method for the shipment.

Ship Mode

Select the shipment mode for the shipment. Values
include 'LTL', 'TL', 'PARCEL’

Carrier/Service

Select the carrier service for the outbound shipment.

Trailer #

Enter the outbound shipment’s trailer number.

BOL #

Enter the outbound shipment’s bill of lading number.

Seal #

Enter the outbound shipment’s seal number.

Pro #

Enter the PRO number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment.

Routing Source

Indicates if the routing was either pre-assigned, by the
system or through an external system.

Load #

The outbound shipment’s load number.

Routing Error Code

The system automatically displays the routing error
code, if applicable.

Requested Carrier
Service

The requested carrier service for the outbound
shipment.

User Guide

Shipment Details

Table 29–13 Shipment Details, Carrier Info
Airway Bill #

Indicates the airway bill number for tracking the
shipment. The airway bill is a document of carriage
which is issued by airlines to shippers of cargo. The
airway bill number:
Q

Is an evidence of a contract of carriage.

Proves receipt of goods for shipment.

Is a freight bill.

Is Revised

Indicates whether the Ship To address has changed
since the creation of the outbound shipment.

Return Carrier Service

Select the carrier service for the return shipment from
the drop-down list.
Note: If you do not select the carrier service for the
return shipment from the drop-down list, the carrier
service used for an outbound shipment is used for the
return shipment.

Table 29–14 Shipment Details, Charges
View Icon
Charges - This icon takes you to the Charges screen
where you can enter or modify additional charges

imposed to the shipment and/or container.
Fields
Carrier Account #

Indicates the carrier account # for the shipment.

Freight Terms

Indicates the freight terms used for the shipment.
Valid values include COLLECT, PREPAID, TP-COLLECT
and TP-PREPAID.

COD Pay Method

Select the COD payment type for the carrier.

Estimated Shipment
Charges

The estimated charge for shipping the outbound
shipment.

Actual Shipment
Charges

The actual charge for shipping the outbound shipment.

Freight Charge

The charge applied by the carrier for shipping the
outbound shipment.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

373

Shipment Details

Table 29–15

Shipment Details, Shipment Lines

Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Shipment Line Details
screen where you can view the shipment line
attributes for the selected shipments.

Add Release

This action takes you to the Add Release screen where
you can add an order release line to include in the

shipment.

Remove Line

This action allows you remove the selected shipment
lines from the shipment.

Fields
Shipment Line #

Enter the outbound shipment line number.
Click this link to go to the Shipment Line Details
screen to view the shipment line attributes for the a
shipment.
- This icon takes you to the Logical Kits screen
where you can view the item kit components for the
shipment line.

Order #

Enter the order number being received on the
shipment, if applicable.

Line #

Enter the order line number being received on the
shipment, if applicable.

Release #

Enter the release number, if applicable

Item ID

Enter the item ID for the SKU.

Description

The item’s description

Select the product class for the item.

UOM

Select the unit of measure for the item.

Requested Serial #

The serial number requested in the order.
Editable if the order is not available on the system.

374

Mark For

The mark for address associated with the item.

Quantity

Number of requested units of the item included in the
shipment.

Over Ship Quantity

Indicates quantity of an item over shipped.

User Guide

Modify Shipment

Table 29–15 Shipment Details, Shipment Lines
Shortage Qty

Indicates the shortage quantity on the order for the
item.

Original Qty

Indicates the original quantity on the order for the
item.

29.9 Special Services List
You can select the applicable special services for a carrier.
Table 29–16 Special Services List
Fields
Special Services

Check the applicable special services for the carrier
and click Save. Valid values are:
Q

Declared Value Insurance

Ship Notification

Adult Signature Required

Delivery Confirmation

Saturday Delivery

Signature Required

Saturday Pickup

Tagless COD

Return Shipping Label Required

29.10 Modify Shipment
You can modify a shipment in this screen.
Table 29–17 Modify Shipment
Fields
Carrier/Service

Select the carrier and carrier service used to ship the
outbound shipment.

Expected Ship Date

The date the shipment is estimated to ship on.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

375

Address Details

Table 29–17

Modify Shipment

Fields
Shipment Sort Lane

The lane where containers are sorted by shipment,
when 'Sort by Shipment' option is chosen.

Carrier Sort Lane

The lane where containers are sorted by carrier, when
'Sort by Carrier' option is chosen.

29.11 Address Details
You can modify an outbound shipment or container ship to address in
this screen.
Table 29–18

Address Details

Fields

376

Address Line 1

The first address line.

Address Line 2

The second address line, if applicable.

Address Line 3

The third address line, if applicable.

Address Line 4

The fourth address line, if applicable.

Address Line 5

The fifth address line, if applicable.

Address Line 6

The sixth address line, if applicable.

City

The city.

State

The state.

Postal Code

The postal code.

Country

The country.

First Name

The first name.

Middle Name

The middle name.

Last Name

The surname.

Company

The company.

Day Time Phone

The day time phone number.

Evening Phone

The evening phone number.

Mobile Phone

The mobile phone number.

User Guide

Charges

Table 29–18

Address Details

Fields
Fax

The fax number.

E-Mail

The e-mail address.

29.12 Charges
You can modify additional charges imposed to the shipment and/or
container in this screen.
Table 29–19 Charges, Shipment
Fields
Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.

Receiving Node

Indicates the node that is receiving the outbound
shipment. Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail
screen to view the shipment’s receiving node details.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits to view shipment status
audits.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

377

Shipment Loads

Table 29–20

Charges, Shipment Charges

Fields
Charge
Category/Charge
Name

The name of the additional outbound shipment charge.

Estimated Charge

The estimated additional charge for the outbound
shipment.

Actual Charge

The actual additional outbound shipment charge.

Table 29–21

Charges, Container Charges

Fields
Container #

The container number.

Actual Freight Charge

The Carrier’s freight charge for shipping the container.

29.13 Shipment Loads
You can view any load carrying an outbound shipment with the help of
this screen.
Table 29–22

Loads, Shipment

Fields

378

Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.

Receiving Node

The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.

Status

The outbound shipment status.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the outbound shipment contains any
hazardous item.

User Guide

Shipment Containers

Table 29–23 Loads, Loads
Actions
View Details

The actions lets you view the load details. For more
information, see the Sterling Logistics Management:
User Guide.

Fields
Load #

The load number the outbound shipment belongs to.

Load Type

The load type as per your business practices.

Carrier/Service

The Carrier and Carrier service transporting the load.

Origin

The load’s origin location.

Destination

The load’s destination location.

Status

The load status.

29.14 Shipment Containers
You can view the packed containers included in an outbound shipment in
this screen.
Table 29–24 Shipment Containers, Shipment
Fields
Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.

Receiving Node

The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.

Status

The outbound shipment status.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the outbound shipment contains any
hazardous item.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

379

Shipment Instructions

Table 29–25

Shipment Containers, Containers

Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view the container details.

Delete Containers

This action takes you to the Delete Selected
Containers where you can delete the selected
containers from the shipment.

Modify
Containerization

This action takes you to the Modify Containerization
screen.

Fields
Container #

The container number.

Tracking #

The container’s tracking number used to track the
status and location of the container.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking.

Net Weight

The net weight.

Gross Weight

The container’s total weight (including packaging).

Freight Charge

The charge applied by the Carrier for shipping the
container.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.

Manifested

Indicates whether the container is manifested.

29.15 Shipment Instructions
You can view special instructions pertaining to an outbound shipment,
such as handling instructions in this screen.
Table 29–26

Shipment Instructions, Shipment

Fields

380

Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

User Guide

Shipment Status Audits

Table 29–26 Shipment Instructions, Shipment
Fields
Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.

Receiving Node

Indicates the node that is receiving the outbound
shipment. Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail
screen to view the shipment’s receiving node details.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits to view shipment status
audits.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.

Table 29–27 Shipment Instructions, Instructions
Actions
Delete Instruction

This actions lets you delete the selected shipment
instructions.

Fields
Instruction Type

The type of instruction, such as Gift, Pick, Pack, Ship,
or Other. This field can be modified.

Text

The specific instructions to be performed on the order
line. This field can be modified.

29.16 Shipment Status Audits
You can view any status modifications performed against an outbound
shipment status in this screen.
Table 29–28 Shipment Status Audits, Shipment
Fields
Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

381

Shipment Status Audits

Table 29–28

Shipment Status Audits, Shipment

Fields
Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add

an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.

Destination

The outbound shipment’s destination.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.

Table 29–29

Shipment Status Audits, Shipment Status Audits

Fields

382

Modified By

The user who performed the modification.

Old Status

The outbound shipment status before the status
modification.

Old Status Date

The date the outbound shipment entered the old
status.

New Status

The outbound shipment status after the status
modification.

New Status Date

The date the status modification was made.

Reason Code

The reason for the modification.

Reason Text

Additional information as to why the modification was
made.

User Guide

Shipment Dates

29.17 Shipment Dates
You can change dates pertaining to the outbound shipment, such as
shipment dates and delivery dates in this screen.
Table 29–30 Shipment Dates, Shipment
Fields
Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add

an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.

Receiving Node

The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the outbound shipment contains any
hazardous item.

Table 29–31 Shipment Dates, System Dates
Fields
Requested Shipment
Date

The requested shipment date.

Expected Shipment
Date

The expected shipment date.

Actual Shipment Date

The actual shipment date.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

383

Alerts

Table 29–31

Shipment Dates, System Dates

Fields
Requested Delivery
Date

The requested delivery date.

Expected Delivery Date The expected delivery date.
Actual Delivery Date
Table 29–32

The actual delivery date.

Shipment Dates, New Dates

Fields
Date Type

The date type. For example, Shipment or Delivery.

Requested

The Buyer requested date for the date type. This field
can be modified.

Expected

The expected date for the date type. This field can be
modified.

Actual

The actual date for the date type. This field can be
modified.

29.18 Alerts
You can view shipment alerts in this screen.
Table 29–33

Shipment Alerts, Shipment

Fields
Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add

an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.

384

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.

User Guide

Alerts

Table 29–33 Shipment Alerts, Shipment
Fields
Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.

Receiving Node

The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the outbound shipment contains any
hazardous item.

Table 29–34 Shipment Alerts, Alert List
Actions
View Details

This action allows you to view alert details. For more
information about alerts, see the Selling and
Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform User
Guide.

Fields
Alert ID

The alert ID.

Type

The type of alert raised. For example, ON_FAILURE or
FAILED_AUTH. For more information about alerts, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform User Guide.

Description

A brief description of the alert.

Queue

The queue the alert has been assigned to.

Priority

The alert priority.

Owner

The user who is handling the alert.

Raised On

The date the alert was raised.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

385

Additional Attributes

29.19 Additional Attributes
You can view shipment additional attributes in this screen.
Table 29–35

Additional Attributes, Shipment

Fields
Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add

an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.

386

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.

Receiving Node

Indicates the node that is receiving the outbound
shipment.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.

User Guide

Shipment Activity Demand

Table 29–36 Additional Attributes, Additional Attributes
Fields
Overage Allowed

Indicates whether the overage is allowed.
For outbound shipments, overage means shipping
more than was initially intended in a shipment.
For inbound shipments, overage means receiving more
than the expected quantity in a shipment.

Manually Entered

Indicates whether the shipment was manually entered,
or generated automatically.

Order Available On
System

Indicates whether the order that is associated with the
shipment is available in Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation, or if it only exists in an external system.

Case Content
Verification Not
Required

Indicates whether the case content verification is
required for this shipment.

Pallet Content
Verification Not
Required

Indicates whether the pallet content verification is
required for this shipment.

Shipment Entry
Overridden

Indicates whether the shipment entry is allowed.

Gift

Indicates whether the shipment line is a gift.

29.20 Shipment Activity Demand
You can view activity demand for the selected outbound shipments in this
screen.
Table 29–37 Shipment Activity Demand
Fields
Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add

an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

387

Shipment Activity Demand

Table 29–37

Shipment Activity Demand

Fields
Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.

Receiving Node

Indicates the node that is receiving the outbound
shipment.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.

Table 29–38

Shipment Activity Demand, Activity Demand List

Actions

388

Delete

This action allows you to delete the selected activity
demands.

Shipment Line #

The outbound shipment line number.

Location ID

The item location in the node.

Activity Code

The activity to be performed on items belonging to the
work order.

Pallet Id

The pallet LPN that belong to the work order.

Case Id

The case LPN that belong to the work order.

Item ID

The items that belong to the work order.

Priority

Indicates the priority of the demand.

Demand Quantity

Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.

Satisfied Quantity

The extent to which the demand is satisfied.

Demand Satisfied

Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.

User Guide

Shipment Audits

29.21 Shipment Audits
You can view any modifications performed against an outbound shipment
in this screen.
Table 29–39 Shipment Audits, Shipment
Fields
Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number with which the outbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
go to the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can

add an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.

Receiving Node

The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.

Has Hazardous Item

Indicates if the shipment has any hazardous item.

Table 29–40 Shipment Audits, Shipment Audits
Fields
Date

The date and time on which the shipment was
modified.

Modified By

The user who performed the modification.

Context

The modifications carried out against the shipment.

Modification

The attribute that was modified for the shipment.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

389

Logical Kits

Table 29–40

Shipment Audits, Shipment Audits

Fields
Old Value

The attribute value before making the modifications.

New Value

The attribute value after it was modified.

Reason Code

The reason for the modification.

Reason Text

Additional information as to why the modification was
made.

Table 29–41

Shipment, Shipment Line Audits

Fields
Date

The date and time on which the shipment line was
modified.

Modified By

The user who performed the modification.

Context

The modifications carried out against the shipment
line.

Line #

The shipment line number that was modified.

Modification

The attribute that was modified for the shipment line.

Old Value

The attribute value before making the modifications.

New Value

The attribute value after it was modified.

Reason Code

The reason for the modification.

Reason Text

Additional information as to why the modification was
made.

29.22 Logical Kits
You can view the kit components for a logical kit in this screen.
Table 29–42

Shipment Line Details, Shipment Line

Fields

390

Shipment Line #

The shipment line number.

Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

User Guide

Logical Kits

Table 29–42 Shipment Line Details, Shipment Line
Fields
Order #

The order number to which the outbound shipment
line belongs.

Order Line #

The order line number to which the outbound
shipment line belongs.

Release #

The order release number to which the outbound
shipment line belongs.

Item ID

The outbound shipment line item’s item ID.

Description

The item’s description.

Is Hazardous Item

Displays ’Y’ if the item is a hazardous item, or 'N' if it
is not a hazardous item.

Product Class

The outbound shipment line item’s product class.

Unit of Measure

The outbound shipment line item’s unit of measure.

Requested Serial #

The serial number requested in the order.

Quantity

Number of requested units of the item included in the
shipment.

Over Ship Quantity

Indicates quantity of an item over shipped.

Original Qty

Indicates the original quantity on the order for the
item.

Table 29–43 Shipment Line Details, Line Attributes
Fields
Segment Type

Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.

Segment #

Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.

COO

The country of origin.

FIFO #

FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order in which stock arrived at
the node. This is used to send out items that arrived
first than the ones that arrived later.

Net Weight

The net weight.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

391

Pack Containers

Table 29–43

Shipment Line Details, Line Attributes

Fields
Net Weight UOM

The net weight unit of measure.

Wave #

The wave number.

Customer PO #

The customer’s purchase order number.

Table 29–44

Shipment Line Details, Kit Components

Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Shipment Line Details
screen where you can view the shipment line details.

Fields
Item ID

The item ID for the SKU.

Description

Description of the item.

Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Qty Per Kit

Number of units of the item included in the kit.

Wave #

The wave number associated with the shipment line.

Quantity

Number of units of the item included in the shipment.

29.23 Pack Containers
(Applicable only for Distributed Order Management, Supply Collaboration,
and Reverse Logistics)
You can pack any unpacked items into containers for shipping in this
screen.
Table 29–45

Pack Container, Shipment

Fields

392

Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

User Guide

Pack Containers

Table 29–45 Pack Container, Shipment
Fields
Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add

an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.

Destination

The outbound shipment’s destination.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.

Table 29–46 Pack Container, Ship To
The address the shipment is shipped to.
Click
to go to the Address Details screen where you can modify the ship to
address.
Table 29–47 Pack Container, Container Details
Fields
Container Type

Select whether the container is a case or pallet.

Container SCM

Enter the shipment container marking number of the
case or pallet.

Tracking #

Enter the container’s tracking number used to track
the container’s status and location.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

393

Pack Containers

Table 29–47

Pack Container, Container Details

Fields
Declared Value

Enter the declared value used to calculate customs
charges. This field is only applicable to international
shipments.

Gross Weight

Enter the weight of the container plus its contents.

Net Weight

Enter the net weight of the container.

Height

Enter the height of the container.

Width

Enter the width of the container.

Length

Enter the length of the container.

Table 29–48

Pack Container, Unpacked Items

Fields
Tag/Serial

This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled
or serial tracked. The column label that displays is the
name of the unique identifier you have defined (for
example, Lot #). If you have defined more than one
unique identifier, the label that displays is Tag #. To
view the details associated with the container line,
click the hypertext link.
The tag details for a tag-controlled item displays, if the
ship node is configured to capture tags in all
operations performed within the node, or if the buyer
on a shipment mandates it as a part of their inbound
compliance. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.

394

Order #

The order number associated with the unpacked items.

Line #

The order line number to which the line item packaged
in the container belongs to.

Release #

The order release number to which the unpacked line
item belongs.

Item ID

The item ID of the unpacked line item.

The product class of the unpacked line item.

UOM

The unit of measure of the unpacked line item.

User Guide

Pack Containers

Table 29–48 Pack Container, Unpacked Items
Fields
Quantity

The quantity associated with the unpacked items.

Pack Quantity

Enter the item quantity you can pack in the container.

If the item is serial-controlled, an additional field is displayed to let you
enter the serial number.
Table 29–49 Pack Container, Serial Range
Field

Description

Serial #

Enter the serial number of the item.
Click

to add a new serial number.

Click
to go to the serial range panel, where you
can enter the serial range of the items.
From Serial #

Enter the start serial number.

To Serial #

Enter the end serial number.
Click

to add a new serial range.

Note: While packing whenever there is requested serial
defined in shipment lines of the outbound shipment, the
'Enter serial range' button is not displayed in the screen.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

395

Cancel Selected Shipments

29.24 Packing a Container
You can pack any unpacked items into containers for shipping in this
screen. For more information on this, see Section 8.45, "Pack or
Unpack".

29.25 Print
You can print documents or labels and apply to an outbound shipment
with the help of this screen.
Table 29–50

Fields
Print Service Name

Choose the applicable document or label you want to
print.

Printer Name

Choose the printer to print the document or label
from.

No. of Copies

Enter the total number of copies of the document or
label to print.

29.26 Cancel Selected Shipments
This screen allows you to cancel the selected outbound shipments.
Table 29–51

Cancel Selected Shipments

Fields

396

Backorder cancelled
quantity

Select if the quantity that was cancelled from a
shipment must be backordered.

Cancellation Reason
Code

Select the applicable reason code for cancellation.

Reason Text

Enter reason for cancellation of the outbound
shipment.

User Guide

Split Shipment

29.27 Split Shipment
Use this screen to split an outbound shipment.
Table 29–52 Split Shipment, Shipment
Fields
Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add

an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.

Seller

The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.

Destination

The outbound shipment’s destination.

Status

The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.

Table 29–53 Split Shipment, Shipment Lines
Actions
Split Lines

This action takes you to the Split Shipment Lines
where you can split the selected shipment line or
container lines.

Fields
Shipment Line #

The line number on the shipment for the item.

Order #

The order number to which the shipment line belongs

Line #

The line number to which the shipment line belongs.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

397

Split Shipment

Table 29–53

Split Shipment, Shipment Lines

Release #

The order release number to which the shipment line
belongs.

Item ID

The item ID for the SKU.

Description

The item’s description.

Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Mark For

The net weight of item expected

Quantity

Number of units of the item included in the shipment.

Split Qty

Enter the number of units of the item to be split.

Table 29–54

Split Shipment, Shipment Containers

Actions
Split Containers

This action takes you to the Split Shipment Lines
where you can split the selected shipment line or
container lines.

Fields

398

Container #

The container number.

Tracking #

The tracking number used to track a container during
the shipment process.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking.

Net Weight

The container’s net weight.

Gross Weight

The container’s total weight (including packaging).

Freight Charge

The charge applied by the Carrier for shipping the
container.

User Guide

Ship Node Detail

29.28 Split Shipment Lines
Use this screen to split a shipment or container lines in this screen.
Table 29–55 Split Shipment, Shipment
Fields
Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the outbound
shipment is automatically generated and populated by
the system.
Enter the outbound shipment number, if applicable.

29.29 Create Alerts
You can create alerts for the selected outbound shipments in this screen.
For field value descriptions, see the Shipment Alerts, Shipment and
Shipment Alerts, Alert List tables.

29.30 Ship Node Detail
You can view the ship node details for an inbound shipment in this
screen.
Table 29–56 Ship Node Details, Ship Node
Fields
Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment ships.

Description

A brief description of the ship node.

Interface

The interface the node uses to communicate with the
system.

Parent Organization

The organization that owns the ship node.

Parent Organization
Name

The name of the parent organization.

Identified By Parent As

The node ID as it is seen by the parent organization.

GLN

The GLN number.

Table 29–57 Ship Node Detail, Ship Node Address
The ship node’s address.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

399

Organization Details

Table 29–58

Ship Node Detail, Contact Address

The contact address for the ship node.

29.31 Organization Details
You can view an organization’s details in this screen.
Table 29–59

Organization Details

Field

Description

Organization Information
Organization Code

The code that identifies the organization.

Organization Name

The name of the organization.

DUNS Number

The unique nine-digit identification sequence which
provides unique identifiers of single business entities.
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation does not associate
any logic with the DUNS number.

Account Number With
Hub

If the organization is not the Hub, the account number
that the organization has with the Hub.

Primary Enterprise

The primary enterprise of the organization.

Primary URL

Enter the URL of the organization’s Internet address, if
applicable.

Primary Contact Address
This inner panel displays the current primary contact address for this
organization. Click
to view the Primary Contact Address Details. For more
information about the Primary Contact Address Details window, see Address
Details.
Corporate Address
This inner panel displays the current corporate address for this organization.
Click
to view the Corporate Address Details. For more information about the
Corporate Address Details window, see Address Details.

400

User Guide

Shipment Line Details

29.32 Select Delivery Plan
You can add an outbound shipment to a delivery plan in this screen.
Table 29–60 Select Delivery Plan
Fields
Plan #

Enter the plan number of the delivery plan you want to
add the outbound shipment to.

Plan Name

Enter the name of the delivery plan you want to add
the outbound shipment to.

Plan Date

Enter the date range through which the delivery plan
you are adding the outbound shipment to is valid.

29.33 Shipment Line Details
You can view an outbound shipment line details in this screen.
Table 29–61 Shipment Line Details, Shipment Line
Fields
Shipment Line #

The shipment line number.

Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Enterprise

The Enterprise associated with the shipment.

Order #

The order number to which the outbound shipment
line belongs.

Order Line #

The order line number to which the outbound
shipment line belongs.

Release #

The order release number to which the outbound
shipment line belongs.

Item ID

The outbound shipment line item’s item ID.

Description

The item’s description.

Is Hazardous Item

Displays ’Y’ if the item is a hazardous item, or 'N' if it
is not a hazardous item.

Product Class

The outbound shipment line item’s product class.

Unit of Measure

The outbound shipment line item’s unit of measure.

Requested Serial #

The serial number requested in the order.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

401

Shipment Line Details

Table 29–61

Shipment Line Details, Shipment Line

Fields
Quantity

Number of requested units of the item included in the
shipment.

Over Ship Quantity

Indicates quantity of an item over shipped.

Original Qty

Indicates the original quantity on the order for the
item.

Table 29–62

Shipment Line Details, Line Attributes

Fields
Segment Type

The item’s segment type. A segment type indicates an
inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made To
Customer or MTO - Made to Order.

Segment

The item’s segment number. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.

COO

The country of origin.

FIFO #

The FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute
that helps understand the order in which stock arrived
at the node. This is used to send out items that
arrived first than the ones that arrived later.

Net Weight

The net weight.

Net Weight UOM

The net weight unit of measure.

Wave #

The wave number.

Customer PO #

The customer’s purchase order number.

Table 29–63

Shipment Line Details, Requested Tag

Fields

402

Tag Identifiers

The requested tag identifiers for this shipment line.

Tag Attributes

The requested tag attributes for this shipment line.

User Guide

Create Wave

Table 29–64 Shipment Line Details, Actual Tag
Actions
Delete

This action deletes the specified tag quantity from the
shipment line.

Fields
The attributes shown here depend on the tag identifiers and attributes
configured.
Quantity

Indicates the quantity on the order with this tag
criteria.

29.34 Add Release
You can add an order release line to be included in an outbound shipment
in this screen. For more information, see the Sterling Distributed Order
Management: User Guide.

29.35 Create Wave
You can create wave for the selected shipment group in this screen.
Table 29–65 Create Wave
Fields
Node

Node associated with the wave.

Create New Wave With
Shipment Group

Select the shipment group for the wave.

Add To Wave #

Choose this option to add shipment to an existing
wave number.
You can also click

Consider

to select a wave number.

Select one of the following options:
All Eligible Shipments - Choose this to select all the
shipments.
First Shipments based on Expected Ship Date - Choose
this to select the first shipments based on the
expected ship date.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

403

Container Search By All Attributes

29.36 Containers
A container is the physical packaging of outbound shipment line items
included in a shipment. Cartons and pallets are examples of containers.
You can use the Outbound Shipment Console to search for individual
containers and view details such as container dimensions and line items
packed in the container.

29.37 Container Search By All Attributes
You can search for containers by all attributes with the help of this
screen.
Table 29–66

Container Search By All Attributes

Fields

404

Document Type

Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable

Order #

Enter the order number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Shipment #

Enter the outbound shipment number you are
searching for, if applicable.

Container #

Enter the container number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Container Type

Enter the type of containers you are searching for, if
applicable.

Tracking #

Enter the tracking number you want to search for
containers under, if applicable.

Item ID

Enter the item ID included in the containers you are
searching for, if applicable.

Container SCM

Enter the container SCM number you are searching for,
if applicable.

Has Hazardous Items

Select this check box to search for containers
containing hazardous items, if applicable.

Containers With
Logical Kits Only

Select this if you want to search for containers only
with logical kits, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of outbound shipments
you want returned from your search.

User Guide

Container Search By Status

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Container List screen displays as a result of outbound container
search by all attributes.

29.38 Container Search By Status
You can search for containers that fall within a particular status with the
help of this screen.
Table 29–67 Container Search By Status
Fields
Document Type

Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable.

Node

Select the node for which you want to search.

Shipment #

Enter the outbound shipment number you are
searching for, if applicable.

Container #

Enter the container number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Container Type

Enter the type of containers you are searching for, if
applicable.

Container Contains

Select the container quantity you are searching for, if
applicable.

Status

Select the status range of the container you want to
search for, if applicable.

Carrier/Service

Select the carrier/service you are searching for, if
applicable.

Container Group

Select the container group you are searching for, if
applicable.

Wave #

Enter the wave number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Outermost Containers
Only

Select check box to search for outermost containers
only, if applicable.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

405

Container List

Table 29–67

Container Search By Status

Fields
Unmanifested
Containers Only

Select check box to search for unmanifested
containers only, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of outbound shipments
you want returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Container List screen displays as a result of outbound container
search by status.

29.39 Container List
The Container List window displays the results of a container search. You
can perform actions on a single container or multiple containers by
selecting the check boxes of the containers you want to perform an
action on and choosing the applicable action from the action bar.
Table 29–68

Container List

Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view the container details.

Pack/Unpack

This action takes you to the Pack or Unpack screen
where you can pack or unpack a container.

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the container’s documents or labels.

Delete

This action lets you delete an inbound container.

Void Tracking#

This action lets you void a container’s tracking

number.

Fields
Container #

406

User Guide

The container number.

Container Details

Table 29–68 Container List
Shipment #

The shipment number of the shipment the container
belongs to.

Status

The container status.

Manifested

Indicates whether the container is manifested.

Container Type

Indicates whether it is a Pallet or Carton.

Tracking #

The tracking number used to track a container during
the shipment process.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking.

Ship Date

The date the container ships on.

29.40 Container Details
The Container Details screen provides container information associated
with the shipment. The actions that can be performed in the Container
Details screen are explained in the following tables.
Table 29–69 Container Details, Container
View Icon
Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Container
Status Audits where you can view the container’s
status audits.
Container Activity List - This icon takes you to the
Container Activity List where you can view activities
performed against an outbound container.
Actions
Pack/Unpack

This action takes you to the Pack or Unpack screen
where you can pack or unpack a container.

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the shipping documents or labels.

Void Tracking #

This action takes lets you void a container’s

tracking number.

Fields
Container #

The container number.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

407

Container Details

Table 29–69

Container Details, Container

Container Type

The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.

Container Group

The container group to which the container belongs to.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.

Parent Container #

The parent container #. This field displays only if the
container is a child container.

Parent Container Type
#

The type of parent container used. For example,
Carton or Pallet. This field displays only if the
container is a child container.

Parent Container
Group #

The container group to which the container belongs to.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking number of the case
or pallet.

Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Load #

The load number associated with the container. This
field displays only if the container belongs to a load.
Click this link to go to the Load Details screen to view
the load details associated with the container. For

more information, see the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.

Table 29–70

Container Details, Execution Details

Fields
Container Location

Indicates the location where the container is available.

Container Status

Indicates the current status of the container.

Is Manifested

Indicates whether the container is manifested.

Table 29–71

Container Details, Container Info

Fields

408

Carrier/Service

The Carrier and Carrier service shipping the container.

Tracking #

The container’s tracking number used to track the
container’s status and location.

User Guide

Container Details

Table 29–71 Container Details, Container Info
Fields
Gross Weight

The weight of the container plus its contents.

COD Pay Method

The COD payment type.

Return Tracking #

The return tracking number associated with the
container.

Net Weight

The container’s content’s weight.

COD Amount

The COD amount.

Size

The size of the container.

Actual Weight

The actual weight of the container.

Actual Freight Charge

The actual freight charges for the carrier or service

Length

The length of the container.

Billed Weight

The billed weight.

Special Services
Surcharges

The special services surcharges.

Width

The width of the container.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the container contains hazardous items.

Declared Insurance
Value

The value used to calculate customs charges. This field
is only applicable to international shipments.

Height

The height of the container.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

409

Container Details

Table 29–72

Container Details, Container Line Details

Fields
Tag Details

This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled
or serial tracked. The column label that displays is the
name of the unique identifier you have defined (for
example, Lot #). If you have defined more than one
unique identifier, the label that displays is Tag #.
The tag details for a tag-controlled item displays, if the
ship node is configured to capture tags in all
operations performed within the node, or if the buyer
on a shipment mandates it as a part of their inbound
compliance. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Serial Details screen to the
serial details for the container line.

410

Order #

The order number to which the line item packaged in
the container belongs.

Line #

The order line number of the line item packaged in the
container.

Release #

The order release number to which the line item
packaged in the container belongs.

Item ID

The item ID of the line item packaged in the container.

The product class of the line item packaged in the
container.

UOM

The unit of measure of the line item packaged in the
container.

Description

The item’s description.

Quantity

The quantity of the line item to be packaged into the
container.

Packed Quantity

The actual quantity of the line item packaged into the
container.

User Guide

Container Details

Table 29–73 Container Details, Inner Pack Details
Fields
Tag Details

Click the
icon to view and hide tag information of
an inner pack.
The tag details for a tag-controlled item displays, if the
ship node is configured to capture tags in all
operations performed within the node, or if the buyer
on a shipment mandates it as a part of their inbound
compliance. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.

Item ID

The item’s item ID.

The item’s product class.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Description

A brief description of the item.

Inner Pack Quantity

The item quantity contained in each inner pack.

No Of Inner Packs

The total number of inner packs packaged into the
container.

Table 29–74 Container Details, Child Containers
Fields
Container #

The container number.

Status

The container status.

Container Type

The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.

Tracking #

The container’s tracking number used to track the
status and location of the container.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

411

Container Status Audits

29.41 Serial Details
You can view an outbound container serial details in this screen.
Table 29–75

Serial Details, Serial Information

Fields
Node

Node associated with the item.

Location

Location associated with the item.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the container.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the container.

Serial #

The serial number associated with the container items.

Table 29–76

Serial Details, Child Serials

Fields
Secondary Serial #1

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #2

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #3

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #4

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #5

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #6

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #7

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #8

Component serial number of the item.

Secondary Serial #9

Component serial number of the item.

29.42 Container Status Audits
You can view any status modifications performed against an outbound
container status in this screen.
Table 29–77

Container Status Audits, Container

Fields

412

Container #

The outbound container number.

Container Type

The outbound container type. Valid values are: Pallet
or Case.

User Guide

Container Status Audits

Table 29–77 Container Status Audits, Container
Fields
Container Group

The container group to which the container belongs to.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.

Parent Container #

The parent container number.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.

Parent Container Type

The type of parent container used. For example, Case
or Pallet.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.

Parent Container
Group

The container group to which the container belongs.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking number of the case
or pallet.

Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.
Click this link to go to the Shipment Details screen and
view the outbound shipment details.

Table 29–78 Container Status Audits, Container Status Audits
Fields
Modified By

The user who performed the modification.

Old Status

The outbound shipment status before the status
modification.

Old Status Date

The date the outbound shipment entered the old
status.

New Status

The outbound shipment status after the status
modification.

New Status Date

The date the status modification was made.

Reason Code

The reason for the modification.

Reason Text

Additional information as to why the modification was
made.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

413

Container Activity List

29.43 Container Activity List
You can view details about the outbound container activities in this
screen.
Table 29–79

Container Activity List, Container

Fields
Container #

The outbound container number.

Container Type

The outbound container type. Valid values are: Pallet
or Case.

Container Group

The group to which the container belongs. Valid values
are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.

Parent Container #

The parent container number.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.

Parent Container Type

The type of parent container used. For example, Case
or Pallet.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.

Parent Container
Group

The group to which the parent container belongs. Valid
values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking number of the case
or pallet.

Shipment #

The outbound shipment number identifying the
shipment to which this container belongs.
Click this link to go to the Shipment Details screen and
view the details about this outbound shipment.

Table 29–80

Container Activity List, Container Activities

Fields

414

Date

The date and time when the activity was performed for
this container.

Recorded By

The user who performed the activity.

Activity Code

Identifies the activity that was performed.

User Guide

Modify Containerization

Table 29–80 Container Activity List, Container Activities
Fields
Location ID

Indicates the location where the activity was
performed in the node.

Node

Indicates the node where the activity was performed.

Address

Indicates the address where the activity was
performed.

Is An Exception

Indicates if the activity recorded is an exception to
typically performed activities.

Notes

Any additional information about the activity
execution.

29.44 Pack or Unpack
You can pack or unpack a container in this screen. For more information
about packing a container, see Section 8.45, "Pack or Unpack".

29.45 Delete Selected Containers
You can delete selected container from the shipment in this screen.
Table 29–81 Delete Selected Containers, Delete
Fields
Remove quantity from
shipment line

Select the check box to remove the quantity from
shipment line.

Backorder removed
quantity

Select the check box to remove backorder quantity.

29.46 Modify Containerization
You can modify the containerized quantity in this screen.
Table 29–82 Modify Containerization, Container
View Icon
Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Container
Status Audits screen where you can view a list of

status audits that you modified for an outbound
container.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

415

Modify Containerization

Table 29–82

Modify Containerization, Container

Fields
Container #

The container number.

Shipment #

The outbound shipment the container belongs to.

Container Type

The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.

Ship Date

The date by which the container must ship.

Container Group

The container group to which the container belongs to.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.

Manifested

Indicates whether the container is manifested.

Remove quantity from
shipment line

Select check box to remove quantity from the
shipment line.

Ship To

The address the container is shipped to.

Table 29–83

Modify Containerization, Ship To

The address the shipment is shipped to.
Click
to go to the Address Details screen where you can modify the ship to
address.
Table 29–84

Modify Containerization, Container Info

Fields

416

Carrier/Service

The Carrier and Carrier service used to ship the
container.

Tracking #

The container’s tracking number used to track the
container’s status and location.

Pallet/Carton SCM

The shipment container marking number of the pallet
or carton.

Declared Value

The value used to calculate customs charges. This field
is only applicable to international shipments as it is
insured.

Gross Weight

The gross weight of the container.

Actual Weight

The actual weight of the container.

User Guide

Modify Containerization

Table 29–84 Modify Containerization, Container Info
Fields
Size

The size of the container.

Length

The length of the container.

Width

The width of the container.

Height

The height of the container.

Net Weight

The net weight of the container.

Table 29–85 Modify Containerization, Container Line Details
Fields
Tag Details

Order #

The order number to which the line item packaged in
the container belongs.

Line #

The container line number and the order line number
of the line item packaged in the container.

Release #

The order release number to which the line item
packaged in the container belongs.

Item ID

The item ID of the line item packaged in the container.

The product class of the line item packaged in the
container.

UOM

The unit of measure of the line item packaged in the
container.

Description

Description of the item.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

417

Resolve Short Picked Containers

Table 29–85

Modify Containerization, Container Line Details

Fields
Ship By Date

The date by which the container line must be shipped.

Containerized Quantity

Enter or modify the containerized quantity. If
containers are short picked, you can resolve
short pick by modifying the containerized
quantity. For more information, see the Resolve
Short Picked Containers screen.

Packed Quantity

The quantity of the line item packaged in the
container.

Table 29–86

Modify Containerization, Execution Details

Fields
Location

The outbound container present in location.

Status

The outbound container execution status.

Table 29–87

Modify Containerization, Child Containers

Fields
Container #

The container number.

Status

The container status.

Container Type

The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.

Tracking #

The container’s tracking number used to track the
status and location of the container.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking.

Note: The Modify Container action is only available when

that container belongs to a WMS Node.

29.47 Resolve Short Picked Containers
Short picked containers can be resolved manually by requesting the
system to pack additional inventory into the containers or modifying the

418

User Guide

Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes

containerization quantity on the container and backordering due to
inadequate inventory.
1.

Click Short Picked link in the Container Details screen.

Modify the Containerized Quantity.

Click Save. The status changes to Short Pick Resolved.

29.48 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Use this screen to search for dock appointments by all attributes.
Table 29–88 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Fields
Node

The node associated with the docks displays.

Start Date

The start date is defaulted to the current date.
Enter the start date of the appointment for which you
are searching, if applicable.
Choose the calendar lookup to change the date.

Number of Days To
Display

Enter the maximum number of days to be displayed
on the dock schedule calendar as a result of your
search, if applicable. By default, the value displayed is
5.

Location

Enter the dock location, if applicable.
Choose the lookup option to search for dock locations.

Inbound Delivery

Check this checkbox to search for inbound docks, if
applicable.

Outbound Pickup

Check this checkbox to search for outbound docks, if
applicable.

Appointment #

Enter the appointment number for which you are
searching, if applicable.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number for which you are
searching for the dock appointment, if applicable.

Order #

Enter the order number for which you are searching
for the dock appointment, if applicable.

Load #

Enter the load number for which you are searching for
the dock appointment, if applicable.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

419

Dock Schedule Details

Table 29–88

Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes

Fields
Carrier

Enter the carrier for which you are searching for the
dock appointment, if applicable.

BOL #

Enter the bill of lading number for which you are
searching for the dock appointment, if applicable.

The Dock Schedule Details screen displays as a result of your dock
appointment search by all attributes.

29.49 Dock Schedule Details
This screen provides visibility to the dock appointment calendar, and
displays inbound, outbound, and both inbound and outbound docks with
their:
Q

Available time slots for creating new appointments.

Unavailable time slots due to calendar constraints.

Unavailable time slots due to appointments already taken.

Table 29–89

Dock Schedule Details, Dock Availability

Actions
Manage Dock Group

This action button takes you to the Dock Group Details
screen.

Zoom In

Click this action button to view more definitive details
of the appointment calendar. Two levels of Zoom In
are supported.

Zoom Out

Click this action button to view a larger area of the
appointment calendar. Two levels of Zoom Out are
supported.

Displays the dock locations for nodes that are of the dock type INBOUND,
OUTBOUND, and BOTH.

420

User Guide

Dock Appointment

Table 29–90 Dock Schedule Details, Legend
Indicates an appointment for the searched criteria.
Click a slot to modify an existing appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates appointments that do not match the
searched criteria.
Click a slot to modify an existing appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates free slots for which new appointments can
be taken.
Click a slot to create a new dock appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates the unavailable slots due to the calendar
constraints.

29.50 Dock Appointment
You can create new appointments or modify existing appointments with
the help of this screen.
Table 29–91 Dock Appointment, Appointment Details
Actions
Cancel

Click this action button to cancel an appointment.

Fields
Appointment #

The appointment number associated with the dock
displays, if applicable.
The appointment number displays only for the existing
appointments.

Location

The dock location for which you chose to take an
appointment displays here.

Appointment Type

By default, the Outbound Pickup appointment type is
selected for outbound dock locations, and Inbound
Delivery for inbound and both inbound and outbound
dock locations.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

421

Dock Appointment

Table 29–91
Start Date

Dock Appointment, Appointment Details
This start date is defaulted with the date of the
selected slot.
Enter the start date on which you want to take an
appointment or choose the calendar lookup to change
the date.

Start Time

This start time is defaulted with the time of the
selected slot.
Enter the start time of the appointment or choose the
time lookup to change the time.

Shipment #

Load #

422

Order #

Enter the order number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.

BOL #

Enter the bill of lading number you want to associate
with the dock appointment, if applicable.

PRO #

Enter the PRO number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.

Carrier

Select the carrier for which you want to take an
appointment, if applicable.

Notes

Enter any additional information associated with the
dock appointment, if applicable.

Weight

Enter the weight of the shipment, if applicable.

Volume

Enter the volume of the shipment, if applicable.

No Of Cases

Enter the number of cases contained in the shipment
or load, if applicable.

No Of Pallets

Enter the number of pallets contained in the shipment
or load, if applicable.

User Guide

Dock Group Details

Table 29–91 Dock Appointment, Appointment Details
Estimate End Time

Click this button to calculate and display the estimated
end time in the End Time field. The estimated end
time is calculated based on SAM definition for the
productivity type, LOADING/UNLOADING

End Time

To specify a pre-determined end time, enter the end
time.
Choose the time lookup to change the time.

Click Save to save the dock appointment.

29.51 Dock Group Details
You can enter constraints on the maximum number of appointments that
can be taken for the group of docks associated with a node.
Table 29–92 Dock Group Details, Dock Group
Fields
Node

The node associated with the docks displays.

Table 29–93 Dock Group Details, Dock Group Max No. of Appointments
Action
Remove

Click this action button to remove the selected
appointment constraints.

Fields
Start Time

Indicates the start time of the time slot for which the
maximum number of appointment constraint needs to
be created.
Click

End Time

to create an appointment constraint.

Indicates the end time of the time slot for which the
maximum number of appointment constraint needs to
be created.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

423

View Holds

Table 29–93

Dock Group Details, Dock Group Max No. of Appointments

Sunday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Monday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Tuesday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Wednesday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Thursday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Friday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.

Saturday

Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window.

Click Save to save the maximum number of dock group appointment
constraints.

29.52 View Holds
You can view holds that are applied to the selected outbound shipments
in this screen.
Table 29–94

View Holds, Shipment

Fields

424

Shipment #

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipment reference number.

Plan #

The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with.

User Guide

View Holds

Table 29–94 View Holds, Shipment
Fields
Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the outbound shipment.

Buyer

The identifier for the buyer.

Seller

The identifier for the seller.

Ship Node

The node from where the outbound shipment is
shipped.

Receiving Node

The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.

Status

The outbound shipment status.

Release #

The shipment release number to which the outbound
shipment line belongs.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.

Merge Node

If you have shipment lines coming from multiple nodes
and want to consolidate them into one load, enter a
node at which you want all dependent shipment lines
to be consolidated with the parent shipment line.
Note: Merge Node is only relevant in a Deliver
Together dependency.

Table 29–95 View Holds, Shipment Holds
Actions
Add Holds

This action takes you to the Add Holds screen where
you can add holds to the selected outbound shipment.

Fields
Hold Description

A brief description of the hold.
Choose the

icon to View History of the shipments

that are held.
Hold Status

The current status of the hold.

Hold Comment

Any additional comments for the hold.

Outbound Shipment Console Screens

425

View History

Table 29–95

View Holds, Shipment Holds

Actions
Action

Select the action that you want to apply to the hold
from the drop-down list.

Reason

Enter the reason for the hold.

Table 29–96

View Holds, Resolved Holds

Fields
Hold Description

A brief description of the hold.

Reason

The reason for changing this hold to resolved status.

29.53 Add Holds
You can add holds to the outbound shipment on this screen.
Table 29–97

Add Holds, Shipment Holds

Fields
Hold Type

Select the hold type associated with the outbound
shipment from the drop-down list.

Reason

Enter the reason for the hold.

29.54 View History
Whenever the status of a shipment hold changes, the information
regarding the status change is recorded in Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation. In this screen, you can view the history of a shipment hold.
Table 29–98

View History, Primary Information

Fields

426

Shipment#

The outbound shipment number.

Shipper’s Ref. #

The outbound shipper’s reference number.

Plan #

The outbound shipment’s plan number

User Guide

30
Create Outbound Shipment Screens
Shipments (ASN) are transmitted to warehouses through EDI downloads,
fax, or e-mail, and also when a trailer arrives with no prior notice.
The shipment entry console enables you to manually create shipments
from fax, e-mail or telephone conversations, and also for those trailers
that arrive with no prior notice.

30.1 Shipment Entry
You can create outbound shipments for a sales or transfer order in this
screen.
Table 30–1

Shipment Entry

Action
Supervisory Overrides

This action takes you to the Shipment Supervisory
Overrides screen where you can specify whether the
shipment can have overages.

Fields
Document Type

Select the document type associated with the
shipment you are creating.
Valid values are 'Sales Order' or 'Transfer Order'. For
an outbound shipment, valid value is 'Sales Order'

Ship Node

The shipping node associated with the shipment. This
represents the seller's ship node.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the shipment you
are creating for, if applicable.

Create Outbound Shipment Screens

427

Shipment Supervisory Overrides

Table 30–1 Shipment Entry
Shipment #

Enter the shipment number for the shipment you are
creating, if applicable. A unique number is
automatically generated by the system, if number is
not specified.

Receiving Node

Select node where the receipt is being performed.

Buyer

Enter the buyer associated with the shipment you
want to create, if applicable.

Seller

Enter the seller associated with the shipment you want
to create.

Order #

Enter the order number, if there is only order on the
shipment.

Release#

Enter the release number of the order against which
the shipment is being created, if applicable.

Pro#

Enter the PRO number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment you are creating, if applicable.

Carrier/Service

Select the carrier service availed for transporting the
shipment, if applicable.

BOL#

Enter the bill of lading number of the shipment you
are creating, if applicable.

Trailer#

Enter the trailer number of the shipment you are
creating, if applicable.

After entering the relevant information in the fields a shipment is created
and you are taken to the Shipment Details screen.

30.2 Shipment Supervisory Overrides
This screen allows you to create overages for the shipment being
created.
Table 30–2 Shipment Supervisory Overrides

428

Field

Description

Allow Overage

Select to allow overage for the outbound shipment.

User Guide

31
Wave Console Screens
During the normal course of the day, the system automatically generates
waves based on parameters defined by the system administrator. The
waves are generated based on shipment groups that have been given a
sequence and a defined set of selector criteria. When waves are created,
the system analyzes the shipments in need of picking and evaluates
them against a shipment group’s selector criteria based on the group’s
sequence. If the shipment does not match up with the group’s selector
criteria, the shipment is then evaluated by the next shipment group in
the sequence, until a match has been found. The shipment is then added
to that shipment group. Once all shipments have been matched up with
the appropriate shipment groups, waves are created for those groups.
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Wave Console.

31.1 Wave Search
The Wave Search screen lets you enter the criteria to search for waves.
Table 31–1

Wave Search

Fields

Description

Node

Select the node you want to search for waves in.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number of the shipment that
belongs to the wave you are searching for, if
applicable.

Wave #

Enter the wave number of the wave you are searching
for, if applicable.

Wave Status

Select the status of the waves you are searching for.

Wave Console Screens

429

Wave List

Table 31–1 Wave Search
Fields

Description

Shipment Group

Enter the shipment group that the waves you are
searching belong to.

Release No Earlier
Than

Enter the Release No Earlier Than date range that you
want to search for waves in. Only waves with a
Release No Earlier Than date that falls within the
range you specify considered.

Release No Later Than

Enter the Release No Later Than date range that you
want to search for waves in. Only waves with a
Release No Later Than date that falls within the range
you specify considered.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of waves you want
returned from your search.

Click Search to view the search results in the Wave List screen.

31.2 Wave List
The Wave List screen displays the result of a wave search. This screen
lets you perform actions on a single wave or on multiple waves by
selecting the check boxes of the relevant waves and choosing the
applicable action from the action bar.
Table 31–2 Wave List
Actions

430

This action button moves the wave to the accepted
status.

Release

This action button takes you to the Release Wave
screen.

Cancel

This action button takes you to the Cancel Wave
screen.

View Summary

This action button takes you to the Wave Summary
screen.

Print Wave

This action button takes you to the Print Wave screen.

View Alerts

This action button takes you to the Alert List screen.

User Guide

Release Wave

Table 31–2

Wave List

Fields
Wave #

The wave number.

Shipment Group

The shipment group that the wave belongs to.

Status

The status of the wave is in.

Sequence #

The sequence number associated with the wave.

Release No Earlier
Than

The wave is not released for picking before this date.

Release No Later Than

The wave is not release for picking after this date.

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
The shipment is getting excluded from the wave, and
therefore cannot ship the shipment.
Cause
The Shipment Selector Details are defined incorrectly, or
shipments are not serialized, or the pick strategy to pick
inventory is not defined for a wave.
Resolution
Make sure that the Shipment Selector Details are defined
correctly, shipments are serialized, and the pick strategy
to pick inventory is defined for a wave.
For more information about Shipment Selector Details
screen, see the section Defining Shipment Selectors in the
chapter Configuring Picking chapter in the Sterling
Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide.

31.3 Release Wave
The Release Wave screen lets you request the release of a wave for
picking.

Wave Console Screens

431

Wave Summary

Table 31–3 Release Wave
Field

Description

Override Concurrent
Wave Constraint

Select Override Concurrent Wave Constraint to
override any existing wave constraints that may keep
the wave from being released, if applicable.

31.4 Cancel Wave
Table 31–4 Cancel Wave
Field

Description

Cancellation Reason
Code

The code of the reason for cancelling the wave.

Reason Text

The description of the reason for cancelling the wave

31.5 Wave Summary
The Wave Summary screen lets you view the details associated with a
wave.
Table 31–5 Wave Summary, Wave
Actions
View Task Summary

This action button takes you to the Task Summary
screen.

This action button moves the wave to the accepted
status.

Release

This action button takes you to the Release Wave
screen.

Cancel

This action button takes you to the Cancel Wave
screen.

Fields

432

Wave #

The wave number.

Shipment Group

The shipment group to which the wave belongs.

Status

The current status of the wave.

Priority

The wave’s priority.

User Guide

Wave Summary

Table 31–5

Wave Summary, Wave

Release No Earlier
Than

The wave is not released for picking before this date.

Release No Later Than

The wave is not release for picking after this date.

Table 31–6

Wave Summary, Overall Summary

Fields

Description

# Shipments

The number of shipments included in the wave.
Click this link to view the Shipment Summary screen.

# Shipment Lines

The number of shipment lines included in the wave.

# Batches

The number of batches included in the wave.
Click this link to view the Batch Summary screen.

# Work Orders

The number of work orders included in the wave.
Click this link to view the Work Order Summary
screen.

# SKUs

The number of individual SKUs included in the wave.
Click this link to view the Item Task Summary screen.

# Shipment Profiles

The number of shipment profiles included in the wave.
Click this link to view the Shipment Profile Summary
screen.

Volume

The total volume of the shipments in the wave.

Case Type

The types of cases included in the wave.

Quantity

The quantity that the case type holds.

Estimated Cases

The estimated number of cases for the case type
needed to fulfill the wave.
Click this link to view the Shipping Containers
Summary screen.

Wave Console Screens

433

Shipment Summary

Table 31–7 Wave Summary, Task Types
Fields

Description

Task Type

The task type name performed during the wave.

Description

A brief description of the task type.

Open quantity

The task quantity that are currently open for a task
type.

Held quantity

The task quantity that are held.

Suggested quantity

The task suggested quantity that have been assigned
but not accepted.

In Progress quantity

The task quantity that are currently in progress.

Complete quantity

The task quantity that have been completed.

Cancelled quantity

The task quantity that have been cancelled.

Total quantity

The total task quantity that were generated for the
wave for a task type.

31.6 Shipment Profile Summary
The Shipment Profile Summary screen enables you to view a wave’s
shipment profile summary based on the profile identifier.
Table 31–8 Shipment Profile Summary
Fields

Description

Profile Id

The profile identifier for a shipment.

Status

The shipment status.

# Shipments in Wave #
Wave Number

The number of shipments included in the wave for
a profile identifier.
Click this link to view the shipments list.

Total

The total number of shipments in a wave.

31.7 Shipment Summary
The Shipment Summary screen enables you to view a wave’s shipment
summary.

434

User Guide

Work Order Summary

Table 31–9

Shipment Summary

Fields

Description

Carrier

The carrier code for the shipment displays.

Status

The shipment status.

# Shipments in Wave # 1

The number of shipments included in the wave.
Click this link to view the shipment list.

Total

The total number of shipments.

31.8 Batch Summary
The Batch Summary screen enables you to view the summary of batches
created for a wave.
Table 31–10 Batch Summary, Batch List
Actions
View Details

This action button takes you to the Batch Detail
screen.

Fields
Batch #

The number associated with a task batch.

Task Type

The task type associated with a task batch.

Batch Status

The status associated with a task batch.

Equipment Type

The equipment type associated with a task batch.

No. of Items

The number of items included in a task batch.

No. of Containers

The number of containers included in a task batch.

First Pick Location

The first pick location for a task batch.

Last Pick Location

The last pick location for a task batch.

No. Of Locations

The number of pick locations in a task batch.

Total Quantity

The total quantity associated with a task batch.

31.9 Work Order Summary
You view the work order summary for a wave.

Wave Console Screens

435

Shipping Containers Summary

Table 31–11

Work Order Summary

Field
Activity

The activity performed on items belonging to the work
order.

Pending Work Orders

Total work orders still pending for the activity.

Completed Work
Orders

Total work orders completed for the activity.

31.10 Item Task Summary
You view a summary of tasks created for an item and each task type
from a location for the wave.
Table 31–12

Item Task Summary, Item Task List

Fields

Description

Item Id

The identifier of the item associated with a task type.
Click this link to view the Task List screen.

Item Description

A brief description of the item.

Task Type

The name of the task type.

Source Location

The origin location of the task.

Open quantity

The task quantity that is currently open for an item for
a specific task type in the source location.

Held quantity

The task quantity that is held for an item for a specific
task type in the source location.

Completed quantity

The task quantity that is completed for an item for a
specific task type in the source location.

Total Quantity

The total task quantity for an item for a specific task
type in the source location.

31.11 Shipping Containers Summary
The Shipping Containers Summary screen lets you view a summary of
the wave’s shipping containers.

436

User Guide

Print Wave

Table 31–13 Shipping Containers Summary
Fields

Description

Status

The shipment status.

Wave #

The wave number associated with the shipment.

# Cases

The number of cases in the shipment.

# Pallets

The number of pallets in the shipment.
Click this link to view the container list.

31.12 Prioritize Wave
The Prioritize Wave screen lets you prioritize a wave.
Table 31–14 Prioritize Wave
Fields

Description

Priority

The priority to be applied to the wave.

Release No Earlier
Than

The time and date before which the wave cannot
be released.

Release No Later

The time and date after which the wave cannot
be released.

31.13 Print Wave
The Print Wave screen lets you print wave information. This can be used
by the pickers.
Table 31–15 Print Wave
Fields

Description

Print Service Name

Choose the print service name you want to print.

Printer Name

Select the printer name you want to print from.

No. of Copies

Enter the total number of copies of waves you want to
print.

Wave Console Screens

437

Alert List

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
After releasing a wave, you cannot print batch sheets and
shipping labels.
Cause
The printer may not be connected, printer power or green
light may not be on, and/or printer that you want to print
to is not selected.
Resolution
Make sure your printer is connected, printer power or
green light is on, and/or select the correct printer that you
want to use.

31.14 Alert List
The Alert List screen lets you view a wave’s alerts.
Table 31–16

438

Alert List, Wave

Fields

Description

Wave #

The wave number.

Description

A brief description of the wave.

Shipment Group

The shipment group that the wave belongs to.

Status

The status the wave is in.

Priority

The wave’s priority.

Release No Earlier
Than

The wave is not released for picking before this date.

Release No Later Than

The wave is not released for picking after this date.

User Guide

Wave Audit

Table 31–17 Alert List, Alert List
Action
View Details

This action button displays the details of the selected
alerts. For more information about alert details, see
the "Viewing Alert Details" chapter of the Selling and
Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform User
Guide.

Fields
Alert ID

The alert ID.
Choose this link to view alert details. For more
information about alert details, see the "Viewing Alert
Details" of the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform User Guide.

Type

The type of alert raised. For example, ON_FAILURE or
FAILED_AUTH. For more information about alerts, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform User Guide.

Description

A brief description of the alert.

Queue

The queue the alert has been assigned to.

Priority

The alert priority.

Status

Indicates if the alert is open or closed.

Owner

The user who is handling the alert.

Raised On

The date the alert was raised.

31.15 Wave Audit
The Wave Audits screen allows you to audit the details of a wave.
Table 31–18 Wave Audits Screen
Action
Click this action to go to the Wave Audit screen, where
you can view the wave audits.
Fields
Wave

Wave Console Screens

439

Wave Audit

Table 31–18

Wave Audits Screen

Wave #

The wave number.

Shipment Group

The shipment group to which the wave belongs.

Status

The current status of the wave.

Ship Node

The node from which the wave was created.

Wave Audit
Date

The date on which the wave was modified.

Modified By

The name of the user who modified the wave.

Modification

The old and new statuses of the wave.

Reason Code

The reason code associated with the wave
modification.

Reason Text

Additional information about why the wave was
modified.

No of Shipments in
Wave

The total number of shipments included in the wave.

Exception Audits
Exception Audit Details

Click this hyperlink to view the exception audit details.

Modification

Indicates the reasons for exception.
There are two types of modification, Removed from
Wave and Split in Shipment.

Exception Audits Detail

440

Date

The date on which the exception occurred.

Modified By

The name of the user who modified the wave.

Reason Code

The reason code associated with the wave
modification.

Reason Text

Additional information about why the wave was
modified.

User Guide

Wave Audit

Table 31–18 Wave Audits Screen
Old Shipment No

The old shipment number of the shipment that is split
from the shipment.
This field is populated if the Modification Type is Split
in Shipment.

New Shipment No

The new shipment number of the shipment that is
created after splitting the shipment.
This field is populated if the Modification Type is Split
in Shipment.

Wave Console Screens

441

Wave Audit

442

User Guide

32
Create Wave Screens
This chapter provides field value descriptions for the Create Wave screen.

32.1 Create Wave
You can request for a wave creation for a shipment group in this screen.
Table 32–1

Create Wave, Create Wave

Field

Description

Shipment Group

Select the shipment group for which you want to
request for a wave creation.

Click Create Wave to request for a wave creation.

Create Wave Screens

443

Create Wave

444

User Guide

33
Pack Station Screens
The Pack Station screen enables you to pack cartons and/or pallets after
picking the items.
For more information about Execution Console Framework, see
Appendix B, "Understanding the Execution Console Framework".

33.1 Pack Details
This screen enables you to pack cartons and/or pallets after picking the
items. The inner pack quantity breakup for the selected item also
displays. You can add or modify the inner pack quantity and the inner
packs packaged into the container.

Pack Station Screens

445

Pack Details

Note: To extend the Pack HSDE functionality in the

Applications Manager, under HSDE_Pack (exuipack) in the
application rules side panel, right-click Pack_Details
resource, and select the Save As option. In the Resource
Details: Pack Details dialog box that is displayed, enter a
prefix in the Resource Prefix field, and click
. In the
Resource Details: Pack Details window, in the Detail View
panel, the following attribute is displayed in the Java
Server Page field:
exuipack_pack_
container.jsp?AutoDetectInventoryAttributes=

If you set the value of this attribute to "N", in the Pack
HSDE screen of the Console, a dialog box is displayed
depending on the type of item you are packing. Enter
the appropriate inventory attributes in the
corresponding fields.
If you set the value of this attribute to “Y”, the
inventory attributes are automatically copied based on
the location inventory information available with the
Sterling Warehouse Management System.
For more information about setting the attributes, refer
to the information provided in Table 33–9.

Table 33–1 Pack Details, Scan
Actions

446

Close Shipment

This action allows you to manually close the shipment
after the packing process is complete. You can also
press Alt+S to close the shipment.

Close Container

This action allows you to manually close the container
after the packing process is complete. You can also
press Alt+C to close the container.

Weigh

This action enables you to enter the actual weight of
the container. You can also press Alt+W to record the
container’s weight.

User Guide

Pack Details

Table 33–1

Pack Details, Scan

Fields
Location

Select the pack location.
The pack station uniquely identifies devices including
printers and weighing scales attached.

Scan Identifier

Enter or scan the container SCM, shipment number,
batch number, LPN identifier, serial number, or item
identifier. In the Instructions panel, shipment or
container level instructions displays. For more
information, see the Instructions table.
In situations where containerization is performed by
the system during wave release, scanning of the
container SCM identifies the shipment.
During post-pick containerization, the shipment
number and the container SCM identifying the
container must be scanned.
The information entered above is used to populate the
Items panel to indicate item and quantities to be
packed into the container.

New Case

Click this button to generate a new container SCM for
the case, if applicable.

New Pallet

Click this button to generate a new container SCM for
the pallet, if applicable.

Table 33–2

Pack Details, Products

Fields
SKU

Enter or scan barcode that identifies the item to be
packed into the container for the shipment. In the
Instructions panel, item level instructions displays. For
more information, see the Instructions table.
The "Last Scanned Item Id" field populates with the
item ID.

Scan Quantity

The item quantity scanned during the pack process is
automatically populated by the system.

Pack Station Screens

447

Pack Details

Table 33–2 Pack Details, Products
Fields
UOM

Select the appropriate item's unit of measure, if
applicable.
This value is automatically populated when UPC code,
UPC Case Code, case with LPN is scanned in the SKU
field.

Add Quantity

Enter the quantity to add to the container, if
applicable.
In the SKU field, when you scan the UPC Code, UPC
Case Code or a case LPN, the system automatically
populates the "Add Quantity" value, which is editable.

Inventory Status

Select the appropriate inventory status.

Remove Quantity

Enter the quantity to remove from the container.
This field is used to correct errors, if any, during the
packing process.

Last Scanned Item Id

The item’s Id that was last packed is automatically
populated.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure corresponding to the item
Id is automatically populated.

Quantity

The item quantity that was last packed is
automatically populated.

Table 33–3 Pack Details, Container Properties
Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view the inner pack details.

Unpack Container

This action takes you to the Container Contents screen
where you can remove contents for the selected item
from the shipment container.

Fields
Shipment #

448

User Guide

The shipment number is automatically populated by
the system from the values scanned into the scan
identifier field.

Pack Details

Table 33–3

Pack Details, Container Properties

Container #

The container number is automatically populated by
the system from the values scanned into the scan
identifier field.
This number uniquely identifies a container in a
warehouse. Typically, this is different from the SCM
number.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the shipment.

Ship Mode

The shipment mode for the shipment. Values include
'LTL', 'TL', 'PARCEL’

Container SCM

The container SCM is automatically populated by the
system from the values scanned into the scan
identifier field.
SCM is an industry standard which identifies the
container and the enterprise.

Container Size

Select the size to be associated with the container.
This value is automatically populated, if
containerization is performed by the system

Computed Weight

The computed weight is automatically populated by
the system, if containerization is performed by the
system.

Actual Weight

Click on the Weigh button or press Alt+W to capture
the actual weight of the container.
Select the unit of measure from the list.

Table 33–4

Pack Details, Items

Fields
Show Items Containing Enter search criteria to search for specific items, if
applicable.
Item ID

The item to be packaged in the container.

Description

The item description.

Product Class

The product class of the line item packaged in the
container.

UOM

The unit of measure of the line item packaged in the
container.

Pack Station Screens

449

Pack Details

Table 33–4 Pack Details, Items
Fields
Inventory Status

The item quantity that is currently available.

Quantity To Pack

The quantity to be packed into the container.

Pack Quantity

Enter the actual quantity that can be packed into the
container.

Requested Tag

The item’s tag details, such as lot number or batch
number associated with the tag displays.
You can view the tag details only if the node that is
performing the pack operations is configured to
capture the tag attributes in all operations performed
within the node, or if the buyer on the shipment
mandates it as a part of the inbound compliance. For
more information about capturing the tag attributes,
see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.

Table 33–5 Instructions
This panel displays the shipment, container, or item level instructions.

Table 33–6 Packing Notes
Actions
Delete

This action allows you to delete selected packing notes
that you captured during the packing process.

Fields
Notes

450

User Guide

Displays additional notes being captured during the
packing process.

Container Contents

Table 33–7

Container Routing Information

Fields
Activity

The next activity associated with the container packed
is automatically populated by the system.
For example, special packaging done for the container
as a VAS activity.

Description

Table 33–8

The activity description is automatically populated by
the system.

Pack Details, Barcode Types

Fields
Scan Identifier

Pack Scan Initiation

SKU

Pack SKU Initiation

Table 33–9

Pack Details, Attributes

AutoDetectInventor
yAttributes

Behavior

Inventory attributes will be automatically copied

Inventory attributes must be entered during packing.

based on the location inventory information
available with the Sterling Warehouse
Management System.

33.2 Container Contents
You can view all items packaged into the container. You can also remove
inner packs from the shipment container, if necessary.

Pack Station Screens

451

Container Contents

Table 33–10

Container Contents

Fields
Item ID

The item’s item ID.

Description

A brief description of the item.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Packed Quantity

The quantity packed into the container.

Remove Quantity

Enter the inner pack quantity that you want to remove
from the container.

Requested Tag

The item’s tag information, such as lot number or
batch number associated with the tag displays.
You can view the tag details only if the node that is
performing the pack operations has configured to
capture the tag attributes if the buyer on a shipment
mandates it as a part of the inbound compliance. For
more information about capturing the tag attributes,
see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.

Click Save.
Table 33–11

Container Contents, Selected Container Details

Fields
Item ID

The item ID that you selected for which you want to
remove the inner packs.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

Requested Tag

The item’s tag details.
You can view the tag details only if the node that is
performing the pack operations has configured to
capture the tag attributes if the buyer on a shipment
mandates it as a part of the inbound compliance. For
more information about capturing the tag attributes,
see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.

452

User Guide

Select SKU

Table 33–12 Selected Container Details, Quantity Breakup
Fields
Inner Pack Quantity

The item quantity contained in each inner pack.

No Of Inner Packs

The item’s identifier displays.

Unit Of Measure

The item’s primary unit of measure displays.

Product Class

The product class of the item displays.

Total

The total quantity contained in the container.

33.3 Select SKU
You can select the items to pack into a container.
Table 33–13 Container Contents
Fields
LPN #

Displays the identifier of the LPN.

Item ID

Enter the identifier of the item.

Item ID

Displays the identifier of the item.

Unit Of Measure

Displays the unit of measure of the item.

Product Class

Displays the product class of the item.

Inventory Status

Displays the status of inventory in the LPN.

System Quantity

Displays the system-reported quantity of items
available in the LPN.

Actual Quantity

Enter the actual quantity of items available in the LPN.
Note: Adjusting the Actual Quantity can be performed
only for items that are not tag controlled, time
sensitive, or serial tracked.

Reason Code

Mandatory. Enter the reason code for the
corresponding inventory transaction.

Pack Station Screens

453

Serial Entry

33.4 Serial Entry
The Serial Entry screen enables you enter or scan the item’s serial
number.
The Serial Entry screen also enables you enter the serial number range
for an item.
Table 33–14

Serial Entry

Field
Count

The total count of items scanned is automatically
populated by the system.

Item ID

The identifier of the item.

Unit Of Measure

The unit of measure of the item.

Serial #

The component serial number of the item.

Table 33–15

Serial Entry, Serial Range

Field
Item ID

The identifier of the item.

Unit Of Measure

The unit of measure of the item.

From Serial #

The start serial number of the item.

To Serial #

The end serial number of the item.

Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary

serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.

454

User Guide

34
Manifest Console Screens
The Manifest Console provides field value descriptions for all the Manifest
Console screens.

34.1 Manifest Search By All Attributes
You can search for manifests by all attributes.
Table 34–1

Manifest Search By All Attributes

Fields
Node

The node associated with the manifest.

Carrier

Select the carrier associated with the manifest you are
searching for.

Manifest #

Enter the manifest number associated with the
manifest you are searching for.

Manifest Date

By default, the system date and time displays. Enter
the date range associated with the manifest you are
searching for, if applicable.

Manifest Status

Select the status of the manifest.
Valid values are: Open, Closure Requested, Closure
Failed, and Closed.

Has Hazardous Items

Select this checkbox to search for manifests that
contain hazardous items.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.

Manifest Console Screens

455

Manifest List

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

34.2 Manifest List
The manifest list window displays the results of a manifest search. You
can perform actions on a single manifest or multiple manifests by
selecting the checkboxes of the manifests you want to perform an action
on and choosing the action from the action bar.
Table 34–2 Manifest List
Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Manifest Details screen
where you can view the details for the selected
manifests.

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print a manifest.

Close Manifest

This action takes you to the Close Manifest screen
where you can close a manifest.
Note: If trailer numbers are not associated with a

manifest, the Close Manifest screen is displayed.
Otherwise, the manifest is closed directly.

Fields

456

Manifest #

The manifest number associated with the manifest.
Click this link to view manifest details.

Manifest Date

The date on which the manifest was created.

Carrier

The carrier service availed to transport the load.

Trailer #

The trailer number associated with the manifest.

Manifest Closed

Indicates that the manifest has been closed. All
shipments included in the shipment are confirmed,
and you cannot add any new shipments to this
manifest.

Manifest Status

Indicates the current status of the Manifest.

User Guide

Manifest Details

Table 34–3

Manifest List, Carrier Summary

Actions
Open Manifest

This action takes you to the Open Manifest screen
where you can open a new manifest.

Fields
Carrier

The carrier service availed to transport the load.

Description

A brief description of the carrier.

Date

The date associated with the open manifests.

Open Manifests

Total number of manifests open.

Total Packages to be
Manifested

Total number of packages associated with the
manifest.

34.3 Manifest Details
The Manifest Details screen provides manifest information for the
selected manifests. The actions that you can perform in the Manifest
Details screen are explained in the following tables.
Table 34–4

Manifest Details, Details

Fields
Manifest #

The manifest number associated with the manifest.

Manifest Date

The manifest date on which the manifest was created.

Carrier

The carrier associated with the manifest.

Manifest Status

The current status of the manifest.
Valid values are: ’Open’ or ’Closed’.

Trailer #

The manifest’s trailer number.

Has Hazardous Items

Indicates if the manifest contains hazardous items.

Manifest Console Screens

457

Manifest Details

Table 34–5 Manifest Details, Summary
Actions
Print

This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print a manifest.

Close Manifest

This action takes you to the Close Manifest screen
where you can close a manifest.

Fields
Total Shipments

Total number of shipments associated with the
manifest.

Total Loads

Total loads associated with the manifest.

Partially Manifested
Shipments

Number of partially manifested shipments. Click this
link to view partially manifest shipments. For more
information on partially manifest shipments, see the

Load List screen of the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.

Partially Manifested
Loads

Number of partially manifested loads. Click this link to
view partially manifest loads. For more information
on partially manifest loads, see the Load List

screen of the Sterling Logistics Management:
User Guide.

458

Total Packages
Manifested

Total number of packages associated with the
manifest. Click this link to go to the Summary By
Carrier Service screen where you can view all
packages manifested for the used carrier service.

Packages to be
manifested to close
manifest

Total number of packages to be manifested to close
manifest.

User Guide

Summary By Carrier Service

Table 34–6

Manifest Details, Partially Manifested Shipments

Fields
Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the manifest.

Shipment Status

The current status of the shipment.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT CREATED, SHIPMENT
BEING PICKED, SHIPMENT PACKED, and SHIPMENT
SHIPPED.

Table 34–7

Manifest Details, Packages to be Manifested

Fields
Container #

The container number associated with the manifest.

Container Status

The current status of the container.

Container Location

The location where the container is available.

Table 34–8

Manifest Details, Partially Manifested Loads

Fields
Load #
Load Status

The load number associated with the manifest.
The current status of the load.
Valid values are: LOAD CREATED, TRAILER LOADED,
LOAD INTRANSIT, and LOAD COMPLETED.

34.4 Summary By Carrier Service
This screen provides the total number of packages manifested for the used
carrier service.

Manifest Console Screens

459

Open Manifest

Table 34–9 Summary By Carrier Service
Fields
Carrier/Service

The carrier service associated with the container.

Total Packages

The total number of packages manifested for the
carrier service.

34.5 Print
Use this screen to print a manifest.
Table 34–10

Fields
Print Service Name

Choose the manifest print service name you want to
print.

Printer Name

Select the printer name you want to print from.

No. of Copies

Enter the total number of copies of manifests you
want to print.

34.6 Open Manifest
Use this screen to open a new manifest.
Table 34–11

Open Manifest

Fields

460

Node

Node associated with the manifest.

Manifest #

Enter the manifest number you want to open.

Manifest Date

Enter the date on which the manifest was created.

Trailer #

Enter the trailer number associated with the manifest.

User Guide

Close Manifest

Table 34–11 Open Manifest
Fields
Enterprise

Select the enterprise for which you want to open the
manifest.

Shipper Account # For
The Selected
Enterprise

The shipper’s account number for the selected
enterprise displays.

34.7 Close Manifest
Use this screen to close a manifest.
Table 34–12 Close Manifest
Fields
Trailer #

Enter the trailer number associated with the manifest.

Manifest Console Screens

461

Close Manifest

462

User Guide

35
Create Load Screens
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Create Loads screen.

35.1 Create Load
Use the Create Load screen to create loads.
Table 35–1

Create Load, Load

Fields
Load #

Enter the load number.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise which maintains the ownership of
the load during the delivery process.

Load Type

Select the load type.
You can customize this filed as per your business
practices.

Shipment Mode

Select the shipment mode for the shipment. Values
include 'LTL', 'TL', 'PARCEL'

Carrier Service Code

Select the Carrier service you want to use to transport
the load.

Table 35–2

Create Load, Additional Info

Fields
BOL #

Enter the load’s bill of lading number.

Seal #

Enter the load’s seal number.

Create Load Screens

463

Create Load

Table 35–2 Create Load, Additional Info
Fields
PRO #

Enter the load’s PRO number, if applicable.
This value is populated automatically by Sterling WMS
based on the PRO Number Generation settings. For
more information about PRO number generation
settings, see the Sterling Warehouse Management
System: Configuration Guide.

Trailer #

Enter the trailer number of the vehicle used to carry
the load.

POD #

Enter the Proof Of Delivery (POD) number to indicate
the date on which the load was delivered.

Table 35–3 Create Load, Origin
Fields
At Shipment Origin

Select At Shipment Origin to designate the load’s
origin node to be same as the shipment contained in
the load.

At Node

Select At Node and enter the applicable node to
designate this node as the load’s origin.

At Address

Select At Address and enter the address to designate
this address as the load’s origin.
Choose
to add the address. For more information,
see the Sterling Logistics Management: User

Guide.

Table 35–4 Create Load, Destination
Fields
At Shipment
Destination

464

User Guide

Select At Shipment Destination to designate the load’s
destination node to be same as the shipment
contained in the load.

Create Load

Table 35–4

Create Load, Destination

Fields
At Node

Select At Node and enter the applicable node to
designate this node as the load’s destination.

At Address

Select At Address and enter the address to designate
this address as the load’s destination.
Choose
to add the address. For more information,
see the Sterling Logistics Management: User

Guide.

Click the Save button. This takes you to the Load Details screen. For
more information, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User
Guide.

Create Load Screens

465

Create Load

466

User Guide

36
Load Console Screens
The Load Console screens lets you:
Q

Search using granular level information such as Shipment Mode,
Destination, etc.
Modify granular load attributes at a location.

The Load Console screens also lets you search for loads in various ways,
such as:
Q

Search by summary

Search by status

Search by location

For more information about loads, see the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.

Load Console Screens

467

468

User Guide

37
Add To Manifest Screens
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Add To
Manifest screen.

37.1 Add To Manifest
The Add To Manifest screen can be used to add containers to a manifest.
The following table provides field level descriptions of the add to manifest
screen.
Table 37–1

Add To Manifest, Scan

Actions
Add To Manifest

This action allows you to add container to a manifest.

Note: If the container has shipment level
integration with FedEx, a message "m of n
package(s) manifested" displays. Here, "m"
indicates the number of containers manifested
and "n" indicates the total number of containers
present in the shipment or load.
View Contents

This action takes you to the Container Contents to
view all items packaged into the container.

Save

This action allows you to save the container details
that you entered.

Weigh

This action takes you to the Weigh Station Screens
where you can record the container’s weight

belonging to TL, LTL, or parcel shipments.

Add To Manifest Screens

469

Add To Manifest

Table 37–1 Add To Manifest, Scan
Reset

This action clears all container information that you
entered.

Fields
Station

The manifest station identifier.

Scan Identifier

The container SCM, shipment, or LPN identifier.
If you scan a load container, the Load # displays in
the Add To Manifest, Container Attributes panel
instead of the Shipment #.

Manifest #

Select the manifest number.
Displays any manifest that is open for the carrier.

Table 37–2 Add To Manifest, Container Attributes
Fields
Shipment #

The shipment number displays.

Container #

The container number displays.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking number displays.

Container Size

Enter the size of the container.
This is automatically populated when containerization
is performed by the system or when the size is
associated during the pack process.

Computed Weight

The computed weight is automatically populated by
the system if containerization is performed by the
system.

Actual Weight

Enter the actual weight of the container

Table 37–3 Add To Manifest, Carrier Information
Fields
Carrier/Service

470

User Guide

The carrier service associated with the container
displays.

Add To Manifest

Table 37–3

Add To Manifest, Carrier Information

Billed Weight

Enter the container’s billed weight.

Tracking #

The tracking number associated to the container
displays.
Enter or scan the tracking number, if association is at
the manifest station.

Special Service
Surcharge

Enter the special service surcharges associated with
the container, if applicable.

Return Tracking #

Enter the return tracking number of the container.

Actual Freight Charge

Enter the total cost of shipping the manifested
package.

Table 37–4

Special Services

Fields
Special Services

Table 37–5

This panel displays the carrier special services for
shipping the container.

Instructions

This panel displays manifest instructions and the items being packed.

Table 37–6

Packing Notes

Actions
Delete

This action allows you to delete selected packing notes
that you captured during the packing process.

Fields
Notes

Displays additional notes being captured during the
packing process.

Add To Manifest Screens

471

Container Contents

Table 37–7 Container Routing Information
Fields
Activity

The next activity associated with the container packed
is automatically populated by the system.
For example, special packaging done for the container
as a VAS activity.

Description

The activity description is automatically populated by
the system.

Table 37–8 Add To Manifest, Barcode Types
Fields
Container

ManifestContainer

37.2 Container Contents
You can view all items packaged into the container.
Table 37–9 Add To Manifest, Container Contents
Fields

472

Child Container SCM

The child container marking number.

Item ID

The item identifier.

Description

A brief description of the item.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Quantity

The item quantity is automatically populated by the
system.

Packed Quantity

The quantity packed in the container.

User Guide

38
Remove From Manifest Screens
The Remove From Manifest screen enables you to remove containers
from the trailer, or manifest the container before closing the manifest.
For more information about Execution Console Framework, see
Appendix B, "Understanding the Execution Console Framework".

38.1 Remove From Manifest
You can remove packed containers from manifest in this screen.
Table 38–1

Remove From Manifest, Scan

Actions
Remove From Manifest

This action allows you to remove a container from the
manifest.
Note: When you remove any container from the
manifest, a confirmation message displays only if
the container is manifested using shipment level
integration, and all containers in the shipment or load
are manifested. On clicking the OK button, all
containers included in the shipment or load are
removed.

View Contents

This action takes you to the Container Contents to
view all items packaged into the container.

Save

This action allows you to save the container details
that you entered.

Weigh

This action takes you to the Weigh Station Screens to

record the container’s weight belonging to TL,
LTL, or parcel shipments.

Remove From Manifest Screens

473

Remove From Manifest

Table 38–1 Remove From Manifest, Scan
Actions
Reset

This action clears all container information that you
entered.

Fields
Station

The manifest station identifier.

Scan Identifier

The container, shipment, or LPN identifier.

Manifest #

Select the manifest number.
Any manifest that are open for the carrier displays.

Note: If the container is manifested using shipment level

integration, and all containers on the shipment or load are
manifested, if you attempt to remove any container from
the manifest, a confirmation message displays. On clicking
the OK button, all containers included in the shipment or
load are removed.

Table 38–2 Remove From Manifest, Container Attributes
Fields
Shipment #

The shipment number displays.

Container #

The container number displays.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking number displays.

Container Size

Enter the size of the container.
This is automatically populated when containerization
is performed by the system or when the size is
associated during the pack process.

Computed Weight

474

User Guide

The computed weight is automatically populated by
the system, if containerization is performed by the
system.

Remove From Manifest

Table 38–2

Remove From Manifest, Container Attributes

Fields
Actual Weight

The actual weight of the container is either
automatically populated by the system from the
weighing scale attached upon closure of container or
when Weigh action is selected.
Enter the actual weight of the container, if necessary.
Select the unit of measure for the weight, if different
from the value displayed.
The system checks whether the difference between
actual weight and computed weight is greater than the
tolerance.

Ship To Address

Table 38–3

The address the container is shipped to.

Remove From Manifest, Ship To

The address the container is shipped to.

Table 38–4

Remove From Manifest, Carrier Information

Fields
Carrier/Service

The carrier service associated with the container
displays.

Billed Weight

Enter the container’s billed weight.

Tracking #

The tracking number associated to the container
displays
Enter or scan the tracking number, if association is at
the manifest station.

Special Service
Surcharge

Enter the special service surcharges associated with
the container, if applicable.

Return Tracking #

Enter the return tracking number of the container.

Remove From Manifest Screens

475

Container Contents

Table 38–5 Special Services
Fields
Actual Freight Charge

Enter the actual freight charges for shipping the
container.

Table 38–6 Instructions
This panel displays the instructions and items being packed.
Table 38–7 Packing Notes
Actions
Delete

This action allows you to delete selected packing notes
that you captured while packing the container.

Fields
Notes

Displays additional notes, if captured while packing the
container.

Table 38–8 Container Routing Information
Fields
Activity

The next activity associated with the container packed
is automatically populated by the system.
For example, special packaging done for the container
as a VAS activity.

Description

The activity description is automatically populated by
the system.

38.2 Container Contents
You can view all items packaged into the container.

476

User Guide

Container Contents

Table 38–9

Remove From Manifest, Container Contents

Fields
Child Container SCM

The child container marking number.

Item ID

The item ID.

Description

The item’s description.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Quantity

The item quantity is automatically populated by the
system.

Packed Quantity

The quantity packed in the container.

Remove From Manifest Screens

477

Container Contents

478

User Guide

39
Weigh Station Screens
The Weigh Station console lets you record the weight of a container that
belongs to TL, LTL, or parcel shipments.
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Weigh Station
console.

Note: To perform generic status change in the Weigh
Station:
Q

Define the custom pipeline by extending the default
pipeline associated with a transaction ID. For more
information about configuring process models, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
Extend the existing resource and modify JSP to contain
JSP=/wms/wmsmanifest/detail/exuimanifest_detail_
anchor. jsp?TransactionId=. For more
information about defining or extending resources, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Create a Menu Entry for the newly created resource
and use the new screen to perform generic status
change. For more information about defining menus,
see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.

Weigh Station Screens

479

Weigh Station

39.1 Weigh Station
The Weigh Station screen lets you record a container’s weight.
Table 39–1 Weigh Station, Scan
Actions
View contents

This action button takes you to the Container Contents
screen.

Save

This action button saves the details entered.

Weigh

If a weighing scale is connected, this action button
captures the weight on the weighing scale.

Reset

This action button resets the screen. It clears all the
details entered into the screen.

Fields
Location Id

The manifest location Id.

Scan Identifier

The container SCM, shipment, or LPN identifier.

Manifest #

Select the manifest number.
Any manifest that are open for the carrier displays.

Table 39–2 Weigh Station, Container Attributes
Fields
Shipment #

The shipment number displays.

Container #

The container number displays.

Container SCM

The shipment container marking number displays.

Container Size

Enter the size of the container.
This is automatically populated when containerization
is performed by the system or when the size is
associated during the pack process.

Computed Weight

480

User Guide

The computed weight is automatically populated by
the system, if containerization is performed by the
system.

Weigh Station

Table 39–2

Weigh Station, Container Attributes

Fields
Actual Weight

Ship To Address

Table 39–3

The address the container is shipped to.

Weigh Station, Carrier Information

Fields
Carrier

The carrier associated with the container displays.

Carrier/Service

The carrier service associated with the container
displays.

Tracking#

The tracking number associated to the container
displays.
Enter or scan the tracking number, if association is at
the manifest station.

Special Services

Table 39–4

This panel shows carrier special services associated
with the container.

Weigh Station, Packing Instructions

Fields
Displays instructions for the shipment and the specific item being packed.
Instruction Code

The type of instruction, such as Gift, Pick, Pack, Ship,
or Other.

Instruction Text

The specific instructions to be performed
corresponding to the text.

Weigh Station Screens

481

Serial Entry

Table 39–5 Weigh Station, Packing Notes
Actions
Delete

This action button deletes the selected packing note.

Fields
Notes

Additional notes captured during the packing process
displays.
Click the Delete button to delete notes, if applicable.

Container Routing
Activity

The next activity associated with the container packed
is automatically populated by the system.
For example, special packaging for container done as a
VAS activity.

Description

The description of the activity is automatically
populated by the system.

Table 39–6 Weigh Station Barcode Type
Field
Container

ManifestContainer

39.2 Serial Entry
The Serial Entry screen lets you capture the serial number for a
serial-tracked item.
Table 39–7 Serial Entry
Fields

482

Item ID

The item Id is automatically populated by the
system.

Unit Of Measure

The unit of measure associated with the item is
automatically populated by the system.

Serial #

Enter or scan the item’s serial number.

User Guide

Container Contents

Table 39–7

Serial Entry

Fields
Secondary Serial #1

Enter or scan the component serial number of the
item.

Secondary Serial #2

Enter or scan the component serial number of the
item.

Secondary Serial #3

Enter or scan the component serial number of the
item.

Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.

39.3 Container Contents
The Container Contents screen provides visibility to all items packaged
into the container.
Table 39–8

Container Contents

Fields
Child Container
SCM

The child container marking number.

Item ID

The item’s ID.

Description

The item’s description.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Quantity

The quantity is automatically populated by the
system.

Packed Quantity

The quantity packed in the container.

Weigh Station Screens

483

Container Contents

484

User Guide

40
Location Inventory Audit Console Screens
Location Inventory Audit console enables you to view item’s and/or
container’s inventory audit details.

40.1 Location Inventory Audit Search By Item
You can search for location inventory audits by item with the help of this
screen.
Table 40–1

Location Inventory Audit Search By Item

Fields
Field

Description

Node

Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Item ID

Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.

Product Class

Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.

Unit Of Measure

Select the unit of measure of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.

Location

Enter the location ID you want to search for, if
applicable.

Location Inventory Audit Console Screens

485

Location Inventory Audit Search By Container

Table 40–1 Location Inventory Audit Search By Item
Fields
Audit Type

Select the audit type, if applicable.

Task Type

Select the task type if applicable.

User ID

Enter the user ID.

Activity Date

Enter the date range through which you want to
search for if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Location Inventory Audit List screen displays as a result of location
inventory audit search by item.

40.2 Location Inventory Audit Search By
Container
You can search for location inventory audits by container with the help of
this screen.
Table 40–2 Location Inventory Audit Search By Container
Fields

486

Field

Description

Node

Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

User Guide

Location Inventory Audit Search By Transaction References

Table 40–2

Location Inventory Audit Search By Container

Fields
Pallet ID

Enter the pallet LPN you are searching for.

Case ID

Enter the case LPN you are searching for.

Activity Date

Enter the date range you are searching for, if
applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Location Inventory Audit List screen displays as a result of location
inventory audit search by container.

40.3 Location Inventory Audit Search By
Transaction References
You can search for location inventory audits by transaction references
with the help of this screen.
Table 40–3

Location Inventory Audit Search By Transaction References

Fields
Node

The node associated with the Item you want to search
for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Order #

Enter the order number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Location Inventory Audit Console Screens

487

Location Inventory Audit Search By Inventory Attributes

Table 40–3 Location Inventory Audit Search By Transaction References
Fields
Order Line #

Enter the order line number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Container #

Enter the container number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Reference

Enter the reference you are searching for, if
applicable.

Adjustment Reason
Code

Select the reason code associated with the
adjustment.

Activity Date

Enter the date range you are searching for, if
applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Location Inventory Audit List screen displays as a result of location
inventory audit search by transaction references.

40.4 Location Inventory Audit Search By
Inventory Attributes
You can search for location inventory audits by inventory attributes with
the help of this screen.

488

User Guide

Location Inventory Audit Search By Inventory Attributes

Table 40–4

Location Inventory Audit Search By Inventory Attributes

Fields
Node

Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Inventory Status

Select the inventory status of the item want to search
for, if applicable.

Receipt #

Enter the receipt number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Tag #

Enter the tag number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Serial #

Enter the serial number you are searching for, if
applicable.

Ship By Date

Enter the date by which the item must be shipped you
are searching for, if applicable.

In Activity Date

Enter the date range you are searching for, if
applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Location Inventory Audit List screen displays as a result of location
inventory audit search by inventory attributes.

Location Inventory Audit Console Screens

489

Location Inventory Audit List

40.5 Performing a Location Inventory Audit
Search By Count Reference
You can search for location inventory audits by count reference with the
help of this screen.
Table 40–5 Location Inventory Audit Search By Count Reference
Fields
Document Type

The system automatically displays the document type.

Node

Select the node you want to search for.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.

Across Enterprise

Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.

Count Request #

Enter the count request you are searching for, if
applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Location Inventory Audit List screen displays as a result of location
inventory audit search by count reference.

40.6 Location Inventory Audit List
The Location Inventory Audit List window displays the results of a
location inventory audit search. You can perform actions on a single item
or on multiple items by selecting the check boxes of the required audits
and choosing the action from the action bar.

490

User Guide

Location Inventory Audit List

Table 40–6

Location Inventory Audit List, Item Information

Actions
View Details

This action button takes you to the Location Inventory
Audit Details for the selected inventory items.

Fields
Activity Date

The date on which any activity was performed on the
inventory. Click this link to view Location Inventory
Audit Detail.

Location

The location identifier.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the audit.

Item ID

The item ID.

The item’s product class. Indicates the item's
inventory categorization. Orders are placed for an item
and product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR,
FD (Factory Defects).

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Description

Description of the item

Status

Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.

Adjustment Type

The type of adjustment for the audit. Valid values are:
RECEIPT, ADJUSTMENT, SHIPMENT, RETURN.

Reason Code

The reason identifier for the adjustment.

User ID

The identifier of the user who performed the
adjustments.

Quantity

Quantity incremented (+) or decremented (-) in this
transaction

Table 40–7

Location Inventory Audit List, Container Information

Actions
View Details

This action button takes you to the Location Inventory
Audit Details for the selected inventory containers.

Location Inventory Audit Console Screens

491

Location Inventory Audit Details

Table 40–7 Location Inventory Audit List, Container Information
Fields
Activity Date

The date on which any activity was performed on the
inventory. Click this link to view Location Inventory
Audit Detail.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the container.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the container.

Location

The location identifier.

Parent Pallet ID

The parent pallet LPN of the container.

Parent Case ID

The parent case LPN of the container.

Adjustment Type

The type of adjustment for the audit. Valid values are:
RECEIPT, ADJUSTMENT, SHIPMENT, RETURN.

Reason Code

The reason identifier for the adjustment.

User ID

The identifier of the user who performed the
adjustments.

Audit Type

Indicates the type of audit. The Audit Type is either
"In" or "Out". The Audit Type "In" indicates that the
LPN was created in or moved into a location. Audit
Type "Out" indicates that the LPN was removed from
or moved out of a location.

40.7 Location Inventory Audit Details
The item level Location Inventory Audit Details screen lets you view item
inventory audit details.
Table 40–8 Location Inventory Audit Detail, Item Information
Fields

492

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the item.

Item ID

The item ID. Click this link to view item details.

Product Class

Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).

User Guide

Location Inventory Audit Details

Table 40–8

Location Inventory Audit Detail, Item Information

Fields
Unit Of Measure

The item’s unit of measure.

Item Description

Description of the item.

Quantity

Number of units of the item at this location.

Table 40–9

Location Inventory Audit Detail, Audit Information

Fields
Location

The location identifier. Click this link to view location
details.

Date

The date on which the audit was performed.

User ID

The user associated with the audit.

Task Type

The task type associated with the audit.

Pallet ID

Pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

Case LPN associated with the container.

Adjustment Type

The type of adjustment for the audit. Valid values are:
RECEIPT, ADJUSTMENT, SHIPMENT, RETURN.

Table 40–10 Location Inventory Audit Detail, Transaction Reference
Fields
Order #

The order number associated with the audit.

Release #

The order release number associated with the audit.

Order Line #

The order line number associated with the audit.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the audit.

Container #

The container number associated with the audit.

Program ID

The identifier of the program that created the audit.

Location Inventory Audit Console Screens

493

Location Inventory Audit Details

Table 40–10

Location Inventory Audit Detail, Transaction Reference

Fields
Adjustment Reason
Code

The reason code associated with the adjustment.

Reason Text

Additional information as to why the adjustment was
made.

Table 40–11
Attributes

Location Inventory Audit Detail, Additional Inventory

Fields
Serial #

The serial number associated with the audit.

FIFO #

The FIFO number associated with the audit.
FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order in which stock arrived at
the node. This is used to send out items that arrived
first than the ones that arrived later.

Segment #

The segment number associated with the audit.
Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.

Segment Type

The segment type associated with the audit.
Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are: MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.

Ship By Date

The ship by date associated with the audit.

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the audit.

Inventory Status

The inventory status associated with the audit.
Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse

Country Of Origin

494

User Guide

The manufacturing country code associated with the
audit.

Location Inventory Audit Details

Table 40–12 Location Inventory Audit Detail, Other References
Fields
Reference #1

Reference values captured for the audit

Reference #2

Reference values captured for the audit

Reference #3

Reference values captured for the audit

Reference #4

Reference values captured for the audit

Reference #5

Reference values captured for the audit

40.8 Location Inventory Audit Details
The container level Location Inventory Audit Details screen lets you view
container inventory audit details.
Table 40–13 Location Inventory Audit Details, Container Information
Fields
Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the container.

Pallet ID

The pallet LPN associated with the container.

Case ID

The case LPN associated with the container.

Audit Type

The type of audit. The Audit Type is either "In" or
"Out". The Audit Type "In" indicates that the LPN was
created in or moved into a location. Audit Type "Out"
indicates that the LPN was removed from or moved
out of a location.

Table 40–14 Location Inventory Audit Details, Audit Information
Fields
Location

The location identifier. Click this link to view location
details.

Date

The date on which the audit was performed.

User ID

The user id associated with the audit.

Location Inventory Audit Console Screens

495

Location Inventory Audit Details

Table 40–14

Location Inventory Audit Details, Audit Information

Fields
Task Type

The task type associated with the audit.

Parent Pallet ID

The parent pallet LPN of the container.

Parent Case ID

The parent case LPN of the container.

Adjustment Type

The type of adjustment for the audit. Valid values are:
RECEIPT, ADJUSTMENT, SHIPMENT, RETURN.

Table 40–15

Location Inventory Audit Details, Transaction Reference

Fields
Order #

The order number associated with the audit.

Release #

The order release number associated with the audit.

Order Line #

The order line number associated with the audit.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the audit.

Container #

The container number associated with the audit.

Program ID

The identifier of the program that created the audit.

Adjustment Reason
Code

The reason code associated with the adjustment.

Reason Text

Additional information as to why the adjustment was
made.

Table 40–16

Location Inventory Audit Details, Other References

Fields

496

Reference #1

Reference values captured for the audit.

Reference #2

Reference values captured for the audit.

Reference #3

Reference values captured for the audit.

Reference #4

Reference values captured for the audit.

Reference #5

Reference values captured for the audit.

User Guide

41
Task Console Screens
The Task Console lets you to optimize warehouse throughput and
maximize worker efficiency. It enables you to perform the following task
management tasks:
Q

Assign tasks

Reprioritize tasks

Modify task location and quantity

Complete a task

Cancel certain types of tasks

View summary level information across all tasks for a node

This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Task Console.

41.1 Task Search By Task Type
The Task Search By Task Type screen lets you enter the criteria for the
search.
Table 41–1

Task Search By Task Type

Fields
Node

Displays the node you are logged in as.

Enterprise

Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.

Task Console Screens

497

Task Summary

Table 41–1 Task Search By Task Type
Fields
Task Type

Choose one or more task types to search for. This is
mandatory.

Start No Earlier Than

Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started within the time range specified, if applicable.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Click Search to view the search results in the Task Summary screen.

41.2 Task Summary
The Tasks Summary screen displays the tasks that are to be completed
within a specific time frame, which is typically the current day, or the
time selected in your search criteria. If there are tasks that are not yet
complete, these tasks also display.
This screen enables you to quickly determine what work is being done
and which tasks are at risk. The details display as data within a graph
and also within a table as more granular details.

498

User Guide

Task Summary

Table 41–2

Task Summary

Task Summary
The Task Summary graph displays a summary of all the available tasks. The
graph displays the following information:
Q

Completed - The number of tasks completed. Completed tasks display as
gray boxes in the graph.
Open To InProgress - The number of tasks that are either open or in
progress. These tasks display as green boxes in the graph.
# Tasks at Risk of Delay - The number of tasks that are at a risk of getting
delayed. These tasks display as red boxes in the graph.

Fields
# Of Users Logged In

The number of users currently logged in. Click this link
to view the User List, which displays a list of available
users.

Current Time

The current time.

End Of Day

Midnight of the present day.

Task Type

The task type. Click this link to view the Task
Summary By Zone screen.

Name

The name of a task type.

Task Console Screens

499

Task Summary

Table 41–2 Task Summary
Open Tasks

The number of tasks that are open, which includes the
following states:
Q

Open

Held

Suggested

In Progress

Click this link to view the Task Summary By Zone
screen, which displays a breakdown of open task
summaries.
# Tasks At Risk Of
Delay

The number of tasks at risk of delay. This is estimated
based on finish time of tasks, the number of users
working on the task type, standard rate, and current
time.

Standard Rate

The standard rate of work, or the number of tasks per
hour.

Effort (Hrs)

The amount of effort in hours. Effort equals the Open
Tasks divided by the Standard Rate.

# Logged In /
Available Users

The number of people logged in who possess the skills
required to perform the task at hand. The first number
indicates how many people are currently performing
the task. The second number indicates the total
number of people capable of performing the task,
including those who are currently performing the task.
For example, 3/5 indicates that five people are
capable of performing a specific task type; three of
those five people are currently performing that task
type. Click this link to view the User List screen,
which displays a list of available users.

500

Past Due

The number of tasks that should have been completed
but are still open.

# Batches

The number of batches open for this task type.

Completed Tasks

The number of completed tasks.

User Guide

Open Task Summary

41.3 Task Summary By Zone
The Task Summary By Zone screen lets you view task summaries by
zone. Tasks are grouped by type and listed with information about the zones
where a specific task is performed.
Table 41–3

Task Summary By Zone

Fields
Zone

The name of the zone where a specific task is
performed.

# Of Tasks Originating
Here

The number of tasks that originate in the zone
specified.

# Of Tasks
Terminating Here

The number of tasks that end in the zone specified.

41.4 Open Task Summary
The Open Task Summary screen lets you view an open task summary
breakdown. Tasks are grouped by type and listed with information about
the users performing a task, tasks open, tasks at risk, and estimated
time length to perform those tasks.
Table 41–4

Open Task Summary

Fields
Task Type

The name of the zone that has a specific task.

# Of Users Logged In
Performing This Task

The number of users logged in who are performing the
task specified.

Scheduled Start Time

The time at which a specific task is scheduled to begin.

Scheduled End Time

The time at which a specific task is scheduled to finish.

Open Tasks

The number of tasks specified that are currently open.

# Of Tasks At Risk Of
Delay

The number of tasks specified that are currently at
risk of being delayed.

Estimated Start Time

The time at which a specific task is estimated to begin.

Estimated End Time

The time at which a scheduled task is estimated to
finish.

Task Console Screens

501

Task Search By Zone

41.5 User List
The User List screen lets you view a list of available users.
Table 41–5 User List
Fields
Node

The node to which the user belongs.

User ID

The ID of the person to perform tasks within the node.

User Name

The name of the person that corresponds with a
specific User ID.

Logged In

An icon displays to show that the user is logged in.

Most Recent Task

The most recent task a user has worked on.

Activity Date

The date and time of the activity.

41.6 Task Search By Zone
The Task Search By Zone screen lets you perform a task search by zone.
Table 41–6 Task Search By Zone
Fields

502

Node

Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.

Enterprise

Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.

Activity Group

Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.

Task Type

Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.

Task Status

Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.

Task ID

Enter a task ID to search for, if applicable.

Start Task After

Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.

Assigned To User

Enter a user name to search for, if applicable. Or
choose the lookup icon to find the user name you want
to search for, if applicable.

User Guide

Task Search By Inventory

Table 41–6

Task Search By Zone

Fields
Only Unassigned Tasks

Choose this to search for only tasks that are not
assigned to a user.

Show Hierarchy

Choose this to show a hierarchical list of results, if
applicable. This option is most appropriate when you
are searching for both Summary Tasks and Detail
Tasks at the same time, but not individually.

Search History

Choose this to search history records, if applicable. If
selected, only history records are shown.

Show Only

Choose Summary Tasks to list only task summaries, if
applicable.
Choose Detail Tasks to show a list of detail tasks, if
applicable.
Choose All Tasks to show both summaries and details,
if applicable.

Source Zone

Enter the source zone to search for, if applicable.

Source Location

Enter the source location to search for, if applicable.

Target Zone

Enter the target zone to search for, if applicable.

Target Location

Enter the target location to search for, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.

41.7 Task Search By Inventory
The Task Search By Inventory screen lets you perform a task search by
inventory.

Task Console Screens

503

Task Search By Inventory

Table 41–7 Task Search by Inventory
Fields
Node

Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.

Enterprise

Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.

Activity Group

Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.
This search criteria displays the activity group
specified and any task types that belong to it.

Task Type

Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.

Task Status

Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.

Start Task After

Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.

Show Only

Choose Summary Tasks to list only task summaries, if
applicable.
Choose Detail Tasks to show a list of task details, if
applicable.
Choose All Tasks to show both summaries and details,
if applicable.

Item ID

Enter an item ID to search for or choose the lookup
icon to find an item ID to search for, if applicable.

Product Class

Select a product class to search for, if applicable.

UOM

Select a unit of measure to search for, if applicable.

Item Classification

Enter the item classification to search for, if applicable.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the Count Classifications configurations. This
displays only when the Activity Group is ‘Count’.

504

Inventory Status

Select an inventory status to search for, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.

User Guide

Task Search By Reference

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.

41.8 Task Search By Reference
The Task Search By Reference screen lets you perform a task search by
reference.
Table 41–8

Task Search By Reference

Fields
Node

Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.

Enterprise

Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.

Activity Group

Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.

Task Type

Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.

Task Status

Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.

Start Task After

Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.

Show Only

Choose Summary Tasks to list only task summaries, if
applicable.
Choose Detail Tasks to show a list of task details, if
applicable.
Choose All Tasks to show both summaries and details,
if applicable.

Batch #

Enter the batch number to search for, if applicable.

Wave #

Enter the wave number to search for, if applicable.

Shipment #

Enter the shipment number to search for, if applicable.

Container #

Enter the container number to search for, if applicable.

Task Console Screens

505

Task Search By Exception

Table 41–8 Task Search By Reference
Fields
Order #

Enter the order number to search for, if applicable.

Carrier

Enter the carrier to search for, if applicable.

Load #

Enter the load number to search for, if applicable.

Move Request #

Enter the move request number to search for, if
applicable.

Count Request #

Enter the count number to search for, if applicable.

Work Order #

Enter the work order number to search for, if
applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.

41.9 Task Search By Exception
The Task Search By Exception screen lets you perform a task search by
exception.
Table 41–9 Task Search By Exception
Fields

506

Node

Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.

Enterprise

Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.

Activity Group

Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.

Task Type

Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.

User Guide

Task Search By Date

Table 41–9

Task Search By Exception

Fields
Task Status

Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.

Start Task After

Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.

Tasks With All
Following Holds

Choose one or more of the following check boxes, as
applicable:
Q

Hold Reason
Show Only

Dependency - to search for all tasks on hold
because a prerequisite task has not yet been
completed.
Batch - to search for all tasks that are on hold
because they have not yet been added to a batch.

If you have chosen to search only tasks marked
"Held", select the hold reason, if applicable.
Choose one of the following types of tasks to display:
Q

Max Records

Exception - to search for all tasks on hold due to
an exception.

Summary Tasks - to list only task summaries, if
applicable.
Choose Detail Tasks - to show a list of task details,
if applicable.
Choose All Tasks - to show both summaries and
details, if applicable.

Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.

41.10 Task Search By Date
The Task Search By Date screen lets you perform a task search by date.

Task Console Screens

507

Task Search By At Risk Tasks

Table 41–10

Task Search By Date

Fields
Node

Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.

Enterprise

Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.

Activity Group

Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.

Task Type

Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.

Task Status

Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.

Start Task After

Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.

Finish Task Before

Enter a task completion time range to search within, if
applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.

41.11 Task Search By At Risk Tasks
The Task Search By At Risk Tasks screen lets you perform a task search
by at risk tasks.

508

User Guide

Task List

Table 41–11 Task Search By At Risk Tasks
Fields
Node

Select the appropriate node to search for, if applicable.
This is mandatory.

Enterprise

Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.

Activity Group

Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.

Task Type

Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.

Task Status

Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.

Start Task After

Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.

Tasks With All
Following Holds

Exception—choose this to only search for tasks
marked "Held" due an exception, if applicable.
Dependency—choose this to only search for tasks
marked "Held" due to a dependency, if applicable.
Batch—choose this to only search for tasks marked
"Held" due to batching, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.

41.12 Task List
The Task List screen displays the results of a task search. This screen
lets you perform actions on a single task or on multiple tasks by selecting
the check boxes adjacent to the relevant tasks and choosing the
applicable action from the action bar.

Task Console Screens

509

Task List

Table 41–12

Task List

Actions
View Details

This action button takes you to the Task Detail screen.

Task Assign to User

This action button takes you to the Assign to User
screen.

Reprioritize

This action button takes you to the Reprioritize screen.

Hold

This action button takes you to the Hold Reason
screen.

Release

This action button releases the specified tasks.
To specify tasks for release, select the check boxes
adjacent to the relevant tasks.

Cancel

This action button takes you to the Cancel Task
Reason screen.

Fields
Task ID

The task ID.
For all types of searches, Summary tasks are indicated
by a
icon. If you select the Show Hierarchy check
box in the search window, Summary tasks displays as
bold text.

Task Type

The task type.

Priority

The priority assigned to a task type.

Item Classification

The item classification of a task.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the Count Classifications configurations. This
displays only when the Activity Group is ‘Count’.

510

Task Status

The status of a task.

Source Location

The origin location of a task.

Target Location

The destination location of a task.

Primary Reference

The primary reference of a task.

Predecessor Task

Link to the task that must be completed before the
task that is displayed can be started.

Assigned To User

Link to the user profile.

User Guide

Task Detail

41.13 Task Detail
The Task Detail screen lets you view task summary details.
Table 41–13 Task Detail, Task
Actions
Hold

This action button takes you to the Hold Reason
screen.

Release

This action button releases the task.

Cancel

This action button takes you to the Cancel Task
Reason screen.

Complete

This action button takes you to the Record Count
Result Details screen.

Fields
Node

The node where a task takes place.

Enterprise

The Enterprise that owns a task.

Task Type

The name of a task type.

Task ID

The task’s ID.

Task Status

The status of a task.

Task Priority

The priority of task.

Parent Task ID

The task ID of the task’s parent.

Created On

The date the task request was created.

Pick For Enterprise

Perform a picking operation for the enterprise.

Table 41–14 Task Detail, Inventory
Fields
Item ID

The item ID of an item in inventory associated with a
task.

Product Class

The product class of an item in inventory associated
with a task.

Task Console Screens

511

Task Detail

Table 41–14

Task Detail, Inventory

Fields
UOM

The unit of measure of an item in inventory associated
with a task.

Quantity

The quantity of an item in inventory associated with a
task.

Serial #

The serial number of an item in inventory associated
with a task.

Ship By Date

The date to ship an item in inventory associated with a
task.

Segment

The segment an item in inventory belongs to that is
associated with a task.

Segment Type

The segment type of an item in inventory associated
with a task.

Inventory Status

The condition of an item in inventory associated with a
task.

Case ID

The case ID.

Pallet ID

The pallet ID.

Item Classification

The item classification of a task.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the Count Classifications configurations. This
displays only when the Activity Group is ‘Count’.

Table 41–15

Task Detail, Location

Fields
These columns list information that pertains to the Source (or origin) and the
Target (or destination) locations.

512

Zone

The zone within the location associated with a task.

Aisle

The aisle within the location associated with a task.

Location

The identifier of the location associated with a task.

Sort Sequence

The sorting sequence within the location associated
with a task.

User Guide

Complete Task

Table 41–15 Task Detail, Location
Fields
Shipment #

The shipment number associated with a task, if
applicable.

Wave #

The wave number associate with a task, if applicable.

Table 41–16 Task Detail, More Attributes
Fields
Start No Earlier Than

The earliest date and time a task should be started.

Finish No Later Than

The latest date and time a task should be completed.

Assigned To User ID

The identifier of the user assigned to complete a task.

Predecessor Task ID

The identifier of a task that must be completed before
the task that is displayed can be started.

Equipment ID

The identifier of the equipment associated with a task.

Table 41–17 Task Detail, References
Fields
The references that are displayed vary according to the Activity Group utilized.
Batch #

The batch number associated with a task, if applicable.

Container #

The container number associated with a task, if
applicable.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with a task, if
applicable.

Wave #

The wave number associate with a task, if applicable.

41.14 Complete Task
The Complete Task screen lets you mark a task as completed.

Task Console Screens

513

Complete Task

Table 41–18

Complete Task, Task

Fields
Node

The node where a task takes place.

Enterprise

The Enterprise that owns a task.

Task Type

The name of a task type.

Completed By

The name of the user who completed the task.
Choose the field and lookup icon to find the user name
that you want to use.

Table 41–19

Complete Task, Task List

Fields

514

Source Location

Enter the source location where a task originates.

Target Location

Enter the target location where a task originates.

Item ID

The item ID associated with a specific task.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Item Description

The description of the item.

User Guide

Complete Task

Table 41–19 Complete Task, Task List
Quantity

Enter the quantity of inventory associated with a task.

Serial No

For serial-controlled items,
enter the serial number.

From Serial #

The start serial number for the
serial range.

To Serial #

The end serial number for the
serial range.

You can enter the tag details for a
tag-tracked item only if the node that is
performing the task is configured to
capture the tag attributes in all operation
performed within the node or if the buyer
on a shipment mandates it as a part of the
inbound compliance. For more information
about capturing the tag attributes, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.

Inventory Status
Source Pallet Id

Lot #

For tag-controlled items, enter
the lot number.

Batch #

For tag-controlled items, enter
the batch number.

Revision #

For tag-controlled items, enter
the revision number.

Quantity

For tag-controlled items, enter
the quantity of inventory
associated with the task.

Select the condition of the inventory associated with a
specific task.

Enter the source pallet ID associated with a specific

task.

Task Console Screens

515

Summary Task Detail

Table 41–19

Complete Task, Task List

Source Case Id

Enter the source case ID associated with a specific

task.
Target Pallet Id

Enter the target pallet ID associated with a specific

task.

Click Save to record the exception reason. Clicking Save after modifying
the Target Location and Quantity fields displays the Modification Reason
screen.

Note: In the Serial Entry screen when you click on Toggle

Serial Range button, you can enter the serial range.

41.15 Modification Reason
The Modification Reason screen lets you enter the modification reason
code and reason text.
Table 41–20

Complete Task Fields

Fields
Reason Code

The code of the reason for modification.

Reason Text

The description of the reason for modification.

41.16 Summary Task Detail
The Summary Task Detail screen displays task summary details.
Table 41–21

Summary Task Detail, Summary Task

Actions

516

Hold

This action button takes you to the Hold Reason
screen.

Release

This action button releases the task.

User Guide

Summary Task Detail

Table 41–21 Summary Task Detail, Summary Task
Cancel

This action button takes you to the Cancel Task
Reason screen.

Complete

This action button takes you to the Record Count
Result Details screen.

Update Count

This action button takes you to the Record Count
Result Details screen where you can modify the count
result.

Fields
Node

The node where a task takes place.

Enterprise

The Enterprise that owns a task.

Task Type

The name of a task type.

Task ID

The task’s ID.

Task Status

The status of a task.

Task Priority

The priority of task.

Parent Task ID

The task ID of the task’s parent.

Created On

The date the task request was created.

Table 41–22 Summary Task Detail, Inventory
Fields
Case ID

The case ID.

Pallet ID

The pallet ID.

Table 41–23 Summary Task Detail, Location
Fields
These columns list information that pertains to the Source (or origin) and the
Target (or destination) locations.
Zone

The zone within the location associated with a task.

Aisle

The aisle within the location associated with a task.

Task Console Screens

517

Task Status Details

Table 41–23

Summary Task Detail, Location

Fields
Location

The identifier of the location associated with a task.

Sort Sequence

The sorting sequence within the location associated
with a task.

Table 41–24

Summary Task Detail, More Attributes

Fields
Start No Earlier Than

The earliest date and time a task should be started.

Finish No Later Than

The latest date and time a task should be completed.

Assigned To User ID

The identifier of the user assigned to complete a task.

Predecessor Task ID

The identifier of a task that must be completed before
the task that is displayed can be started.

Equipment ID

The identifier of the equipment associated with a task.

41.17 Task Status Details
The Task Status Details screen lets you view the status of a task on hold.
Table 41–25

Task Status Details

Fields

518

Exception Hold

Indicates that a task is on hold due to an exception.

Dependency Hold

Indicates that a task is on hold due to a prior
dependency that must be completed.

Batch Hold

Indicates that a task is on hold due to batching
reasons.

Hold Reason Code

Displays the code associated with putting a task on
hold, if applicable.

Hold Reason Text

Displays the description of why a task is on hold, if
applicable.

User Guide

Assign to User

41.18 Task Status Audits
The Task Status Audits screen lets you view the status audit trail of a
task.
Table 41–26 Task Status Audits, Task
Fields
Node

The node where a task takes place.

Enterprise

The Enterprise that owns a task.

Task Type

The name of a task type.

Task ID

The task’s ID.

Task Status

The status of a task.

Task Priority

The priority of task.

Parent Task ID

The ID of the parent task.

Created On

The date a task request was created.

Table 41–27 Task Status Audits, Task Status Audit
Fields
Modified On

The date and time a task status changed.

User ID

The ID of the user who changed a task status.

Old Status

The status of a task before it was changed.

New Status

The status a task was changed to.

Reason Code

The reason code associated with the status change.

Reason Text

The reason text associated with the status change.

41.19 Assign to User
The Assign to User screen lets you assign a task to a user.
Table 41–28 Task Status Audits, Task Status Audit
Field
Assign To

Enter the identifier of the user to whom the task is
assigned.

Task Console Screens

519

User List (selection)

41.20 User Search By All Attributes
The User Search By All Attributes lets you find a task user.
Table 41–29

User Search By All Attributes

Fields
Node

Choose a node to search for, if applicable.

Task Type

Choose a task type to search for, if applicable.

User ID

Enter a user ID to search for, if applicable.

User Name

Enter a user name to search for, if applicable.

Only Logged In Users

Check this if you want to narrow your search to
display only users that are currently logged in, if
applicable.

Zone

Enter a zone to search for, if applicable.

Aisle

Enter an aisle to search for, if applicable.

Source / Target /
Either

For the zone and aisle you are searching for, choose
Source to specify an originating point, choose Target
to specify a destination point, or choose Either to
specify that they are either the source or target (or
both).

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of users you want
returned from your search.

41.21 User List (selection)
This User List screen lets you select a user to whom a task is assigned.
Table 41–30

User List (selection)

Fields

520

Node

The node to which the user belongs.

User ID

The ID of the person to perform tasks within the node.

User Name

The name of the person that corresponds with a
specific User ID.

An icon displays if the user is logged in.

User Guide

User Detail

41.22 Reprioritize
The Reprioritize screen lets you reprioritize a task.
Table 41–31 Reprioritize
Fields
Priority

Enter the new priority of the task.

41.23 Hold Reason
The Hold Reason screen lets you put a task on hold.
Table 41–32 Hold Reason
Fields
Hold Reason Code

Enter the code of the reason for putting the task on
hold.

Hold Reason Text

Enter the reason for putting the task on hold.

41.24 Cancel Task Reason
The Cancel Task Reason screen lets you cancel a task.
Table 41–33 Cancel Task Reason
Fields
Reason Code

Enter the code of the reason for cancelling the task.

Hold Reason Text

Enter the reason for cancelling the task.

41.25 User Detail
The user Detail screen lets you view the tasks assigned to a user.

Task Console Screens

521

User Detail

Table 41–34

User Detail, User

Fields
Organization

The organization to which a user belongs.

User ID

The ID of a person who performs tasks within the
node.

User Name

The name of the person that corresponds with a
specific User ID.

The login status of a user.

Table 41–35

User Detail, User Task Types

Fields
Activity Group

The activity groups to which a user belongs.

Task Type

The task types associated with a user.

Priority

The priority of tasks associated with a user.

Table 41–36

User Detail, User Zones

Fields

522

Zone

The zones associated with a user.

Aisle

The aisle associated with a user.

Type

The type associated with a user.

User Guide

Batch Search By All Attributes

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
While performing replenishment, if minimum and/or
maximum replenishment tasks are not available.
Cause
The Inventory Below Min and Inventory Below Current
Demand alerts are not selected. Also, all dedicated
locations are below minimum and non-dedicated locations
are below current demand.
Resolution
Ensure that the Inventory Below Min and Inventory Below
Current Demand alerts are selected. Additionally, all
dedicated locations should be above minimum and
non-dedicated locations above current demand.

41.26 Batch Search By All Attributes
The Batch Search By All Attributes screen lets you perform a batch
search.
Table 41–37 Batch Search By All Attributes
Fields
Node

Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.

Enterprise

Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.

Activity Group

Choose an activity group to search for, if applicable.

Task Type

Choose the task type to search for, if applicable.

Batch #

Enter the batch number to search for, if applicable.

Batch Status

Choose a batch status to search for, if applicable.

Equipment Type

Enter an equipment type to search for, if applicable.

Task Console Screens

523

Batch List

Table 41–37

Batch Search By All Attributes

Fields
Request #

Enter a request number to search for, if applicable.

Wave #

Enter a wave number to search for, if applicable.

Shipment #

Enter a shipment number to search for, if applicable.

Search History

Select this to search only history tasks, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of task batches you want
returned from your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

Click Search to view the search results in the Batch List screen.

41.27 Batch List
The Batch List screen displays the results of a task batch search.
Table 41–38

Batch List

Actions
View Details
Print

This action button takes you to the Batch Detail

screen.

This action button takes you to the Print Batch

screen.

Fields

524

Batch #

The number associated with the batch.

Task Type

The task type associated with the batch.

Batch Status

The completion status of the batch.

Equipment Type

The equipment associated with the batch.

User Guide

Batch Detail

41.28 Batch Detail
The Batch Detail screen lets you view batch details.
Table 41–39 Batch Detail, Batch
Actions
Complete
Print

This action button takes you to the Complete Batch

screen.

This action button takes you to the Print Batch
screen.

Fields
Node

The node associated with a task batch.

Task Type

The task type associated with a task batch.

Batch #

The number associated with a task batch.

Batch Status

The status associated with a task batch.

Equipment Type

The equipment type associated with a task batch.

Created On

The date a batch was created.

User ID

The ID of the person who created the batch.

Table 41–40 Batch Detail, Task List
Actions
View Details

This action button takes you to the Task Detail
screen.

Fields
Task ID

The task ID of a specific task.

Task Type

The task type of a specific task.

Task Status

The current status of a task

Source Location

The origin location of a specific task.

Target Location

The destination location of a specific task.

Primary Reference

The primary reference of a task.

Task Console Screens

525

Complete Batch

Table 41–40

Batch Detail, Task List

Item ID

The item ID associated with a specific task.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Quantity

The item quantity associated with a specific task.

41.29 Complete Batch
The Complete Batch screen lets you mark a batch as completed.
Table 41–41

Complete Batch

Fields

526

Source Location

Enter the source location where a task originates.

Target Location

Enter the target location where a task originates.

Item ID

The item ID associated with a specific task.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Item Description

The description of the item.

User Guide

Complete Batch

Table 41–41 Complete Batch
Fields
Quantity

Enter the quantity of inventory associated with a task.

Serial No

For serial-controlled items,
enter the serial number.

From Serial #

The start serial number for the
serial range.

To Serial #

The end serial number for the
serial range.

You can enter the tag details for a tag-tracked
item only if the node that is performing the task
is configured to capture the tag attributes in all
operation performed within the node or if the
buyer on a shipment mandates it as a part of
the inbound compliance. For more information
about capturing the tag attributes, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Lot #

For tag-controlled items, enter
the lot number.

Batch #

For tag-controlled items, enter
the batch number.

Revision #

For tag-controlled items, enter
the revision number.

Quantity

For tag-controlled items, enter
the quantity of inventory
associated with the task.

Inventory Status

Select the condition of the inventory associated with a
specific task.

Source Pallet Id

While picking a pallet, enter the pallet ID of the pallet
that is picked.
While picking an item enter the pallet ID of the pallet
from which the item is picked.

Task Console Screens

527

Print Batch

Table 41–41

Complete Batch

Fields
Source Case Id

While picking a case, enter the case ID of the case
that is picked.
While picking an item enter the case ID of the case
from which the item is picked.

Target Pallet Id

Enter the pallet ID of the pallet into which the item is
deposited.

Note: In the Serial Entry screen when you click on Toggle

Serial Range button, you can enter the serial range.

41.30 Print Batch
The Print Batch screen lets you print batch details.
Table 41–42

Print Batch

Fields

528

Print Service Name

Choose the print service name you want to print.

Printer Name

Select the printer name you want to print from.

No. of Copies

Enter the number of copies of batch list you want to
print.

User Guide

42
Confirm Batch Screens
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Confirm Batch screen.

42.1 Confirm Batch
You can confirm a batch with the help of this screen.
Table 42–1

Confirm Batch

Fields
Batch #

Enter the batch number associated with the batch you
are confirming.

Target Location

Enter the location where the batch is dropped off.
Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
target location you want to use.

Target LPN No

Enter the LPN number if the batch has been picked
onto an LPN.

User ID

Enter the user ID associated with the batch you are
confirming.
This is automatically populated to the current user by
the system.

Confirm Batch Screens

529

Complete Batch

Table 42–1 Confirm Batch
Fields
Start No Earlier Than

The current system date and time is automatically
populated.
Enter different start date and time when the batch was
started, if applicable.

Finish No Later Than

The current system date and time is automatically
populated.
Enter different finish date and time when the batch
was finished, if applicable.

Click the Confirm button to confirm the batch.

Click the Confirm with Details button to complete a batch with
details. This takes you to the Complete Batch screen.

42.2 Complete Batch
The Complete Batch screen allows you to complete a batch that is
confirmed with details.
Table 42–2 Complete Batch
Fields

530

Source Location

Enter the source location where a task originates.

Target Location

Enter the target location where a task originates.

Item ID

The item ID associated with a specific task.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Item Description

The description of the item.

User Guide

Complete Batch

Table 42–2

Complete Batch

Fields
Quantity

Enter the quantity of inventory associated with a task.

Serial No

For serial-controlled items,
enter the serial number.

You can enter the tag details for a tag-controlled
item, if the node that is confirming a batch is
configured to capture the tag attributes in all
operations performed within the node, or if the
buyer on a shipment mandates it as a part of
the inbound compliance. For more information
about capturing the tag attributes, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Lot #

For tag-controlled items, enter
the lot number.

Batch #

For tag-controlled items, enter
the batch number.

Revision #

For tag-controlled items, enter
the revision number.

Quantity

For tag-controlled items, enter
the quantity of inventory
associated with the task.

Inventory Status

Select the condition of the inventory associated with a
specific task.

Source Pallet Id

While picking a pallet, enter the pallet ID of the pallet
that is picked.
While picking an item enter the pallet ID of the pallet
from which the item is picked.

Source Case Id

While picking a case, enter the case ID of the case
that is picked.
While picking an item enter the case ID of the case
from which the item is picked.

Confirm Batch Screens

531

Modification Reason

Table 42–2 Complete Batch
Fields
Target Case Id

Enter the Case ID of the case into which the item is
deposited.

Target Pallet Id

Enter the pallet ID of the pallet into which the item is
deposited.

Click the Save button to enter appropriate reasons for adjusting the quantity.
This takes you to the Modification Reason screen.

42.3 Modification Reason
Enter the appropriate reasons for adjusting the quantity.
Table 42–3 Modification Reason
Fields

532

Reason Code

Select the applicable exception reason code for the
modification.

Reason Text

Enter any additional comments for the modification.

User Guide

43
Record Count Screens
A warehouse operator records count task results to indicate the
completion of the count task that was assigned. During the process of
recording the count task results, the system automatically computes and
records the count variance.
The Record Count Results screen provides information about recording
the count results.

43.1 Recording Count Results
You can record count results to indicate the completion of a count task
operation with the help of this screen.
Table 43–1

Record Count Results

Fields
Task ID

The count task ID.

Location

The location where the count was performed.

Click Proceed. The Record Count Result Details screen displays where
you can record the count task results.

Record Count Screens

533

Recording Count Results

534

User Guide

44
Log Productivity Screens
The Sterling WMS provides the ability to record additional productivity
information. The manual entry of productivity is done for activities that
are done outside of the system but reflect the work done by the user.
Examples include stacking of shipping cartons, checking for consolidation
opportunities and physical check of aisles and locations for cleanliness.
The Log Productivity screen enables you to create productivity.

44.1 Log Productivity
Use this screen to create productivity.
Table 44–1

Log Productivity

Fields
Node

Node associated with the productivity.

Enterprise

Enter or select the enterprise associated with the
productivity.

Productivity Type

Enter the productivity type associated with the
productivity.
Choose the field and lookup icon to go search for the
productivity type. For more information, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform User Guide.

User

Enter the user ID associated with the productivity

Execution Date

Enter the date on which the tasks were performed.

Log Productivity Screens

535

Log Productivity

Click Create Productivity to create productivity. The Productivity Details
screen displays. For more information about productivity details, see
Section 45.3, "Productivity Details".

536

User Guide

45
Productivity Console Screens
This chapter provides the screen and field descriptions for all Productivity
Console screens.

45.1 Productivity Search By Productivity Type
You can search for productivity that fall within a particular productivity
type with the help of this screen.
Table 45–1

Productivity Search By Productivity Type

Fields
Node

The node associated with productivity.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise you are searching for.

Across Enterprises

Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.

Productivity Type

Enter the productivity type you want to search for, if
applicable.

User ID

Enter the user ID associated with the productivity you
want to search for, if applicable.

Date of Execution

Enter the date range of productivity execution, if
applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Productivity Console Screens

537

Productivity List

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Productivity List screen displays as a result of this search.

45.2 Productivity List
The Productivity List window displays the results of a productivity search.
You can perform actions on a single productivity type or multiple
productivity types by selecting the check boxes of the productivity types
you want to perform an action on and choosing the applicable action
from the action bar.
Table 45–2 Productivity List
Actions
View Details

This action takes you to the Productivity Details screen
where you can modify the productivity details.

Delete

This action allows you to delete the selected
productivity.

Fields

538

Productivity Type

The productivity type associated with the productivity.

Description

A brief description of the productivity type.

User ID

The user associated with the productivity.

Enterprise

The enterprise associated with the productivity.

Execution Date

The date on which the tasks were performed.

Start Time

The start time of the task included in the productivity
batch.

User Guide

Productivity Details

Table 45–2

Productivity List

End Time

The end time of the task included in the productivity
batch.

Credited Time

Time credited to the user to perform the task.
This value is based on the calculations from the
Standard Allowable Minutes (SAM) details for the
productivity type.

45.3 Productivity Details
You can modify the productivity details with the help of this screen.
Table 45–3

Productivity Details, Productivity

Fields
Node

The node associated with the productivity.

Enterprise Code

The enterprise associated with the productivity.

Productivity Type

The productivity type associated with the productivity.

User ID

The user who performed the tasks.

Execution Date

The date on which the tasks were performed.

Credited Time

The time credited to the user to perform the tasks.

Table 45–4

Productivity Details, Productivity Metrics

Fields
No. of Pallets

Number of pallets handled by the user.

No. of Cases

Number of cases handled by the user.

No. of Items

Number of items handled by the user.

No. of Units

Number of units handled by the user.

No. of Tasks

Number of tasks handled by the user.

No. of Source Aisles
Visited

Number of source aisles visited by the user.

Productivity Console Screens

539

Productivity Details

Table 45–4 Productivity Details, Productivity Metrics
Fields
No. of Target Aisles
Visited

Number of target aisles visited by the user.

No. of Source Location
Visited

Number of source locations visited by the user.

No. of Target Location
Visited

Number of target locations visited by the user.

Start Time

The start time of the task included in the productivity
batch.

End Time

The end time of the task included in the productivity
batch.

Table 45–5 Productivity Details, Productivity References
Fields

540

Request #

The request number associated with the productivity
reference.

Order #

The order number associated with the productivity
reference.

Receipt #

The receipt number associated with the productivity
reference.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the productivity
reference.

Batch #

The batch number associated with the productivity
reference.

Carrier

The carrier code associated with the productivity
reference.

Load #

The load number associated with the productivity
reference.

Bol #

The bill of lading number associated with the
productivity reference.

Trailer #

The trailer number associated with the productivity
reference.

User Guide

Productivity Details

Table 45–5

Productivity Details, Productivity References

Fields
Manifest #

The manifest number associated with the productivity
reference.

Item Classification
code

The classification code associated with the productivity
reference.

Release #

The release number associated with the productivity
reference.

Prime Line #

The order line number associated with the productivity
reference.

Sub Line #

The order-sub-line number associated with the
productivity reference. For example, kit components
have the same prime line number, but different sub
line numbers for each of the components.

Wave #

The wave number associated with productivity
reference.

Wave Date

The date on which the wave was released.

Container #

The container number associated with the productivity
reference.

Note: The field values displayed vary depending on the
productivity type selected.

Productivity Console Screens

541

Productivity Details

542

User Guide

46
Derive Labor Standards Screens
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation provides the ability to automatically
derive labor standards or Standard Allowable Minutes (SAM) based on
the historical data of tasks or activities performed by warehouse users
over a period of time. The Derive Labor Standards console enables you to
derive labor standards for a productivity type at a specified time.
Some of the parameters taken into account when deriving the labor
standards are:
Q

Time spent by the user to complete the task

Number of tasks completed in the given period of time

Distance covered by the user when executing the task

Number of source and/or target locations visited by the user

The weight borne by the user when executing the task

Number of cases or pallets picked

Number of items picked

This chapter provides the screen and field descriptions for the Derive
Labor Standards screens.

46.1 Activities Search By Date Range
You can search for activities that fall within a particular productivity type
on this screen.

Derive Labor Standards Screens

543

Productivity Type List

Table 46–1 Activities Search By Date Range
Fields

Description

Node

The node associated with the productivity.

Productivity Type

Enter the productivity type for which you want to
search, if applicable.

Start Date

Enter the start date for the time period to be
considered for calculating the productivity.
This field is mandatory.

End Date

Enter the end date for the time period to be
considered for calculating the productivity.
This field is mandatory.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Productivity Type List screen displays as a result of this search.

46.2 Productivity Type List
The Productivity Type List window provides visibility to productivity types
associated with the activity.
Table 46–2 Productivity Type List
Actions
View Summary
Fields

544

User Guide

This action takes you to the Productivity Summary
screen where you can view the productivity details.

Productivity Summary

Table 46–2

Productivity Type List

Productivity Type

The productivity type.
Click
to view the productivity types associated with
this equipment type.
SAM Defined On

The date and time when SAM
was last modified.

SAM Defined By

The user who last modified
SAM.

Equipment Type

The equipment type associated
with the productivity type.

Description

A brief description of the productivity type.

SAM Defined On

The date and time when the SAM for the productivity
type was last modified.

SAM Defined By

The user who last modified the SAM for the
productivity type.

46.3 Productivity Summary
You can view the productivity details on this screen.
Table 46–3

Productivity Summary, Productivity Type

Actions
Compute SAM

This action takes you to the Derive Labor Standards,
Compute SAM Action screen, which enables you to
compute the SAM for the productivity type.

Fields
Node

The node associated with the productivity.

Productivity Type

The productivity type.

Description

A brief description of the productivity type.

Equipment Type

The equipment type associated with the productivity
type.

Derive Labor Standards Screens

545

Productivity Summary

Table 46–3 Productivity Summary, Productivity Type
Start Date

The start date for the time period to be considered for
calculating the productivity.

End Date

The end date for the time period to be considered for
calculating the productivity.

Table 46–4 Productivity Summary, User List
Fields

Description

User Name

The identifier of the user who performed the tasks.

Credited Minutes

The time (in minutes) credited to the user.

Efficiency %

The percentage of the user’s efficiency. The user
efficiency is calculated by dividing the time (in
minutes) credited to the user by the total time (in
minutes) taken to complete the task. The credited
time is computed based on the old SAM values.

Estimated Efficiency %

The percentage of the user’s estimated efficiency. The
user efficiency is calculated by dividing the time (in
minutes) credited to the user by the total time (in
minutes) taken to complete the task. The credited
time is computed based on derived SAM values.

Table 46–5 Productivity Summary, Execution SAM Estimates

546

Fields

Description

SAM

Indicates the standard allowable minutes associated
with the productivity type.

Current Value

The current SAM value of the productivity type.

Estimated Value

The estimated SAM value of the productivity type.

User Guide

Derive Labor Standards

Table 46–6

Productivity Summary, Planning SAM Estimates

Fields

Description

SAM

Indicates the standard allowable minutes associated
with the productivity type.

Current Value

The current SAM value of the productivity type.

Estimated Value

The estimated SAM value of the productivity type.

46.4 Derive Labor Standards
This screen aids you in deriving the labor standards.
Table 46–7

Derive Labor Standards, Compute SAM Action

Fields

Description

Derive Execution
Standards

Check this box to derive execution standards.

Derive Planning
Standards

Check this box to derive planning standards.

Consider Selected
User(s) % Efficient

Enter the values of efficiency percentages for the
selected users.

Derive Labor Standards Screens

547

Derive Labor Standards

548

User Guide

47
User Time Sheet Screens
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation provides the ability to view
productivity information based on the amount of time spent by users on
the various tasks they performed during a given period of time.
This chapter provides the screen and field descriptions for the User Time
Sheet screens.

47.1 User Time Sheet Search By User
The User Time Sheet Search By User screen lets you enter the criteria to
search for a specific user’s time sheet.
Table 47–1

User Time Sheet Search By User

Field

Description

Node

The node to which the user belongs.

User ID

Enter the identifier of the user.
Note: If you do not enter the user ID, the time sheet
displays all users for the selected date.

Date

Enter the date for which you want to calculate the
time sheet.

Enter Date Range

Click to enter the date range for which you want to
view the user time sheet.

Date of Execution

Enter the date range for which you want to complete
the time sheet, if applicable.

Max Records

Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
as a result of your search.

User Time Sheet Screens

549

Time Sheet

Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you

enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.

The Time Sheet screen displays as a result of your search.

47.2 Time Sheet
The Time Sheet screen provides visibility to the time spent by users to
perform various tasks during the selected date range. This screen
displays the time slot in colored boxes in a table based on the activity
group to which the task belongs.
Table 47–2 Time Sheet,
Field

Description

User

Displays the identifier of the user associated with the
time sheet.

Date (s)

The date for which the time sheet is calculated.

Utilization %

The percentage of the user’s utilization. This is
calculated as:
Utilization% = The amount of time spent by the user
performing the tasks/ the number of hours defined per
day * 100.

Table 47–3 Time Sheet, Legend
Indicates unavailable time slots.
Indicates time slots for put away.
Indicates time slots for replenishment.

Indicates time slots for retrieval.

550

User Guide

Time Sheet

Table 47–3

Time Sheet, Legend
Indicates time slots for picking.

Indicates time slots for receipt.
Indicates time slots for count.

Indicates time slots for VAS.

Indicates time slots for packing.

Indicates time slots for outbound inventory container
build.
Indicates time slots for shipping container build.

Indicates time slots for shipping.

Indicates time slots for inspection.

Indicates time slots for transportation.

Indicates time slots for login.

Indicates idle time slots.

User Time Sheet Screens

551

Time Sheet

552

User Guide

48
Resource Planning Screens
The Resource Planning tool provides a warehouse with the ability to plan
for expected workload and determine the number of resources that is
required to complete all activities. Having provided visibility to the
expected resources, warehouse personnel can accurately plan for
overtime, temporary staffing, and so forth thus optimizing the resource
costs.
Resource planning console provides:
Q

Comprehensive visibility to standard capacities.

Ability to foresee demand and capacity.

Ability to recognize the availability of resources on selected dates.

Ability to move resources between various resource pools depending
on the viability.
Ability to assign extended shifts to various resources based on
demand.
Ability to push demands to a further date depending on resources and
requested ship dates.

48.1 Defining Standard Capacity
You can define a standard capacity for different resource pools based on
the effective start and end dates, units of measure, and so forth.

Resource Planning Screens

553

Defining Standard Capacity

Table 48–1 Defining Standard Capacity
Fields
Resource Pool

Select the resource pool from the drop-down list for
which you want to define the standard capacity.

48.1.1 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details
You can view and override the standard capacity details.
Table 48–2 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details, Resource
Pool
Fields
Resource Pool

The resource pool for which the standard capacity is
defined.

Resource Pool
Description

The description of the resource pool.

Node

The ship node associated with the resource pool.

Capacity Organization

The capacity organization defined for the selected
resource pool.

Supervisor ID

The identifier of the supervisor.

Table 48–3 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details, Current
Standard Capacity
Fields
Effective Start Date

554

User Guide

Enter the start date for which you want to define the
standard capacity.

Defining Standard Capacity

Table 48–3 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details, Current
Standard Capacity
Fields
Effective End Date

Enter the end date for which you want to define the
standard capacity.

Fields
Slot

The name of the slots
available in a warehouse.

Start Time

The time at which the slot
begins.

End Time

The time at which the slot
ends.

Copy From

Enter the value of
capacities you want to
copy to the selected days
of the week.

Days of the Week

The capacity of each slot
on all days of the week.

Table 48–4 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details, Standard
Capacity Periods
Actions
View Standard
Capacity

This action takes you to the Resource Pool Standard
Capacity Details.

Create New

This action takes you to the Resource Pool Standard
Capacity Period.

Delete

This action deletes the selected standard capacity
periods.

Fields
Start Date

Enter the date on which you want to begin the period
for standard capacity.

End Date

Enter the date on which you want to end the period for
standard capacity.

Resource Planning Screens

555

Defining Standard Capacity

48.1.1.1 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Details
You can view the standard capacity details.
Table 48–5 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Details, Resource Pool
Fields
Resource Pool

The resource pool for which the standard capacity is
defined.

Resource Pool
Description

The description of the resource pool.

Node

The node associated with the resource pool.

Capacity Organization

The capacity organization defined for the selected
resource pool.

Supervisor ID

The identifier of the supervisor of the resource pool.

Table 48–6 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Details, Standard
Capacities
Actions
Copy Capacity

This action copies the capacity entered in the "copy
from" field to the selected days of the week.

Fields
Effective Start Date

Enter the date on which you want to begin the
standard capacity period.

Effective End Date

Enter the date on which you want to end the standard
capacity period.

48.1.1.2 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Period
You can view the standard capacity period details.

556

User Guide

Planning Resources

Table 48–7

Resource Pool Standard Capacity Period, Resource Pool

Fields
Resource Pool

The resource pool for which the standard capacity is
defined.

Resource Pool
Description

The description of the resource pool.

Node

The node associated with the resource pool.

Capacity Organization

The capacity organization defined for the selected
resource pool.

Supervisor ID

The identifier of the supervisor.

Table 48–8
Period

Resource Pool Standard Capacity Period, Standard Capacity

Fields
Effective Start Date

Enter the date on which you want to begin the
standard capacity period.

Effective End Date

Enter the date on which you want to end the standard
capacity period.

48.2 Planning Resources
You can use the screens described in the following sections to view and
deploy resources optimally to meet the demand.

48.2.1 Resource Planning Capacity Search
You can search for resource demand and capacity and view an overview
by date.

Resource Planning Screens

557

Planning Resources

Table 48–9

Capacity Search

Fields
Node

Enter the ship node.

Start Date

Enter the date for which you want to view the
capacity.

# of Days

Displays the number of days for which you can view
the capacity details based on the start date.
By default, the system displays 7 days.

Show Demand and
Capacity Data in

Choose the appropriate unit of measure in which you
want the demand and capacity details to display.
Based on the configuration, the default unit of
measure displays.
Fields

Consider Pending Task

Work Hours

The unit of measure of
the capacity in hours.

Work Day

The unit of measure of
the capacity in days.

Check this box if you want to consider all pending
tasks to be completed and included as backlog
demands for the selected day.

48.2.2 Resource Planning Screen
You can view the details of capacity and demand for various resource
pools.

558

User Guide

Planning Resources

Figure 48–1

Capacity vs Demand

Table 48–10 Resource Planning, Capacity vs Demand
Action
View Details

This action takes you to the Planning Summary screen
where you can view the overridden default deployment
of the resources and confirm your plan.

Fields
HR

Displays the capacity and demand in hours for the
selected date.

Resource Pools

Displays the capacity and demand of different
resource pools for the selected date.
The capacity is displayed in this color.
The demand is displayed in this color.

Resource Planning Screens

559

Planning Resources

Table 48–11

Resource Planning, Plan Resources

Action
Standard Capacity

This action takes you to the Resource Pool Current
Standard Capacity Details screen when you choose the
appropriate resource pool for which you want to define
the standard capacity.

Fields
Resource Pool

The list of different resource pools for a node.

Measure

The measure of demand and capacity.
When you select the capacity for a day, the capacity
details screen displays for the selected day.
When you select the demand for a day, the demand
details screen displays for the selected day.

Days of the Week

The demand and capacity measures for the selected
days of the week.
Note: The selected days of the week are highlighted.

48.2.3 Capacity Details
You can view the capacity details for the selected date. You can also
move resources from other resource pools depending on the capacity.
Table 48–12

Capacity Details Screen, Resource Pool Details

Fields

560

Resource Pool

The resource pool for which you want to view the
capacity details.

Date

The date on which you want to view the capacity
details.

Demand

The demand for a selected resource pool on a chosen
date.

Planned Capacity

The capacity planned for a selected resource pool.

Allocated Capacity

The sum of capacities for resources within a resource
pool.

User Guide

Planning Resources

Table 48–13 Capacity Detail Screen, Capacity Distribution
Fields
Shift

The name of the shift defined for the warehouse.

Planned Capacity

The capacity planned for a selected resource pool
during a particular shift.

Allocated Capacity

The sum of capacities for resources within a resource
pool during a particular shift.

Excess

The excess capacity when the allocated capacity is
higher than the planned capacity.

Shortage

The capacity shortage when the allocated capacity is
lower than the planned capacity.

Table 48–14 Capacity Detail Screen, Other Resource Pools
Action
Pull Resources

This action takes you to Transfer Resources Screen
that displays the source and target resource pools for
the selected resources.
You can transfer resources from the current resource
pool to the target resource pool.

Fields
Pool Name

The name of the resource pool from where you want
to pull the resources.

Allocated Capacity

The allocated capacity of resources within the selected
resource pool.

Planned Capacity
(Demand)

The planned capacity and the existing demand for the
resource pool on the selected date.

Excess Capacity

The capacity in excess within the resource pool on the
selected date.

Resource Planning Screens

561

Planning Resources

Table 48–15

Capacity Detail Screen, Member Resources

Action
Assign Shift

This action takes you to Assign Shifts Screen where
you can assign shifts to each resource.

Fields
Resource

The list of resources within the current resource pool.

Start Time

The time when the resource begins the work.

End Time

The time when the resource ends the work.

Total Hours

The total hours of the resource capacity within the
resource pool.

48.2.3.1 Transfer Resources Screen
This screen enables you to move resources between various resource
pools.
Table 48–16
Resources

Capacity Detail Screen, Pull Resources Action, Transfer

Fields
Current Resource Pool

The resource pool from where you want to move
resources.

Target Resource Pool

The resource pool to where you want to move
resources.

Override Shifts

Check this box if you want to override the time range
for a shift.

Table 48–17

Capacity Detail Screen, Transfer Resources, Assign Shift

Fields

562

Shift

Displays the shift to which the user belongs.

Start Time

The time when the shift begins.

End Time

The time when the shift ends.

Assigned

Check this box to assign shifts to resources.

User Guide

Planning Resources

48.2.3.2 Assign Shifts Screen
This screen enables you to assign shifts to resources.
Table 48–18 Capacity Detail Screen, Assign Shift Action
Fields
Shift

Displays the capacity for each shift.

Start Time

The time when the shift begins.

End Time

The time when the shift ends.

Assigned

Check this box to assign shifts to resources.

48.2.4 Demand Details
You can view demands for each resource pool. You can also move
demands to further dates based on the resource and requested ship
date.
Table 48–19 Demand Details Screen, Resource Pool Details
Fields
Resource Pool

The resource pool for which you want to view the
demand details.

Date

The date chosen to view the demand details.

Planned Capacity

The standard capacity defined for a resource pool.

Allocated Capacity

The sum of capacities of the resources within a
resource pool.
Field

Today’s Demand Details

#Shipments

The number of
shipments.

#Shipments Lines

The number of
shipment lines.

Total Hours

The total effort
required in hours.

Total Days

The total effort
required in days.

Resource Planning Screens

563

Planning Resources

Figure 48–2 Resource Availability

48.2.4.1 Demand Search Panel
You can search for demand based on your required constraints.
Table 48–20

Resource Availability, Hours vs Days

Fields
Hours

The availability of a resource in hours.

Days

The availability of a resource on various days.

Table 48–21

Demand Search Screen

Fields
Document Type

Select the appropriate document type.
Valid values include: Sales Order and Transfer Order.

564

Node

The node associated with the resource pool.

Enterprise

Select the enterprise to which you want to move
demands from the drop-down list.

Buyer

Enter the organization of the buyer.

Ship Mode

Select the mode of shipment from the drop-down list.

$Value

The cost of the shipment in dollars.

User Guide

Planning Resources

Table 48–21 Demand Search Screen
Fields
Service

The service used to ship the shipment.

Pack and Hold Only

Check this box to search for demands considering only
pack and hold shipments.

Requested Delivery
Date

Enter the requested delivery date for which you want
search the demands.

Enter the requested delivery date on which you want
to end the search for demand.

Status

Select the from status of the task for demand search
from the drop-down list.

Select the to status of the task for performing a
demand search from the drop-down list.

Held Shipments With
Hold Type

Check this box to view demands for shipments that
are held with hold type.

Order Type

The type of the order.
You can customize this field, if applicable.

Only Planned
Shipments

Choose this option to search for demands considering
only planned shipments.

Only Unplanned
Shipments

Choose this option to search for demands considering
only unplanned shipments.

All Shipments

Choose this option to search for demands considering
all shipments.

Table 48–22 Demand Search Screen, Demand Break-up by Requested
Ship Date
Fields
Measure

The different measures across requested ship dates.

Total

The total demand across requested ship dates.

Backlog

The demand that was not fulfilled on the previous date
and is carried over.

High Date

The date that is not determined for the demand.

Resource Planning Screens

565

Planning Resources

Table 48–22
Ship Date

Demand Search Screen, Demand Break-up by Requested

Fields
Days of the week

The demand across each day of the week.
This icon takes you to the Move screen. You can push
demands to appropriate date.

48.2.4.2 Move
This screen enables you to move the shipments on a chosen date.
Table 48–23

Move Shipments

Fields
For Shipments with
Requested Ship Date

This displays the date chosen to move the demands.

Move

Choose the appropriate task you want to move.
Field
Pick Tasks

Choose this option to move
pick tasks on the selected
date.

Ship Tasks

Choose this option to move
ship tasks on the selected
date.

All Tasks

Choose this option to move
all tasks on the selected
date.

amounting to...

Enter the number of hours or shipments that is to be
moved to a chosen date.

To Date

Enter the date to which you want to move the
shipments.

48.2.5 Planning Summary
This screen aids in confirming your plan after viewing the edits that are
made to the resources.

566

User Guide

Planning Resources

Table 48–24 Planning Summary Screen
Action
Confirm Plan

This action enables you to confirm a plan.

Field
Show Only Overridden
Resources

Check this box if you want to see the resources that
are overridden.

Resource Pool

The resource pool that
is overridden.

Shift

The shift that is
overridden.

Resource

The resource that is
overridden.

Total Working Hours

The total working
hours that are
overridden.

Note: The overridden fields are highlighted.

Resource Planning Screens

567

Planning Resources

568

User Guide

A
Sterling WMS Prints
This appendix describes the various documents (labels or reports) that
are printed daily in a warehouse as and when requested or when initiated
by the occurrence of specific events. For more information about prints,
see the Sterling Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide.
The Sterling WMS provides the following prints:
Q

Packing Slip

UCC-128 Container Shipping Label

Task List

Bill Of Lading

FedEx Carrier Label

Reprint Carrier Label

Count Sheet

Wave Release

Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels

Sterling WMS Prints

569

Packing Slip

Troubleshooting Tip:

Problem
Q

When you configure Selling and Fulfillment Foundation
to print on Loftware in TCP/IP sockets - WAIT mode,
the following error message displays:
An unexpected error has occurred on the LPS: The
maximum allowable clients have been exceeded!
Rejecting login!
When you configure Selling and Fulfillment Foundation
to print on Loftware in TCP/IP sockets - NOWAIT mode,
the screen from which you requested for a print hangs.

Cause
Loftware Client Licenses have exceeded.
Resolution
Restart the Loftware Print Server ensuring that the
Loftware Print Server client licenses are not exceeded.
Note that every instance of Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation communicating with the Loftware Print Server
consumes one Loftware Client License.

A.1 Packing Slip
A Packing Slip displays packed shipment lines that are ready to be
shipped. On packing the last carton, the system automatically prints the
packing slip.
On selecting the "PrintPackList" service, you can print the packing slip
from Outbound Shipment Console.
The default packing slip that the Sterling WMS print displays here:

570

User Guide

Packing Slip

The Sterling WMS allows the configuration of the Packing Slip custom
label format for an Enterprise, Seller Organization, and Buyer
Organization. For more information about print preferences, see the
section Defining Participant Print Preferences in the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.

Sterling WMS Prints

571

Packing Slip

Table A–1 Packing Slip
Fields

572

SHIP FROM

The ship from address.

Date

The ship by date.

SHIPPER #

The barcode associated with the shipment
number is printed.

Mark For

The mark for address associated with the
shipment.

SHIP TO

The address to which the shipment is to be
shipped to.

BILL TO

The address to which the shipment is to be billed
to.

CARRIER

The carrier used to ship the containers.

FREIGHT TERMS

The freight terms used for the shipment. Valid
values include TPB-Third Party Billing,
COL-Collect and PRE-Prepaid.

Special Instructions

Special instructions associated with the SHIP
type is printed, if any.

Picking Instructions

Picking instructions specify the cart location and
batch number for a shipment that is not
containerized. The shipment is directly loaded
onto a cart.

User Guide

Cart Location

The location assigned to a
shipment in the cart.

Batch No

The batch number to which
the shipment belongs.

UCC-128 Container Shipping Label

Table A–2

Packing Slip, SHIPPING INFORMATION

Fields

Line

The item’s line number.

Cust PO#

The customer’s purchase order number.

Product No

The item ID.

Cust Item No

The customer’s item ID.

Description

The item’s description.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Qty Ord

The ordered quantity.

Qty Ship

The shipped quantity.

Qty B/O

The backordered quantity.

A.2 UCC-128 Container Shipping Label
The UCC-128 Container Shipping Label provides visibility into the
container contents and enables to track the container status.
The UCC-128 Container Shipping Label is printed during:
Q

Packing

Wave Release

On selecting the "PrintShippingLabel" service, you can request for a
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label print from:
Q

Outbound Shipment Console

Outbound Container Console

Using Sterling WMS you can print container labels for a single and
multiple SKU containers.
The Sterling WMS allows the configuration of the UCC-128 Container
Shipping custom label format for a Buyer Organization. For more
information about print preferences, see the section Defining Participant
Print Preferences in the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
Configuration Guide.

Sterling WMS Prints

573

UCC-128 Container Shipping Label

A.2.1 Container Label Single SKU
The default UCC-128 Container Label format for a single SKU container is
displayed below:

574

User Guide

UCC-128 Container Shipping Label

Table A–3

Container Label Single SKU

Fields

FROM

The ship from address.

The ship to address.

SHIP TO POST

The carrier routing bar code.

CARRIER

The carrier used to ship the container.

SHIPMENT #

The shipment number to which the container
belongs.

TRACKING

The tracking number assigned to the container to
track the container status and location of the
container.
Note: The tracking number is used for Parcel
Shipments.

BATCH

The batch number to which the container
belongs.

Slot No

The slot in which the container is placed.

The purchase order number to which the
shipment belongs.

DEPT

The department code associated with the
shipment, if any.

ITEM

The item ID.

CUST SKU

The customer’s ID for the item.

QTY

The item quantity contained in the container.

FOR

The FOR - Barcode associated with any sorting
done at or for the destination address. Typically,
this has the store number when the ship-to
address is a merge point for the customer.

Sterling WMS Prints

575

UCC-128 Container Shipping Label

Table A–3 Container Label Single SKU
Fields

MARK FOR

This is in human readable format indicating the
sort performed for or at the destination address.
Typically, store number, or name of the person,
or department is printed.

SSCC

The Serial Shipping Container Code (SSCC) bar
code used to track the container and its
contents.
The SSCC is a 20 digit code comprising of the
sellers EAN/UCC number and a sequence
number. It is a mandatory field for UCC/EAN
compliance.

Note: Depending on the carrier used, the TRACKING, PRO

and TRAILER field values are printed on the shipping label.

A.2.2 Container Label Multi SKU
The default Container Label format for multiple SKU containers is
displayed below:

576

User Guide

UCC-128 Container Shipping Label

Table A–4

Container Label Multi SKU

Fields

FROM

The ship from address.

The ship to address.

SHIP TO POST

The carrier routing bar code.

CARRIER

The carrier used to ship the container.

Sterling WMS Prints

577

UCC-128 Container Shipping Label

Table A–4 Container Label Multi SKU
Fields

SHIPMENT #

The shipment number to which the container
belongs.

BATCH

The batch number to which the container belong.

Slot No

The slot in which the container is placed.

The purchase order number to which the
shipment belongs to.

DEPT

The department code associated with the
shipment, if any.

ITEM

The item ID.

CUST SKU

The customer’s ID for the item.

QTY

The item quantity contained in the container.

FOR

The FOR - Barcode associated with any sorting
done at or for the destination address. Typically,
this has the store number when the ship-to
address is a merge point for the customer.

MARK FOR

This is in human readable format indicating the
sort performed for or at the destination address.
Typically, store number, or name of the person,
or department is printed.

SSCC

Note: Depending on the carrier used, the TRACKING, PRO

and TRAILER field values get printed in the shipping label.

578

User Guide

Task List

A.3 Task List
The Task List provides a list of tasks that the user needs to complete in
one trip. The Sterling WMS can be configured to automatically print the
Task List during putaway, replenishment and batch pick. You can print
the Task List from the Batch Console.
The Sterling WMS has two types of task list formats pre-packaged:
Q

Item Pick Task List (Simple)

Cart Manifest Task List (Requires Sorting of Inventory During Pick)

The Sterling WMS allows the configuration of the Task List custom label
format for an Equipment Type. For more information about print
preferences, see the section Defining Print Format Preferences in the
Sterling Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide.

A.3.1 Item Pick Task List (Simple)
The default Item Pick Task List label format is displayed below:

Sterling WMS Prints

579

Task List

The bar
code of
item pick
task sheet
Batch
Number

Table A–5 Item Pick Task List
Fields

WHSE

The warehouse where tasks were performed.

BATCH #

The batch number associated with the task.

Wave #

The wave number associated with the task.
The wave number gets printed if the batch is
associated with a wave.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the task.
The shipment number gets printed if the batch
belongs to a single shipment.

580

User Guide

Task List

Table A–5

Item Pick Task List

Fields

Request #

The move request number.
The request number gets printed if the batch is
associated with a move request.

Pallet ID

The pallet LPN from which the item is picked.

From Location/ From
LPN

The location or LPN from where the item is
picked.

Item/Serial No

The item’s item ID or serial number.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

Item Description

The item’s description.

Qty

The total item quantity to be picked.

To Location

The location where the items should be
deposited.

Tag Details

The item’s tag details, such as lot number, batch
number, and revision number.

Picked By

The user who performed the tasks.

Checked By

The user who inspected the items.

Confirmed By

The user who confirmed the tasks.

A.3.2 Cart Manifest Task List (Requires Sorting of
Inventory During Pick)
The Cart Manifest Task List is printed if the equipment type associated
with the batch contains multiple locations.
The default Cart Manifest Task List label format is displayed below:

Sterling WMS Prints

581

Task List

The bar
code of
cart
manifest
task list

The slots
in each cart

Important: If the cart locations are less than or equal to
eight slots, configure two slots for each location.
Otherwise, configure one slot per location.

Table A–6 Cart Manifest Task List
Fields

582

WHSE

The warehouse where tasks were performed.

BATCH #

The batch number associated with the cart
manifest batch sheet.

User Guide

Bill Of Lading

Table A–6

Cart Manifest Task List

Fields

Wave #

The wave number associated with the cart
manifest batch.

Shipment #

The shipment number associated with the cart
manifest batch.
The shipment number gets printed if the batch
belongs to a single shipment.

Cart Location

The slot in which the item should be placed.

Carton Size

The size of the carton in the current slot.

Location

The pick location from where the items have to
be picked.

Item

The item’s description.

UOM

The item’s unit of measure.

QTY

The total item quantity to be picked.

Picked By

The user who performed the tasks.

Checked By

The user who inspected the items.

Confirmed By

The user who confirmed the tasks.

A.4 Bill Of Lading
The Bill Of Lading (BOL) provides inventory processing information
through supply chain to a shipper, carrier and customer.
The Sterling WMS allows the configuration of the BOL custom label
format for a carrier, shipper and consignee. By default, the system prints
3 copies of BOL labels every time you print the label. If the copy is
meant for the carrier, Carrier Copy is printed on the label. Similarly, for
shipper, Shipper Copy is printed, and for a consignee, Consignee Copy is
printed.
For more information about print preferences, see the Defining
Participant Print Preferences section in the chapter Configuring System
Administration in the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
Configuration Guide.

Sterling WMS Prints

583

Bill Of Lading

Using the Sterling WMS you can print:
Q

VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment and/or Hazmat Bill Of Lading

VICS Bill Of Lading for Load and/or Hazmat Bill Of Lading

The VICS Standard Bill Of Lading document can be found at:
www.vics.org/standards/bol/vics_bol_2004.doc

A.4.1 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment
On selecting the "PrintShipmentBOL" service, you can print the VICS BOL
for Shipment from the Outbound Shipment Console.
For example, the default carrier copy of VICS BOL for Shipment label
format is as follows:

584

User Guide

Bill Of Lading

The BOL and SCAC/Pro
Bar Code number

Indicates that this copy
is maintained by the
carrier.

Table A–7

VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP FROM

Fields

Name

The company that is shipping the product.

Address

The shipper’s street address.

City/State/ZIP

The shipper’s city, state, and zip code.

Sterling WMS Prints

585

Bill Of Lading

Table A–7 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP FROM
Fields

SID#

The shipment ID number applied by the shipper
to this shipment.

FOB

Indicates the FOB freight term used for the
shipment.

Bill of Lading
Number

The bill of lading number created by the shipper
to identify the shipment.

Table A–8 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP TO
Fields

Location #

The location number assigned to the consignee’s
ship to address.

Name

The company where the product has to be
shipped to.

Address

The company’s address.

City/State/ZIP

The company’s city, state, and zip code.

CID#

The consignee ID number applied by the
consignee to this shipment.

FOB

Indicates the FOB freight term used for the
shipment.

CARRIER NAME

The carrier picking up the shipment.

Trailer number

The shipment’s trailer number.
The trailer number is used if the truckload carrier
hauls the shipment.

Seal numbers

The shipment’s seal number.
The seal number is used if the shipment is full
truckloaded from the origin to destination.

586

User Guide

Bill Of Lading

Table A–8

VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP TO

Fields

SCAC

The Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC)
assigned to identify the carrier.

Pro number

The Pro number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment.
The pro number is used if a LTL carrier hauls the
shipment.

Table A–9 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, THIRD PARTY FREIGHT
CHARGES BILL TO
Fields

Name

The third party to whom the charges are billed
to, if applicable.

Address

The third party’s address.

City/State/ZIP

The third party’s city, state, and zip code.

SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS

Special instructions associated with the carrier.
For example, appointment number, date and
delivery instructions.
Note: Only four underlying BOL numbers are
printed.

Freight Charge
Terms

Indicates which third party is invoiced and is
responsible for payment of the freight invoice.

Prepaid

The prepaid charges for the freight paid by the
shipper from origin to the consignee's dock.

Collect

The charges collected for the freight from the
consignee from origin to the consignee's dock.

3rd Party

The freight charges paid by the third party from
origin to the consignee's dock.

Master Bill of Lading

Indicates if BOL is attached.

Sterling WMS Prints

587

Bill Of Lading

Table A–10 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CUSTOMER ORDER
INFORMATION
Fields

588

CUSTOMER ORDER
NUMBER

The number generated by the customer to
identify the order.

CUST# PKGS

The number of individual packages or cartons on
the shipment that has quantity associated with
the customer order.

WEIGHT

The weight associated with the CUST# PKGS.

PALLET

Indicates if the product is palletized for the
customer order.

ADDITIONAL
SHIPPER INFO

Any additional information, if any, associated
with the customer order.

GRAND TOTAL

The grand total and weight across all customer
orders.

User Guide

Bill Of Lading

Table A–11 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CARRIER INFORMATION
Fields

HANDLING UNIT

QTY

The quantity associated with the type of
package being handled. This refers to the
pallet or carton being shipped.

TYPE

The type of handling unit. For example, pallets
or cartons.

Sterling WMS Prints

589

Bill Of Lading

Table A–11 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CARRIER INFORMATION
Fields

PACKAGE

QTY

The number of packages in the handling unit.
This refers to number of cartons in a pallet
(handling unit) or number of units in a carton
(handling unit).

TYPE

The unit type associated with the package. For
example, cartons in a pallet or units (EACH) in
a carton.

WEIGHT

The weight associated with the package
quantity.

H.M (X)

Indicates if there is any hazardous material
(HM) in the package.

LTL ONLY

NMFC #

The National Motor Freight Classification
(NMFC) number associated with the
commodity classification.

CLASS

The freight class associated with the
commodity classification.

COD Amount

The amount to be collected when shipment is
delivered, referred to as COD - Collect (Cash)
on Delivery.

Fee Terms

The fee terms associated with the shipment.
For example, collect or prepaid.

Customer check
acceptable

Indicates if checks are accepted for collect or
COD shipments.

A.4.2 VICS Bill Of Lading for Load
On selecting the "PrintLoadBOL" service, you can print the VICS BOL for
Load from the Outbound Shipment Console.

590

User Guide

Bill Of Lading

For example, the default carrier copy of VICS BOL for Shipment label
format is as follows:

The BOL and SCAC/Pro
Bar Code number

Indicates that this copy
is maintained by the
carrier.

Table A–12 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP FROM
Fields

Name

The company that is shipping the product.

Address

The shipper’s street address.

Sterling WMS Prints

591

Bill Of Lading

Table A–12 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP FROM
Fields

City/State/ZIP

The shipper’s city, state, and zip code.

SID#

The shipment ID number applied by the shipper
to this load.

FOB

Indicates the FOB freight term used for the
shipment.

Bill of Lading
Number

The bill of lading number created by the shipper
to identify the load.

Table A–13 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP TO
Fields

Location #

The location number assigned to the consignee’s
ship to address.

Name

The company where the product has to be
shipped to.

Address

The company’s address.

City/State/ZIP

The company’s city, state, and zip code.

CID#

The consignee ID number applied by the
consignee to this load.

FOB

Indicates the FOB freight term used for the load.

CARRIER NAME

The carrier picking up the load.

Trailer number

The load’s trailer number.
The trailer number is used if the truckload carrier
hauls the load.

Seal numbers

The load’s seal number.
The seal number is used if the load is full
truckloaded from the origin to destination.

592

User Guide

Bill Of Lading

Table A–13 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP TO
Fields

SCAC

The Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC)
assigned to identify the carrier.

Pro number

The Pro number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment.
The pro number is used if an LTL carrier hauls
the load.

Table A–14 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, THIRD PARTY FREIGHT
CHARGES BILL TO
Fields

Name

The third party to whom the charges are billed
to, if applicable.

Address

The third party’s address.

City/State/ZIP

The third party’s city, state, and zip code.

SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS

Special instructions associated with the carrier.
For example, appointment number, date and
delivery instructions.
Note: Only four underlying BOL numbers are
printed.

Freight Charge
Terms

Indicates which third party is invoiced and is
responsible for payment of the freight invoice.

Prepaid

The prepaid charges for the freight paid by the
shipper from origin to the consignee's dock.

Collect

The charges collected for the freight from the
consignee from origin to the consignee's dock.

3rd Party

The freight charges paid by the third party from
origin to the consignee's dock.

Master Bill of Lading

Indicates if BOL is attached.

Sterling WMS Prints

593

Bill Of Lading

Table A–15 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CUSTOMER ORDER
INFORMATION
Fields

594

CUSTOMER ORDER
NUMBER

The number generated by the customer to
identify the order.

CUST# PKGS

The number of individual packages or cartons on
the shipment that has quantity associated with
the customer order.

WEIGHT

The weight associated with the CUST# PKGS.

PALLET

Indicates if the product is palletized for the
customer order.

ADDITIONAL
SHIPPER INFO

Any additional information, if any, associated
with the customer order.

GRAND TOTAL

The grand total and weight across all customer
orders.

User Guide

Bill Of Lading

Table A–16 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CARRIER INFORMATION
Fields

HANDLING UNIT

QTY

The quantity associated with the type of
package being handled. This refers to the
pallet or carton being shipped.

TYPE

The type of handling unit. For example, pallets
or cartons.

Sterling WMS Prints

595

Bill Of Lading

Table A–16 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CARRIER INFORMATION
Fields

PACKAGE

QTY

The number of packages in the handling unit.
This refers to number of cartons in a pallet
(handling unit) or number of units in a carton
(handling unit).

TYPE

The unit type associated with the package. For
example, cartons in a pallet or units (EACH) in
a carton.

WEIGHT

The weight associated with the package
quantity.

H.M (X)

Indicates if there is any hazardous material
(HM) in the package.

LTL ONLY

NMFC #

The National Motor Freight Classification
(NMFC) number associated with the
commodity classification.

CLASS

The freight class associated with the
commodity classification.

COD Amount

The amount to be collected when shipment is
delivered, referred to as COD - Collect (Cash)
on Delivery.

Fee Terms

The fee terms associated with the shipment.
For example, collect or prepaid.

Customer check
acceptable

Indicates if checks are accepted for collect or
COD shipments.

A.4.3 Hazmat Bill Of Lading
On selecting the "PrintShipmentBOL" service, you can print the VICS BOL
for Shipment from the Outbound Shipment Console.

596

User Guide

Bill Of Lading

In addition to printing the Shipment or Load BOL, the Hazmat Bill of
Lading is always printed when shipping hazardous items. The Hazmat
BOL provides information about the hazardous materials being shipped.
The default Hazmat BOL label format is shown below:

Table A–17 Hazmat Bill Of Lading
Fields

Carrier

The Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC)
assigned to identify the carrier that is used to
ship the hazardous material.

Trailer

The trailer number associated with the carrier.

Shipped

The date on which the shipment was shipped.

BOL No

The bill of lading number created by the shipper
to identify the shipment or load.

Sterling WMS Prints

597

Bill Of Lading

Table A–17 Hazmat Bill Of Lading
Fields

PRO No

The PRO number assigned by the carrier to track
the load.
The PRO number is used if an LTL carrier hauls
the load.

From

The address the shipment or load is shipped
from.

Ship To

The address the shipment or load is shipped to.

Pcs

The total number of containers that contains the
hazardous material.

Pkg

Indicates the carton type.

Indicates that the material packaged into the
container is a hazardous material (HM).

Description

A brief description of the hazardous material
information, such as the proper shipping name,
hazard class, identification number, packing
group, and label code.

Qty and UnitVol

The item’s unit of measure.

Class

The item’s hazardous material class.

Weight

The total weight of the containers that contain
the hazardous material.

Total Pieces

The total number of containers.

Total Weight

The total weight of all containers.

For Emergency Contact

The shipper’s contact details for you to contact in case of any
emergency.

598

Shipper Signature

The shipper’s signature.

Date

The date on which the shipper signed the
document.

User Guide

LTL Manifest Label

Table A–17 Hazmat Bill Of Lading
Fields

Driver Signature

The driver’s signature.

Date

The date on which the driver signed the
document.

A.5 LTL Manifest Label
Note: If a single carrier provides both LTL and Parcel
services, create two different organizations to separately
handle LTL and Parcel services.

On selecting the "PrintLTLManifest" service, you can print the manifest
label for LTLs from the Manifest Console.
The default LTL Manifest label format is shown below:

Sterling WMS Prints

599

LTL Manifest Label

Table A–18 LTL Manifest
Fields

600

Manifest #

The manifest number associated with the LTL.

Carrier

The carrier (such as UPS, and FedEx) picking up
the LTL.

Manifest Date

The date on which the manifest was created.

Trailer #

The trailer number associated with the LTL
manifest.

Shipping Warehouse

The address from which the LTL manifest is
shipped to.

BOL #

The BOL number associated with the load.

User Guide

LTL Manifest Label

Table A–18 LTL Manifest
Fields

PRO #

The PRO number associated with the load.

Customer

The customer name to whom the package is
shipped to.

Address

The customer’s address where the package is to
be shipped.

Total Weight

The total weight of all packages.

# of Cartons

The total number of cartons shipped to the
customer.

# of Pallets

The total number of pallets shipped to the
customer.

TOTAL

The total weight of the packages, cartons and
pallets associated with LTL manifest.

A.5.1 Shipper’s Certification For Hazardous Materials
In addition to printing the LTL Manifest label, when a manifest has
hazardous items, a shipper’s certification is also required where the
shipper provides information about all the hazardous materials being
shipped.
When you print the LTL Manifest label, the Sterling WMS also provides
the ability to print the Shipper’s Certification if the manifest contains
hazardous materials. The default Shipper's Certification For Hazardous
Materials label format is shown below:

Sterling WMS Prints

601

LTL Manifest Label

Table A–19 Shipper’s Certification For Hazardous Materials
Fields
EMERGENCY CONTACT PHONE NUMBER

The shipper’s contact details for you to contact in case of any
emergency.

602

FROM

The address the manifest is shipped from.

DESCRIPTION OF
MATERIAL

The proper shipping name of the hazardous
material.

HAZARD CLASS

The item’s hazard class.

PACKING GROUP

Indicates the degree of danger of a hazardous
item within its hazard class or division, and the
type of packaging required for the item. The
valid values are: Packing Group I - high danger,
Packing Group II - medium danger, Packing
Group III - Low danger.

User Guide

FedEx Carrier Label

Table A–19 Shipper’s Certification For Hazardous Materials
Fields

I.D. NO

The four-digit number that identifies hazardous
items (such as explosives and poisonous
materials) of commercial importance.
This numbering scheme is widely used in
international commerce. For instance, to label
the contents of the shipping containers.

DOT LABEL CODE

Indicates the label code of the hazardous item.

WT. /VOL

The item’s unit of measure.

PRO #

The PRO number associated with the load.

RECEIVER’S NAME

The receiver’s name, address, and city where the
package is shipped.

DESTINATION CITY
STATE

The state to where the package is shipped.

Shipper’s Signature

The shipper’s signature.

Date

The date on which the shipper signed the
document.

A.6 FedEx Carrier Label
The FedEx Carrier Label is a container label shipped by the FedEx carrier.
The FedEx Carrier Label is printed when the container is manifested for
FedEx carrier.
For International FedEx shipments, the FedEx server automatically prints
international shipment specific labels and commercial invoice.
The Sterling WMS automatically prints the FedEx Carrier Label after
adding a container to the manifest.

Important: To print FedEx Carrier Label, ensure to set
the Eltron printer as the default printer.

Using the Sterling WMS, you can print:

Sterling WMS Prints

603

FedEx Carrier Label

FedEx Shipping Label

FedEx Return Shipping Label

A.6.1 FedEx Shipping Label
The FedEx Shipping Label format may be different for different services.
For more information about defining label formats, see the Selling and
Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform Configuration Guide.
The FedEx Shipping Label format for FedEx Express is shown below:

604

User Guide

FedEx Carrier Label

Shipper’s
Address

The FedEx
revenue bar code
The recipient’s
phone number
Delivery
Address
bar code
The date on which
the container
has to be delivered
The ship to
country’s
zip code,
state, and
country

The tracking
number bar code

Table A–20 FedEx Shipping Label
Field

SHIP DATE

The date on which the container should be
shipped.

ACTUAL WGT

The actual weight of the container.

The ship to address.

Sterling WMS Prints

605

FedEx Carrier Label

Table A–20 FedEx Shipping Label
Field

REF

The container’s shipment reference number.

TRK#

The tracking number assigned to the container to
track the container’s status and location.

A.6.2 FedEx Return Shipping Label
The FedEx Return Shipping Label format may be different for different
services. For more information about defining label formats, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform Configuration
Guide.
The following is the default FedEx Return Shipping Label format for
FedEx Ground:

606

User Guide

FedEx Carrier Label

Shipper’s
Address

Delivery
Address

Delivery
Address
bar code

Tracking
Number

Sterling WMS Prints

607

Count Sheet

Table A–21 FedEx Return Shipping Label (FedEx Ground)
Field

From

The address from where the shipment is shipped.

Delivery Address

The address to where the shipment needs to be
shipped.

RETURN MGR

The tracking number assigned to the container to
track the status and location of the container.

A.7 Reprint Carrier Label
On selecting the Reprint Carrier Label service for FedEx and UPS carriers
you can reprint a carrier label from the Container List and Container
Details screens.

A.8 Count Sheet
A count sheet displays all locations and items that are to be included for
the cycle count. On selecting the "PrintTaskList" service, you can print
the Count Sheet from the Batch Console for batches associated with the
"Count" activity group.

608

User Guide

Count Sheet

Sterling WMS Prints

609

Wave Release

Table A–22 Count Sheet
Fields

Batch #

The batch number associated with the cycle
count.

WHSE

The warehouse where the count tasks were
performed.

Counted By

The user who performed the count.

Location

The location where the items were counted.

Item

The items that were counted.

Product Class

The item’s product class.

Count Qty

Enter the item quantity counted at the location.

Checked By

The user who inspected the items.

Confirmed By

The user who confirmed the task.

A.9 Wave Release
During the Wave Release process, the Sterling WMS prints the following
documents:
Q

Batch sheets (Task List) for each batch in the wave. For more
information about batch sheets, see Section A.3, "Task List".
UCC-128 Container Shipping labels for each container in the batch.
For more information about container shipping labels, see
Section A.2, "UCC-128 Container Shipping Label".
Packing Slip for each shipment in the wave. Initially, the packing slip
prints to a file and later sent to the printer after packing all
containers. For more information packing slip, see Section A.1,
"Packing Slip".

On selecting the "PrintWave" service, you can print the Wave Release
document from the Wave Console.
By customizing prints, you can print additional documents as a part of
Wave Release. For more information about customizing prints, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Integration Guide.

610

User Guide

Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels

A.10 Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels
The Hazmat SKU labels are applied on hazardous items.
On selecting the "PrintHazmatSKULabel" service, you can print the
Hazmat SKU label. For more information about printing the SKU labels,
see Section 4.14, "Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels".
The default Hazmat SKU label format is shown below:

Table A–23 Hazmat SKU Labels
Fields

DOT SHIPPING
NAME

The proper shipping name.

ITEM

The item identifier.

HAZARD CLASS

The item’s hazard class.

IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER

The four-digit number that identifies the
hazardous items (such as explosives and
poisonous materials) of commercial importance.
This is widely used in international commerce.
For example, the contents packaged in the
shipping containers.

Sterling WMS Prints

611

Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels

Table A–23 Hazmat SKU Labels
Fields

PACKING GROUP

Indicates the degree of danger of a hazardous
item within its hazard class or division and the
type of packaging required for the item. The
valid values are: Packing Group I - high danger,
Packing Group II - medium danger, Packing
Group III - Low danger.

DOT LABEL CODE

Indicates the label code of the hazardous item.

Note: Hazmat SKU labels are printed on 2" X 4" sheet.

612

User Guide

B
Understanding the Execution Console
Framework
The Execution Console Framework in the Sterling WMS supports the
execution of high-speed data entry oriented transactions. The framework
presents execution specific functionality through web-based consoles.
The transactions are designed to be performed using only the keyboard
and a wedge scanner.
You can capture data on to the screen by typing it using a keyboard and
pressing the Tab key, or by scanning the barcode using a wedge scanner.

Note: You CANNOT extend the Execution Console
Framework screens.

The features of Execution Console Framework include:
Q

Tab Ordering

Automatic Pop-Ups for Additional Data Capture

Hot Keys

Field Level Validations

Populating Fields

Barcode Handling Capabilities

Understanding the Execution Console Framework

613

Populating Fields

B.1 Tab Ordering
When scanning data the related values are populated in the current field
and the cursor is redirected to the next appropriate field for scanning.
The next appropriate field to be scanned is determined by the system
based on the process you are following.

B.2 Automatic Pop-Ups for Additional Data
Capture
Certain data values are dynamically requested by the system based on
item properties. These values include the serial number for serial-tracked
items or for items that require outbound tracking by serial number. Tag
controlled items in inventory also require tag values to be specified.

B.3 Hot Keys
Hot keys are keyboard shortcuts to help you work more efficiently. For
example, the hotkey sequence for Save is Alt+A and for Reset it is
Alt-R.

B.4 Field Level Validations
Data is validated at an individual field level against the form level.
Information based fields like notes are not validated. Errors are reported
during scanning or manual entry, after pressing the Tab key.

B.5 Populating Fields
Scanning a barcode or identifier populates related fields in the console.
For example, shipment and container attributes (including item and
carrier, if applicable) are automatically populated when you scan a
shipment or container in the pack station. Another common example is
the item description being automatically populated when any barcode
identifying the item is scanned.
The web-based consoles supported by the Execution Framework include:

614

Receive Purchase Order

Receive Return Order

User Guide

Barcode Handling Capabilities

VAS Station

Pack Station

Manifest Station

B.6 Barcode Handling Capabilities
Field level validation for Mobile Terminal use includes the ability to
translate barcode information and transfer it to the appropriate data
field. Fields are tied into Bar Code Types that are used to validate against
the appropriate sources. For example, a location field validates against
the Location ID and a unique barcode. An item field can have the Item
ID, UPC Code, LPN, or UPC Case Code scanned.
For more information about bar code types, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.

Understanding the Execution Console Framework

615

Barcode Handling Capabilities

616

User Guide

Index
A
Accept Variance action. See also Managing
Count Requests, 227
Accept Wave action, 432
Activity Code field, 200
Activity Date field, 502
activity demand, 387
Activity field, 472
Activity Instructions, 354
Actual Weight field, 475, 481
Add To Manifest action. See also Adding
Containers To a Manifest.
Additional Item Details action, 329, 341
addresses, 376
Adjust Cost action, 306
Adjust Location Inventory, 303
Adjust Receipt action, 179
Adjusting Inventory, 36
Existing Product, 36
New Product, 36
adjusting the quantity, 532
Adjustment Cost Details, 307
Adjustment Type field, 491
Aisle field, 512
Alert ID field, 262
alerts
creating, 399
shipments, 384
All Shipments field, 565
All Tasks field, 566
Allocated Capacity field, 561, 563
Allocated Demand field, 295
Allow Overage action, 428

Allow Receipt of Unexpected Items on
Shipment field, 195
Appointment Type field, 166, 421
appointments
planning, 349
assign a task to a user, 519
Assign Shift field, 562
Assigned field, 563
Assigned To User ID field, 513
At Address field, 464
At Node field, 464
At Shipment Destination field, 464
At Shipment Origin field, 464
Audit Information, 495
Audit Type field, 486, 492
audits, 381
Automatically populating field values, 614

B
Backlog field, 565
barcode translation, 615
batch search
screen, 523
Batch # field, 513, 529
Bill Of Lading
definition, 583
Break LPN, 300
Break LPN action, 279
Buyer field, 564

617

C
Cancel
Count Request, 32
cancel a task
screen, 521
Cancel action, 225
Cancel wave
screen, 432
Capacity Organization field, 556, 557
Capturing item’s expiration date, 202
Capturing item’s serial number, 200
Capturing item’s tag number, 202
Carrier Service Code field, 463
Carrier Sort Lane field, 371
Carrier/Service field, 481
Cart Manifest Task List
definition, 581
Case Content Verification Not Required
field, 387
Case Type field, 433
Catalog Organization field, 319
Change Inventory Attributes action, 278
Changing Inventory Attributes, 37
Across Locations, 38
charges, 377
Checked By field, 583
CID# field, 586
Close Case action, 197
Close Pallet action, 197
Close Prereceipt action, 178
COD Amount field, 590
Collect field, 587
Comment field, 426
Complete Batch, 530
Complete quantity field, 434
Completed Tasks field, 500
Completed Work Orders field, 436
Component Items, 354
Computed Weight field, 480
Confirm Batch., 529
Confirmed By field, 583
Confirming Activities Performed for the Work
Order, 44
Consider Pending Task field, 558

618

User Guide

container
viewing details, 82
Container barcode type, 472
container routing, 482
Container SCM field, 474
containers, 379
packing, 392, 396
recording weight, 83
unpacking, 163
COO (Country Of Origin), 184
Copy Capacity field, 556
Count, 221
putting an item category on count, 31
putting an item classification on count,
putting an item on count, 31
record count results, 533
Count Accuracy field, 227
Count Iteration field, 228, 240
Count Quantity field, 230
Count Request, 215
count request
searching, 221
Count Request for Location Range, 218
Count Request Search By Location
Range, 224
Count Requests
managing, 32
count result
searching, 237
Count Sheet, 569
Count sheet
definition, 608
Count Task
Assign Count Tasks to a User, 33
Cancel Count Task, 33
Complete, 34
Put a Count Task on Hold, 34
Put Count Tasks on Hold, 33
putting a count task on hold, 33
Release a Count Task Put on Hold, 34
Release Count Tasks Put on Hold, 33
releasing a count task put on hold, 33
reporting completion, 34
Reprioritize Count Tasks, 33
View Count Task Details, 33, 34

Count Tasks
managing, 33
country of origin. See COO
Create, 443, 463
Create Count Request, 215
creating, 232
Create Count Request action, 228
Create Count Request action. See also
Managing Count, 279
Create Count Request button., 217
Create Load, 463
Create Move Request, 35, 209
Create move request, 209
Create Move Requests action. See also
Managing Inventory, 279
Create New field, 555
create outbound shipments, 427
Create Wave button, 443
Create Work Order, 325
Credited Time field, 539
Current Resource Pool field, 562
Currently Chosen Appointment Slot field, 349
Cust Item No field, 573
Customer check acceptable field, 590
CUST# PKGS field, 588

D
Date field, 563
dates, 383
Date/Time field, 426
Days of the Week field, 560
Days of the week field, 566
Dedicated Location field, 284
Dedications action, 284
Delay Window field, 349
Delete action, 330, 471
Delete field, 555
delivery dates, 361
demand details
viewing, 93
Demand field, 560, 561
Demand Location Id field, 268
Demand Quantity field, 268
Demand Satisfied field, 268

Dependency Hold field, 518
display task summary details
screen, 516
display tasks to be completed within a specific
time frame
screen, 498
Disposition Qty field, 207
Do not verify Case Content field, 195
Do not verify Pallet Content field, 195
Dock Appointment Scheduling
managing docks, 167, 423
searching for an appointment, 163, 419
taking a new appointment, 165, 421
viewing dock schedule details, 164, 420
dock appointments
additional constraints
adding, 90
canceling, 90
constraints
removing, 91
modifying, 89
scheduling, 88
searching, 88
dock schedule
details
viewing, 88
Document Type field, 193, 564

E
Effective End Date field, 557
Effective Start Date field, 557
Effort (Hrs) field, 500
End Time Stamp field, 354
enter the criteria for the search
screen, 497
entering the modification reasons, 26, 324
Enterprise, 303, 309, 310, 317
Enterprise field, 497, 564
environment variable
INSTALL_DIR, xli
INSTALL_DIR_OLD, xlii
Estimate End Time field, 167, 423
Estimated Cases field, 433
Estimated End Time field, 501

619

Estimated Start Time field, 501
Exception Hold field, 518
Excess Capacity field, 561
Excess field, 561
Execution Console Framework, 613
hot keys, 614
Execution Status field, 371

F
FedEx Carrier label
definition, 603
FIFO # field, 305
Fill Code field, 285
Finish No Later Than field, 513, 530
FOB field, 586
For Activity Code field, 251
FOR field, 575
For Shipments with Requested Ship Date
field, 566
Freeze Move In field, 284, 286
Freeze Move Out field, 284, 286
Freeze On Variance field, 285
Freight Charge Terms field, 587
FRIEGHT TERMS field, 572
From Activity Code field, 267
From Activity Group field, 267
From Location/ From LPN field, 581

G
Global Trade Item Number. See GTIN
GTIN (Global Trade Item Number), 288

H
HANDLING UNIT fields, 589
Has Exceptions field, 252
Has Hazardous Item(s) field,
Has Shortage field, 371
Hazard Class field, 602
HAZMAT BOL
definition, 597
Hazmat SKU Labels

620

User Guide

111

definition, 611
Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels, 569
Held Shipments With Hold Type field, 565
High Date, 565
H.M (X) field, 590
Hold Reason Code field, 518
Hold Reason task search field, 507
Hold Reason Text field, 518
Hold Transaction field, 348, 426
Hold Type field, 347
Hold Type marker, 426
Holds
viewing, 424
holds
adding, 347

I
I.D. No field, 603
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER field, 40, 611
Ignore Run Quantity field, 326
In Progress quantity field, 434
In Staging Location field, 284
inbound shipments
creating, 193
Infinite Capacity field, 285
Inspect action, 180
Inspect Return Receipt, 205
INSTALL_DIR, xli
INSTALL_DIR_OLD, xlii
Instructions, 471
Inv Upd Activity field, 344
Inventory Age (days) field, 275
Inventory Audit Trail, 30
Inventory Status field, 305, 531
Inventory View action, 178
Is Infinite Demand field, 200, 267
Is Outbound Container field, 296
Item Classification task list field, 510
Item Classification task search field, 504
Item ID field, 319
Item Pick Task List
definition, 579

L
Last But One Variance Quantity field, 231
Last Variance Quantity field, 231
Latest summary Task field, 238
load
creating, 85
holds
adding, 86
shipments
adding, 87
loads, 378
Location Inventory
searching, 271
Location Inventory Audit
searching, 485
Location Size Code field, 285
Location SKU Dedications, 286
Logged In field, 502
logical kits, 390
See Also kit components
Lot Key Reference field, 291
LTL manifest document
definition, 599

M
Manage Dock Group field, 164, 420
Managing Count Requests, 32
managing count tasks, 33
Manifest
carrier service summary, 459
closing manifests, 461
opening manifests, 460
printing manifest, 460
remove packed containers screen. See also
removing containers from a
manifest, 473
manifest
closing, 83
containers
adding, 74
removing, 82
searching, 455
manifest status field, 455

Manifest # field, 470, 474, 541
mark a batch as completed
screen, 526
mark a task as completed
screen, 513
MARK FOR field, 576
Mark For field, 572
Master Bill of Lading field, 587
Master Catalog ID field, 319
Max Records, 487
Measure field, 560, 565
Modified On field, 519
Most Recent Task field, 502
Move field, 566
Move Request, 251
alerts, 262
move request
searching, 251
Move Request Line
Activity Demand, 266
Multiple SKU containers label
definition, 576

N
Name field, 499
Net Variance Quantity field, 228
Net Variance Value field, 228
New Disposition field, 207
New Status field, 519
NMFC #, 596
NMFC # field, 590
No. of Source Aisles Visited field, 539
No. of Source Location Visited field, 540
No. of Target Aisles Visited field, 540
No. of Target Location Visited field, 540
Node field, 497, 502, 557, 558, 564
Node Level Inventory, 293
Node Level Inventory action, 278
nodes, 399
Number of Days To Display field, 163, 419

O
Old Status field, 519

621

On Hand Quantity field, 283
Only Logged In Users user search field, 520
Only Planned Shipments field, 565
Only Unassigned Tasks task search field, 503
Only Unplanned Shipments field, 565
Open Manifest action, 457
Open Tasks field, 500, 501
Order Available On System field, 387
Order Type field, 565
organizations, 400
Out Staging Location field, 284
outbound shipments
creating, 50
holds
adding, 52
modifying, 51
Outer Most Case ID field, 296
Over Ship Quantity field, 374
Overage Allowed field, 387
overages, 195
Override Shifts field, 562
Override Shipment Entry field, 195

P
Pack And Hold flag, 371
Pack and Hold Only field, 565
Pack Container action, 392
Packed Quantity field, 371, 472
packing
adding items, 68
removing inner packs, 71
removing items, 70
system-suggested containers, 57, 62
unknown contents, 61
user-defined containers, 58
packing adding inner packs, 71
Packing Group field, 602
Packing Slip, 569
definition, 570
Pallet ID field, 226
Parent Task ID field, 517
Partially Manifested Loads field, 458
Partially Manifested Shipments field, 458
Past Due field, 500

622

User Guide

PC (Product Class), 189
Pend In Quantity field, 281
Pend Out Quantity field, 281
Pending Work Orders field, 436
Performing VAS activities, 351
Pick Tasks field, 566
Picked By field, 583
Pipeline ID field, 226
Planned Capacity field, 561, 563
plans
selecting, 401
POD # field, 464
Pool Name field, 561
Predecessor Task task list field, 510
Prepaid field, 587
Primary Reference task list field, 510
Prime Line # field, 541
printing, 396
printing SKU labels, 39
Priority task list field, 510
Pro number field, 587
Product Class field, 319
product class. See PC
Product No field, 573
productivity, 535
searching, 537
Productivity Type field, 538
Promised Demand field, 295
Pull Resources field, 561
put an item classification on count, 32
put an item on count, 31
putting a task on hold
screen, 521

Q
Qty and UnitVol field, 598
Qty Completed field, 353
Qty Per Kit field, 343
Qty Remaining field, 353
Qty To Process field, 353
Quantity After Adjustment field,
Quantity field, 472, 515, 527, 531
Queue field, 263
queues, 137

308

R
Reason Code field, 519, 532
Reason Text field, 519, 532
Receipt, 305
receipt
searching, 173
Receipt Adjustment
entering receipt adjustment criteria, 321
validating receipt adjustment criteria, 25,
322
Receive action, 178
Receive Details console, 197
Receive Inventory
build cases or pallets, 17
expected containers, 17
paper-based
adjusting a receipt, 25
build cases or pallets, 22
expected containers, 21
receiving excess, 23
receive loose items, 18
receiving excess, 18
Receiving Dock field, 179
Record Count, 533
Reference, 496
Release action, 257, 432
Release From ESP Hold action, 370
Release Wave
screen, 431
Released Quantity field, 261
releases
adding, 403
Remove From Manifest action, 473
Removing shipments from wave, 367
Reprint Carrier Label, 569, 608
reprioritize a task
screen, 521
Request Type field, 221
Requested Delivery Date field, 565
Requested Quantity field, 260
Requesting User ID, 217
Reset action, 351
resource demands
searching, 94

shipments
moving, 94
Resource field, 562
Resource Pool Description field,
Resource Pool field, 560, 563
resource pools
assigning shifts, 93
capacity details
viewing, 92
resources
moving, 93
standard capacity
defining, 92
Routing Error Code field, 372

556, 557

S
SAM (Standard Allowable Minutes), 539
Satisfied Quantity field, 268
Save action, 351, 469
SCAC (Standard Carrier Alpha Code), 587
Scan field, 352
Scan Identifier field, 470
Scheduled End Time field, 501
Scheduled Start Time field, 501
Search History task search field, 503
Segment field, 230
Segment Type field, 182, 230
serial number
capturing, 81
serial shipping container code. See SSCC
Service field, 565
Service Item Group field, 326, 336, 352
Service Item ID field, 326, 336
Shift field, 563
Ship By Date, 306
Ship By Date field, 230
Ship Mode field, 564
Ship Tasks field, 566
SHIP TO POST field, 575
Shipment, 496
Shipment Audits, 132
shipment audits, 389
shipment dates, 361
Shipment Sort Lane field, 371

623

shipments, 193, 368
cancelling, 396
creating, 427
deleting, 367
modifying, 375
outbound, 359
searching, 359
splitting, 397
splitting lines, 399
supervisory overrides, 428
Shipper’s Certification For Hazardous
Materials, 601
shipper’s certification for shipping hazardous
materials, 601
Short Description field, 319
Shortage field, 561
Show Demand and Capacity Data in field, 558
Show Hierarchy task search field, 503
Show Only Overridden Resources field, 567
Show Only task search field, 503, 504, 505
SID# field, 586, 592
Slot No field, 578
Sort Sequence field, 512
Source Case Id, 516, 531
Source Location task search field, 503
Source Pallet Id, 531
Source Pallet Id field, 515
Source Zone task search field, 503
Special Service Surcharge field, 471, 475
Special Services, 481
special services, 375
SSCC (Serial Shipping Container Code), 576
standard allowable minutes. See SAM
Standard Capacity field, 560
Standard Carrier Alpha Code. See SCAC
Standard Rate field, 500
Start Date field, 558
Start No Earlier Than field, 498, 513, 530
Start Task After task search field, 504, 507
Start Time Stamp field, 354
Status field, 426, 565
Storage Code field, 284
Sub Line # field, 541
Supervisor ID field, 556, 557
supervisory overrides, 428

624

User Guide

Supervisory Overrides action, 193, 427
Suppress Overage Check field, 195

T
Target Location task search field, 503
Target Pallet Id, 516, 532
Target Resource Pool field, 562
Target Zone task search field, 503
Task
searching, 497
Task ID field, 510
Task List, 569, 579
definition, 579
task list screen, 509
task search
by risk, 508
task search by date
screen, 507
task search by exception
screen, 506
task search by inventory
screen, 503
task search by reference
screen, 505
task search by zone
screen, 502
Task Status task list field, 510
Task Summary field, 499
Task Type field, 499, 501
Tasks With All Following Holds field, 507
To field, 565
Today’s Demand Details field, 563
Total field, 565
Total Hours field, 562
TRACKING field, 575
Trailer # field, 540

U
UCC-128 container label
definition, 574
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label, 569
UCC-128 container shipping label
definition, 573

unit of measure, 143
unit of measurement. See UOM
UnReceive Quantity field, 324
UOM field, 319
UOM (Unit Of Measure), 352, 530
User ID field, 426, 502
User Name field, 502
User Time Sheet
user
searching, 549

V
Variance Type field, 232
Variance Value field, 239
VAS
work order
creating, 42
VAS Station
Performing Value-Added Services
operations. See Also Confirming
Activities Performed for the Work
Order, 351
Velocity Code field, 284
VICS Bill Of Lading, 569
VICS BOL for load
definition, 590
VICS BOL for shipment
definition, 584, 596
View
Count Request Details, 32
View All Lines action, 257
View Audit action, 228
view batch details
screen, 525
View Contents action, 473
View Contents action. See also Viewing the
Container’s Contents.
View Details action, 224
View Details field, 559
View Lines With Exceptions action, 257
View Move Request action, 339
View Standard Capacity field, 555
view task summaries by zone
screen, 501

View Task Summary action, 432
view task summary details
screen, 511
View Tasks action, 339
view the results of a task batch search
screen, 524
view the status audit trail of a task, 519
view the status of a task on hold
screen, 518
view the tasks assigned to a user
screen, 521
viewing a list of available users, 502
viewing an open task summary
breakdown, 501
Viewing Hold History, 347

W
Wave, 432
Wave Date field, 541
Wave Release, 569
definition, 610
Wave Summary
screen, 432
Wave # field, 371
Waves
canceling, 432
release, 431
searching, 429
waves, 364
accepting, 54
canceling, 54
creating, 53, 403
releasing, 54
viewing batch summary, 435
Weigh action. See also Recording the
Container’s Weight
Weigh Station
converting inventory container into an
outbound container, 85
recording container’s weight, 480
WHSE field, 580
Work Order
searching, 244, 333
Work Order Cancellation, 348

625

Z
Zone field, 501
# Batches field, 500
# Logged In / Available Users field, 500
# of count results field, 227
# of Days field, 558
# Of Items In Variance field, 228
# Of Locations In Variance field, 228
# Of Tasks At Risk Of Delay field, 501
# Of Tasks Originating Here field, 501
# Of Tasks Terminating Here field, 501
# Of Users Logged In Performing This Task
field, 501
# of variances field, 227
# Shipments in Wave # 1 field, 435
# Tasks At Risk Of Delay field, 500
$ Value field, 564

626

User Guide

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.1
Modify Date                     : 2010:08:31 18:28:47+05:30
Create Date                     : 2009:10:02 19:49:48Z
Metadata Date                   : 2010:08:31 18:28:47+05:30
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : WMS User Guide
Creator                         : Sterling Commerce
Document ID                     : uuid:ea7810c5-392e-4f3b-9d8f-5b98a6372249
Instance ID                     : uuid:e9e42c91-aa94-403a-a28c-160336810319
Page Count                      : 670
Author                          : Sterling Commerce

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

WMS User Guide WMS_User_Guide

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation